m  MEMORIAM 
John  S-vett 


THE 


QUESTION   BOOK 


A    GENERAL    REVIEW    OF 


COMMON  SCHOOL  STUDIES. 


TO    BE    USED    IN    SCHOOLS,    IN   CONNECTION 
WITH   TEXT    BOOKS. 


BY  ASA  H.  CRAIG. 


TENTH   EDITION  —  REVISED. 


CALDWELL'S   PRAIRIE,  WIS. 
PUBLISHED     BY     THE     AUTHOR 


1878. 


LBI7fl 


Entered  According  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  Year  1872,  by 

ASA  H.  CRAIG, 

In  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


OlC 


PREFACE. 


Reviews  should  be  cne  of  the  most  important  features 
of  any  school,  for  by  it  the  pupil  is  called  upon  to  answer 
from  real  memory,  instead  of  the  momentary  memory 
"direct  from  the  text  books. 

I  have  sometimes  thought  that  the  majority  of  teachers 
of  our  district  schools,  do  not  realize  the  importance  c^ 
daily,  v/eeklv  and  monthly  reviews.  Their  greatest  zeal 
appears  to  be  in  the  advancement  of  their  pupils  in  their 
studies.  7  hey  labor  to  stimulate  them  to  pass  over  a  cer- 
tain course,  or  reach  a  given  point,  and  it  is  with  pride 
that  they  note  the  rapid  progress  of  their  classes.  We  all 
know  that  students  are  few  v/ho  can  retain  the  lessons  of 
to-day,  without  the  thought  of  to-morrow  on  the  same  sub- 
ject. 

It  is  more  essential  for  us  to  direct  apart  of  our  thoughts 
upon  what  we  have  learned,  than  it  is  to  be  continually 
pressing  farther.  Far  better  it  is  for  us  to  fully  understand, 
and  be  capable  of  practically  using  a  part  of  a  science, 
than  to  have  studied  the  whole  and  forgotten  a  part. 
If  teachers  would  adopt  the  plan  of  asking  some  questions 
on  previous  lessons,  at  the  close  of  each  recitation,  a  more 
thorough  knowledge  would  be  obtained;  their  memories 
would  be  continually  refreshed,  until  those  facts  or  prin- 
ciples will  be  so  indelibly  fixed  upon  their  minds  that  they 
cannot  be  forgotten.  It  is  with  this  idea  of  refreshing  the 
memory,  that  the  author   collected  and  formed  systematic- 

543436 


4  PREFACE. 

ally  the  general  and  essential  principles  of  the  Common 
School  studies.  The  object  is  to  facilitate  the  means  of 
reviews,  and  if,  through  the  publication  of  this  work, 
teachers  are  induced  to  direct  the  attention  of  their  scholars 
to  questions  promiscuously,  then  much  good  will  be  ac- 
complished. The  answers  which  are  given  are  formed  of 
few  words,  but  the  intention  was  to  make  them  clear  and 
concise,  and  as  it  is  to  be  used  in  connection  with  text  books, 
reference  should  be  made  when  the  teacher  or  pupil  does 
not  fully  understand  the  whole  meaning.  Errors  may  be 
found,  and  the  author  will  consider  it  a  great  favor  to  be 
informed  of  them,  that  the  correction  may  be  made. 

ASA  H.  CRAIG. 


QUESTIONS 


ON 


United  States  History 


(  I.     What  is  History? 

2.  What  records  show  that  America  was  discovered  pre- 
vious to  the  discovery  of  Columbus? 

3.  What  proofs  show  that  America  was  inhabited  by  a 
race  of  men  previous  to  the  Indians? 

4.  Into  how  many  chief  epochs  can  the  history  of  the 
United  States  be  divided? 

*^5.     What  land  did  Columbus  first  discover,  and  when? 

6.  How  many  vessels  composed  the  fleet? 

7.  When    and  where  did  Columbus   first  discover  the 
main  land? 

8.  How  many  voyages  did  he  make? 

9.  Who  discovered  the  continent  before  Columbus,  and 
where? 

i^io.     Why  was  this  continent  named  America  instead  of 
Columbia? 

11.  "What   reward   did    Columbus   receive  for  his  dis- 
coveries?    Where  was  he  buried? 

12.  What  nations  explored  the  future  United  States? 

13.  Where  did  the  Spaniards  make  their  claims? 

14.  Where  did  the  French  make  theirs? 

15.  The  English? 

16.  The  Dutch? 


^6    *    /,     '*%  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

17.  Who  was  Ponce  de  Leon?      Why  did  He  come  to 
the  new  continent  ? 

18.  What  discoveries  were  made  by  Vasco  de  Balboa? 

19.  What  was  the  object  of  De  Narvaez'  explorations? 
^  20.     Who  was  Ferdinand  de  Soto? 

21.  When  anywhere  was  the  first  colony  founded  on 
the  continent?     i/cs-^-^i-'-;^-   i  <">  ^ 

22.  When,  where,  and  by    whom,  was  the  first  perma- 
nent settlement  made  in  the  United  States?     The  second? 

23.  Who  first  attempted  to  form  English  settlements  in 
America? 

y^  24.  When  and  where  was    the  first  permanent  English 
settlement  made  in  the  United  States? 

25.  Who  sent  out  the  settlers  to  Jamestown? 

26.  What  territory  was  granted  the  London  Company? 

27.  How  many  charters  had  the  London  Company? 

28.  What  territory  was  granted  the  Plymouth  Company? 
I       29.  Who  were  the  first   Spanish,  French,  English  and 

Dutch  discoverers? 

30.  Where  was  the  first  permanent  settlement  made  by 
the  Dutch? 

31.  Where  was  the  first  permanent  settlement  made  by 
the  French? 

32.  Who  was  James  Carter? 

33.  Who  were  the  Jesuit  Missionaries? 

34.  Who  were  the  first  partial  explorers  of  the  Missis- 
sippi and  its  branches? 

35.  Who  were  La  Salle  and  Father  Hennepin? 

36.  What  tract  of  country  was  called  Acadia? 

37.  Who  discovered  the  Hudson  river? 

38.  What  was  the  object  of  Hudson's  explorations? 

39.  What  is  said  to  have  been  the  fate  of  Hudson? 

40.  What  was  that  country  called  explored  by  Hudson? 

41.  What  nations  claimed  it? 

42.  How  was  the  dispute  settled? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  7 

43.  When,  and  by  whom  was  the  first  colony  founded 
in  Massachusetts? 

44.  How  many  Puritans  came  on  the  first  voyage  ? 

45.  Who  was  their  first  governor? 

46.  "V^'as  the  colony  prosperous? 
j^  47.     Who  was  Roger  Williams? 

48.  What   was    the   treatment   by  the  Puritans  of  the 
Quakers? 

49.  When,  and  by  what  nation  was  negro  slavery  intro- 
duced into  the  United  States? 

50.  Who  was  Captain  John  Smith? 

51.  Who  were  Pocahontas  and  Powhatan? 

52.  What  became  of  Pocahontas? 

53.  When  did  the  first  English  women  come  to  America? 

54.  What  valuable  plants  were  discovered  in  America? 

55.  When    was   the   first   Indian  plot  to  massacre  the 
English? 

56.  When  was  the  first  massacre?     The  second? 

57.  Who  was  Nathaniel  Bacon?      Wliat  was  the  cause 
of  Bacon's  rebellion? 

58.  When  was  the  first  Colonial  Assembly? 
^' Wliat  colonies  composed  the  United  Colonies  of  New 

England  ? 

60.     When   was    King  Phillip's  war?      Who  was  King 
Phillip? 
U^6i.     What  was  the  Navigation  Act? 

62.  Was  this  Act  observed  in  Massachusetts? 

63.  Who  was  Sir  Edmond  Andros? 

^    64.  From  what  was  derived  the  appellation  of  Charter 
Oakl 

65.  Who  was  Sir  William  Phipps? 

66.  What  was  the  cause  and  result  of  the  Salem  witch- 
craft? 

67.  What  was  the  cause  of  the  Pequot  war?     How  did 
it  terminate? 


8  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

68.  What  name  did  the  Dutch  give  their  colony  on 
Manhattan  Island? 

69.  How  was  this  island  obtained? 

70.  Give  a    short  history  of  the   early  government  of 
New  York. 

71.  When,  and  by  whom  was  Philadelphia  founded? 

72.  Who  was  William  Penn? 

73.  Why   did   Lord   Baltimore  obtain  a  tract  of  land 
north  of  the  Potomac  river? 

74.  What  was  the  cause  of  Clayborne's  rebellion? 

75.  After   this   rebellion,  what   was   the   condition   of 
Maryland  ? 

76.  What    European    wars    disturbed    the    American 
colonies? 

7  7.     What  were  the  causes  of  King  William's  war?    How 
long  did  it  last? 

78.  What   was   the  condition  of  the   colonies  during 
Queen  Anne's  war? 

79.  Were  the  colonies  much  affected  by  King  George's 
war? 

80.  What  part  did  the  Indians  usually  take  in  these  wars? 

8 1 .  Which  of  the  colonies  suffered  most  in  early  warfare  ? 

82.  Which  of  the  colonies  was  free  from  Indian  warfare? 

83.  What  was  the  only  treaty  never  sworn  to,  and  the 
only  one  never  broken  by  the  Indians? 

l/'^  84.     Name  the  thirteen  colonies. 

85.  When   and  where  were  Harvard  and  Yale  Colleges 
founded  ? 

86.  When,  and  by  whom,  was  the  first  newspaper  started 
in  America? 

87.  In  1 74 1,  what  caused  great   excitement   in   New 
York  city? 

^    88.     Who  was  John  Eliot? 
89.     Who  was  William  Kidd? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  9 

90.  Where  and  when   was   the   first  permanent   settle- 
ment made  in  the  Mississippi  river  valley? 

91.  What  was  the  cause  of  the  French  and  Indian  war? 
What  parties  were  engaged  in  it? 

92.  Wliere  was  the  disputed  territory? 

93.  Who  was  sent   to  request   the   French  to  withdraw 
from  the  territory  on  the  Ohio? 

94.  What   was  the  result  of  Washington's  endeavor  to 
compel  the  French  to  abandon  the  Ohio? 

95.  How  were   Col.  Washington  and  his   soldiers   re- 
w^arded  by  the  Legislature  of  Virginia? 

96.  After  Washington's  retreat,  what  general   was  sent 
in  his  place  against  the  French? 

97.  What  was  the  result  of  Gen.  Braddock's  expedition? 

98.  Who  was  the  only   mounted  officer  saved   in  this 
expedition? 

99.  Was  the  next    expedition   against  Fort  de  Quesne 
successful? 

100.  At   what  other  points  besides  the    Ohio  did  the 
colonists  attack  the  French? 

10 1.  What  success  had  the  English   in   their  attack  on 
Acadia? 

102.  What  was  their  success  at  Crown  Point  and  Ticon- 
deroga  ? 

103.  Describe  the  attack  on  Ticonderoga? 

104.  Were  they  successful  at  Niagara? 

-^  105.     Who  were  the  commanders  at  the  battle  of  Quebec? 

106.  How  was  Quebec  taken? 

107.  What  generals  were  killed  at  the  capture  of  Que- 
bec?    What  were  their  dying  words? 

108.  What  was  the  treaty  of  peace  between  France  and 
England? 

109.  What  was  the  cause  and  result  of  Pontiac's  war? 

1 10.  In  the  French  and  Indian  war,  what  was  the  most 
remarkable  battle? 


10  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

111.  What  were  the  effects  of  this  war? 

112.  At  the  close  of  the  French  and  Indian  war,  what 
was  the  population  of  the  colonies? 

\^    113.     What   were  .the    chief  causes  which   led    to  the 
American  Revolution? 

114.     What  were  writs  of  Assistance  ? 
i^  115.     What  was  the  Stamp  Act?     When  passed? 
i<^ii6.     Who  was  Patrick  Henry? 

117.  After  the  repeal  of  the  Stamp   Act,  what  attempt 
was  made  to  tax  the  colonies? 

118.  What  was  the  Mutiny  Act? 

119.  What  occurred  in  Boston  in  relation  to  the  tea  tax? 

120.  What  was  the  Boston  Port  Bill? 

121.  When  and  where  did  the  first  general  Congress  of- 
the  colonies  assemble?     What  action  did  it  take? 

REVOLUTIONARY  WAR. 

122.  Who   had   command  of  the  British  army  at  the 
commencement  of  the  Revolution? 

123.  When  and  where  was  fought  the  first  battle  of  the 
Revolution  ? 

124.  Describe  the  battle  of  Lexington? 

125.  When  and  where  was  fought  the  battle  of  Bunker 
Hill? 

126.  Who  were  the  commanders  in  this  battle?      What 
was  the  force  of  each  army,  and  the  loss? 

127.  What  American  general  was  killed  in    this  battle  ? 

128.  What  two  forts  were  captured  by   the  Americans 
in  May,  1775? 

129.  To  whom  did  these  forts  surrender? 

130.  What  did  Allen  say  when  asked  by  what  authority 
he  demanded  the  surrender  of  Ticonderoga? 

131.  When  did  the  second  Continental  Congress  as- 
semble?    What  did  this  Congress  do? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  11 

132.  When  did  Gen.  Washington  take  command  of 
the  American  army,  and  how  large  was  his  force? 

133.  What  was  the  result  of  the  American  attack  on 
Canada? 

134.  How  did  Washington  force  the  British  to  evacuate 
Boston? 

135.  Describe  the  attack  on  Fort  Moultrie. 

136.  What  daring  feat  was  accomplished  by    sergeant 

Jasper  in  this  attack? 

1776. 

137.  Who  introduced  measures  into  Congress  that  "  The 
United  Colonies  are,  and  ought  to  be,  free  and  independent 
States?" 

138.  Who  were  appointed  to  draw  up  a  declaration  of 
rights? 

139.  When  was  the  Declaration  of  Independence  ac- 
cepted by  Congress? 

140.  What  did  this  declaration  declare? 

141.  When  were  these  articles  signed,  and  by  how 
many  persons? 

142.  What  became  necessary  after  this  declaration? 

143.  What  were  these  articles  called,  and  when  were 
they  to  take  effect? 

144.  Were  they  ratified  by  Congress  immediately? 

145.  Which  State  was  last  to  give  her  consent? 

146.  Why  were  the  articles  of  confederation  not  adapted 
to  the  general  wants  of  the  government? 

147.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Long  Island,  and 
with  what  result? 

148.  In  the  retreat  of  Washington,  through  what  place 
did  he  pass? 

149.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  White  Plains,  and 
who  was  victorious? 

150.  What  daring  exploit  was  made  by  Washington 
near  the  close  of  the  year  1776? 


12  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

1777. 

151.  What  battle  soon  followed  Washington's  success  at 
Trenton? 

152.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Brandy  wine,  and 
who  was  victorious? 

153.  When  did  Philadelphia  surrender  to  the  British? 

154.  Where  did  Washington  attack  the  British  soon 
after  his  retreat  from  Philadelphia,  and  with  what  result? 

155.  What  was  one  of  the  most  daring  and  remarkable 
exploits  during  the  war,  and  how  accomplished? 

156.  What  was  the  chief  object  of  taking  Gen.  Prescott? 

157.  Who  invaded  the  United  States  from  Canada? 

158.  Who  commanded  the  northern  division  of  the 
American  army?    Who  the  British? 

159.  What  stratagem  did  Arnold  resort  to,  in  order  to 
rout  the  British,  and  relieve  Fort  Stanwix? 

160.  At  the  battle  of  Bennington,  how  did  Gen'.  Stark 
inspire  his  troops,  and  with  what  result? 

161.  What  battles  were  fought  by  Gates  and  Burgoyne? 
who  were  victorious? 

162.  When, where,  and  to  whom  did  Burgoyne  surrender? 

163.  What  was  the  agreement  in  this  surrender? 

164.  Where  did  Washington  quarter  his  troops  during 
the  winter  of  1 777-1 778,  and  what  were  their  condition? 

1778. 

165.  Who  were  appointed  by  Congress  to  solicit  aid 
from  the  French  government? 

166.  When  and  where  was  a  treaty  of  alliance  formed? 

167.  In  the  Spring,  what  assistance  was  sent  by  France? 

168.  How  long  did  the  British  hold  Philadelphia? 

169.  Where  did  Congress  assemble  while  the  British 
held  Philadelphia? 

1 70.  When  and  where  was  fought  the  battle  of  Mon- 
mouth, and  who  were  victorious?  What  heroic  achieve- 
ment was  performed  by  a  woman  in  this  battle? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  13- 

171.  When  did  the  massacre  of  Wyoming  occur?     Who 
directed  it? 

1779- 

172.  Who  had  charge  of   the   American   forces   in  the 
south,  in  1779?   who  the  British? 

173.  At  this  time,  where  were  Washington  and  CHnton? 

1 74.  What  important   posts  on   the  Hudson  were  sur- 
rendered to  the  Americans  in  1779? 

175.  How  were  these  posts  taken,  and  by  whom? 

176.  What  was  the  result  of  the  American  attack  on 
Savannah? 

177.  In  the    siege  of  Savannah,  what   nobleman    was 
mortally  wounded? 

178.  Up  to  this  time,  what  had  been  the  successes  of 
the  American  navy  and  privateers? 

179.  Who  was  Paul  Jones? 

1780. 

180.  In  1780,  where  were  the  military  operations  mostly 
carried  on? 

181.  What  was  the  result  of  the  siege  of  Charleston? 

182.  Who  succeeded  Lincoln  in  the  command  of  the 
southern  forces,  and  who  had  command  of  the  British? 

183.  When  and  where  was  the  battle  of  Camden,  who 
commanded,  and  who  was  victorious? 

184.  Who   received  command  of   the  southern   army 
after  the  unsuccessful  operations  of  Gen.  Gates? 

185.  What  massacre  was  perpetrated  by  Col.  Tarleton 
'  and  a  body  of  British? 

186.  What  was  the  condition  of  the  south  after  these 
reverses? 

187.  What  fleet  came  to  assist  the  Americans  in  July? 

188.  Who  was  Benedict  Arnold? 

189.  Who  was  Major  Andre? 

^      190.     What  were  the   names  of   the  captors  of  Andre,, 
and  how  were  they  rewarded? 


14  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

191.  What  became  of  Arnold  and  Andre? 

192.  How  was  Arnold  rewarded  for  his  treacher}'? 

1781. 

193.  When  and  where  was  fought  the  battle  of  Cow- 
pens,  and  who  was  victorious? 

194.  What  successful  operations  under  Gen.  Greene  in 
September? 

195.  Did  Gen.  Greene  ever  gain  a  decided  victory? 

196.  How  was  the  war  conducted  at  the  north? 

197.  What  event  brought  the  war  to  a  close? 

198.  When  and  to  whom  did  Cornwallis  surrender? 
^^199.     When  and  where  was  the  treaty  of  peace  signed? 

Who  were  the  commissioners  who  signed  it? 

200.  When  was  peace  proclaimed  to  the  American  army? 

201.  When  and  where   did  Washington  resign  his  mili- 
tary commission? 

202.  What  was  the  condition  of  the  country  at  this  time? 

203.  What  noted  persons  from  foreign  powers  gave  their 
assistance  to  the  Americans? 

^^04.     What  was  the  cause  of  Shay's  rebellion? 

205.  When  was  the  national  flag  adopted?  Describe  it. 

206.  When  was  the  constitution  adopted? 

207.  After  the  adoption  of  the  constitution,  where  did 
Congress  first  meet? 

208.  What   were  the  difficulties  with  which   the  new 
government  had  to  contend? 

Washington's  administration. 

209.  When  was  Washington   inaugurated  as  President 
of  the  United  States? 

210.  \Vhere  was  the  second  session  of  Congress  held? 

211.  When   did   the   city  of   Washington  become  the 
capitol  of  the  United  States? 

212.  Who  were  Washington's  Cabinet? 

213.  How  was  the  credit  of  the  United  States  put  upon 
a  firm  basis? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  15 

214.  What  did  Daniel  Webster  say  of  Hamilton? 

215.  What  was  the  whisky  rebellion? 

216.  What  difficulties  now  arose  with  the  Indians,  and 
what  expeditions  were  sent  against  them  ? 

217.  What  was  the  condition  of  foreign  affairs? 

ADAMS'  ADMINISTRATION. 

218.  During   Adams'  Administration  what  memorable 
occurrences  transpired? 

219.  What  was   the    nature   of   the  Alien  cvid  Sedition 
Laws? 

220.  What  were    the  difficulties  with  France,  and  what 
prevented  war  with  that  nation? 

Jefferson's  administration. 
//  221.     How  was  Thomas  Jefferson  elected  President? 

222.  What  was  the  most  important  event  of  Jefferson's 
Administration? 

223.  What  was  the  cause  of  the  war  with  Tripoli? 

224.  What  daring  exploit  was  accomplished  by  Lieut. 
Decatur? 

225.  What  diffictilties  arose  between  England  and  the 
United  States? 

226.  Who  was  Aaron  Burr?     Alexander  Hamilton? 

227.  For  what  is  Robert  Fulton  noted? 

Madison's  administration. 

228.  What   Indian   disturbances  occurred  in  the  year 
1811? 

229.  When  was    war  formally  declared  against  Great 
Britain?  How  long  did  it  last? 

WAR  OF  1812. 

230.  What  was  the  opening  event  of  the  war  of  1812? 

231.  Describe  the  surrender  of  Detroit. 

232.  What  other  attempt  was  made  to  invade  Canada, 
and  with  what  result? 


16  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

233.  What   were    some   of   the  most   important  naval 
victories  for  the  Americans  in  181 2? 

234.  During  this  year,  how  many  prizes  were  captured 

by  the  Americans? 

1813. 

235.  What  was  the  plan  of  the  campaign  of  181 3? 

236.  What  successes  had  these  divisions? 

237.  Describe  Perry's  victory  on  Lake  Erie. 

238.  What  daring  exploit  was  performed  by  Perry? 

239.  In  writing  to  Gen.  Harrison  of  the  victory  gained, 
what  memorable  words  did  Perry  use? 

240.  What  course  did  Harrison  pursue  after  hearing  of 
the  Erie  engagement? 

241.  What  were  the  principal  American  naval  victories 
in  1813? 

242.  What  were  the  important  British  naval  victories 
in  1813? 

243.  In  what  engagement,  and  by  whom  was  used  the 
sentence,  "don't  give  up  the  ship?" 

244.  What  Indian  disturbances  occurred,  and  who  was 
sent  to  punish  them? 

245.  What  ravages  were  committed  by  Admiral  Cock- 

burrj? 

1814. 

246.  In   the  third  invasion  of   Canada,  what  battles 
were  fought? 

247.  Describe  the  battle  of  Lund/s  Lane.     Who  com- 
manded? 

248.  Describe  the  battle  of  Lake  Champlain. 

249.  What  were  some  of  the  ravages  of  the  British  on 
the  Atlantic  coast? 

250.  When  and  where  were  the  articles  of  peace  signed? 

1815. 

251.  After  this  treaty,  what  terrible   battle  was  fought, 
and  with  what  loss? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  17 

/ 

252.     What  was  the  national  debt  at  this  time? 
Monroe's  administration. 
/x^^53.     What  was  the   Missouri  compromise  bill?      Who 
proposed  this  compromise? 

254.     What  foreigner    visited    this    country    as    "The 
Nation's  Guest?" 
\y^2^$.     What  is  the  nature  of  the  Monroe  doctrine? 
^^256.     How  was  J.  Q.  Adams  elected  President? 

J.   Q.  ADAMS'  administration. 

257.  What  important    events    occurred  during  Adams' 
Administration? 

258.  Where  was  the  first  railroad  in  the  United  States? 

259.  How  long  is  the  Erie  Canal? 

Jackson's  administration. 
i^^6o.     What  was  the  Nullification  Ordinance? 

261.  What  Indian  troubles  occurred  during  Jackson's 
Administration  ? 

262.  What  demands  were  made  of  the  French  govern- 
ment? 

VAN  buren's  administration. 

263.  What  were  some  of  the  memorable  events  during 
Van  Buren's  Administration? 

264.  What  were  some  of  the   causes  of   the  J^inancial 
Crisis? 

265.  What  occurred  during  the  Patriot  war? 

HARRISON  AND  TYLER'S  ADMINISTRATION. 

u^266.  How  long  did  Harrison  remain  in  office? 

267.  What  bill  was  vetoed  by  Tyler,  to   the  great  dis- 
gust of  the  men  who  elected  him? 

268.  What  was  the  cause  of  the  Dorr  Rebellion? 

269.  What  were  the  Anti-Rent  difficulties? 

270.  What  occurred  in  relation  to  the  Mormons? 

271.  When  was  Texas  admitted  into  the  Union? 


18  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

272.     Where  was  the  first   telegraph,  and  what  was  the 
first  message  sent  by  it? 

JAMES  K.  folk's    ADMINISTRATION. 

^^^73.     What  were  the  causes  which  led  to  the  war  with 
Mexico? 

274.  Who  had  command  of  the  American  army? 

275.  What  was  the  treaty  of  peace  between  the  United 
States  and  Mexico? 

>2  76.     What  was  the  Fugitive  Slave  Law? 

Pierce's  administration. 
^277.     What  was  the  Kansas  Nebraska  Bill?      Who  pre- 
sented it? 

278.     How  did  this  bill  affect  the  inhabitants  of  Kansas? 
u-^79.     What  was  the  Gadsden  purchase? 

Buchanan's  administration. 
^  280.     What  was  the  Dred  Scott  Decision  ? 
Jz2>i.     What  did  John  Brown  attempt  to  do? 

282.  In  the  fall  elections,  who  were  the  candidates  for 
the  Presidency? 

283.  What  did  each  of  the  parties  advocate? 

284.  What  were  the  causes  whirli  led  to  the  Civil  war? 

285.  Which  State  first  passed  ordinance  of  secession? 

286.  What  other  States  followed  this  example? 

287.  What  government  was  formed  by  these  States? 

288.  Who  was  elected  President,  and  when  inaugurated? 

Lincoln's  administration,  1861. 

289.  What  event   signalized  the  commencement  of  the 
war? 

290.  What  was  the  result  of  this  bombardment? 

291.  What  did  Lincoln  do  in  regard  to  troops? 

292.  Where  was  the  first  blood  shed  in  this  war? 

293.  What  valuable  stores  were  seized  by  the  Confeder- 
ates? 

294.  How  did  Col.  Elmer  E.  Ellsworth  meet  his  death? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  19 

295.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Bull  Run,  and  with 
what  result? 

296.  What  effect  had  this  defeat  on  the  northern  people? 


297 
298 
299 
300, 
301 


Give  an  account  of  the  battle  of  Ball's  Bluff. 
What  colonel  was  killed  in  this  battle? 
What  was  the  condition  of  Missouri? 
When  and  where  was  Gen.  Lyon  killed? 
What  proclamation  was  issued  by  Davis?      In  re- 
ply, what  did  Lincoln  declare? 

302.  At  the  commencement  of  the  year,  how  many 
vessels  were  in  the  United  States  Navy?  how  many  at  the 
close  of  the  year? 

303.  What  did  England  and  France  do,  by  way  of  en- 
couraging the  rebellion? 

^-^304.     Who  were  James  M.  Mason  and  John  Slidell? 

305.  What  occurred  of  much  interest  in  relation  to  the 
commissioners? 

306.  Give  a  general  review  of  the  first  year  of  the  war. 

1862. 

307.  What  was  the  plan,  for  the  campaign  of  1862? 

308.  What  was  the  size  of  each  army?  what  successes 
had  the  Union  forces  early  in  this  year? 

309.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Shiloh,  and  who 
commanded? 

310.  Describe  the  battle  of  Shiloh. 

311.  Where  is  Island  No.  10?  when  and  by  whom  was 
it  captured? 

312.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Murfreesboro?  who 
were  victorious? 

313.  What  effect  had  this  battle? 

314.  What  was  the  plan  of  the  first  expedition  against 
Vicksburg,  and  how  did  it  terminate  ? 

315.  What  fighting  occurred  in  Missouri? 

WAR  ON  THE  SEA  AND  ON  THE  COAST. 

316.  Describe  the  capture  of  New  Orleans. 


20  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

317.  After  the  capture  of  New  Orleans,  what  course 
did  Com.  Farragut  pursue? 

318.  What   was  gained  by  the   capture  of   Roanoke 
Island? 

319.  What  vessels  were  sunk  by  the  Merrimac? 

320.  Describe    the  encounter  between   the    Merrimac 
and  Monitor. 

321.  What  would  undoubtedly  have  been  the  final  result 
if  the  Merrimac  had  been  succesful? 

322.  After  this  engagement,  how  was  the  United  Stales 
Navy  looked  upon  by  European  powers? 

323.  What  became  of  the  boats  Merrimac  and  Monitor? 

WAR  IN  THE  EAST. 

324.  In  the  war  in  the  east,  what  was  the  objective  point  ? 

325.  Who  commanded  in  the  Peninsular  Campaign? 

326.  Describe  the  siege  of  York  town. 

327.  When  was  fought  the  batde  of  Williamsburg? 

328.  What  were  McClellan's  plans?  how  foiled? 

329.  What  were  the  movements  of  Stonewall  Jackson? 

330.  What  was  the  effect  of  this  movement? 

331.  While  these  events  were  transpiring  in  the  Shen- 
andoah valley,  what  were  the  movements  of  McClellan  ? 

332.  After  the  battle  of  Fair  Oaks,  What  course    did 
McClellan  pursue,  and  what  desperate  fighting  occurred? 

333.  What  is  the  distance  from  Fair  Oaks  to  the  James 
river? 

334.  What  was  the  effect  of  this  campaign? 

335.  What  orders  did  McClellan  now  receive? 

336.  Describe  l.ee's  campaign  against  Pope. 

337.  What  was  the  effect  of  this  campaign? 

338.  What  did  Lee  do? 

339.  Who  assumed  command  of  the  army  of  the  Poto- 
mac after  Pope's  defeat? 

340.  What  battles  were  fought  soon  after  he  took  com- 
mand? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  21 

341.  After  these  battles,  what  course  did  Lee  pursue? 

342.  What  was  the  effect  of  Lee's  defeat? 

343.  Why  was  McClellan  again  superseded?  who  took 
command? 

344.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Fredericksburg,  and 
with  what  result? 

345  What  were  the   Confederate  victories  during  this 
year? 

346.  What  were  the  Union  victories? 

347.  What  terrible  Indian  massacre  occurred? 

1863. 

348.  What  was  the  plan  of  the  war  of   1863?      What 
was  the  force? 

349.  When  was  issued  the  Emancipation  Proclamation? 

350.  Describe  the  second  expedition  against  Vicksburg. 

351.  When  did  the  garrison  of  Vicksburg  surrender? 

352.  What  effect  had  this  campaign? 

353.  When   was   fought   the  battle   of    Murfreesboro? 
Who  were  victorious? 

354.  After   this  battle,  what  were   the  movements   in 
Tennessee? 

355.  By  what  means  was   the   army  of   the  Tennessee 
Jrelieved? 

356.  Where  was   Hooker,  and  how  did  he  so  suddenly 
appear  before  the  Confederate  army  at  Chattanooga? 

357.  After   the   battle   of    Fredericksburg,   who    took 
command  of  the  army  of  the  Potomac? 

358.  When  was  fought  the  battle  of  Chancellorville? 

359.  In  this  battle,  what  valuable  Confederate  officer 
was  killed? 

360.  Who  succeeded  Hooker  after  the  battle  of  Chan- 
cellorville? 

361.  What  were  the  movements  of  Lee? 

362.  How  was  his  progress  arrested? 


22  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

363.  At  the  battle  of  Gettysburg,  what  was  the  loss? 

364.  The  loss  of  Vicksburg  and  the  battle  of  Gettys- 
burg had  what  effect  on  the  Confederacy? 

365.  How     did    Admiral   Dupont    attempt    to    take 
Charleston? 

366.  What   were   the    Confederate   successes  for    the 
year  1863? 

367.  The  Union  successes? 

1864. 

368.  When  was  Gen.  Grant  appointed  Lieutenant  Gen- 
eral of  all  the  Union  forces? 

369.  Where  was  the  main  strength  of  the  Confederacy? 

370.  What  plan  was  now  adopted? 

371.  Describe  Sherman's  advance  to  Atlanta. 

372.  When  did  Atlanta  surrender? 

373.  What  had  been   the  loss  during  this  campaign  of 
four  months'  fighting? 

374.  What  movement  was  made  by  Hood,  and  why? 

375.  What  became  of  Hood's  army? 

376.  Describe   Sherman's   "March   to  the   Sea,"  after 
burning  Atlanta. 

377.  AVhat  effect  had  this  march  on  Georgia? 

378.  At  the  time  of  Grant's  move  towards  Richmond^ 
what  battles  were  fought? 

379.  Describe  the  battle  of  the  Wilderness. 

380.  What  did  Grant  do,  and  what  battle  followed? 

381.  Where  was  the  next  engagement? 

382.  What  was  the  result  of  the  attack  on  Petersburg? 

383.  What  was  the  loss  in  this  campaign? 

384.  During  the  siege  of  Richmond,  what  two  important 
events  occurred? 

385.  What  was  the  result  of  the  mine  explosion? 

386.  What  raids  were  made  by  (len.  Early? 

387.  What  was  secured  by  these  expeditions? 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  23 

388.  What  did  Gen.  Sheridan  do? 

389.  What  was  the  effect  of  Sheridan's  successes? 

390.  Describe  the  Red  River  Expedition. 

391.  When  was  the  massacre  of  Fort  Pillow,  Ky. 

392.  What  brilliant  naval  victory  did  Admiral  Farragut 
achieve? 

393.  Describe  the  expedition  against  Fort  Fisher. 

394.  What  was  the  Alabama?  What  damage  did  she  do? 

395.  When,  where,  and  with   what  result  was  the  en- 
counter between  the  Kearsarge  and  the  Alabama? 

396.  What  were  the  Confederate  victories  during  this 
year? 

397.  What  were  the  Union  victories? 

1865. 

398.  When  were  Petersburg  and  Richmond  evacuated 
by  the  Confederates? 

399-     When  and  to  whom  did  Lee  and  Johnson  surrender  ? 

400.     When   was   Jefferson   Davis  captured,  and  how? 
What  was  done  with  him? 
.    401.     How  long  did  the  war  last? 

402.      When  and  by  whom  was  Abraham  Lincoln  assas- 
sinated? 
.  403.     What  became  of  Booth? 

404.  What  was  the  cost  of  the  war? 

405.  How  was  slavery  abolished  in  the  United  States? 

406.  What  caused  trouble  between  Johnson  and  Con- 
gress? 

407.  What  were   the   most  important  bills  passed  over 
the  President's  veto? 

408.  What  is  the  nature  of  these  bills? 

409.  For  what  was  Johnson  impeached? 

^4,10.     What  is  the  fourteenth  Amendment  to  the  consti- 
tution?    When  adopted? 

411.     What   demand   was   made  by  the  United   States 
government  of  France? 


24  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

412.  When  was  the  Atlantic  cable  completed? 

413.  When  was  the  U.  P.  R.  R.  completed? 

414.  When  was  the  fifteenth  Amendment  formally  an- 
nounced? 

^^415.  What  is  the  nature  of  this  amendment? 

416.  What  proclamation  did  Grant  proclaim? 

417.  Whsit   was   the    difficulty   with    England?     How 
settled? 

418.  Name  the  Presidents  in  their  order.     How  long  in 
office?  Who  died  in  office? 

419.  Which  three  ex-Presidents  died  on  the  4th  of  July? 

420.  What  father  and  son  were  Presidents? 

421.  Who  said  "I  would  rather  be  right  than  be  Presi- 
dent?" 

422.  Name  the  rebellions  which  have  occurred  in  our 
history. 

423.  \^Tien,  where,  and   by   whom  were  each  of  the 
States  settled,  and  when  admitted  as  a  State? 

424.  What  are  the  acquisitions  of  territory  to  the  United 
States? 


ANSWERS  TO  QUESTIONS 


ON 


United  States  History 


1.  A  recital  of  what  has  happened  respecting  nations 
and  countries. 

2.  The  historical  records  of  Iceland  show  that  America 
was  discovered  by  the  Northmen  in  1002, 

3.  In  Llexico  and  Central  America  there  are  ruins  of 
ancient  cities,  which  must  have  been  erected  during  a  high 
state  of  civilization,  and  the  Indians  have  no  traditions  as 
to  their  origin.  Tnousands  of  curiously  constructed  earth 
mounds,  which  are  scattered  through  the  Mississippi  river 
valley,  and  from  the  gulf  to  the  lakes,  are  evidences  of  a 
different  race  of  men  which  inhabited  the  continent  pre- 
vious to  the  Indians. 

4.  Six:  First,  from  the  discovery  of  the  continent  to 
the  first  settlement.  Second,  from  the  first  settlement  to 
the  breaking  out  of  the  Revolutionary  war.  Third,  from 
the  commencement  of  this  war  to  the  adoption  of  the 
constitution.  Fourth,  from  the  adoption  of  the  constitu- 
tion to  tlie  commencement  of  the  civil  war.  Fifth,  from 
the  beginning  of  this  war  to  the  surrender  of  Lee's  army. 
Sixth,  from  the  close  of  the  rebellion  to  some  future  period 
of  more  than  ordinary  importance. 

5.  The  island  of  Guanahani  or  San  Salvador,  on  Fri- 
day, Oct.  12th,  1492. 


26  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

6.  Three  small  vessels;  the  Pinta,  Santa  Maria  and 
Nina. 

7.  At  the  mouth  of  the  Cionoco  river,  in  1498. 

8.  Four. 

9.  John  Cabot  and  his  son  Sebastian,  who  discovered 
the  coast  of  Labrador  in  1497. 

10.  A  German,  who  published  a  description  of  the  new 
world,  suggested  that  it  should  be  called  America  in  honor 
of  Americus  Vcspucius,  who  made  great  claims  to  the  first 
discoveries. 

11.  Others  were  jealous  of  his  successes;  treachery 
was  planned;  false  statements  were  made;  and  he  died 
without  reward,  almost  broken  hearted. 

He  was  buried  at  Valladolid,  Spain,  where  he  remained 
until  1 5 13;  he  was  then  transported  to  Seville;  and  again 
in  1536,  his  remains  were  removed  to  the  citj/^  of  Saint 
Domingo,  Hayti,  and  there  interred;  but  in  1796,  they 
were  taken  to  their  final  resting  place,  in  the  cathedral  at 
Havana,  with  imposing  ceremonies. 

12.  The  Spaniards,  English,  French  and  Dutch. 

13.  The  West  Indies  and  southern  part  of  the  United 
States. 

14.  They  claimed  the  northern  part  of  the  United 
States  and  Canada,  having  explored  the  great  lakes,  the 
Mississippi  river,  from  the  Falls  of  St.  Anthony  to  the  gulf, 
the  Illinois,  Wisconsin,  Wabash,  Maumee,  Fox,  and  many 
other  rivers. 

15.  Having  discovered  and  explored  the  Atlantic  coast 
at  various  points,  they  claimed  this  vast  territory,  naming 
it  Virginia,  in  honor  of  Elizabeth,  the  Virgin  Queen. 

16.  In  New  York,  which  they  called  the  New  Nether- 
lands. These  claims  were  based  upon  the  explorations  of 
Hudson. 

1 7.  He  was  a  Spanish  explorer,  who,  being  a  disgraced 
soldier,  sought  the  glory  of  conquest  to  restore  his  tarnished 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  27 

reputation.  He  also  went  in  search  of  a  fountain,  the  ele- 
ments of  which  were  supposed  to  restore  youth  to  all  who 
drank  of  its  waters.     He  discovered  Florida  in  15 12. 

18.  He  crossed  the  isthmus  of  Panama,  and  from  the 
summit  of  the  Andes  discovered  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

19.  Receiving  a  grant  of  Florida  in  1528,  he  with  300 
men  attempted  its  conquest,  allured  by  the  prospect  of 
gold.  The  exploration  proved  a  failure.  Many  perished 
while  wandering  in  the  swamps.  After  arriving  at  the  gulf 
of  Mexico,  they  hurriedly  constructed  boats  and  put  to  sea; 
they  were  shipwrecked  and  De  Narvaez  was  lost.  Six  years 
afterward,  the  only  survivors  (four)  reached  the  Spanish 
settlements  on  the  Pacific  coast. 

20.  A  Spanish  nobleman,  who  invaded  Florida  in  1539, 
with  the  prospect  of  gold  and  conquests.  He  discovered 
the  Mississipi  river,  and  was  shortly  after  buried  in  its  waters. 

21.  At  Darien,  by  the  Spaniards  in  15 10. 

22.  At  St.  Augustine,  in  1565,  by  Melendez,  a  Spaniard. 
The  second  was  also  founded  by  the  Spaniards,  at  Santa 
Fe,  in  1582. 

23.  Sir  Walter  Raleigh  and  Sir  Humphrey  Gilbert. 
Their  labors  were  unsuccessful. 

24.  At  Jamestown,  Virginia,  in  1607. 

25.  The  London  Company,  composed  of  noblemen, 
gentlemen,  and  merchants  of  London. 

26.  All  of  the  country  between  the  southern  limit  of 
Maryland  and  Cape  Fear. 

27.  Three :  the  first  charter  contained  no  idea  of  self-gov- 
ernment. The  people  chose  none  of  their  officers ;  the  king 
was  to  appoint  two  councils;  one  to  reside  in  London,  and 
have  control  of  all  the  colonies,  and  the  other  to  reside  in 
each  colony,  and  have  control  of  its  local  affairs.  The 
second  charter  vested  the  authority  in  a  governor  instead 
of  a  local  council ;  this  change  gave  the  colonists  no  ad- 
ditional rights,  neither  were  they  consulted  with  regard  to 


28  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

the  change.    The  third  charter  gave  the  stockholders  power 
to  regulate  the  affairs  of  the  company  themselves. 

28.  That  tract  of  country  lying  between  the  forty-first 
and  forty-fifth  degrees  of  latitude.  This  was  called 
North  Virginia. 

29.  Columbus  was  the  first  Spanish,  John  Verrazani, 
the  first  French;  John  Cabot,  the  first  English;  and  Hud- 
son, the  first  Dutch  discoverer. 

30.  At  New  York,  in  1613. 

31.  At  Port  Royal,  Nova  Scotia,  in  1605. 

32.  A  French  explorer,  who  made  three  voyages  to  the 
St.  Lawrence  river,  which  he  discovered  in  1534. 

33.  They  were  French  Priests,  who  sought  to  convert 
the  Indians  to  the  Catholic  faith ;  they  were  the  explorers 
of  the  Mississippi  valley.  In  1868,  they  founded  the  mis- 
sion of  St.  Mary,  the  oldest  European  settlement  in  Michi- 
gan. 

34.  .  Joliet  and  Marquette. 

35.  They  were  Jesuit  Missionaries,  and  early  explorers 
of  the  northern  lakes  and  rivers. 

36.  The  tract  lying  between  the  present  cities  of  Phila- 
delphia and  Montreal.  The  name  has  since  been  confined 
to  New  Brunswick  and  the  adjacent  islands. 

37.  Henry  Hudson,  in  1609,  who  sailed  up  the  riVer 
116  miles,  to  where  the  city  of  Hudson  now  stands. 

38.  To  find  a  north-east  passage  to  the  East  Indies. 

39.  In  1610,  after  discovering  the  strait  and  bay  which 
bears  his  name,  he  was  placed  in  an  open  boat  by  his  com- 
panions and  abandoned. 

40.  The  New  Netherlands. 

41.  The  English  and  Dutch.  The  English  based  their 
claims  upon  the  discoveries  of  the  Cabots,  and  the  Dutch 
upon  the  discoveries  of  Hudson. 

42.  By  force  of  arms.  The  English  maintained  posses- 
sion. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  29 

43.  By  the  Puritans,  or  Pilgrim  Fathers,  who  landed  at 
Plymouth,  December  30th,  1620. 

44.  One  hundred.  They  came  in  a  vessel  called  the  May 
Flower. 

45.  John  Carver. 

46.  Nearly  one-half  of  the  number  died  during  the  first 
four  months,  and  all  would  have  perished  but  for  the  aid  of 
fishermen  off  the  coast.  Their  sufferings  continued  four 
years,  after  which  they  were  prosperous. 

47.  A  Puritan,  who  for  liberal  religious  opinions  was 
banished  from  Massachusetts.  He  afterward  formed  the' 
first  settlement  in  Rhode  Island. 

48.  The  Quakers  were  banished  from  the  colony,  many 
were  imprisoned,  and  four  put  to  death. 

49.  By  'the  Dutch,  in  1620. 

50.  One  of  the  founders  of  Jamestown  who  succeeded 
Ratcliffe,  and  governed  the  affairs  of  the  colony  with  great 
energy  and  success. 

51.  The  daughter  of  the  Indian  chief  Powhatan,  who 
saved  the  life  of  Capt.  John  Smith,  who  had  been  sentenced 
to  death  by  her  father. 

52.  She  married  a  young  English  planter,  John  Rolf. 
Three  years  after,  she  visited  London,  was  taken  sick  and 
died.  She  left  an  infant  son,  whose  posterity  are  many  of 
the  leading  families  of  Virgmia. 

53.  In  1608,  to  Jamestown. 

54.  Indian  corn,  potatoes  and  tobacco. 

55.  In  1609,  but  the  massacre  was  prevented  by  Poca- 
hontas, who  revealed  the  plot  to  the  people  of  Jamestown. 

56.  In  1622,  when  in  one  hour,  347  men,  women  and 
children  were  massacred.  The  second  was  in  1644,  when 
300  were  killed;  this  plot  was  originated  by  Opechancan- 
ough,  and  was  intended  to  extermmate  the  English  settlers. 

57.  A  patriotic  young  lawyer,  who  rallied  a  company 
and  defended  the  settlements  against  the  Indians;  he  was 


30  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

denounced  by  governor  Berkley  as  a  traitor  for  acting  with- 
out orders.  During  the  contest  which  followed,  Berkley 
was  driven  out  of  Jamestown,  and  the  village  burned.  In 
the  midst  of  this  struggle  Bacon  died. 

58.  At  Jamestown,  June  28,  1619.  It  consisted  of  the 
governor,  council  and  deputies  or  "burgesses," chosen  from 
the  various  plantations.  '  ! 

59.  Massachusetts,  Plymouth,  Rhode  Island  and  Con- 
necticut 

60.  The  war  commenced  in  1675,  continuing  about  one 
year.  King  Phillip  was  an  Indian  chief,  the  son  of  Massasoit; 
he  became  jealous  of  the  intrusion  of  the  whites,  and 
planned  a  confederation  of  the  Indian  tribes  against  their 
intruders.  He  was  shot  by  an  Indian,  an  ally  of  the  English, 
in  1676. 

61.  In  1660,  the  British  Parliament  ordered  that  the 
commerce  of  the  colony  should  be  carried  on  in  English 
Vessels,  and  their  tobacco  shipped  to  England. 

62.  It  was  not,  and  an  officer  was  sent  to  enforce  the 
act,  but  without  success.  Charles  II.  seized  upon  the  excuse 
thus  offered,  and  made  Massachusetts  a  royal  province. 
The  King  died  before  his  plan  was  completed,  but  James 
II,  in  1686,  declared  the  charters  of  all  the  New  England 
colonies  forfeited. 

63.  The  first  royal  governor  of  New  England.  He  was 
sent  by  James  II.  The  colonies  endured  his  oppressions 
for  three  years,  when  learning  that  his  royal  master  was 
dethroned,  they  rose  against  him,  and  he  was  put  in  jail. 

64.  When  James  II.  declared  that  the  charters  of  all 
the  New  P^ngland  Colonies  were  forfeited,  Connecticut  re- 
fused to  surrender  hers.  Governor  Andros  demanded  the 
charter  of  the  assembly  then  in  session  at  Hartford,  and 
during  the  debate  which  ensued,  the  lights  were  suddenly 
extinguished,  the  charter  was  seized  by  William  Wadsworth 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  31 

and  hidden  In  the  hollow  of  an  old  oak,  which,  since  that 
time  has  been  called  the  "Charter  Oak." 

65.  The  second  royal  governor  of  Massachusetts,  or  a 
province  embracing  Massachusetts,  Maine  and  Nova  Scotia. 

66.  A  superstition  prevailed  that  persons  were  subject 
to  the  control  of  invisible  evil  spirits,  and  it  is  the  received 
opinion  that  200  persons  were  accused,  150  imprisoned, 
28  condemned,  19  hanged,  and  one  pressed  to  death. 

67.  The  Indians  had  become  troublesome  and  danger- 
ous to  the  early  settlers  of  Connecticut,  who  resolved  to 
make  war  upon  the  Pequots.  The  battle  took  place  at 
Mystic  River,  where  the  tribe  was  annihilated,  those  who 
were  not  killed  were  captured  and  made  slaves,  or  escaped 
and  joined  other  tribes. 

68.  New  Amsterdam. 

69.  It  was  purchased  of  the  Manhattan  Indians  for 
about  $24. 

70.  After  the  discovery  of  the  Hudson  river,  the  West 
India  Company  obtained  of  the  Dutch  government  a  grant 
of  New  Netherlands,  and  settlements  were  made  at  New 
Amsterdam  and  Fort  Orange,  (Albany. )  For  twenty  years 
New  York  was  subject  to  Indian  butcheries,  varied  by 
difficulties  with  the  Swedes  on  the  Delaware,  and  the  Eng- 
lish on  the  Connecticut.  In  September,  1664,  an  English 
fleet  came  to  anchor  in  the  harbor  of  New  Amsterdam,  and 
demanded  the  surrender  of  the  town.  Peter  Stuy vesant,  the 
last  and  ablest  of  the  four  Dutch  governors,  plead  with  the 
council  to  fight,  but  in  vain.  They  wished  for  English 
rule.  The  surrender  was  signed,  and  the  colony  was  named 
New  York.  The  English  governors  did  not  satisfy  the 
people,  so  that  when,  after  nine  years  of  English  rule,  a 
Dutch  fleet  appeared  in  the  harbor,  the  people  went  back 
quietly  under  their  old  rulers.  The  next  year  peace  was  de- 
clared between  England  and  Holland,  and  New  Amster- 
dam became  New  York  again.     Andros  now  became  gov- 


82  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

emor,  and  New  York  was  a  royal  province  until  the  revolu- 
tion. 

71.  It  was  founded  in  1683,  by  William  Penn,  who  pur- 
chased the  land  of  the  Swedes;  the  name  sigaifiQS  brotherly 
love. 

72.  A  Quaker,  who  with  a  band  of  followers,  settled  in 
Pennsylvania,  in  1682,  buying  the  lands  of  the  Indians. 

73.  To  secure  for  the  friends  of  this  church  a  Catholic 
refuge  from  the  persecutions  which  they  were  then  suffering 
in  England. 

74.  The  Virginia  colonies  claimed  that  Lord  Baltimore's 
grant  covered  territory  belonging  to  them.  Claybome,  a 
member  of  the  Jamestown  council,  having  established  two 
trading  posts  in  Maryland,  prepared  to  defend  by  force  of 
arms. 

On  the  eve  of  battle  he  fled  to  Virginia,  and  his  parly 
was  defeated.  Clayborne  was  tried  for  treason,  but  ac- 
quitted. Ten  years  afterward  he  came  back,  raised  a  re- 
bellion, and  drove  Calvert  (Lord  Baltimore,)  then  governor 
of  Maryland,  out  of  the  colony;  Calvert  returned  with  a 
large  force,  and  Clayborne  fled. 

75.  The  Protestants,  having  obtained  a  majority  in  the 
assembly,  excluded  Catholics  from  their  rights;  assailed 
their  religion ;  and  even  declared  them  outside  the  pro- 
tection of  the  law.  Civil  war  ensued.  At  one  time  two 
governments  were  sustained,  one  Protestant,  and  the  other 
Catholic.  In  1691,  Lord  Baltimore  was  entirely  deprived 
of  his  rights  as  proprietor,  and  Maryland  became  a  royal 
province.  In  1715,  the  fourth  Lord  Baltimore  recovered 
the  government,  and  religious  toleration  was  again  restored. 

76.  King  William's  war  in  1689,  Queen  Anne's  in  1702, 
and  King  George's  in  1 744. 

77.  In  1689  war  broke  out  in  Europe  between  England 
and  France.  The  contest  extended  to  the  American 
colonies,  and  lasted  seven  years. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  38 

78.  The  war  lasted  eleven  years ;  the  New  England 
frontier  was  again  desolated;  remote  settlements  were 
abandoned;  the  people  betook  themselves  to  palisaded 
houses,  and  worked  their  farms  with  their  guns  always  at 
hand. 

79.  They  were  not.  The  only  event  of  importance 
was  the  capture  of  Louisburg,  on  the  island  of  Cape 
Breton.  Peace  being  established,  England  gave  back 
Louisburg  to  the  French. 

80.  They  assisted  the  French  against  the  English. 

81.  Virginia,  Massachusetts,  Connecticut  and  New- 
York. 

82.  Pennsylvania. 

S^.     William  Penn's  treaty  with  the  Indians. 

84.  Virginia,  New  York,  New  Jersey,  Massachusetts, 
New  Hampshire,  Maryland,  Connecticut,  Rhode  Island, 
Delaware,  Pennsylvania,  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina, 
and  Georgia. 

85.  Harvard  was  founded  at  Cambridge,  Mass.,  in  1638; 
Yale  at  New  Haven,  Conn.,  in  1701. 

86.  It  was  the  Boston  News  Letter^  and  was  established 
in  1 704,  by  Bartholomew  Green. 

87.  The  supposed  negro  plot;  the  plan  being  to  bum 
New  York,  and  make  one  of  their  number  governor.  Many 
innocent  persons  suffered  death. 

88.  A  minister  who  labored  among  the  Indians,  and  for 
his  devotion  was  called  the  Indian  Apostle;  he  also  trans- 
lated the  Bible  into  the  Indian  language. 

89.  He  was  a  man  sent  out  by  England  to  suppress 
piracy  in  1696,  but  turned  pirate  himself;  he  was  captured 
in  Boston,  in  1699,  sent  to  England,  condemned  and  ex- 
ecuted. 

90.  At  Kaskaskie  in  Illinois,  about  1690. 

91.  The  cause  was  disputed  territory,  and  the  parties 
were  the  French  and  Indians  against  the  English. 


4 
84  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

92.  West  of  the  Alleghany  mountains,  along  the  Ohio 
river  and  the  northern  lakes. 

93.  George  Washington. 

94.  After  some  successes  Washington  marched  to  a 
place  called  Great  Meadows,  where  he  built  Ft.  Necessity. 
Early  in  July,  1755,  the  fort  was  attacked  by  the  whole 
French  and  Indian  force,  but  was  defended  with  such  re- 
sistance that  the  French  Commander,  Count  de  Villiers, 
sent  in  a  flag  of  truce.  Washington  gave  up  the  fort  but 
was  permitted  to  march  away  with  all  the  honors  of  war. 

95.  A  vote  of  thanks  was  passed,  and  each  soldier  was 
to  receive  z.  pistole. 

96.  Gen.  Braddock  with  a  select  force  of  1200  men. 

97.  When  within  a  mile  of  Fort  du  Quesne  he  was  sur- 
prised by  a  body  of  French  and  Indians  in  ambush.  Brad- 
dock  was  mortally  wounded,  and  nearly  all  of  his  officers, 
and  one-half  of  his  troops  were  killed.  Braddock  was 
buried  during  the  retreat,  and  Washington  ordered  the 
wagons  to^pass  over  his  grave  that  his  body  might  not  fall 
into  the  hands  of  the  Indians. 

98.  Washington,  although  four  bullets  pierced  his  coat, 
and  two  horses  were  shot  under  him. 

99..  It  was.  Gen.  Forbes  led  this  expedition.  Washing- 
ton commanded  the  Virginia  troops.  After  the  capture  of 
the  fort  it  received  the  name  of  Pittsburg,  in  honor  of 
William  Pitt. 

100.  At  Louisburg,  Quebec,  Crown  Point  and  Niagara. 

10 1.  The  French  forts  at  the  head  of  Fundy  Bay  were 
quickly  taken,  and  the  region  east  of  the  Penobscot  fell 
into  the  hands  of  the  English.  Gen.  Loudoun  planned  an 
attack  on  Louisburg,  but,  learning  that  the  French  fleet 
contained  one  more  ship  than  his  own,  gave  it  up.  The 
next  year  Gen.  Amherst  and  Wolf  captured  the  city  after 
a  severe  bombardment,  and  took  possession  of  the  entire 
island. 


UNITED    STATES   HISTORY.  35 

1 02.  The  English  under  Johnson  met  the  French  com- 
manded by  Dieskau,  near  the  head  of  Lake  George,  where 
a  battle  was  fought,  the  English  being  victorious.  Johnson 
after  building  a  fort  which  he  called  WilHam  Henry,  feared 
defeat  if  he  attempted  to  take  Crown  Point,  and  returned 
to  Albany. 

103.  On  a  calm  Sunday  morning,  about  four  months 
before  the  fall  of  Ft.  du  Quesne,  Gen.  Abercrombie  with  a 
thousand  boats  full  of  soldiers,  with  waving  flags  and  mar- 
tial music,  swept  down  Lake  George  to  attack  Ticonderoga. 
The  result  was  a  disastrous  repulse.  The  next  year,  1759, 
at  the  approach  of  Gen.  Amherst  with  a  large  army,  both 
Ticonderoga  and  Crown  Point  were  evacuated. 

104.  When  Gen.  Shirley  reached  Oswego,  and  hearing 
of  the  disastrous  defeat  of  Braddock  he  was  discouraged, 
and  after  building  a  fort  came  home.  Four  years  after 
Niagara  surrendered  to  the  English. 

105.  General  Wolf  commanded  the  English,  and  Gen. 
Montcalm  the  French. 

106.  Gen.  Wolf  while  reconnoitering  observed  a  nar- 
row path  winding  among  the  rocks  to  the  top,  at  night  he 
■descended  the  river ;  his  men  landed ;  climbed  the  steep 
cliff;  seized  the  guards;  and  at  break  of  day  he  stood 
with  his  entire  army  drawn  up  in  order  of  battle  on  the 
plains  of  Abraham ;  a  desperate  battle  ensued ;  five  days 
after  the  city  surrendered. 

107.  Generals  Wolf  and  Montcalm.  Wolf,  when  in- 
formed that  the  French  were  running,  exclaimed,  "Now 
God  be  praised,  I  die  happy. "  Montcalm  when  told  that 
he  could  not  live  more  than  twelve  hours,  replied,  "So  much 
the  better ;  I  shall  not  see  the  surrender  of  Quebec. " 

108.  France  gave  up  all  the  territory  west  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi, except  two  small  islands  south  of  Newfoundland, 
retained  as  fishing  stations.  In  this  treaty,  Spain  ceded 
Plorida  to  England,  and  France  ceded  to  Spain  New  Or- 


86  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

leans,  and  all  the  territory  she  owned  west  of  the  Missis- 
sippi. 

109.  When  the  English  took  possession  of  the  western 
forts  great  discontent  was  roused,  for  the  French  had  won 
the  hearts  of  the  Indians.  Pontiac,  a  chief  of  the  Ottawas, 
formed  a  confederation  of  the  tribes  against  the  English. 
Eight  forts  were  surprised  and  captured,  thousands  of  per- 
sons fled  from  their  homes  to  avoid  the  scalping  knife.  By 
a  disagreement  among  the  Indians  the  confederation  was 
broken  and  a  treaty  signed. 

no.     The  capture  of  Quebec,  the  13th  of  September, 

1759- 

111.  It  cost  the  colonists  $16,000,000,  and  England  re- 
paid only  $5,000,000;  they  lost  thirty  thousand  men;  they 
suffered  the  untold  horrors  of  Indian  barbarity;  taxes  were 
sometimes  equal  to  two-thirds  of  the  income  of  the  tax 
payers;  they  learned  to  think  and  act  independently  of  the 
mother  country. 

112.  About  2,000,000  people.  Boston  and  Philadelphia 
contained  about  18,000  inhabitants  each. 

113.  The  colonies  were  unjustly  taxed,  and  not  allowed 
the  right  of  sending  representatives  to  Parliament. 

114.  Warrants  authorizing  the  King's  officers  to  search 
for  smuggled  goods.  This  gave  the  custom  house  officers 
power  to  enter  a  man's  house  or  store  at  his  pleasure.  The 
colonists  resisted  such  power  as  a  violation  of  their  rights. 

115.  That  all  bonds,  deeds,  newspapers,  pamphlets, 
&c.,  should  be  stamped.    It  was  passed  by  Parliament  in 

1765. 

116.  A  Virginian,  who  with  boldness  and  eloquence 
distinguished  himself  by  his  opposition  to  the  Stamp  Act 

117.  A  duty  was  laid  on  all  tea,  glass,  paper,  and 
painters'  colors,  which  should  be  imported. 

118.  That  the  colonies  should  furnish  the  soldiers  with 
quarters  and  necessary  supplies.    This  act  aroused  the  indig- 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  o7 

nation  of  the  Americans.    To  be  taxed  was  bad  enough,  but 
to  shelter  and  feed  their  oppressors  was  unendurable. 

1 19.  Vessels  containing  nearly  350  chests  of  tea  were 
boarded  by  Americans  disguised  as  Indians,  and  the  tea 
was  thrown  into  the  harbor. 

120.  An  act  of  Parliament  forbidding  the  landing  of 
goods  in  Boston. 

121.  The  first  Continental  Congress  was  held  at  Phila- 
delphia, Sept.  5  th,  1774.  They  voted  not  to  obey  the  recent 
acts  of  Parliament ;  they  protested  against  standing  armies 
being  kept  in  the  colonies  without  consent  of  the  people; 
they  sustained  Massachusetts  in  her  resistance,  and  agreed 
to  hold  no  intercourse  with  Great  Britain. 

122.  General  Gage. 

123.  At  Lexington,  near  Boston,  April  19th,  1775. 

124.  Gen.  Gage,  learning  that  the  people  were  gather- 
ing military  stores  at  Concord,  sent  eight  hundred  men  to 
destroy  them;  at  Lexington  a  skirmish  ensued,  in  which 
seven  Americans  were  killed.  After  destroying  the  stores, 
they  hastily  retreated,  followed  by  the  militia,  who  were 
eager  to  avenge  the  death  of  their  countrymen.  In  their  re- 
treat to  Boston  they  lost  nearly  three  hundred  men. 

125.  On  Breed's  Hill,  June  17th,  1775. 

126.  Gen.  Howe  of  the  British  army,  and  of  the  Amer- 
icans it  is  uncertain  who  commanded,  but  it  is  thought  by 
some  to  have  been  Prescott.  The  British  force  was  3,000, 
loss  1,000;  the  American  force,  1,500,  loss  450. 

127.  General  Warren. 

128.  Ticonderoga  and  Crown  Point. 

129.  Ethan  Allen  and  Benedict  Arnold. 

130.  "I  demand  it  in  the  name  of  the  Great  Jehovah 
and  the  Continental  Congress. " 

131.  It  assembled  May  loth,  1775,  when  they  voted  to 
raise  and  equip  20,000  men,  and  give  the  command  to  Gen. 


38  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

Washington.   It  was  again  convened  at  Philadelphia,  in  Mx).^ 
1776. 

132.  June  15th,  1775.    His  force  was  14,000  men. 

133.  They  were  unsuccessful,  receiving  a  defeat  at 
Quebec,  where  Gen.  Montgomery,  the  American  general, 
was  killed. 

1 34.  By  sending  a  force  at  night  to  fortify  Dorchester 
Heights.  This  overlooked  Boston,  and  Howe  remembering 
the  lesson  of  Bunker  Hill,  decided  to  leave.  The  next  day^ 
March  i8th,  Washington  entered  amid  great  rejoicing. 

135.  June  28th,  a  British  fleet,  under  Admiral  Parker,, 
opened  fire  on  Fort  Moultrie.  The  response  from  Moul- 
trie's guns  was  so  fearful  that  the  fleet  was  badly  shattered,, 
and  they  withdrew  and  sailed  for  New  York. 

136.  Early  in  the  action  the  flag  staff  was  struck  by  a 
ball,  Jasper  leaped  over  the  breastworks,  caught  'up  the 
flag,  and  springing  back  tied  it  to  a  sponge  staff,  and  hoisted 
it  in  its  place. 

137.  Richard  Henry  Lee,  of  Virginia,  June  7,  1776. 

138.  Thomas  Jefferson,  John  Adams,  Benjamin  Frank- 
lin, Roger  Sherman,  and  Robert  R.  Livingston. 

139.  July  4th,  1776. 

140.  That  the  thirteen  United  States  of  America  were 
free  and  independent. 

141.  August  2d,  1776,  by  all  the  members of^  Congress^ 
numbering  fifty-six. 

142.  That  articles  of  government  should  be  drawn. 

143.  Articles  of  Confederation,  and  were  to  take  effect 
when  ratified  by  all  the  States. 

144.  No;  delays  and  objections  arose,  but  they  were 
established  in  March,  1781. 

145.  Rhode  Island. 

146.  Because  it  gave  no  real  power  to  Congress,  who 
could  only  recommend  what  should  be  done.  Congress 
could  borrow   money,  but  was  not  empowered  to  pay  it. 


UNITED   STATES   HISTORY.  39 

could  declare  war  and  determine  how  many  troops  should 
be  raised,  but  could  not  levy  taxes  to  defray  expenses,  nor 
compel  the  States  to  raise  the  troops. 

147.  Aug.  27th,  1776,  the  Americans  being  compelled 
to  withdraw,  closely  pursued  by  the  British  under  Gen. 
Howe. 

148.  North  by  the  way  of  Harlem,  White  Plains  and 
Chester,  then  southwest  through  New  Jersey  to  the  Penn- 
sylvania side  of  the  Delaware  river. 

149.  Oct.  28th,  1776,  neither  side  being  victorious,  al- 
though Washington  retreated  when  the  British  received  re- 
inforcements. 

150.  He  crossed  the  Delaware  December  26th,  pro- 
ceeded to  Trenton,  captured  one  thousand  Hessians  and 
a  large  quantity  of  arms. 

151.  The  battle  of  Princeton,  Jan.  3d,  1777,  which  was 
one  of  the  hottest  fought  battles  during  the  whole  war. 
The  Americans  were  successful.  That  night  Washington  left 
his  camp  fires  burning  to  deceive  the  enemy,  and  by  a 
circuitous  route  passed  the  British;  fell  upon  the  troops 
near  Princeton ;  routed  them ;  took  three  hundred  prisoners; 
and  by  rapid  marches  reached  Morristown  Heights  in 
safety. 

152.  September  nth,  1777,  Washington  was  defeated, 
retreating  to  Philadelphia. 

153.  September  26th,  1777,  without  opposition. 

154.  At  German  town,  October  4th,  meeting  with  a  de- 
feat, losing  1,200  men. 

155.  The  capture  of  the  British  General  Prescott,  by 
Col.  Barton,  with  forty  select  soldiers,  who  crossed  from 
Warwick  in  the  night  to  the  island  of  Rhode,  where  the 
British  army  was  encamped,  proceeded  to  Gen.  Prescott's 
lodgings,  captured  him  and  returned. 

156.  To  have  an  officer  equal' in  rank  to  Gen.  Lee,  that 
they  might  exchange. 


40  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

157.  Gen.  Burgoyne  with  10,000  British  and  Indian 
troops. 

158.  Gen.  Gates  commanded  the  Americans,  and  Gen. 
Burgoyne  the  British. 

159.  He  sent  a   half-witted  boy  into  the  camp  of  the 
t         British,    who    spread   the  report   that   a    large    body    of 

Americans  was  close  at  hand.  When  asked  their  number, 
he  could  only  answer  by  pointing  to  the  leaves  of  the  trees, 
the  Indians  and  the  British  were  so  frightened  that  they  fled 
immediately. 

160.  As  the  British  lines  were  forming  for  the  attack, 
he  exclaimed:  "There  are  the  red  coats,  we  must  beat 
them  to-day  or  Mollie  Stark  is  a  widow. "  They  gained  a 
victory,  and  took  six  hundred  prisoners. 

161.  The  battles  of  Stillwater,  (Saratoga)  Sept.  19th, 
and  Oct.  7th,  1777;   the  Americans  were  successfTil. 

162.  To  Gen.  Gates  at  Saratoga,  Oct.  17th,  1777. 

163.  That  the  British  should  give  up  their  arms  and 
ammunition,  return  to  England,  and  engage  no  more  in  the 
war. 

164.  In  Valley  Forge.  The  men  were  encamped  in 
cold,  comfortless  huts,  with  little  or  no  clothing,  many  were 
barefooted,  few  had  blankets,  and  straw  could  not  be  ob- 
tained ;   sickness  followed,  and   for  want  of  suitable  food 

^♦#        and  medicines  many  died. 

165.  Benjamin  Franklin,  Silas  Dean  and  Arthur  Lee. 

166.  At  Paris,  February  6th,  1778,  and  was  ratified  by 
Congress  May  4th. 

167.  A  French  fleet  under  Count  D'Estaing. 

168.  About  nine  months,  withdrawing  their  forces  June 
i8th,  1778. 

169.  At  Lancaster  and  York,  Pennsylvania. 

1 70.  June  28th,  1 778,  in  the  eastern  part  of  New  Jersey, 
both  parties  claimed  the  victory,  but  the  British  withdrew 
their  troops.    The  day  was  sultry  and  hot.    During  this  battle 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  41 

an  artillery  mar«  was  shot  at  his  post,  his  wife,  Mary  Pitcher, 
saw  him  fall  and  heard  the  commander  order  the  piece  to 
be  removed  from  the  field ;  she  hastened  to  the  cannon, 
seized  the  rammer,  and  with  great  skill  and  courage  per- 
formed her  husband's  duty. 

171.  July  3d,  1778,  under  the  direction  of  John  Butler, 
at  the  head  of  i,6oo  Tories  and  Indians. 

172.  Gen.  Lincoln.       Gen.  Prevost  of  the  British. 

173.  In  the  northern  States. 

1 74.  Stony  Point  and  Paulus  Hook. 

175.  Gen.  Wayne,  in  the  night  of  July  15th,  with  un- 
loaded guns  and  fixed  bayonets  attacked  Stony  Point,  carry- 
ing the  works.  Paulus  Hook  was  surprised  and  taken  by 
Major  Lee,  July  19th. 

176.  A  great  loss  to  the  American  and  PYench  forces. 

177.  The  Polish  nobleman,  Count  Pulaski. 

178.  They  had  captured  over  five  hundred  ships,  they 
even  cruised  among  the  British  Isles,  and  entering  harbors, 
seized  and  burned  ships  lying  at  the  English  wharves. 

179.  A  very  successful  naval  commander  of  the  naval 
forces.  His  most  memorable  exploit  occurred  ofi"  the  coast 
of  Scotland,  where  the  Richard  captured  the  Serapis.  As  the 
enemy  carried  heavier  guns,  he  lashed  the  two  vessels 
together,  and  for  two  hours  they  fought  hand  to  hand  with 
musket,  pike  and  cutlass.  As  the  Ban  Homme  Richard  was 
about  to  sink,  the  captain  of  the  Serapis  struck  his  colors, 
and  Jones  transferred  his  men  to  the  captured  frigate  and 
sailed  off  with  his  prize. 

180.  In  South  Carolina. 

181.  Gen.  Lincoln  was  forced  to  surrender  his  troops, 
2,000  in  number.  May  12th,  1780. 

182.  Gen.  Gates  succeeded  Lincoln,  and  Lord  Corn- 
wallis  had  command  of  the  British. 

183.  Near  Camden,  South  Carolina,  Aug.  i6th,   1780. 


42  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

The  armies  were  commanded  by    Gates  and   Cornwallis, 
the  Americans  being  defeated  with  a  loss  of  2,000  men. 

184.  General  Greene. 

185.  The  massacre  of  Maxhaw  Creek,  where  a  body 
of  400  Americans  were  surprised,  and  after  surrendering, 
were  massacred. 

186.  As  the  states  had  been  overrun  by  the  British, 
there  was  no  organized  resistance  to  them. 

187.  A  French  fleet,  under  De  Ternay  and  Count 
De  Rochambeau,  with  6,000  troops. 

188.  An  American  traitor,  who  secretly  agreed  to  betray 
West  Point  into  the  hands  of  the  British. 

189.  A  British  officer,  who  was  sent  by  Clinton  to 
negotiate  with  Arnold. 

T90.  John  Paulding,  David  Williams,  and  Isaac  Van 
Wart.  They  received  a  pension  of  $200  each  for  life,  and 
a  silver  medal  bearing  on  one  side  the  motto  "Fidelity," 
and  on  the  other,  "The  love  of  country  conquers." 

191.  Arnold  escaped  to  the  British  and  was  given  a 
command  in  the  army.  Andre  was  hanged  as  a  spy,  Oct. 
2d,  1780. 

192.  He  received  about  $30,000,  a  colonelcy  in  the 
English  army,  and  the  contempt  of  every  body. 

193.  In  South  Carolina,  Jan.  17th,  1781.  The  Ameri- 
cans under  Gen.  Morgan  were  successful,  with  a  loss  of 
only  80  men.     The  enemy's  loss  was  800. 

194.  He  attacked  the  British  at  Eutaw  Springs,  Sept. 
8th,  and  the  forces  of  the  enemy  were  so  crippled  that  they 
retired  towards  Charleston. 

195.  He  did  not;  but  his  defeats  had  all  the  effects  of 
success,  and  Congress  voted  the  highest  honors  to  him,  for 
his  prudence,  wisdom,  and  valor. 

196.  With  great  brutality.  Arnold,  who  had  command^ 
burned   much  of  private  as  well  as  public  property,  and 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  43 

Cornwallis,  after  arriving  and  taking   command,  destroyed 
$10,000,000  worth  of  property. 

197.  The  surrender  of  Cornwallis  at  Yorktown. 

198.  To  Gen.  Washington,  Oct.  19th,  1781. 

199.  At  Paris,   Sept.   3d,  1783.     The  American  com 
missioners  were   John  Adams,  Benjamin  Franklin,  Henry 
Lawrence,  and  John  Jay.     The  British  commissioners  were 
Messrs.  Fitzherbert  and  Oswald. 

200.  x^pril  19th,  1783,  just  eight  years  after  the  battle 
of  Lexington. 

201.  Before  Congress,  which  was  assembled  at  Annap- 
olis, Dec.  23d,  1783.  He  then  returned  to  his  home  in 
Virginia. 

202.  The  Articles  of  Confederation  could  not  meet  the 
wants  of  the  people.  Bitter  jealousy  existed  between  the 
several  states,  with  regard  to  each  other  and  the  general 
goverment.  Continental  money  was  much  depreciated,  and 
bankruptcy  seemed  almost  inevitable. 

203.  The  Marquis  de  La  Fayette,  Count  de  Grasse, 
Count  de  Rochambeau,  Count  D'Estaing,  Count  Pulaski, 
and  De  Ternay. 

204.  In  New  England  they  refused  to  pay  their  taxes, 
and  openly  threatened  to  overturn  the  government.  It  was 
put  down  by  militia  under  Gen.  Lincoln. 

205.  In  1777,  by  Congress.  It  is  composed  of  thirteen 
stripes,  alternate  red  and  white,  with  a  field  of  blue  in  the 
upper  flag  staff  corner,  on  which  there  is  a  star  for  every 
state.     The  breadth  is  two-thirds  its  length. 

206.  In  1788. 

207.  At  New  York,  in  April,  1 789. 

208.  The  treasury  was  empty;  and  the  United  States 
had  no  credit ;  the  Indians  were  hostile ;  pirates  from  the 
Barbary  States  preyed  upon  our  commerce ;  Spain  refused 
the  navigation  of  the  Mississippi ;  England  had  not  sent  a 


44  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

minister  to  our  government,  nor  had  she  made  a  treaty  of 
commerce  with  us. 

209.  At  New  York,  April  30th,  1 789. 

210.  At  Philadelphia,  where  the  seat  of  government 
was  to  remain  until  1800. 

211.  In  the  year  1800. 

212.  Jefferson,  Hamilton,  Knox  and  Randolph.  Jef- 
ferson was  appointed  Secretary,  of  State;  Hamilton,  Sec- 
retary, of  the  Treasury ;  Knox,  Secretary,  of  war ;  and  Ran- 
dolph, Atorney-General. 

213.  By  the  advice  of  Alexander  Hamilton,  taxes  were 
levied  on  imported  goods,  and  distillation  of  spirits;  also  a 
mint  and  national  bank  were  established  at  Philadelphia. 

214.  "He  smote  the  rock  of  the  national  resources,  and 
abundant  streams  of  revenue  burst  forth.  He  touched  the 
dead  corpse  of  public  credit,  and  it  sprang  upon  its  feet." 

215.  The  inhabitants  in  Western  Pennsylvania  were  de- 
termined that  no  tax  should  be  paid  on  whisky,  and  they 
were  so  well  organized  that  fifteen  thousand  troops  were 
ordered  out  to  subdue  them. 

216.  The  early  settlers  of  Ohio  were  much  annoyed  by 
their  depredations  and  Gens.  Warner  and  St.  Clair  were 
sent  against  them,  but  were  defeated  with  great  slaughter. 
Gen.  Wayne  was  now  put  in  command,  who,  in  1 794,  gained 
a  complete  victory,  laying  waste  their  whole  country. 

217.  Difficulties  were  arising  with  England  in  regard  to 
the  collection  of  debts  in  America,  and  the  impressment  of 
our  seamen.  A  treaty  was  made  with  Spain,  securing  to 
the  United  States  the  free  navigation  of  the  Mississippi,  and 
fixing  the  boundarj'  of  Florida,  still  held  by  that  nation. 

218.  The  passage  of  the  Alien  and  Sedition  Laws,  and 
difficulties  with  France. 

219.  Under  the  Alien  Law,  the  President  could  expel 
from  the  country  any  foreigner  whom  he  deemed  injurious 
to  the  United  States.     Under  the  Sedition  Law^  any  one 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  45 

libelling  Congress,  the  President,  or  the  government,  could 
be  fined  or  imprisoned. 

220.  Our  flag  was  insulted,  our  vessels  were  captured, 
and  our  envoys  were  refused  audience  by  the  French  gov- 
erment.  Hostilities  were  commenced  on  the  seas,  but 
when  Napoleon  became  First  Consul  of  France  the  dif- 
ficulty ceased. 

221.  He  was  elected  by  Congress  on  the  thirty-sixth 
ballot,  there  being  no  election  by  the  people,  he  and  Aaron 
Burr,  receiving  an  equal  number  of  votes. 

222.  The  purchase  of  Louisiana  from  Napoleon  for 
$15,000,000.  This  secured  over  one  million  square  miles 
of  land,  and  the  full  possession  of  the  Mississippi.  This 
tract  had  just  been  ceded  by  Spain  to  France. 

223.  American  commerce  suffered  greatly  from  the 
inhabitants  of  the  Barbary  States,  who  were  known  as 
pirates.  They  also  held  the  crews  of  captured  vessels,  until 
raiTsomed.     The  war  occurred  in  1805. 

224.  The  frigate  Philadelphia,  had  unfortunately 
grounded  while  in  the  harbor  of  Tripoli,  and  fell  into  the 
hands  of  the  Bashaw.  Decatur  entered  the  harbor  with  a 
small  vessel,  apparently  in  distress,  he  having  concealed  his 
men  below ;  boarded  the  Philadelphia ;  swept  the  crew  into 
the  sea ;  set  the  ship  on  fire,  and  amid  a  tremendous  can- 
nonade from  the  batteries,  escaped  without  the  loss  of  a 
man. 

225.  England  claimed  the  right  of  stopping  American 
vessels  on  the  high  seas;  searching  for  seamen  of  English 
birth,  and  pressing  them  into  the  British  navy.  According- 
ly the  British  frigate,  Leopold,  fired  into  the  American 
frigate,  Chesapeake,  oft'  the  coast  of  Virginia,  and  going 
aboard,  seized  four  of  the  crew,  three  of  which  were 
Americans  by  birth.  These  were  taken  on  the  pretence  of 
being  deserters. 

226.  Aaron  Burr  was  at  one  time  Vice  President  of  the 


46  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

United  States.  He  attempted  to  form  a  government  west 
of  the  AUeghanies;  was  tried  for  treason,  but  acquitted. 
This  was  called  "Burr's  Conspiracy."  Hamilton  was  distin 
guished  in  the  affairs  of  government,  and  was  killed  in  a 
duel  with  Aaron  Burr. 

227.  For  inventing  the  steamboat.  The  first  voyage 
was  made  from  New  York  to  Alb  any. 

228.  The  British  emissaries  had  aroused  the  Indians  to 
war,  and  Tecumseh  formed  a  confederacy  of  the  northwestern 
tribes.  Gen.  Harrison  was  sent  against  them,  who  at  the 
battle  of  Tippecanoe  routed  them  with  great  slaughter. 

229.  June  19th,   18 1 2,  and  lasted  two  years  and  a  half. 

230.  The  government  proposed  to  invade  Canada, 
accordingly  Gen.  Hull  crossed  over  from  Detroit,  but  learn- 
ing that  the  British  and  Indians  were  gathering  to  attack 
him,  retreated,  pursued  by  a  force  of  British  under  Gen. 
Brock,  and  Indians  under  Tecumseh. 

231.  As  Gen.  Brock  marched  to  attack  the  fort,  Hull 
seemed  to  lose  all  presence  of  mind,  and  dare  not  risk  a 
battle.  He  raised  the  white  flag,  surrendered  Detroit,  with 
its  garrisons  and  stores,  and  the  whole  of  Michigan,  without 
even  stipulating  for  the  honors  of  war. 

232.  In  October  of  the  same  year  Gen.  Van  Rensselaer 
sent  a  small  body  of  men  across  the  Niagara  River  to  attack 
the  British  at  Queenstown  Heights.  The  English  were  driven 
from  their  position,  and  Gen.  Brock  killed.  Gen  Van 
Rensselaer  now  returned  to  bring  over  the  rest  of  his  army  •, 
but  the  militia  had  lost  their  courage,  and  refused  to  go.  The 
troops  on  the  Canadian  shore,  thus  basely  abandoned,  were 
compelled  to  surrender. 

233.  The  capture  of  the  Guerriere  by  the  Constitution, 
Aug.  19th;  of  the  Frolic  by  the  Wasp,  Oct.  i8th;  of  the 
Macedonia  by  the  United  States,  Oct.  25th;  of  the  Java  by 
the  Constitution,  Dec.  29th. 

234.  Over  three  hundred. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  47 

235.  Three  armies  were  raised  with  the  intention  of  in- 
vading Canada.  The  division  under  Harrison  was  sent  to 
the  west  shore  of  Lake  Erie ;  the  division  under  Dearborne 
between  Erie  and  Ontario ;  and  Hampden's  division  on  the 
shore  of  Lake  Champlain. 

236.  They  acompHshed  but  Httle. 

237.  The  American  fleet  consisted  of  nine  vessels,  car- 
rying fifty-four  guns,  and  the  British  fleet  of  six  vessels  and 
sixty  three  guns.  Perry's  flag  ship,  the  Lawrence,  engaged 
two  of  the  heaviest  vessels  of  the  enemy,  and  fought  until 
but  eight  of  his  men  were  left.  Leaving  the  Lawrence  he 
passed  to  the  Niagara,  and  within  fifteen  minutes  after 
mounting  the  deck  won  the  victory. 

238.  It  was  while  passing  from  the  Lawrence  to  the 
Niagara.  The  enemy's  guns  were  directed  upon  him,  and,, 
although  he  passed  within  pistol-shot  of  the  British,  he  es- 
caped without  injury. 

239.  "We  have  met  the  enemy,  and  they  are  ours." 

240.  Harrison  was  at  Sandusky  Bay,  preparing  to  in- 
vade Canada,  and  at  the  news  of  this  victory,  crossed  the 
lake,  landed  at  Maiden,  where  on  the  approach  of  Harrison 
the  British  retreated,  but  were  overtaken  on  the  Thames 
River,  and  compelled  to  surrender.  Proctor  escaped  by 
the  fleetness  of  his  horse.  In  this  engagement  Tecumseh 
was  killed. 

241.  The  capture  of  the  Peacock  by  the  Hornet,  Feb. 
24th;  of  the  Boxer  by  the  Enterprise,  Sept.  5  th;  of  Barkley's 
fleet  by  Perry's  fleet,  Sept.  loth. 

242.  The  capture  of  the  Chesapeake  by  the  Shannon; 
and  the  Argus  by  the  Pelican. 

243.  It  was  the  last  command  of  Capt.  Lawrence  as  he 
was  carried  below  during  the  engagement  between  the 
Chesapeake  and  Shannon. 

244.  A  rising  of  the  Alabama  Indians.  They  fell  npon 
Fort    Mims  and   massacred  the  garrison.     Gen.    Jackson 


48  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

took  command ;  drove  them  from  place  to  place,  and  at 
Horseshoe  Bend,  where  they  had  fortified  themselves,  the 
soldiers  with  fixed  bayonets,  scaled  their  breastworks,  and 
a  desperate  battle  ensued.  Six  hundred  Creeks  were  killed. 
Those  who  escaped  were  glad  to  make  peace  on  any  terms. 

245.  Early  in  the  spring  Cockburn  commenced  devas- 
tating the  southern  coast.  In  Virginia  and  Carolina  he 
burned  bridges,  farmhouses,  and  villages ;  robbed  the  in- 
habitants; plundered  churches;  and  murdered  the  sick  in 
their  beds. 

246.  They  attacked  the  British  at  Chippewa,  July  5th, 
and  gained  a  brilliant  victory.  A  second  engagement  was  at 
Lundy's  Lane,  July  25  th. 

247.  It  was  one  of  the  bloodiest  battles  of  the  war.  Gen. 
Scott  commanded  the  American  forces  of  one  thousand 
men,  and  maintained  the  unequal  contest  until  dark.  A 
battery  located  on  a  height  was  the  key  to  the  British  position. 
Scott  asked  Col.  Miller  if  he  could  take  it.  "I'll  try,  sir," 
was  the  reply.  The  battery  was  taken.  Three  times  the 
British  rallied  for  its  recapture,  but  were  unsuccessful.  This 
victory,  though  glorious  to  the  American  army,  was  barren 
of  direct  results. 

248.  In  this  contest  the  British  fleet  on  Lake  Champlain 
attacked  the  A.merican  squadron  under  Com.  McDonough 
and  was  nearly  annihilated.  Prevost  with  twelve  thousand 
men  advanced  against  Plattsburg,  but  when  he  found  that 
his  ships  were  lost,  he  fled,  Id^ving  his  sick  and  wounded, 
and  large  quantities  of  military  stores. 

249.  Gen.  Ross  marched  to  Washington;  burned  the 
capitol  and  other  public  buildings,  libraries,  records,  and 
several  private  dwellings. 

250.  At  Ghent,  December  24th,  1814. 

251.  The  battle  of  New  Orleans,  Jan.  8th.  Gen.  Jackson 
conmianded  the  American  forces,  numbering  6,000,  and 
Gen.  Pakenham  commanded  the  British,  numbering  1 2,000. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  49 

The  American  loss  was  seven  killed  and  seven  wounded. 
The  British  loss  was  2,500. 

252.  $127,000,000. 

253.  A  bill  defining  the  Hmits  of  slavery;  all  states  north 
of  latitude  ;^6^  30/,  and  all  territories  west  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi should  be  free.    It  was  proposed  by  Henry  Clay. 

254.  La  Fayette. 

255.  Any  attempt  by  a  European  nation  to  gain  domi- 
nation in  America  would  be  considered  by  the  United  States 
as  an  unfriendly  act. 

256.  There  being  four  candidates,  no  majority  of  votes 
was  obtained.  He  was  chosen  by  the  House  of  Represent- 
atives. 

257.  The  first  railroad  was  completed,  and  the  Erie 
Canal  was  opened. 

258.  The  first  railroad  in  the  United  States  was  built 
in  1833,  from  Albany  to  Schenectady. 

259.  The  Erie  Canal  is  about  ;^6^  miles  in  length. 

260.  It  declared  the  tariff  laws  "null  and  void,"  'and 
that  the  State  (South  Carolina)  would  secede  from  the 
Union  if  force  should  be  employed  to  collect  any  revenue. 

261.  TAe  Black  Hawk  War  broke  out  in  the  Northwest 
Territory.  After  some  skirmishing  they  were  driven  off 
and  their  leader.  Black  Hawk,  was  captured.  The  Florida 
War  with  the  Seminoles  grew  out  of  an  attempt  to  move 
them,  in  accordance  with  a  treaty,  to  lands  west  of  the 
Mississippi. 

262.  They  had  promised  to  pay  $5,000,000,  for  damages 
to  our  commerce  during  Napoleon's  war.  Jackson  urged 
Congress  to  make  reprisals  on  French  ships.  By  the  medi- 
ation of  England,  the  debt  was  paid,  and  war  prevented. 

263.  The  Financial  Crisis  of  1837,  and  the  Patriot 
War. 

264.  (i.)  The  specie  circular,  which  was  issued  by  Jack- 


60  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

son,  directing  that  payments  for  public  lands  should  be  made 
in  gold  and  silver. 

(2.)  The  surplus  public  money,  amounting  to  about 
$28,000,000,  which  was  ordered  by  Congress  to  be  with- 
drawn from  the  local  banks  and  distributed  among  the 
states.     The  banks  could  not  meet  this  demand. 

(3.)  Heavy  importations  of  European  goods,  which  had 
to  be  paid  for  in  gold  and  silver. 

(4.)  A  terrible  fire  in  New  York  City  on  the  night  of 
Dec.  1 6th,  1835,  which  had  burned  six  hundred  valuable 
stores,  and  property  to  the  amount  of  $18,000,000. 

265.  The  Canadian  Rebellion  stirred  the  sympathies  of 
the  American  people.  Meetings  were  held;  volunteers 
offered;  and  arms  contributed.  The  President  issued  a 
proclamation,  and  (ien.  Scott  was  sent  to  the  frontier  to 
preserve  the  peace.  A  body  of  American  syijipathizers 
took  possession  of  Navy  Island,  in  the  Niagara  River,  but 
were  dislodged  by  British  troops.  The  steamer  Caroline 
was  taken  by  a  body  of  British  troops,  and  sent,  with  her 
crew,  over  the  Falls. 

266.  One  month. 

267.  A  bill  for  establishing  a  United  States  Bank. 

268.  The  people  of  Rhode  Island  organized  by  force  a 
new  constitution,  and  elected  Dorr  Governor.  Dorr  was 
arrested,  tried  for  treason,  and  sentenced  for  life.  He  was 
afterwards  pardoned. 

269.  The  tenants  on  some  of  the  old  patroon  estates  in 
New  York,  refused  to  pay  the  rent.  Some  assumed  the 
disguise  of  Indians,  tarred  and  feathered  those  who  paid 
their  rents,  and  even  killed  officials  who  served  warrants 
upon  them. 

270.  They  were  settled  at  Nauvoo,  III.,  but  having  in- 
curred the  enmity  of  the  people  about  them,  were  com- 
pelled to  leave.  Joseph  Smith,  their  leader,  was  killed  by  a 
mob. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  51 

271.  December  27th,  1845.  She  applied  for  admission 
in  1836. 

272.  From  Baltimore  to  Washington.  The  message  was 
the  announcement  of  Polk's  nomination  for  President  of 
the  United  States. 

2  73.  The  annexation  of  Texas  by  the  United  States,  and 
and  a  certain  tract  of  land  claimed  by  Mexico. 

274.  Gen.  Taylor,  in  1846,  and  Gen.  Winfield  Scott,  in 
1847.  Scott  was  successful  in  many  engagements,  enter- 
ing Mexico  Sept.  14th,  1847. 

2  75.  A  withdrawal  of  United  States  troops ;  that  Mexico 
should  cede  to  the  United  States  the  territories  of  New 
Mexico  and  Upper  California  for  the  sum  of  $15,000,000, 
and  pay  $3,500,000  to  American  citizens  due  them  by 
Mexico. 

276.  It  provided  for  the  return  of  slaves  to  their  owners, 
who  had  escaped  to  a  free  state. 

277.  Its  nature  was  a  repeal  of  the  Missouri  com- 
promise bill,  allowing  the  people  of  the  territories  to  decide 
'Whether  it  should  be  bond  or  free.  It  was  proposed  by 
Stephen  A.  Douglas,  and  had  relation  to  the  territories  of 
Kansas  and  Nebraska.     It  became  a  law,  May,  1854. 

278.  A  bitter  contest  arose  between  the  pro-slavery  and 
anti-slavery  men.  Each  party  sent  bodies  of  armed  emi- 
grants to  the  territory.  Disturbances  arose;  mobs  were 
formed;  houses  were  attacked  and  pillaged;  men  were 
murdered  in  cold  blood ;  and  for  several  years  Kansas  was 
a  scene  of  lawless  violence. 

279.  A  dispute  arose  between  the  United  States  and 
Mexico,  with  regard  to  the  boundary  line.  Gen.  Gadsden 
negotiated  a  settlement,  whereby  $10,000,000  were  paid  to 
Mexico  for  additional  territory. 

280.  The  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States  declared 
that  slave-owners  might  take  their  slaves  into  any  state  in 
the  Union,  without  forfeiting  authority  over  them.     Dred 


52  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

Scott  was  a  slave,  and  claimed  freedom  on  the  ground  that 
he  had  been  taken  into  a  free  territory. 

281.  Being  an  ardent  lover  of  negro  freedom,  he  con- 
ceived the  wild  scheme  of  taking  the  law  into  his  own  hands 
and  liberating  the  slaves.  He  seized  the  United  States 
arsenal  at  Harper's  Ferry  in  1859,  and  proclaimed  freedom 
to  all  the  slaves  in  the  vicinity.  He  was  taken  by  the 
United  States  and  hung  as  a  traitor. 

282.  Abraham  Lincoln,  Stephen  A.  Douglas,  John  C. 
Breckinridge,  and  John  Bell. 

283.  The  Lincoln  party  held,  that,  while  slavery  must 
be  protected  where  it  was,  it  ought  not  to  be  carried  into 
any  free  territory. 

The  Douglas  party  favored  squatter's  sovereignty,  the 
right  of  each  state  to  decide  whether  it  shall  exclude  or 
accept  slavery. 

The  Breckinridge  party  claimed  that  any  citizen  has  a 
right  to  migrate  to  any  territory,  taking  with  him  anything 
that  is  property  (including  slaves),  and  Congress  is  bound 
10  protect  the  rights  of  slave-holders  in  all  the  territories. 

The  Bell  party  had  for  their  platform :  "  The  constitution 
of  the  country,  the  union  of  the  states,  and  the  enforce- 
ment of  the  laws." 

284.  The  agitation  of  the  slavery  question.  The  South- 
ern States,  believing  they  had  a  right  to  secede  from  the 
Union,  seceded,  but  the  federal  government,  denying  that 
right,  raised  armies  and  enforced  its  authority. 

285.  South  Carolina,  Dec.  20th,  i860. 

286.  Mississippi,  Florida,  Alabama,  Georgia,  Louisiana, 
Texas,  Virginia,  North  Carolina,  Arkansas,  and  Tennessee. 

287.  The  Confederate  States  of  America,  and  the  form 
of  Government  was  similar  to  the  government  of  the  United 
States. 

288.  Jefferson  Davis,  and  was  inaugurated  Feb.  4th, 
1861. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  53 

289.  The  bombardment  of  Fort  Sumter. 

290.  Fort  Sumter  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Confede- 
rates under  Beauregard.  Maj.  Anderson,  the  Commander 
of  Sumter,  was  permitted  to  go  north  with  his  men. 

291.  He  issued  a  requisition  for  75,000  troops,  and 
soon  after  for  300,000  volunteers. 

292.  In  Baltimore,  April  19th,  i86t,  where  southern 
sympathizers  attacked  a  Massachusetts  regiment  on  its  way 
to  Washington. 

293.  They  seized  the  United  States  armory  at  Harper's 
Ferry,  and  the  navy  yard  at  Norfolk.  At  Norfolk  there 
were  twelve  ships  of  war,  two  thousand  cannon,  two 
hundred  and  fifty  thousand  pounds  of  gunpowder,  and 
great  quantities  of  shot  and  shell. 

294.  After  the  seizure  of  Alexandria,  Ellsworth,  seeing 
the  Confederate  flag  still  flying  from  the  roof  of  a  hotel, 
went  up  and  tore  it  down.  As  he  descended,  he  was  shot, 
at  the  foot  of  the  stairs,  by  the  landlord,  Jackson,  who,  in 
turn,  fell  at  the  hands  of  private  Brownell. 

295.  July  2ist,  1 86 1,  in  Northern  Virginia.  Gen.  Mc- 
Dowell made  the  attack,  and  was  defeated,  after  a  severe 
engagement. 

296.  At  first  they  were  much  disappointed  and  dis- 
couraged; then  came  a  renewed  determination.  Congress 
voted  $500,000,000  and  five  hundred  thousand  men,  and 
Gen.  McClellan  was  appointed  to  the  command  of  the 
Army  of  the  Potomac. 

297.  A  party  of  2,000  Federals  crossed  the  Potomac 
at  Ball's  Blufl".  They  were  attacked  and  forced  down 
the  slippery,  clayey  bluff,  fifty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty 
feet  high,  to  the  river  below,  where,  in  trying  to  escape, 
many  were  drowned,  some  were  shot,  and  scarcely  half 
their  number  reached  the  other  bank. 

298.  Col.  Baker,  United  States  Senator  from   Oregon. 

299.  The  state  refused  to  pass  an  ordinance  of  seces- 


54  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

sion,  yet  an  effort  was  made  to  preserve  an  armed  neutral- 
ity. Capt.  Lyon  foiled  this  attempt.  Gen.  Sigel  was  de- 
feated in  an  engagement  at  Carthage.  Gen.  Lyon  now 
took  command,  and  was  compelled  to  fight  superior  forces 
or  abandon  that  part  of  the  state.     He  chose   the   former. 

300.  At  Wilson  Creek,  Aug.  loth,  while  gallantly  lead- 
ing a  bayonet  charge. 

301.  He  issued  a  proclamation  offering  to  commission 
privateers.  Lincoln  declared  a  blockade  of  the  Southern 
ports. 

302.  One  on  the  Northern  coast,  and  forty-two  in  the 
United  States  Navy.  At  the  close  of  the  year  there  were 
two  hundred  and  sixty-four. 

303.  They  acknowledged  them  as  belligerents,  thus 
placing  them  on  the  same  footing  with  the  United  States. 

304.  Southern  commissioners  sent  to  England  and 
France  to  plead  the  cause  of  the  Confederacy. 

305.  They  were  taken  from  the  British  steamer  Trent, 
by  Capt.  Wilks,  and  brought  back  to  the  United  States. 
This  produced  much  excitement  in  England.  The  United 
States  Government,  however,  promptly  disavowed  the  act 
and  returned  the  prisoners. 

306.  The  large  vessels  and  stores  at  Harper's  Ferry  and 
Norfolk  were  captured  by  the  Confederates.     They  were 

^  ;  successful  in  the  two  great  battles  of  the  year.  Bull  Run 
and  Wilson's  Creek ;  also  in  the  minor  engagements  at  Big 
Bethel,  Carthage,  Lexington,  BeUnont  and  Ball's  Bluff. 
The  Federals  had  saved  Fort  Pickens  and  Fortress  Monroe. 
The  Forts  at  Hatteras  Inlet  and  Port  Royal  were  captured. 
They  had  gained  the  victories  at  Philippi,  Rich  Mountain, 
Boonsville,  Carrick's  Ford,  Cheat  Mountain  and  Dranes- 
ville.  West  Virginia,  Maryland  and  Missouri  were  saved 
to  the  Union. 

307.  On  the  part  of  the  North  there  were  three  main 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  55 

objects:  the  opening  of  the   Mississippi;  the  blockade  of 
the  Southern  ports ;  and  the  capture  of  Richmond. 

308.  The  Union  forces  numbered  about  500,000;  the 
Confederates  about  350,000.  Gen.  Thomas  won  an  en- 
gagement at  Mill  Springs,  and  Com.  Foote  and  Gen. 
(irant  captured  Forts  Henry  and  Donelson,  in  Northern 
Tennessee. 

309.  On  the  6th  and  7th  of  April.  Gen.  Grant  com- 
manded the  Union  forces,  and  Gen.  Beauregard  the  Con- 
federate. 

310.  Sunday  morning  Johnson  surprised  the  Union 
forces  by  a  desperate  assault.  The  Federals,  having 
no  time  to  form  into  order  of  battle,  fought  where 
they  happened  to  stand,  slowly  yielding,  and  for 
twelve  hours  they  obstinately  disputed  every  inch  of  the 
way.  At  last,  pushed  to  the  very  brink  of  the  river  (Cum- 
berland), Grant  massed  his  artillery,  and  gathered  around 
it  the  fragments  of  his  regiments  for  the  final  stand.  By 
the  aid  of  the  gunboats  below,  and  Buel's  reinforcements, 
the  tide  of  battle  was  stayed,  and  the  Confederates  fell 
back.  They  possessed,  however,  the  Union  camps,  three 
thousand  prisoners,  thirty  flags,  and  immense  stores;  but 
they  had  lost  their  commander,  Gen.  Johnson.  The  next 
morning  the  Confederates  were  driven  from  the  field. 

311.  In  the  Mississippi  River,  between  Kentucky  and 
Missouri.  It  was  taken  by  Com.  Foote  and  Gen.  Pope, 
April  7th. 

312.  Dec.  31st.  Gen.  Bragg,  with  60,000  troops,  at- 
tacked the  Union  forces  under  Gen.  Rosecrans,  and  were 
repulsed.  Jan.  2d,  the  battle  was  renewed,  but  Bragg,  be- 
ing unsuccessful,  retreated.  This  was  one  of  the  bloodiest 
contests  of  the  war.  The  loss  was  one-fourth  of  the  num- 
ber engaged. 

313.  The  Confederates  gave  up  the  attempt  to  recover 
Kentucky. 


;: 


56  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

314.  Grant  was  to  move  along  the  Mississippi  Central 
Railroad,  while  Sherman  was  to  descend  the  river  from 
Memphis,  with  the  gunboats  under  Porter.  The  plan  was 
spoiled  by  Van  Dorn's  cavalry  dash,  which  destroyed 
Grant's  depot  of  supplies  at  Holly  Springs.  Sherman,  ig- 
norant of  what  had  happened,  pushed  on  and  made  an  at- 
tack at  Chickasaw  Bayou,  north  of  Vicksburg.  After  suf- 
fering a  bloody  repulse,  and  hearing  of  Grant's  misfortune, 
he  fell  back. 

315.  Gen.  Curtis  having  command,  attacked  Gen. 
Price  and  drove  him  out  of  the  state  into  Arkansas.  Van 
Dorn  now  taking  command,  a  desperate  battle  was  fought 
at  Pea  Ridge,  March  7th  and  8th,  in  which  Van  Dorn  was 
totally  defeated. 

316.  The  attempt  was  made  with  a  fleet  of  forty-four 
vessels,  under  Com.  Farragut,  and  8,000  troops  under  Gen. 
Butler.  Mortar-boats  for  six  days  stormed  the  outer  de- 
fences, but  with  little  effect.  Farragut  then  boldly  resolved 
to  carry  the  fleet  past  the  defences  to  New  Orleans.  At 
three  o'clock  in  the  morning,  April  24th,  they  advanced, 
running  a  fearful  gauntlet  of  shot  and  shell,  and  flames  of 
fire  rafts.  They  now  encountered  the  Confederate  fleet  of 
thirty  armed  steamers.  Twelve  of  the  Confederate  flotilla 
were  destroyed.  New  Orleans  now  became  an  easy  prey, 
and  soon  surrendered. 

317.  He  ascended  the  river,  took  possession  of  Baton 
Rouge  and  Natchez,  and,  running  the  batteries  at  Vicks- 
burg, joined  the  Union  fleet  above. 

318.  It  gave  control  to  the  outer  defences  of  Nor- 
folk ;  it  opened  two  sounds,  eight  rivers,  four  canals  and 
two  railroads.  It  was  an  excellent  rendezvous  for  ships, 
and  exposed  a  large  country  to  attack. 

319.  The  Cumberland  and  Congress,  March  8th. 

320.  The  morning  after  the  ravages  of  the  Merrimac, 
the  Monitor  made  her  appearance  and  commenced  the  at^ 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  57 

tack.  The  Merrimac,  confident  of  success,  poured  in  a 
broadside,  but  the  balls  glanced  harmlessly  off  the  Moni- 
tor's turret,  or  broke  and  fell  to  pieces  on  the  deck.  The 
battle  now  opened ;  they  fought  side  by  side,  iron  rasping 
on  iron.  Five  times  the  Merrimac  strove  to  crush  her  an- 
tagonist by  running  her  huge  iron  beak  against  the  Mon- 
itor's side.  At  each  dash  her  prow  would  raise  above  the 
water,  and  at  the  same  instant  heavy  volleys  from  the  Mon- 
itor would  crash  against  the  exposed  parts.  In  this  manner 
the  Merrimac  received  severe  injuries,  gave  up  the  contest 
and  steamed  back  to  Norfork. 

321.  She  could  have  entered  any  port  of  the  United 
States,  destroyed  cities,  opened  the  blockade,  and,  un- 
doubtedly, would  have  secured  the  acknowledgement  of  the 
Confederacy  by  European  nations.  On  this  battle  hinged 
the  fate  of  the  war. 

322.  It  was  regarded  as  the  most  formidable  naval 
power  in  the  world. 

323.  Just  before  the  capture  of  Norfolk  she  was  sunk 
by  the  Confederacy.  The  Monitor  sunk,  in  a  storm,  off 
Cape  Hatteras. 

WAR    IN   THE    EAST. 

324.  Richmond. 

325.  Gen.  McClellan. 

326.  Gen.  Magruder,  with  only  about  5,000  men,  held 
such  strong  defences  along  a  line  of  thirteen  miles,  that 
Gen.  McClellan  was  brought  to  a  stop.  Heavy  guns  were 
ordered  from  Washington,  but  as  the  siege  began  Magruder 
quietly  withdrew,  having  delayed  the  Union  army  a  month. 

327.  May  5  th.  Gen.  Hooker  with  his  division  main- 
tained the  contest  for  nine  hours,  then  being  reinforced,  he 
carried  the  works,  and  the  pursuit  was  continued  to  within 
seven  miles  of  Richmond. 

328.  McDowell,  with   30,000   men,  was   to   meet  him 


58  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

near  Hanover  Court  House,  and  then  commence  the  siege 
of  Richmond;  but  Gen.  Johnston,  suspecting  this  move- 
ment, ordered  Gen.  Jackson  to  move  up  the  Shenandoah 
Valley  and  threaten  Washington. 

329.  After  being  reinforced  by  Gen.  Ewell's  division  of 
10,000  men,  he  hurried  down  the  valley  and  drove  Banks 
across  the  Potomac.  The  excitement  in  Washington  was 
intense.  The  President  took  military  possession  of  all 
the  railroads;  called  upon  the  Governors  of  Northern 
states  to  send  militia  to  the  defense  of  the  capital ;  ordered 
Fremont  at  Franklin,  Banks  at  Harper's  Ferry,  and  Mc- 
Dowell at  Fredericksburg,  to  capture  Jackson.  He  now 
commenced  his  retreat,  burning  bridges  as  he  passed,  and 
escaped. 

330.  With  15,000  men,  Jackson  had  occupied  the  at- 
tention of  three  Major  Generals  and  60,000  men,  prevented 
McDowell's  junction  with  McClellan,  and  saved  Richmond. 

331.  He  had  pushed  his  left  wing  across  the  Chicka- 
hominy,  and  before  he  could  unite  his  army,  a  terrible 
storm  flooded  the  swamps,  and  the  Chickahominy  Creek 
became  a  broad  river.  Johnston,  seeing  the  exposed  wing, 
commenced  the  attack.  Johnston  was  severely  wounded. 
The  next  day  the  Confederates  were  repulsed  in  great  dis- 
order. 

'  ^  332-     Jackson  making  his   appearance   near   Hanover 

Court  House,  McClellan  resolved  to  "change  his  base"  of 
supplies  to  the  James  River.  A  series  of  battles,  lasting 
seven  days,  now  occurred.  The  most  important  were  those 
.  of  Mechanicsville,  Gaines'  Mill,  Savage's  Station,  Frazier's 
Farm,  and  Malvern  Hill.  In  this  famous  retreat  the  army 
fought  by  day  to  give  time  for  the  baggage  trains,  and  fell 
back  at  night  to  a  new  position.  At  Malvern  Hill  Lee 
received  so  bloody  a  check  that  he  pressed  no  farther. 
333'     Seventeen  miles. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  59 

334.  The  North  was  as  much  discouraged  as  the  South 
was  elated.     Lincoln  called  for  300,000  troops. 

335.  To  transfer  his  army  to  Acquia  Creek,  and  put  it 
under  the  command  of  Gen.  Pope. 

^^6.  After  some  manoeuvering,  Pope  was  compelled  to 
fight  the  entire  Confederate  army  on  the  old  battle-field  of 
Bull  Run.  The  shattered  remains  of  the  Army  of  the  Po- 
tomac retreated  and  took  refuge  within  the  fortifications  at 
Washmgton. 

337.  The  Union  army  lost  30,000  men  and  vast  sup- 
plies. The  Capitol  was  in  great  danger ;  a  victorious  army 
without  and  only  broken  battalions  within. 

338.  He  crossed  the  Potomac  and  entered  Marylana. 

339.  McClellan. 

340.  South  Mountain  and  the  terrible  battle  of  Antie- 
tam,  September  17th. 

341.  He  retreated  across  the  Potomac. 

342.  It  was  a  Union  victory.  The  North  was  saved 
from  invasion,  and  Washington  from  any  danger  of  attack. 

343.  For  the  slowness  of  his  movements  in  pursuing 
the  retreating  army.     Gen.  Burnside  took  command. 

344.  Dec.  13th.  The  Union  forces  were  defeated,  with 
a  loss  of  12,000  men. 

345.  They  had  gained  the  victories  of  Jackson  in  the 
Shenandoah  Valley;  of  Lee  in  the  Peninsular  campaign; 
those  against  Pope;  Bragg' s  great  raid  in  Kentucky;  the 
battles  of  Cedar  Mountain,  Chickasaw  Blufi",  and  Fred- 
ericksburg. 

346.  They  had  taken  Forts  Henry,  Donelson,  Pulaski, 
Macon,  Jackson,  St.  Phillip,  and  Island  No.  10.  They  had 
opened  the  Mississippi  to  Vicksburg;  taken  New  Orleans, 
Roanoke  Island,  Newbern,  Yorktown,  Norfork,  and  Mem- 
phis. They  had  also  won  the  battles  of  Pea  Ridge,  WiL 
liamsburg,  Fair  Oaks,  South  Mountain,  Antietam,  luka, 
Corinth,  and  Murfreesboro,  and  silenced  the  Merrimac. 


60  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

347.  In  Minnesota,  Iowa,  and  Dakotah;  over  seven 
hundred  whites  were  slain,  and  many  thousands  driven  from 
their  homes.  Col.  Sibley  routed  them  and  took  five  hun- 
dred prisoners.  Thirty-nine  were  hung  on  one  scaffold,  at 
Mankato,  Minnesota,  Dec.  26t^\ 

348.  It  was  about  the  same  as  the  preceding  year.  The 
Union  force  was  about  700,000;  the  Confederate,  about 
350,000. 

349.  January  ist,  1863. 

350.  After  several  weeks  of  fruitless  efforts  upon  the 
north,  Grant  marched  down  the  west  side  of  the  river,  and 
crossed  below  the  city.  From  May  ist  to  the  i8th,  he  de- 
feated the  Confederates  at  Fort  Gibson,  Jackson,  Cham- 
pion Hills,  and  Big  Black  River,  and  within  seventeen  days 
after  he  landed,  Pemberton's  army  was  shut  up  within  the 
entrenchments  of  Vicksburg.  After  three  desperate  as- 
saults, the  Union  troops  threw  up  entrenchments  and  com- 
menced undermining  the  city.  The  siege  lasted  forty- 
seven  days. 

351.  On  the  4th  of  July. 

352.  The  Confederates  lost  the  cities  of  Vicksburg  and 
Jackson;  37,000  prisoners;  10,000  killed  and  wounded, 
and  mimense  stores.  On  the  fall  of  Vicksburg,  Port  Hud- 
son surrendered  to  Banks.  The  Mississippi  was  now  open 
to  the  Gulf,  and  one  great  object  of  the  North  accomplished. 

353.  January  2d.  Gen.  Rosecrans  defeated  the  Con- 
federates under  Gen.  Bragg. 

354.  But  little  occurred  until  June,  when  Rosecrans, 
with  60,000  men,  marched  against  Bragg  and  compelled 
him  to  evacuate  Chattanooga.  Sept.  Sth,  Sept.  19th  and 
2oth,  was  fought  the  battle  of  Chickamauga.  The  Union 
army  was  defeated  and  withdrew  to  Chattanooga,  while 
Bragg  occupied  the  heights  commanding  the  city,  and 
threatened  them  with  starvation. 

355.  Grant  was  now  appointed  to  succeed  Rosecrans, 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  61 

and  the  relief  was  obtained  by  Hooker  coming  with  two 
corps  from  the  Army  of  the  Potomac,  and  Sherman,  who 
hastened  by  forced  marches  from  luka,  200  miles  away. 

356.  He  was  in  Virginia.  They  came  by  rail,  23,000 
strong,  in  seven  days,  a  distance  of  1,200  miles. 

357.  Gen.  Hooker,  January  26th. 

358.  May  2d  and  3d.  The  Union  army  was  defeated 
with  great  loss. 

359.  "Stonewall"  Jackson.  While  returning  from  a 
reconnoissance  at  the  front,  he  was  fired  upon  by  his  own 
men,  who  mistook  his  escort  for  Federal  cavalry. 

360.  General  Meade. 

361.  With  the  flower  of  the  Confederate  army  he 
crossed  the  Potomac,  passed  through  Maryland,  entered 
Pennsylvania,  and  proceeded  within  four  miles  of  Harris- 
burg. 

362.  By  the  battle  of  Gettysburg,  which  was  fought  the 
I  St,  2d  and  3d  of  July.  Gen.  Meade  commanded  the 
Union  forces.  Gen.  Lee  retreating  to  Virginia. 

$6;^.  The  Union  loss  was  23,000;  the  Confederate, 
36,000. 

364.  These  losses  and  defeats  having  occurred  at  the 
same  time,  caused  the  turning-point  of  the  war,  and  the 
Confederacy  began  to  wane. 

365.  Having  confidence  in  the  ability  o^  the  iron-clads 
to  resist  cannon  balls,  he  attempted  to  run  the  fortifications 
and  force  his  way  up  to  the  city.  The  attempt  was  a  dis- 
astrous failure. 

366.  They  had  gained  the  great  battles  of  Chickamauga 
and  Chancellorville.  The  Union  cause  in  Texas  was 
depressed.  Galveston  was  seized,  and  they  successfully 
resisted  every  attack  on  Charleston. 

367.  They  had  taken  Vicksburg  and  Port  Hudson,  and 
won  the  battles  of  Chattanooga  and  Gettysburg.  Arkan- 
sas, East  Tennessee,  large  portions  of  Louisiana,  Missis* 


62  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

sippi,  and  some  portions  of  Texas  were  held  by   Union 
troops. 

368.  March  3d,  1SC4. 

369.  It  lay  in  the  armies  of  Lee  in  Virginia,  and  Jo- 
seph E.  Johnston  m  Georgia. 

370.  Grant  was  to  march  against  Lee,  and  Sherman  to 
attack  Johnston  and  sweep  through  to  the  coast. 

371.  He  started  with  a  force  of  100,000  men.  For 
one  hundred  miles  there  was  continuous  skirmishing. 
Sherman  would  drive  Johnson  into  a  stronghold,  and  then 
with  consummate  skill  would  outflank  him,  when  Johnston 
with  equal  skill  would  retreat  to  a  new  post  and  prepare 
to  meet  his  opponent  again.  Several  bloody  battles  were 
fought,  and  finally  Johnston  retired,  July  10th,  to  the  en- 
trenchments of  Atlanta.     Hood  was  now  put  in  command. 

372.  September  2d,  1864. 

373.  There  had  been  ten  pitched  battles,  and  scores  of 
lesser  engagements.  It  cost  the  Union  army  30,000  men, 
and  the  Confederacy  about  40,000. 

374.  He  turned  to  invade  Tennessee,  with  the  expecta- 
tion that  Sherman  would  follow  him,  and  Georgia  be  saved 
from  invasion. 

375.  He  marched  against  Gens.  Thomas  and  Schofield, 
at  Nashville.  After  severe  fighting,' Thomas  withdrew  from 
^he  fortifications  and  remained  two  weeks.  He  then  sud- 
denly burst  forth  and  drove  the  Confederate  forces  out  of 
their  entrenchments  into  headlong  flight.  The  army  was 
completely  demoralized,  and,  for  further  use,  destroyed. 

376.  Hood  having  moved  from  his  path,  there  was  but 
little  to  impede  his  progress.  With  60,000  troops,  in  five 
weeks  he  had  marched  three  hundred  miles,  and  captured 
Savannah. 

377.  A  fertile  region  sixty  miles  wide  and  three  hun- 
dred miles  long,  was  devastated,  and  three  hundred  miles 
of  railroad  were  destroyed. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  63 

378.  The  battles  of  the  Wilderness  and  Spottsylvania. 

379.  After  crossing  the  Rapidan,  the  Union  army 
plunged  into  the  Wilderness,  where  they  were  attacked, 
May  5th,  by  the  Confederate  army.  There  was  none  of 
the  pomp  or  glory  of  war,  only  its  horrid  butchery.  The 
ranks  dashed  into  the  woods,  and  in  the  gloomy  shad- 
ows, dense  with  smoke,  this  strangest  of  battles,  which  no 
eye  could  follow,  was  fought.  The  third  day,  both  armies, 
worn  out  by  this  desperate  struggle,  remained  in  their  en- 
trenchments.    Grant  lost  20,000  men;  Lee,  10,000. 

380.  He  pushed  his  army  by  the  Confederate  right  flank 
towards  Spottsylvania  Court  House,  where,  for  live  days, 
May  8  to  12,  terrible  fighting  occurred.  Ten  thousand  men 
fell  on  each  side. 

381.  Grant  now  concluded  to  try  the  flank  movement 
again,  and  pushed  forward  to  Cold  Harbor,  a  short  distance 
from  Richmond.  Lee  hastened  by  a  shorter  route,  and 
arrived  in  time  to  prepare  for  the  defence.  Early  on  the 
morning  of  June  4th,  the  Union  army  made  an  assault  on 
Cold  Har1)or.  Twenty  minutes  after  the  first  shot  was 
fired,  fully  ten  thousand  Union  men  were  stretched  writhing 
on  the  sod.  or  still  in  death,  while  the  enemy's  loss  was 
little  over  one  thousand. 

382.  The  Confederate  works  could  not  be  carried,  so 
Grant  threw  up  entrenchments,  and  prepared  for  a  siege  of 
Richmond. 

T,S;^.  The  Union  army  lost  70,000,  and  the  Confederates 
40,000. 

384.  The  Mine  Explosion  and  the  capture  of  the  Wel- 
don  Railroad. 

385.  A  mine  was  dug  beneath  a  strong  Confederate 
fort  in  front  of  Petersburg,  and  was  fired  with  a  blast  of 
8,000  pounds  of  powder.  The  fort  and  garrison  were  de- 
stroyed. At  the  same  time  the  Union  artillery  opened 
along  the  line,  and  an  assaulting   column  rushed  forward, 


f>4  THE    QUESTION    POOK. 

but  it  Stopped  in  the  crater  produced  by  the  explosioru 
The  Confederates,  rallying,  turned  their  artillery  toward 
the  seething  mass  within  the  demolished  fort,  and  about 
four  thousand  were  lost  before  they  could  relreat  to  the 
Union  Hues. 

$S6.  He  entered  Maryland,  threatened  Washington 
and  Baltimore,  defeated  Wallace,  and  then  withdrew  to 
Virginia.  In  the  same  month,  July,  he  crossed  into  Penn- 
sylvania, his  troops  setting  fire  to  Chambersburgh ;  after 
which  he  withdrew. 

387.  A  vast  amount  of  stores,  five  thousand  horses, 
and  a  withdrawal  of  part  of  Grant's  army  from  before 
Petersburg. 

388.  In  September  he  defeated  Early  at  Winchester 
and  Fisher's  Hill,  and  in  a  week  destroyed  half  of  his  army 
and  put  the  rest  to  flight.  Early  returned  with  reinforce- 
ments, and,  under  covei  of  a  dense  fog,  surprised  Sheri- 
dan's army  at  Cedar  Creek,  October  19th,  and  drove  it  in 
confusion.  At  this  critical  moment  Sheridan  arrived  from 
Winchester,  checked  the  retreating  columns,  turned  and 
won  the  battle. 

389.  This  was  the  /nost  brilliant  campaign  of  the  war. 
In  one  month  he  had  virtually  destroyed  Early's  Army, 
Sheridan's  loss  was  1 7,000. 

390.  Gen.  Banks  was  sent  up  the  Red  River  to  destroy 
the  Confederate  authority  in  that  region  and  Texas.  This 
campaign  was  a  Confederate  triumph.  Banks  lost  5,000 
men,  18  gims,  and  large  supplies. 

391.  April  1 2th.  The  Confederates  were  maddened  by 
the  sight  of  negro  troops  opposing  them,  and  a  terrible 
massacre  followed. 

392.  The  capture  of  Mobile  Harbor,  Aug.  5th,  and 
closing  it  against  blockade  runners.  The  city  of  Mobile 
was  not  captured  until  April  12th,  1865. 

393.  This  fort  defended  the  harbor  of  Wilmington,  N. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  65 

C.  The  expedition  consisted  of  seventy  vessels,  under 
Com.  Porter,  and  a  land  force  under  Gen.  Butler.  After 
a  fierce  bombardment,  Dec.  24th  and  25th,  Butler  decided 
that  the  fort  could  not  be  taken  by  assault,  and  the  army 
returned  to  Fortress  Monroe.  Com.  Porter  asked  for  an- 
other trial.  The  same  troops  were  sent  back  under  Gen. 
Terry.  By  a  series  of  trenches  a  column  of  troops  worked 
themselves  up  within  two  hundred  yards  of  the  fortifica- 
tions. At  the  word  they  rushed  forward  and  burst  into  the 
fort.  The  hand-to-hand  conflict  within  lasted  for  hours. 
Late  at  night  the  garrison  surrendered,  Jan.  15th,  1865. 

394.  She  was  a  British  steamer,  built  in  England,  but 
officered  and  commissioned  by  the  Confederate  govern- 
ment. Her  object  was  to  prey  upon  Union  commerce. 
She  captured  over  sixty  vessels.  Her  commander  was 
Capt.  Semmes. 

395.  The  engagement  was  off  the  coast  of  France,  in 
the  English  Channe/,  June  15th,  1864.  The  Alabama  was 
sunk.  Capt.  Winslow,  commander  of  the  Kearsarge,  res- 
cued a  part  of  the  sinking  crew.  The  English  yacht, 
Deerhound,  picked  up  the  remainder  and  steamed  off  to  the 
British  coast.     Capt.  Semmes  was  among  the  number. 

396.  They  had  gained  the  battles  of  Sabin  Cross  Roads, 
Wilderness,  Bermuda  Hundreds,  Spottsylvania,  New  Mar- 
ket, and  Cold  Harbor.  They  had  resisted  the  Red  River 
and  Florida  expeditions;  two  attacks  upon  Petersburg,  and 
one  against  Fort  Fisher. 

397.  They  had  gained  the  battles  of  Atlanta  and  those 
preceding  it — Dalton,  Rexaca,  Dallas,  and  Last  and  Kene- 
saw  Mountain — Winchester,  Fisher's  Hill,  Cedar  Creek, 
and  Nashville.  They  had  captured  Fort  de  Russy,  (this 
was  taken  by  Banks  in  his  Red  River  expedition) ;  the 
forts  in  Mobile  Harbor,  and  Fort  McAllister;  Sheridan 
had  annihilated  Early's  army ;  Sherman  had  marched  across 
Georgia   and    taken   Savannah;    Thomas   had   destroyed 


66  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

Hood's   army,    and   the    Confederacy  was    almost   extin- 
guished ;  only  North  and  South  Carolina  were  retained. 

398.  April  3d,  1865. 

399.  Lee  surrendered  to  Gen.  Grant,  near  Lynchburg, 
Va.,  April  9th,  and  Johnston  to  Sherman,  in  North  Caro- 
lina, April  26th. 

400.  He  was  taken  in  disguise  by  a  party  of  Union 
troops,  in  Georgia,  May  loth,  1865,  and  imprisoned  in 
Fortress  Monroe,  but  was  afterward  bailed  out. 

401.  Four  years. 

402.  The  14th  of  April,  1865,  by  J.  Wilkes  Booth,  at 
Ford's  Theater. 

403.  After  shooting  the  president  he  sprang  upon  the 
stage.  His  spur  caught  in  the  American  flag,  and,  throwing 
him  heavily,  broke  his  leg.  He  escaped,  mounted  his 
horse  and  fled  into  Maryland,  where  he  was  overtaken  in 
abarn  and  shot. 

404.  The  Union  armies  probably  lost  in  battle,  or  by 
its  effects,  300,000  men,  and  200,000  were  crippled  for 
life.  The  Confederate  loss  is  not  known,  but,  undoubted- 
ly, as  heavy.  The  Union  debt  Jan.  ist,  1866,  was  nearly 
$2,750,000,000.  The  daily  expenses  at  one  time  reached 
the  sum  of  $2,500,000. 

405.  By  an  act  of  Congress,  ratified  by  two-thirds  of 
the  states.     This  act  is  the  thirteenth  amendment. 

406.  The  exercise  of  the  veto  power. 

407.  The  Freedman's  Bureau,  the  Civil  Rights,  and  the 
Tenure-of-office  bills. 

408.  The  first  provides  for  the  establishment  of  a  de- 
partment for  the  care  and  protection  of  the  freedmen. 
The  Civil  Rights  bill  guarantees  to  the  negroes  the  rights 
of  citizenship.  The  Tenure-of-office  bill  makes  it  neces- 
sary that  the  consent  of  the  Senate  shall  be  obtained  for 
the  removal,  by  the  president,  of  any  person  from  a  civil 
oflSce. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  67 

409.  The  charge  was  misdemeanors,  contempt  of  the 
Senate  for  violation  of  the  Tenure-of-office  bill,  by  the  at- 
tempt to  remove  Edwin  M.  Stanton,  Secretary  of  War. 
He  was  acquitted,  the  two-thirds  majority,  necessary  for 
conviction,  lacking  one  vote. 

410.  It  guarantees  equal  civil  rights  to  all,  and  bases 
representation  in  each  of  the  states  on  the  number  of  vot- 
ers.    It  was  adopted  July  28th,  1868. 

411.  The  recall  of  the  French  from  Mexico,  under 
Maximilian.  This  invasion  of  Mexico  was  in  opposition  to 
the  "Monroe  Doctrine". 

412.  June,  1866. 

413.  In  1869. 

414.  March  30th,  1870. 

415.  The  right  of  the  citizens  of  the  United  States  to 
vote  shall  not  be  denied  or  abridged  by  the  United  States 
or  any  state,  on  account  of  race,  color,  or  previous  condi- 
tion of  servitude. 

416.  A  general  amnesty  to  all  connected  with  the  civil 
war. 

417.  The  refusal  of  the  English  government  to  pay  the 
damages  to  American  commerce,  caused  by  the  cruise  of 
the  Alabama.  It  was  settled  by  arbitration,  the  Eng- 
lish government  paying  $15,000,000. 

418. 

Years 
Presidents.  Inaugurated.       In  Office. 

George  Washington 1 789  8 

John  Adams 1 797  4 

Thomas  Jefferson 1801  8 

James  Madison 1809  8 

James  Monroe 181 7  8 

John  Quincy  Adams .1825  4 

Andrew  Jackson 1829  8 

Martin  Van  Buren 1837  4 


68  THE  QUESTION  500K. 

Years 
Presidents.  Inaugurated.        In  Office. 

*William  H.  Harrison 1841  ]/{2 

John  Tyler.    1841  3^M2 

James  K.  Polk 1845  4 

*Zachary  Taylor 1849  i^ 

Millard  Fillmore. .  1850  2^ 

Franklin  Pierce .  . '. 1853       ^         4 

James  Buchanan i8^f  4 

♦Abraham  Lincoln 1861  4^ 

Andrew  Johnson 1865  3^ 

Ulysses  S.  Grant 1869 

419.  John  Adams,  Thomas  Jefferson,  and  James  Mon- 
roe. Adams  and  Jefferson  expired  the  same  day — July 
4th,  1826.     Monroe  died  in  1831. 

420.  John  Adams  and  John  Quincy  Adams.^ 

421.  Henry  Clay. 

422.  Bacon's,  Clayborne's,  Shay's,  Dorr's,  Whisky  In- 
surrection, and  the  Civil  War. 

423- 


STATES. 

Florida 

Virginia 

New  York 

Massachusetts. . . 

New  Jersey 

New  Hampshire. 

Maine 

Connecticut 

Maryland 

Rhode  Island . . . 

Delaware 

Pennsylvania  . . . 
North  Carolina.. 

Wisconsin 

South  Carolina. . 


Where  Settled. 

When. 

St.  Augustine  . 

1565 

Jamestown 

1607 

Albany 

1.614 

Plymouth  .... 

1620 

Bergen 

1620 

Dover 

1623 

York 

1630 

Windsor 

1633 

St.  Mary's 

1634 

Providence. . . . 

i6s6 

Wilmington... 

1638 

Philadelphia  . . 

1643 

Albermarle  . . . 

1650 

Green  Bay .... 

1669 

Port  Royal .... 

1670 

By  Whom. 

Spanish 

English  

Dutch 

English 

Dutch  and  Danes 

English . 

English 

English 

English . . 

Roger  Williams  . 

Swedes 

Swedes 

English 

French 

EnMish  


Admitted 


1845 


1820 


1848 

t 


♦Died  in  office. 


fOriginal  States. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY. 


69 


STATES. 

Where  Settled. 

When 

By  Whom. 

Admitted 

Michigan 

Illinois 

Detroit 

Kaskaskia     . . . 
Arkansas  Post. 

Vincennes 

Bexar 

Iberville 

Mobile 

Biloxi 

Brattleboro  .  . . 

Savannah 

St.  Genevieve.. 
Fort  London . . 
San  Diego   . . . 

Boonsboro 

Marietta 

Astoria  

Dubuque  

St.  Paul 

Omaha 

1670 
1688 
I685 
1690 

1693 
1699 
1702 
1699 
1724 

^nz 
1775 
1757 
1769 
1770 
1788 

i8ii 

1833 
1838 

French 

1837 
1818 

French  

Arkansas 

Indiana 

French.    

1836 
1816 

Texas 

Spanish 

1845 
1812 

Louisiana 

French 

Alabama 

Mississippi 

French  

French  

1819 

1817 

1791 

* 

1821 

Vermont 

English . . 

Georgia 

Missouri 

English 

French  

Tennessee 

California 

English 

Spanish 

1796 
1850 
1792 
.1802 

Kentucky 

Ohio             

Daniel  Boon 

English 

Oregon 

Iowa 

Americans 

Fren'^h 

1859 
1846 
1858 
1867 
1861 

Minnesota 

Nebraska 

Americans 

Americans 

Americans 

Kansas 

West  Virginia. . . 

1863 
1864 

Nevada 

424.  At  the  close  of  the  French  and  Indian  war  France 
yielded  up  all  her  claims  to  territories  on  the  mainland  in 
North  America,  excepting  the  city  of  New  Orleans,  ceding 
all  east  of  the  Mississippi  to  England,  and  all  west  to 
Spain.  This  gave  England  the  entire  country  east  of  the 
Mississippi,  excepting  Florida,  which  was  a  Spanish  posses- 
sion. In  the  treaty  of  peace  which  followed  the  Revolu- 
tionary war,  the  boundaries  of  the  United  States  included 
all  of  the  English  claims  east  of  the  Mississippi  and  north 
to  the  Great  Lakes. 

In  1800,  Spain,  by  a  secret  treaty,  restored  to  France 
the  territory  of  Louisiana,  comprising  her  possessions  east 
of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  and  north  from  Mexico  to  the 
British  claims.  The  northern  boundary  of  the  Louisiana 
territory  was  never  drawn. 

*  Original  State. 


70  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

In  1803  the  United  States  purchased  the  Louisiana  ter- 
ritory of  France  for  $15,000,000. 

In  1804  President  Jefferson  sent  an  exploration  party 
under  Lewis  and  Clark,  to  the  head  waters  of  the  Missouri, 
and  thence  across  to  the  Pacific.  Up  to  this  time  the 
North  Pacific  country  did  not  belong  to  any  nation,  but,  as 
the  United  States  became  interested,  England  became  jeal- 
ous and  claimed  the  same.  The  United  States,  however, 
continued  to  assert  her  rights,  and  a  great  deal  of  cor- 
respondence between  the  two  governments  resulted.  At 
last,  in  18 1 8,  the  United  States  and  England  agreed  to  a 
joint  occupancy  of  the  whole  territory  for  ten  years. 

In  1828  the  treaty  of  joint  occupancy  was  renewed,  to 
terminate  on  either  party's  giving  a  year's  notice.  No  divi- 
sion was  made  until  1846.  It  was  then  agreed  by  a  treaty 
that  the  American  possessions  should  extend  as  far  north 
as  latitude  49^.  From  this  acquisition  was  formed  the 
state  of  Oregon,  and  the  territories  of  Washington,  Idaho 
and  Montana. 

In  18 1 9  Florida  was  purchased  from  Spain  for  $5,- 
000,000. 

In  1845  Texas  became  a  part  of  the  United  States  by 
annexation. 

At  the  close  of  the  Mexican  war,  in  the  treaty  of  Cauda- 
loupe  Hidalgo,  Feb.  2d,  1848,  the  Mexican  government 
ceded  to  the  United  States  California,  Nevada,  Utah,  a 
part  of  Arizona,  and  New  Mexico,  for  which  the  United 
States  paid  $15,000,000  and  assumed  the  debts  of  Mexico 
to  American  citizens,  amounting  to  $3,500,000  more. 

In  1854  the  "Gadsden  Purchase"  gave  to  the  United 
States  the  southwestern  corner  of  New  Mexico  and  that 
part  of  Arizona  south  of  the  Gila  river,  for  which  was  paid 
$10,000,000. 

In  1867  Alaska  was  purchased  of  Russia  for  $7,200,000 
in  gold. 


UNITED    STATES    HISTORY.  71 

From  the  claims  ceded  to  the  United  States,  by  Great 
Britain,  in  the  Paris  treaty.  Congress  formed  two  great  ter- 
ritories: the  Northwestern  and  the  Southwestern  terri- 
tories. From  the  Northwestern,  the  states  of  Ohio,  In- 
diana, Illinois,  Michigan,  and  Wisconsin  have  been  formed ; 
from  the  Southwestern,  Kentucky,  Tennessee,  Mississippi, 
and  Alabama. 

From  the  "Louisiana  Purchase"  have  been  formed  the 
states  of  Louisiana,  Missouri,  Arkansas,  Iowa,  Minnesota, 
Nebraska,  and  Kansas,  also  Dakota  and  Indian  territories. 

The  Mexican  treaty  gave  California,  Nevada,  Utah, 
Colorado,  a  part  of  Arizona  and  New  Mexico.  Texas 
came  by  annexation.  Florida  by  purchase.  Maine,  until 
1820,  was  a  part  of  Massachusetts.  Vermont,  until  1791, 
was  disputed  territory  between  New  Hampshire  and  New 
York.  As  the  northern  and  northwestern  boundary  of  the 
"Louisiana  Purchase"  was  never  formed,  the  territory  of 
Wyoming  might  be  considered  a  part  of  that  purchase,  or 
a  part  of  the  claims  made  by  the  Clark  and  Louis  expedi- 
tion. 

To  fully  understand  the  acquisitions  of  territory  to  the 
United  States,  the  student  should  refer  to  a  geographical 
map  and  there  trace  the  given  lines  in  accordance  with 
the  above. 


QU  ESTI  ON  S 


ON 


GEOGRAPHY 


1.  From  what  did  the  term  geogj^afihy  derive  its  name  ? 

2.  How  many  kinds  of  geography  ? 

3.  Define  mathematical  geography. 

4.  Define  physical  geography. 

5.  Define  political  geography.  , 
*^  6.     What  is  the  shape  of  the  earth  ? 

7.  What  is  supposed  to  be  the  reason  why  the  earth  is 
flattened  at  the  poles  ? 

8.  How  much  greater  is  the  diameter  at  the  equator 
than  the  diameter  at  the  poles  ? 

9.  What  is  the  axis  of  the  earth  ?  What  are  its  poles  ? 
f^^o.  How  many  revolutions  has  the  earth  ?  Define 
each. 

II.     What  causes  day  and  night  ? 
c.'^2.     What  causes  the  seasons  ? 
t^^.     What   is  the  earth's  orbit  ?     Its  estimated  length  ? 

14.  How  great  is  the  earth's  annual  motion  ? 

15.  Why  is  it  cold  in  winter  and  warm  in  summer  ? 

16.  What  are  zones?  How  many?  Their  width? 
Where  situated  »* 

1^17.     What  is  the  inclination  of  the   earth's  axis  to  the 
plane  of  its  orbit  ? 

18.     Why  are  the  zones  given  their  respective  widths  ? 


74  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

19.  What  would  be  the  climate,  supposing  the  earth's 
axis  to  be  horizontal  to  the  plane  of  its  orbit  ? 

20.  Why  would  the  inclination  of  the  earth  affect  the 
climate  ? 

21.  Supposing  the  earth's  inclination  to  be  30°,  or  any 
other  degree,  how  would  we  ascertain  the  width  of  the 
several  zones  ? 

22.  What  is  a  compass  ?    Its  cardinal  points  ? 

23.  Into  how  many  circles  is  the  earth  divided  ?  What 
are  they  ? 

24.  How  is  every  circle  divided  ? 

25.  What  is  a  map  ? 

26.  What  are  the  lines,  or  circles,  on  a  map  ? 

27.  \Vhat  is  the  equator  ? 

28.  Through  what  countries  does  the  equator  pass  ? 
*^29.     What  is  a  meridian  circle  ?     A  meridian  ? 
1/30.     What  is  longitude  ? 

31.  PVom  what  meridians  do  we  reckon  longitude  ? 

32.  How  many  degrees  west  of  Greenwich  is  Wash- 
ington ? 

i/*  ^;^.     What   is  the  greatest  longitude  a  place  can  have  ? 
^34.     Can  a  place  have  no  longitude? 

35.     Reckoning  from  the  meridian  at  Washington,  what 
is  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  Quito  ? 
•^6.     What  is  the  length  of  a  degree  of  longitude. 

37.  Why  does  the  length  of  a  degree  of  longitude  de- 
crease after  leaving  the  equator  ? 

38.  Through  what  states  does  the  meridian  at  Washing- 
ton pass  ? 

39.  What  countries  in  Asia  are  crossed  by  the  same 
meridian  circle  ? 

40.  What  large  city  in  Asia  is  nearly  opposite  Philadel- 
phia ? 

41.  What  is  latitude  ?     How  many  kinds  ? 
1^2.     What  is  the  highest  degree  of  latitude? 


GEOGRAPHY.  75 

43.  What  is  the  length  of  a  degree  of  latitude  ? 

44.  Through  what  countries  and  bodies  of  water  does 
the  Tropic  of  Cancer  pass  ? 

45.  The  tropic  of  Capricorn  ? 

46.  The  Arctic  Circle  ? 

47.  The  Antarctic  Circle  ? 

48.  Why  is  it  colder  at  the  Antarctic   Circle,  than  at 
the  Arctic  ? 

49.  What  part  of  North  America  is  in  the  same  lati- 
tude as  England  and  Ireland  ? 

50.  Why  does  the  climate  of  Labrador    differ  so  ma- 
terially from  that  of  England  ? 

51.  Why  are  the  winters  more  mild  at   Puget  Sound, 
than  in  the  region  of  Lake  Superior  ? 

^%2.     Describe  the  Gulf  Stream. 
4-^53.     Where  and  what  is  the  Sargasso  Sea  ? 
54-     What  is  the  meaning  of  sargasso  ? 

55.  What  are  the  natural  divisions  of  land  ?     Describe 
each. 

56.  What  are  the  natural  divisions  of  water  ?    Describe 
each. 

57.  How  are  straits  divided  ? 

58.  What  is  the  size  of  the   Eastern   Continent  com- 
pared with  the  Western  ? 

59.  What  is  the  area  of  the  entire  surface  of  the  glol 

60.  Which  of  the  grand  divisions  is  the  largest  ?  Sii  vil- 
est ?     Most  populous  ?     Richest  in  fertiHty  ? 

61.  What  country  contains  the  greatest  number  o    > 
habitants  in  proportion  to  its  area  ? 

62.  How  does  England  compare  in  size  with  the  Uniteu 
States. 

63.  Which  is  larger,  Europe  or  the  United  States  ? 

64.  How  does  Europe  compare  in  size  and  population 
to  Asia  ? 

65.  What  is  a  frith,  or  estuary  ? 


76  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

66.  What  is  an  archipelago  ? 

1/67.  What  is  a  delta  ? 

6S.  Why  is  this  tract  of  land  called  a  de/^a? 

69.  What  is  a  road,  or  roadstead  ? 

70.  What  is  an  oasis  ? 

71.  What  is  a  valley,  or  basin  of  a  river  ? 

72.  What  river  of  the  world  has  the  greatest  basin  ? 
What  is  the  extent  of  this  basin  ? 

73.  What  is  the  extent  of  the  basin  of  the  Mississippi  ? 

74.  How  wide  is  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon  ? 

75.  Into  how  many  classes  is  mankind  divided,  in  re- 
gard to  social  condition  ? 

76.  How  many  kinds  of  government  ? 

77.  What  is  a  monarchy  ? 

78.  What  is  an  aristocracy  ? 

79.  What  is  a  democracy  ? 

80.  What  are  the  political  divisions  of  the  earth  ? 

81.  What  is  an  empire,  kingdom,  republic,  state,  county? 
1^82.  What  is  the  government  of  Great  Britain  ? 

83.  What  countries  are  absolute  monarchies  ? 

C4.  How  many  distinct  races  of  men  ? 

85.  How  many  prevailing  systems  of  religion  ? 

86.  How  many  classes  of  Christians  ? 
"7.  What  is  the  Mohammedan  religion  ? 

8.     What  is  the  principal  difference  between  the  Chns- 
#    .1  and  Jewish  religions  ? 

89.  Who  are  Pagans  ? 

90.  What  proportion  of  the  inhabitants  embrace  these 
.orms  of  religion  ? 

91.  Name  and  give  the  length  of  the  longest  four  riv- 
ers in  the  world. 

92.  Name  and  give  the  length  of  the  longest  four  rivers 
of  North  America. 

93.  What  would  be  the  length  of  the  St.  Lawrence 


GEOGRAPHY.  77 

through  the   chain  of  lakes  to  the  head  of  the  St.  Louis 
river  ? 

94.  Name  and  give  the  length  of  the  longest  four  rivers 
of  South  America. 

95.  Of  Europe. 

96.  Of  Asia. 

97.  Of  Africa. 

98.  What  is  noticeable  of  the  Amazon  river  ? 

99.  Of  the  Mississippi  ? 

100.  Of  the  Missouri  ? 
loi.      Of  the  Nile  ? 

102.  Describe  the  Rio  de  la  Plata. 

103.  Describe  Egypt. 

104.  By  what  two  great  commercial  routes  can  we  travel 
around  the  world,  starting  from  New  York  ? 

105.  What  country  in  the   world  has   the  longest  and 
most  numerous  lines  of  railroads  ? 

106.  Between  what  parallels  does  the  United  States  lie  ? 

107.  What   is    the   longitude    of  San    Francisco,   and 
about  how  far  is  it  from  New  York  City  ? 

108.  What    State    is    the    geographical   center  of  the 
United  States  ? 

109.  What  country  produces  the  most  cotton  ?  Sugar? 
Coffee  ?     Rice  ?     Tea  ? 

What  countries  produce  largely  of  the  same  pro- 

What  country  produces  the  most  spices  ? 

What  are  cloves  ? 

What  are  nutmegs  ?     Mace  ? 

What  is  a  mountain  system  ? 

Name  the  mountain  systems  of  America  ? 

What  is  the  length  of  the  longest  day  at  the 
equator  ?  At  the  Tropic  of  Cancer  ?  Arctic  Circle  ? 
North  Pole  ? 


no. 

ducts  ? 

III. 

112. 

TI3- 

114. 

115- 

116. 

78  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

117.  Why  does  so  little  rain  fall  on  that  part  of  South 
America  west  of  the  Andes  mountain  range  ? 

118.  What  large  city  in  Europe  is  noted  for  the  manu- 
facture of  cotton  cloth  ?  For  silks  ?  Linen  ?  Cutlery  ? 
Laces  ? 

119.  What  are  the  leading  pursuits  of  the  people  of  the 
Eastern  States  ? 

120.  What  are  the  products  of  the  Eastern  States  ? 

121.  Where  are  the  manufactures  carried  on  to  the 
greatest  extent  in  these  states  ? 

122.  Where  is  marble  obtained  ? 

123.  What  is  granite,  and  where  found  ? 

124.  What  state  is  called  the  "Granite  State"? 

a.  Where  are  the  following  mountains:  White,  Blue, 
Hoosick,  Mt.  Katahdin,  Mt.  Holyoke,  Bunker  Hill. 

b.  What  are  Nantucket  and  Martha's  Vineyard,  and  to 
what  state  do  they  belong  ? 

c.  Where  are  Rhode  and  Mt.  Desert  islands,  and  to 
what  states  do  they  belong  ? 

d.  Describe  lakes  Memphremagog,  Moosehead,  Ches- 
uncook.  Grand,  Winnipiseogee,  Sebago,  and  Umbagog. 

e.  Describe  the  bay  of  Passamaquodda,  Massachusetts, 
Cape  Cod,  Penobscot,  Casco,  Narragansett,  and  Long  Is- 
land Sound. 

125.  How  many  square  miles  in  the  area  of  Rhode 
Island,  and  how  many  states  of  the  same  size  could  be 
formed  out  of  the  State  of  Texas  ? 

126.  What  is  particularly  noticeable  about  the  northern 
boundary  of  Connecticut  ? 

a.  Locate  Burlington,  Belfast,  Dover,  Salem,  Bath, 
Bennington,  Bangor,  Eastport,  and  Lowell. 

b.  Describe  the  following:  Housatonic,  Kennebec, 
Merrimac,  Pawtucket,  Connecticut,  Thames,  St.  Croix, 
Taunton,  Onion,  White,  and  Androscoggin. 

127.  WHat  is  the  size  of  California  ? 


GEOGRAPHY.  79 

128.  What  is  the  surface  of  this  state  ? 

129.  What  is  the  name  of  this  valley,  and  from  what 
did  it  derive  its  name  ? 

130.  What  is  the  Golden  Gate  ? 

131.  When  was  gold  discovered  in  California  ? 

132.  What  is  the  climate  ? 

a.     Locate  Vallejo,  San  Jose,  Los  Angelos,  Stockton, 
Benicia,  and  San  Francisco. 

133.  What  is  the  difference  in  latitude  between  San 
Francisco  and  Richmond  ? 

134.  How  far  north   of  Richmond  is  New  York  City  ? 
a.     Name  and  locate    the    capital    cities    of    South 

America. 

135.  What  part  of  South  America  is  in  the  same  lati- 
tude south  of  the  equator,  that  Central  United  States  is 
north  of  it  ? 

136.  How  does  Brazil  compare  in  size  with  the  United 
States  (not  including  Alaska)? 

137.  What  city  in  the  W^est  Indies  is  in  the  same  lati- 
tude north  of  the  equator,  that  Rio  Janeiro  is  south  of  it  ? 

138.  Describe  South  America. 

139.  What  are  the  llanos  "i 

140.  What  are  the  selvasl 

141.  What  are  the  pampas  1 

142.  What  are  the  wastes  of  Patagonia  ? 

143.  What  is  a  plateau,  or  table  land  ? 

144.  How  may  the  plateaus  of  South  America  be  di- 
vided ? 

145.  Describe  the  plateau  of  the  Andes. 

146.  Describe  Quito. 

147.  What  are  Chimborazo  and  Cotopaxi  ? 

148.  What  is  the  Peruvian  Balsa  ? 

149.  Describe  the  Cassiquiare  river. 

150.  How  far  north  does  South  America  extend  ? 


80  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

151.  What  part  of  South   America  is  in  the  same  lati- 
tude of  Cape  Colony  ? 

152.  What  city  in  Australia  is  in,  nearly,  the  same  lati- 
tude as  Buenos  Ayres  ? 

153.  What  large  city  in  the  United  States  is  in,  nearly, 
the  same  longitude  as  Quito  ? 

154.  What  part  of  the  western  coast  of  A-frica  is  in  the 
same  latitude  as  Cape  Gallinas  ? 

a.  Describe  the  following  islands :  Joanes,  Desola- 
tion, Chiloe,  Falkland,  Staten,  Wellington,  Juan  Fernandez, 
Trinidad,  St.  Felix,  Hermit,  Marg-arita. 

b.  Locate  tne  following  places :  Conception,  Trux- 
illo,  Areguipa,  Santiago  Villa  Bella,  Pernambuco,  Popay- 
an,  Aspinwall,  Villa  Rica,  Valparaiso,  Cobija,  Callao, 
Chagres,  Guayaquil,  Para,  Bahia,  Barcelona,  Angostura, 
Potosi,  Panama. 

c.  Name  and  locate  the  capital  cities'  of  South 
America. 

155.  Where  is  Cape  Horn  ? 

156.  What  is  Terra  del  Fuego  ? 

157.  Why  was  Patagonia  so  named  ? 

158.  What   Cape  in  South  America  is  the  most  north- 
em,  eastern,  southern,  western  ? 

a.  Locate  the  following  capes:  North,  Frio,  St 
Antonio,  Blanco. 

b.  Where  are  the  peninsulas  of  St.  Joseph's  and  Tres 
Montes  ? 

c.  Locate  the  Gulf  of  Darien,  St.  Mathias,  All  Saints, 
Choco,  Blanco,  Guayaquil,  St.  George's,  Paranagua, 
Panama. 

d.  Where  are  lakes  Titicaca  and  Uros  ?  What  river 
connects  them  ? 

159.  Where  is  Lake  Reys;  and  what  river  is  its  outlet  ? 

160.  What  is  the   general  character  of  the   lakes  of 
South  America  ? 


GEOGRAPHY.  81 

a.     Locate  lakes  Xarayes,  Yber,  and  Maracaibo. 
i6i.     Describe  Lake  Titicaca  and  Maracaibo. 

a.  Where  is  the  Desert  of  Atacama  ? 

b.  In  how  many  zones  is  South  America  ? 

c.  Between  what  two  mountain  chains  is  the  basin  of 
the  Orinoco  ? 

d  Of  the  countries  of  South  America,  which  border 
on  the  Caribbean  Sea  ?  Which  on  the  Atlantic  Ocean  ? 
On  the  Pacific  Ocean  ? 

162.  Where  are  the  Lobos  and  Chincha  islands  ?     For 
what  are  they  valuable  ? 

163.  Which  is  the  smallest  division  of  South  America, 
and  what  state  is  about  the  same  size  ? 

164.  How  does  Brazil  compare  in  size  to  the  whole  of 
South  America. 

.165.     What  is  the  Argentine  Confederation  ? 

a.  What  are  the  following :  San  Francisco,  Geral, 
Magellan,  Port  Stanley,  De  los  Patos,  Madeira,  Pichincha, 
Essequibo,  JDespoblado,  Maranham,  Tobago,  Margarita  ? 

b.  Describe  the  following  rivers:  Orinoco,  Magda- 
lena,  Rio  Negro,  Para,  Tocantins,  Araguay,  Tapajos, 
Xingu,  Mamore,  Purus,  Pilcomayo,  Salado,  Rio  Colorado. 

166.  Describe  the  Andes  mountains. 

167.  How  is  British  America  divided  ? 

168.  How  are  the  British  Provinces  of  North  America 
divided  ? 

169.  What  is  the  government  of  these  provinces  ? 

1 70.  Is  there  any  similarity  between  the  government  of 
these  provinces  and  that  of  the  United  States  ? 

171.  Where  is  Rupert  Land  ? 

172.  What  does  the  province  of  British  Columbia  com- 
prise ? 

1 73.  What  island  forms  a  part  of  the  province  of  Nova 
Scotia  ? 

1 74.  Describe   Newfoundland.     For  what  is  it  noted  ? 


82  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

175.  What  is  the  Bras  d'Or  ? 

176.  What  are   the  French  possessions  near  these  pro- 
vinces ? 

1/^177.     What  are  the  banks  of  Newfoundland  ? 

1 78.  Where  is  Anticosta  Island  ?     Is  it  valuable  i» 

179.  Which  of  the  United  States  is  about  the  size  of 
New  Brunswick  ?     Prince  Edward  Island  ? 

180.  How  is  Montreal  situated  ? 

181.  For  what  is  the   Basin  of  the  St.  Lawrence  re- 
markable ? 

182.  For  what  is  the  Ba^of  Fundy  noted  ? 
^^183.     What  are  tides  ?'  Neap-tides  ?     S^ng  tidoo  ? 

1^84.  What  are  the  chief  causes  of  tides  ? 

185.  What  are   the   three   distinct  movements  of  the 
ocean  ? 

186.  What  are  waves  ? 

187.  What  are  ocean  currents,  and  how  are  tHey  caused? 

1 88.  How  are  ocean  currents  divided  ? 

189.  What  is  a  counter  current  ? 

1x^190.     Why  are  the  tides  of  Fundy  Bay  so  much  greater 
than  at  other  ports  ? 

191.  What  are  the  chief  productions  of  the  Canadian 
provinces  ? 

192.  Name  and  loca-te  the  the  capital   cities  of  these 
provinces. 

a.  Locate  the  following  cities :  Prescott,  Kingston, 
St.  John,  Liverpool,  Toronto,  Quebec,  Pictou,  Hramilton, 
Bathurst,  Three  Rivers,  Yarmouth,  Harbor  Grace,  Sydney, 
Louisburg,  Chatham,  Windsor,  Truro,  and  Victoria. 

b.  Describe  the  capes:  Sable,  Canso,  North,  Race, 
Bauld,  Ray,  St.  Lewis,  Rozier. 

c.  Describe  the  following  gulfs  and  bays:  James, 
Hudson,  St.  Lawrence,  Chaleurs,  Georgian,  Fundy,  Notre 
Dame,  Placentia,  Fortune,  Bonavista,  Trinity,  and  St. 
George's. 


GEOGRAPHY.  53 

d.  Locate  the  straits:  Belle  Isle,  Northumberland, 
and  Canso. 

e.  Describe  some  of  the  principal  lakes :  Abbitibbe, 
Mistissinnie,  St.  John,  Grand,  NipJssing,  Sinco. 

/.  Describe  the  following  rivers:  Albany,  Moose, 
Ottawa,  East  Main,  St.  Maurice,  Saguenay,  Rupert's, 
Severn,  Grand,  Richelieu,  St.  Francis,  St.  John,  Fraser. 

193.  To  what  province  does  Labrador  belong  ? 

194.  What  are  the  obstructions  to  navigation  from  the 
Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  to  Lake  Superior  ? 

195.  How  are  these  obstructions  avoided  ? 

196.  How  is  Nova  Scotia  joined  to   New  Brunswick  ? 

197.  What  islands  are  in  the  Niagara  river  ? 

198.  How  is  Oceanica  divided  ? 

199.  What  does  Malasia  comprise  ? 

200.  Which  are  the  principal  Sunda  Isles  ? 

20 r.     What  are  the  productions  of  these  islands  ? 

202.  What  is  said  of  the  animals  of  Malasia  ? 

203.  What  are  the  inhabitants  ? 

204.  What  nations  have  possessions  here  ? 

205.  Which  are  the  most  important  cities  of  this  Archi- 
pelago ?     Where  are  they  situated  ? 

a.  Locate  Acheen,  Macassar,  Bencoolen. 

b.  What  strait  separates  Sumatra  from  Java  ? 

c.  What  strait  separates  Sumatra  from  Asia  ?  Borneo 
from  Celebes  ? 

d.  Where  is  Mt.  Ophir  ? 

206.  How  large  is   Borneo,    Sumatra,    Java,  Celebes, 
Philippine  Isles  ? 

207.  What  state  is  about  the  size  of  Celebes  ? 

208.  In  which  zone  are  these  islands  situated  ? 

209.  What  is  the  surface  of  these  islands  ? 

210.  Are  these  islands  thickly  inhabited  ? 
-211.     How  is  Australasia  divided  ? 


84  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

212  To  what  country  does  Australia,  New  Zealand,  and 
Tasmania  belong  ? 

213.  What  possessions  have  France  in  these  divisions  ? 

214.  How  is  Australia  divided  ? 

215.  How  large  is  Australia  ? 

216.  What  is  the  surface  of  this  island  ? 

217.  What  are  the  inhabitants  ? 

218.  What  are  the  chief  pursuits  of  the  people  ? 

219.  What  is  said  of  the  native  animals  of  Australia  ? 

220.  Which  are  the  principal   cities  ?     Locate  them. 

221.  Is  this  country  thickly  settled  ? 

222.  Describe  Tasmania. 

223.  Where  is  New  Zealand  ? 

a.  Locate  Auckland,  Hobarton,  Cook  Strait. 

b.  Where  is  Bass  Strait,  Torres,  Molucca  Passage  ? 

224.  What  is  said  of  Papua,  and  the  other  islands  ? 

225.  What  does  Polynesia  include  ? 

226.  Name  the  principal  groups  ? 

227.  What  is  the  surface  of  the   island?  of  Polynesia  ? 

228.  What  are  the  inhabitants  ? 

229.  What  is  said  of  the  animals  ? 

230.  Which  is  the  only  important  town  in  Polynesia  ? 

a.  Locate  Timor,  Sumbawa,  Kangaroo,  Hawaii. 

b.  To  what  divisions  of  Oceanica  do  the  following 
islands  belong:  Luzon,  Feejee,  Lombock,  Chatham, 
Mindanao,  North  and  South,  Sooloo,  Banca  ? 

c.  Describe  the  Gulf  of  Carpentaria,  Spencer,  Shark, 
Plenty,  Botany,  and  Great  Bay. 

231.  Name  the  Middle  States. 

232.  Which  is  the  larger.  New  York  or  Pennsylvania  ? 

233.  What  is  the  surface  of  these. states  ? 

234.  What  can  be  said  of  New  York  ? 

235.  For  what  are  Rochester,   Syracuse,  West   Point, 
and  Saratoga  noted  ?     Locate  them. 

236.  What  is  noticeable  of  Pennsylvania  ? 


GEOGRAPHY.  85 

237.  What  is  said  of  its  minerals  ? 

238.  For  what  are  Pittsburg  and   Philadelphia  noted  ? 

239.  What  are   the   pursuits   of  the   people   of  New- 
Jersey.  ? 

240.  What  fashionable  resorts   for   sea-bathing  in  this 
state  ?  Locate  them. 

241.  How  large  is  Delaware  ? 

a.  Where  are  capes  May  and  Henlopen,  Charles  and 
Henry  ? 

b.  Name  and  locate  the  capitals  of  the  Middle  States. 

c.  Locate  Sing  Sing,  Poughkeepsie,  Hudson,  Troy, 
Buffalo,  Gettysburg,  Erie,  Newark,  Paterson. 

d.  Which  one  of  the  States  is  called  the  "Empire 
State"?     Which  one  the  "Keystone  State"? 

e.  Describe  the  Hudson,  Mohawk,  Susquehanna, 
Delaware,  Genesee,  Tioga,  Juniata,  and  the  rivers  which 
form  the  Ohio. 

/.  Locate  Pottsville,  Rome,  Utica,  Wilmington, 
Camden,  Jersey  City,  Reading,  Alleghany,  Scranton,  Oswe- 
go, Lockport,  Ithaca,  Ticonderoga. 

g.  Locate  the  following:  Lake  George,  Oneida, 
Cayuga,  Seneca,  Delaware  Bay,  Egg  Harbor,  Manhattan 
Island. 

h.  Where  is  Sandy  Hook,  Blackwell's  Island,  East 
River? 

u  Locate  New  Castle,  Titusville,  Oil  City,  Ogdens- 
burg.  Flushing,  Whitehall,  Albion,  Lebanon,  Schoharie^ 
Auburn. 

242.  How  great  a  fall  has  the  cataract  of  Niagara  ? 
How  are  the  West  India  Islands  divided  ? 
What  islands  belong  to  the  Greater  Antilles  ? 
What  does  the  Lesser  Antilles  include  ? 
What  and  where  are  the  Bahama  Islands  ? 
To  what  country  do  these  islands  belong  ? 
What  are  the  inhabitants  of  these  islands  ? 


243 
244 

245 
246 
247 
248 


86  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

249.  Where  are  the  negroes  held  as  slaves  ? 

.    250.  What  is  the  surface  of  the  Antilles  ? 

25 1.  What  are  the  productions  ? 

252.  What  is  rum  ? 

253.  How  is  Hayti  divided  ? 

254.  What  is  the  history  of  this  Republic  ? 

255.  Where  are  the  Bermuda  Islands  ?     To  whom  do 
they  belong  ? 

256.  How  large  are  Cuba  and  Hayti  ? 

a.  Name  and  locate  the  capital  cities  of  the  West 
Indies. 

b.  Locate  Mantanzas,  Kingston,  Falmouth,  Ponce, 
Manzanillo,  Nuevitas,  Samana,  Gonaives. 

c.  Describe  the  following  capes;  Maysi,  Morant, 
St  Antonio,  Negril,  De  Cruz,  Engano. 

d.  Describe  the  straits,  Mona  Passage,  .Windward 
Passage,  Channel  of  Yucatan,  and  Florida  Strait. 

e.  To  what  divisions  do  the  following  islands  belong: 
Barbadoes,  Dominica,  Guanahani,  Antigua,  Tobago,  Trini- 
dad, Tortuga,  St.  Thomas,  Guadeloupe,  Grenada,  Isle  of 
Pines,  Orchilla  ? 

1X257.  What  are  Keys  ? 

258.  What  is  a  reef  ? 

259.  Describe  the  southern  coast  of  Florida. 

260.  Where  is  Key  West  ?     What  are  its  exports  ? 

261.  How  is  salt  made  in  Key  West  ? 

262.  What  is  sponge  ? 

263.  What  is  the  general  surface  of  Florida  ? 

264.  What  are  the  productions  of  this  state  ? 

265.  What  is  Lake  Okeechobee,  and  where  is  it  ? 

266.  Why  has  this  state  so  few  good  harbors  ? 

a.  Locate  the  following  cities :  Pensacola,  Apalachi- 
cola,  Tallahassee,  St.  Augustine,  St.  Marks, 

b.  How  is  the  Apalachicola  river  formed  ?  Describe 
them. 


GEOGRAPHY.  ti? 

267.  Which  State  is  separated  by  the  Mississippi  river? 

268.  On  which  side  of  the  river  is  New  Orleans  ?     De- 
scribe it. 

269  What  is  the  soil  of  Louisiana  ? 

270.  How  many    territories    in    the   United    States  ? 
Name  them. 

271.  What  is  Alaska  and  the  District  of  Columbia  ? 

272.  Describe  Alaska. 

273.  Is  this  possession  valuable  to  the  United  States  ? 
2  74.  Which  is  the  principal  settlement,  and  how  situ- 
ated ? 

275.  What  does  Danish  America  include  ? 

276.  Has  Greenland  been  fully  explored  ? 

277.  Why  was  Greenland  so  named  ? 

278.  Describe  Iceland. 

279.  What  natural  curiosities  here  ? 

280.  What  is  supposed  to  be  the  cause  of  this  phenom- 
enon ? 

281.  What  gave  the  name  of  Iceland  "i 

282.  Which  are  the  principal  towns  of  Danish  America  ? 

283.  How  much  larger  is  Asia  than  Africa  ? 

284.  What  is  the  greatest  length  and  breadth  of  Africa  ? 

285.  Give  a  short  description  of  Africa. 

286.  What  are  the  inhabitants  ? 
►^287.  What  does  Barbary  include  ? 

288.  To  what  nation  do  these  countries  belong  ? 

289.  How  large  is  the  Desert  of  Sahara  ? 

a.  Describe  the  following  mountains:  Atlas,  Mount- 
ains of  the  Moon,  Snow  Mountains,  Kong,  Crystal,  and 
Mocambe. 

290.  How  is  Southern  Africa  divided  ? 

291.  How  are  these  countries  governed  ? 

292.  Where,  and  what  is  Liberia  ? 

293.  Where  is  the  colony  of  Sierra  Leone  ? 

294.  What  are  the  j^rincipal  exports  of  Africa  ? 


88  '  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

a.  Locate  Morocco,  Monrovia,  Free  Town,  Cairo, 
Cape  Town,  Mozambique,  Cobbe,  Tripoli,  Sego,  Condar, 
Sokoto,  Algiers,  Antananarivo,  Petermaritzburg,  Timbuc- 
too,  Wara,  Mesna,  Coomassie,  Kouka,  Zanzibar,  Graham 
Town,  and  Port  Natal. 

b.  What  capes  project  from  the  four  extremities  of 
Africa  ? 

c.  Describe  the  Mozambique  Channel,  Gulf  of  Aden, 
Guinea,  Sidra,  Niger  river,  Senegal,  Orange,  and  Congo. 

d.  Locate  the  following  islands:  Azores,  Canary, 
Cape  Verd,  Ascension,  Helena,  Madeira,  Peak  of  Teneriflfe. 

295.  Describe  Madagascar. 

296.  Locate  the  capital  cities  of  the  territories  of  the 
United  States. 

297.  For  what  are  Idaho  and  Montana  noted  ? 

298.  Describe  Dakota. 

299.  Describe  the  Union  Pacitic  P.ailroad. 

300.  Locate  the  principal  towns  on  this  railroad 

301.  How  is  Salt  Lake  City  situated  ? 

302.  Describe  Utah. 

303.  For  what  are  the  southern  territories  and  Texas 
especially  adapted  ? 

304.  How  is  the  western  part  of  Texas  occupied  ? 

305.  What  are  the  productions  of  Texas  ? 

306.  What  is  the  climate  ? 

U^  a.  Locate  Austin,  Houston,  Matagorda,  Brownsville, 
Corpus  Christi,  Colorado  City,  Greeley,  Filmore  City, 
Walla  Walla,  Portland,  Ft.  Benton,  Ft.  Union,  Sioux  City, 
Ft.  Laramie,  Silver  City,  Dallas,  Preston,  Pembina,  Ver- 
million. 

b.  Describe  the  following  rivers :  Columbia,  Snake, 
Humboldt,  Colorado,  Gila,  Rio  Grande,  Brazos,  Trinity, 
Arkansas,  Smoky  Hill  Fork,  Platte. 

c.  Locate   Pike's  Peak,   Mt.  Hood,   Mt.  Baker,  Mt 


GEOGRAPHY.  89 

Shasta,   Diamond  Peak,   Long  Peak,  Spanish  Peaks,  Fre- 
mont's Peak,  Mt.  Fairweather,  Mt.  St.  EUas. 

307.  Which   of  the    states  and    territories  border   on 
British  America  ? 

308.  Which  of  the  states  are  separated  by  the  Mississippi 
river  ? 

309.  Which  are  separated  by  the  Ohio  river  ? 

310.  What  is  the  general  outHne  of  Europe,  and  what 
advantages  does  it  offer  ? 

311.  What  is  the  surface  ? 

312.  What   are    the    principal  European  parts  of  this 
great  mountain  system  ?     Describe  each  part. 

313.  What  part  of  Europe  is  included  in  the  Great  Plain  ? 

314.  What  is  the  climate  ? 

315.  Name    the    political    divisions.     How    are    they 
classified  ? 

K^i6.     Which  divisions  are  called  the  "Five  G/eat  Pow- 
ers"? 

317.  Name  and  locate  the  peninsulas  of  Europe. 

318.  Describe  the  Scandinavian  peninsula. 

319.  What  are  the  exports  of  this  peninsula  ? 

320.  How  much  farther  north  can  grain  be  raised  in 
Norway  than  on  the  Atlantic  shore  of  America  ? 

321.  What  point  on  the   American  continent  is  in  the 
same  latitude  as  Christiana  ? 

322.  Where  is  I^apland  ? 

323.  Is  this  country  inhabited  ? 

324.  What  is  the  size  of  the  Russian  empire  ? 

325.  What  is  the  surface  of  this  empire  ? 

326.  How  are  the  inhabitants  divided  ? 

327.  What  is  the  government  ?    Religion  ? 

328.  In  what  does  the  principal  wealth  of  Russia  con- 
sist? 

329.  Where    are    the    great   wheat-growing  regions  of 
Europe  ? 


90  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

330.  What  is   the  nature  of   the   country  around   the 
Caspian  &ea  ? 

331.  Describe  the  Caspian  sea. 

332.  What  are  steppes^  and  where  found  ? 
2t2iZ-     Where  is  Poland  ?     Circassia  ? 

334.  Describe  Moscow.     When  was  it  burned  ? 

335.  For  what  is  Sebastopol  famous  ? 

336.  What  was  the  cause  of  this  siege  ? 

337.  VViio   inhabit   the    steppes,    or   barren   plains   of 
Russia  ? 

338.  Where  is  Niznei  Novgorod,  and  what  takes  place 
there  every  year  ? 

339.  Which   are   the  principal  ports  for  foreign  com- 
merce ?     Locate  them. 

340.  What  seas  and  gulfs  wash  the   shores  of  Russia  ? 
Describe  each. 

341.  What  do  the  British  Islands  comprise  ? 

342.  What  does  Great  Britain  include  ? 

343.  What  is  the  surface  of  the  British  Islands  ? 

344.  How  is  Scotland  divided  ? 

345      What  is  the  nature  of  the  sea-coast  ? 

346.  What  is  ttie  climate  ? 

347.  In  what  does  the  chief  wealth  of  Great  Britain 
consist  ? 

348.  How  does  she   rank  with  other   nations  in  the 
amount  of  her  manufactures  and  commerce  ? 

349.  What  is  the  population  of  the  several  divisions  ? 

350.  Where  is  tin  obtained  ? 

351.  What  is  the  chief  article  of  fuel  in  Ireland  ? 

352.  What  is  the  extent  of  the  British  Empire  ? 

353.  Which   are   the    principal   possessions   of   Great 
Britain  in  Europe  ? 

354.  Which  in  Asia  ? 

355.  In  Africa  ? 

356.  In  Oceanica  ? 


GEOGRAPHY.  QTl 

357.  In  America  ? 

a.  Locate  Malta,  Gozo,  Ceylon,  Singapore,  Hong 
Kong,  Aden,  Mauritius  and  Seychelle  islands. 

b.  Where  are  the  Hebrides,  Orkney,  Shetland,  Ang- 
lesea,  Man,  Isle  of  Wight,  Skye,  Mull,  Lewis,  Uist,  Islay, 
Arran  ? 

c.  Describe  St.  George's  Channel,  North  Channel, 
English  Channel,  Bristol  Channel,  Dover  Strait,  Menai, 
The  Minch,  Little  Minch,  Jura  Sound. 

d.  Describe  the  following  capes :  Land's  End,  Liz- 
ard Pt,  Dunnet  Head,  Kinnaird  Head,  Malin  Head,  Miz- 
zen  Head,  Flamborough  Head,  Butt  of  Lewis,  and  Cape 
Wrath. 

358.  For  what  are  Liverpool,  Leeds  and  Bradford, 
Birmingham,  Limerick,  and  Merthyr  Tydvil  noted  ?  Lo- 
cate them. 

359.  Describe  the  Spanish  Peninsula. 

360.  What  are  the  productions  of  Spain  ? 

361.  What  parallel  crosses  the  central  portion  of  Spain, 
and  through  which  of  the  United  States  does  the  same 
parallel  pass  ? 

362.  What  other  countries  in  Europe  does  the  same 
parallel  cross  ? 

363.  Were  we  to  follow  this  parallel,  what  countries  in 
Asia  would  we  pass  through  ? 

364.  Where  is  the  Republic  of  Andorra  ? 

365.  What  is  noticeable  of  this  republic  ? 

7,66.  What  are  the  foreign  possessions  of  Spain  ? 

367.  How  wide  is  the  strait  of  Gibraltar  ? 

T,6S.  What  is  noticeable  of  the  Fortress  of  Gibraltar  ? 

369.  How  large  is  France  ? 

370.  How  does  she  rank  with  other  countries  ? 

371.  What  is  the  surface  ? 

372.  What,  and  where  are  the  landes  ? 

373.  What  are  the  principal  exports  ? 


92  tHE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

3  74.  What  influence  has  Paris  throughout  the  civilized 
world  ? 

375.  Name    and   locate    the    principal    possessions  of 
France. 

a.  Where  is  Pondicherry  ? 

b.  Locate  Minorca,  Majorca,  Sardinia,  and  Ivica. 

c.  Describe,  Bay  of  Biscay,  Gulf  of  Lyons,    Gulf  of 
Genoa,  and  Strait  of  Bonifacio. 

376.  What  are  the  pursuits  of  the  people  of  Holland 
and  Belgium  ? 

377.  What  is  the  condition  of  much  of  the  coast  of  this 
country  ? 

378.  How  is  internal  communication  promoted  ? 

379.  What  is  the  Zider  Zee  ? 

380.  What  people  are  called  Dutch  ? 

381.  What  is  the  surface  of  Denmark  ? 

382.  How  is  Copenhagen  situated  ? 
2f^2>'  What  does  Germany  comprise  ? 
?^4.  Which  are  the  free  cities  ? 

385.  Where  is  the  state  of  Alsace  ? 

386.  Which  are  the  chief  ports  of  Germany  ? 

387.  What  are  the  productions  ? 

388.  What  are  heaths  1 

389.  What  are  the  inhabitants  of  Austria  ? 

390.  How  is  Vienna  situated  ? 

391.  What  was  Poland  formerly  ? 

392.  Which  is  the  most  mountainous  country  of  Eu- 
rope ? 

393.  Of  how  many  states  is  Switzerland  composed  ? 
How  large  is  it  ? 

394.  For  what  are  the  Swiss  noted  ?     What  language 
do  they  speak  ? 

395.  For  what  is  Geneva  noted  ? 

396.  How  is  Italy  governed  ? 


GEOGRAPHY.  93 

397.  In  ancient  times,  for  what  was  this  country  cele- 
brated ?■ 

398.  For  what  are  the  towns  and  cities  noted  ? 

399.  Where  is  San  Marino  ? 

400.  To  what  country  do  the  islands  of  Sardinia  and 
Sicily  belong  ? 

401.  What  is  the  extent  of  the  Ottoman  Empire  ? 

402.  Describe  the  Turk. 

403.  What  was  Greece  in  ancient  times  ? 

404.  What  is  the  shape  of  Greece  ? 

405.  Name  and  locate   the    capital  cities   of  Europe. 

a.  Locate  Matapan,  Spartivento,  De  Gata,  St.  Vin- 
cent, Finisterre,  Ortegal,  St.  Matthew,  The  Naze,  North, 
Sviatoi. 

b.  Describe  the  following  straits :  Otranto,  Messina, 
Bosphorus,  Dardanelles,  Enikale,  Vaigatch  Skager  Rock, 
and  Cattegat. 

c.  Name  and  describe  the  seas  which  wash  the  shores 
of  Europe. 

d.  Describe  the  following  Gulfs :  Taranto,  Salonica, 
Dantzic,  Lubeck,  Murray  Frith,  The  Wash,  Frith  of  Solway. 

e.  Locate  the  principal  seaports  of  Europe.  Lon- 
don, Marseilles,  Elsinore,  Amsterdam,  Venice,  Aberdeen. 
Rotterdam,  Palermo,  Lisbon,  Lubeck,  Naples,  Genoa, 
Hull,  Oporto,  Southampton,  Brest,  Constantinople,  Bre- 
men, Hamburg,  Limerick,  Dundee,  Bordeaux,  Galway, 
Dublin,  Bristol,  Port  Mahone,  Havre,  Wat'jrford,  Belfast, 
Portsmouth,  Cork,  Liverpool,  Stettin,  Antwerp,  London- 
derry, Barcelona,  Dantzic,  Dover,  Leith,  Swansea^  Kings- 
ton, St.  Petersburg,  Riga,  Odessa,  Archangel,  Malaga, 
Navarino,  Sebastapol,  Trieste,  Aalborg,  Salonica,  Calais, 
Cronstadt. 

/.  Describe  the  mountains  of  Kiolen,  Carpathian, 
Balkan,  Apennines,  Pyrennees,  Cevennes,  Cantabrian, 
Siera  Morena,  Sierra  Nevada,  Jura,   Alps,    Ural,    Valdai 


9^  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

Hills,  Cheviot  Hills,  Grampian  Hills,  Cambrian,  Mt.  Etna, 
Mt.  Vesuvius,  Ben  Nevis,  Ben  Lomond,  Mt.  Snowdon. 

406.  With  what  country  is  England  most  extensively 
engaged  in  trade  ? 

407.  Which  is  the  most  northern  town  in  Europe  ? 

a.  Locate  the  principal  inland  cities,  not  capitals: 
VIoscoWj  Warsaw,  Dresden,  Metz,  Manchester,  Birming- 
am,  Sheffield,  Nottingham,  Nancy,  Orleans,  Granada, 
aragossa,  Cologne,  Hanover,  Adrianople,  Sophia,  Flor- 
ence, Turin,  Milan,  Geneva,  Waterloo,  Kilkenny,  Killarney, 
Bradford,  Norwich,  Oxford,  Pesth,  Munich,  Versailles, 
Rouen,  Breslau. 

408.  What  countries  are  termed  Spanish  America  ? 

409.  AVhat  part  of  Spanish  America  is  still  in  posses- 
sion of  Spain  ? 

410.  What  is  the  surface  of  Mexico  ?  ''. 

411.  Are  the  table-lands  accessible  from  the  Gulf  ? 

412.  What  is  the  climate  ? 

413.  What  are  the  inhabitants  ? 

414.  How  are  the  seasons  divided  ? 

415.  What  are  the  productions  ? 

416.  What  are  the  principal  minerals  ? 

417.  How  is  the  city  of  Mexico  situated  ? 

418.  What  two  volcanoes  are  visible   from  the  city  ? 
V\Tiat  do  their  names  signify  ? 

419.  What  IS  cochineal  ?     Pulque  ? 

420.  What  is  the  history  of  Mexico  ? 

421.  What  peninsulas  belong  to  this  republic  ? 

422.  What  does  Central  America  comprise  ? 

423.  Locate  the  capital  cities. 

424.  Where  is  Balize?     To  what  country  does  it  be- 
long ? 

425.  What  are  the  exports  of  Balize  ? 

a.     Locate  the  following   cities:     Vera  Cruz,  Mata- 


GEOGRAPHY  95 

moras,  Monterey,  Merida,  Balize,  San  Luis  Potosi,  Puebla, 
Acapulco,  Guatemala. 

426.  What  three  routes  were  projected  from  the  Atlan- 
tic to  the  Pacific  ? 

427.  How  does  Mexico  compax-e  in  size  with  the  United 
States  ? 

428.  In  what  zones  is  Mexico  ? 

429.  Where  are  the  greatest  copper  regions  in  the 
United  States  ? 

430.  Where  is  lead  found  most  abundantly  ? 

a.  How  many  Western  States  ?     Name  them. 

b.  How  many  Southern  States  ?    Name  them. 

431.  What  are  the  great  staple  productions  of  the  South- 
ern States  ? 

432.  Which  state  produces  the  most  cotton  ?  Rice  ? 
Sugar  ?     Tobacco  ?     Sweet  potatoes  ?     Corn  ?     Wheat  ? 

433-  Which  State  has  the  greatest  number  of  swine  ? 
Cattle  ?     Horses  ?     Mules  ?     Sheep  ? 

434.  Which  state  produces  the  greatest  quantity  of 
gold  ?  Silver  ?  Iron  ?  Copper  ?  Lead  ?  Coal  ?  Pine 
lumber  ?     Turpentine,  resin,  and  tar  ? 

435.  How  is  turpentine,  resin,  and  tar  manufactured  ? 

436.  From  what  does  Nortli  Carolina  derive  her  chief 
wealth  ? 

437.  What  is  South  Carolina  often  called  } 

438.  What  article  can  be  raised  extensively  in  .all  the 
states  and  territories  ? 

439.  Into  what  sections  is  the  United  States  divided  ? 

440.  What  does  the  Atlantic  Slope  embrace  ? 

441.  What  does  the  Pacific  Slope  embrace  ? 

442.  What  division  is  included  in  the  Central  Plain  ? 

443.  Into  what  divisions  may  the  United  States  be  di 
vided,  with  reference  to  its  drainage  ? 

444.  What  is  the  surface  of  Asia  ? 


^96  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

445.  How  are  the  table-lands  divided  ?     What  is  said 
of  them  ? 

446.  What   countries   constitute   the    Great   Northern 
Plain  of  Asia  ? 

447.  Describe  the  mountain  system  of  Asia. 

448.  Where  is  the  Great  Desert  of  Gobi  ? 

449.  How  may  the  climate  be  described  ? 

450.  What  is  the  climate  of  Northern  Asia  ? 

451.  Describe  Siberia. 

452.  What  is  the  climate  of  Central  and  Southern  Asia  ? 

453.  To  what   three  races  do  the  inhabitants  of  Asia 
belong  ? 

454.  What  people  belong  to  the  Mongolian  race  ? 

455.  What  nations,  or  tribes,  living  in  Asia,   belong  to 
the  Caucasian  race  ? 

456.  What  countries  are  occupied  by  the  Ma,lay  race  ? 

457.  What  is  the  estimated  number  of  inhabitants  of 
the  several  races  ? 

458.  For  what  has  Siberia  long  been  used  ? 

459.  To  what  country  does  Georgia  belong  ?     What  is 
noticeable  of  the  inhabitants  ? 

460.  What  is  the  Khan  ? 

a.     Locate  the  following  cities:     Tobolsk,  Irkoutsk, 
Tashkend,    Bokhara,    Yarkand,     Khokan,    Khiva,    Tiflis, 
Smyrna,  Jerusalem,   Damascus,   Medina,   Mecca,   Mocha, 
)'-         Aden,  Muscat. 

461..    What  does  the  Chinese  Empire  include  ? 

462.  What  is  said  of  the  population  of  China  ? 

463.  What  are  the  productions  of  China  ? 

464.  What  is  the  government  ? 

465.  Which  are  the  most  important  sea-ports  for  foreign 
trade  ?     Locate  them. 

466.  Name  the  principal  islands  of  Japan. 

467.  What  are  the  chief  productions  of  these  islands? 
•468.     What  two  peninsulas  comprise  India  ? 


GEOGRAPHY.  97 

469.  How  is  Farther  India  divided  ? 

470.  Name  and  locate  the  capitals  of  India. 

471.  What  are  the  productions  of  India  ? 

a.  Locate  Singapore,  Rangoon,  Monchobo,  Bombay, 
Madras,  Benares,  Mandalay,  Cabul,  Candahar,  Herat, 
Kelat,  and  Lassa. 

472.  What  is  the  government  of  Persia  ? 

473.  What  is  the  surface  of  Arabia  ? 

474.  Who  are  the  inhabitants  .? 

475.  For  what  is  Mecca  noted  ?     Medina  ? 

476.  Where  is  the  country  of  Cochin  China  ? 

a.  Locate  Teheran,  Ispahan,  Sana,  Yeddo,  HakOr 
dadi,  Kauagawa,  Pekin. 

b.  Name  and  describe  the  seas  which  wash  the  shores 
of  Asia:  Kara,  Behring,  Ochotsk,  Japan,  Yellow,  China, 
Arabian,  Red,  Mediterranean,  Marmora,  Black,  and  Cas- 
pian. 

c.  Where  are  the  Aral  and  Dead  seas  ? 

d.  Describe,  Bay  of  Bengal,  Persian,  Siam,  Tonguin, 
Petchelee,  Lena,  Obe,  Martaban,  and  Cambay. 

e.  Describe  Lake  Baikal,  Tchany,  Balkash,  Tonting. 
/.     Describe  the  following  rivers :     Lena,  Obe,  Yene- 

sei,   Irtish,   Amoor,    Hong    Ho,    Yang   tse   Kiang,   Hong 
Kiang,  Euphrates,  Tigris,  Amoo,  Indus,   Ganges,  Brahma- 
putra, Irrawadda,  and  Cambodia. 
I'         477.     Name  and  locate  the  peninsulas  of  Asia. 

478.  Where  is  the  Isthmus  of  Kraw  ? 

479.  Which  is  the  most  elevated  lake  in  the  world  ? 

a.  Locate  Formosa,  Hainan,  Socotra,  Nova  Zembla, 
Ceylon,  Laccadive,  Maldive,  Hong  Kong,  Lew  Chew, 
Saghalien,  Kurile,  Aleutian,  New  Siberia. 

b.  Describe  the  following  straits  and  capes :  Babel- 
Mandel,  Ormus,  Tartary,  Corea,   Formosa,    Manaar,/_Ma- 

^lacc^  Comarin,    Ras-al   Gat,    Cambodia,   Lopatka,    and 
Vastochnoi. 


98  THE    QUESTION    BOOK.. 

480.  How  wide  is  Behring  Strait  ?  Gibraltar  ?  Dover  ? 

481.  How  wide  is  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  Suez,  Te- 
huan tepee  ? 

482.  Which  are  the  largest  five  islands  in  the  world  ? 

483.  What  is  the  size  of  the  oceans  ? 

484.  What  is  the  highest  point  reached  by  Arctic  ex- 
plorers ?     By  the  Antarctic  ? 

485.  Name  four  of  the  largest  cities  in  the  world,  in 
order  of  population. 

486.  Name  the  next  four  in  order. 

487.  Name  the  five  largest  cities  of  the  United  States. 

488.  In  the  production  of  what  minerals  does  Great 
Britian  exceed  every  other  country  ? 

489.  Name  the  largest  seven  rivers  in  the  United 
States.     Describe  them. 

490.  What  is  the  population  of  the  Chinese  Empire  ? 
Japan  ?     Hindoostan  ?     United  States  ? 

491.  How  does  China  compare,  in  size  and  population, 
to  the  United  States  ? 

492.  What  is  the  horizon  ? 

493.  What  are  the  principal  uses  of  rivers  ? 

494.  What  important  places  of  the  globe  are  situated 
on  or  near  the  40th  parallel  north  latitude  ? 

495.  What  part  of  the  United  States  is  in  the  same 
latitude  north  of  the  equator,  that  the  southern  part  of 
Africa  is  south  of  it  ? 

496.  \Vhat.is  the  latitude  of  Cape  Horn  ?  Cape  Good 
Hope  ? 

497.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  location  of 
commercial  and  manufacturing  cities  ? 

498.  Why  is  the  water  of  Great  Salt  l-.ake  not  fresh  ? 

499.  Name  five  of  the  principal  articles  exported  by 
the  people  of  the  United  States. 

500.  Naine  five  of  the  principal  articles  imported. 


A  N  S  \V  E  R  S 


TO 


Questions  on  Geography. 


1.  From  the  two  words  geo  (earth)  and  graphy  (de- 
scription). 

2.  Three :     Mathematical,  Physical  and  Political. 

3.  It  treats  of  the  form,  magnitude,  and  motions  of 
the  earth,  and  of  the  various  imaginary  lines  on  the  sur- 
face. 

4.  It  treats  of  the  solid  and  fluid  parts  of  the  earth's 
surface,  the  atmosphere,  and  all  animal  and  vegetable  life. 

5.  It  treats  of  the  various  countries  on  the  earth's  sur- 
face; the  people,  customs,  religion,  and  government. 

6.  A  sphere  flattened  at  the  ends. 

7.  By  the  revolution  of  the  earth  while  in  a  plastic 
condition. 

8.  About  twenty-six  miles,  the  diameter  at  the  equa- 
tor being  7,925  miles. 

9.  An  imaginary  line  on  which  it  performs  its  daily 
revolutions;  its  poles  are  the  points  where  its  axis  meets 
the  surface. 

10.  Two:  diurnal  and  annual.  The  diurnal  is  its  mo- 
tion from  west  to  east ;  its  annual  is  its  revolution  around 
the  sun. 

11.  The  revolution  of  the  earth  on  its  axis. 

12.  The  revolution  of  the  earth  around  the  sun. 

13.  The  course  it  takes  in  its  annual  motion;  its  esti- 
mated length  is  about  600,000,000  miles. 


100  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

14.  About  68,000  miles  an  hour. 

15.  It  is  due  to  the  direction  of  the  sun's  rays,  and  is 
on  the  same  principle  that  morn  and  eve  are  cooler  than 
mid-day. 

16.  Belts,  or  divisions  of  the  earth,  bounded  by  the 
tropic  and  polar  circles,  of  which  there  are  five — two  frigid, 
two  temperate,  and  one  torrid.  The  north  frigid  lies  be- 
tween the  pole  and  Arctic  Circle,  and  is  23^°  in  width; 
the  north  temperate  lies  between  the  Arctic  Circle  and  the 
Tropic  of  Cancer,  and  is  43'^  in  width ;  the  torrid  lies  be- 
tween the  Tropic  of  Cancer  and  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn, 
and  extends  23%°  north  and  south  of  the  equator;  the 
south  temperate  is  of  the  same  size  as  the  north,  and  lies 
between  the  Tropic  of  Capricorn  and  the  Antarctic  Circle; 
the  south  frigid  is  all  of  the  earth's  surface  south  of  the 
Antarctic  Circle. 

L/17.     It  is  66^  degrees,  or  23^  degrees  out  of  a  per- 
pendicular direction. 

18.  During  the  revolution  of  the  earth  around  the  sun 
a  part  of  the  earth's  surface  comes  directly  perpendicular 
to  the  sun's  rays.  This  belt,  47^  wide,  is  enclosed  by  the 
tropics,  and  termed  torrid,  meaning  great  heat.  Geo- 
graphers have  decided  that  the  limit  of  the  temperate  zones 
should  be  to  that  line  where  the  length  of  the  longest  day 
is  twenty-four  hours,  and  as  the  inclination  of  the  earth  is 
23^°  that  line  should  be  23^^  from  the  poles,  where  the 
polar  circles  have  been  drawn. 

19.  What  the  exact  influence  upon  the  earth's  climate 
would  be,  might  be  difficult  to  determine,  but  during  the 
annual  revolution  of  the  earth  the  entire  surface  would 
come  directly  perpendicular  to  the  sun's  rays,  and  become 
torrid.  When  one  pole  would  come  perpendicular  to  the 
sun's  rays,  the  other  would  necessarily  be  in  darkness,  and 
frigid.  The  length  of  the  longest  day  at  the  equator  would 
be  twenty-four  hours,  and  would  occur  every  six  months. 


GEOGRAPHY.  \  ,     !  4ftl 

This  would  give,  at  the  equator,  four  zones  m\  ons,  year-'-; ' 
two  torrid  and  two  temperate. 

20.  If  the  earth  was  perpendicular  to  the  plane  of  its 
orbit  there  would  be  no  change  of  seasons,  but  as  it  be- 
comes inclined  the  position  of  the  earth  to  the  sun  is 
changed  in  its  annual  revolution,  consequently  this  change 
must  produce  a  diversity  of  climate.  It  is  by  this  inclina- 
tion that  the  temperate  zones  have  four  seasons. 

21.  The  inclination  of  the  earth  will  vary  that  line 
where  the  length  of  the  longest  day  is  twenty-four  hours, 
one  degree  for  every  degree  of  inclination.  As  it  is  now 
23^°,  the  line  must  be  23^°  from  the  poles,  or  the 
boundary  of  the  frigid  zones.  If  the  inclination  should  be 
20°,  the  frigid  zones  would  extend  30°,  and  30°  each  side 
of  the  equator  would  become  perpendicular  to  the  sun's 
rays,  making  the  torrid  60°,  the  temperate  30°  and  the 
frigid  30  °  ;  and  so  on  of  any  other  degree  of  incHnation. 
The  frigid  zone  would  be  in  width  the  number  of  degrees 
of  the  inclination  of  the  earth ;  the  torrid  would  be  the 
same  each  side  of  the  equator,  and  the  temperate  what  lies 
between. 

22.  A  magnetic  needle,  resting  upon  a  pivot,  enclosed 
in  a  circular  box.  It  always  points  nearly  north.  The 
cardinal  points  are  north,  south,  east,  and  west. 

23.  Into  great  and  small  circles.  The  great  circles  are 
the  meridians  and  the  equator;  the  small  circles  are  the 
tropic  and  polar  circles,  and  the  parallels  of  latitude. 

24.  Into  360  equal  parts,  called  degrees. 

25.  A  drawing  representing  a  part  or  whole  of  the 
earth's  surface. 

26.  The  equator,  meridians,  parallels,  tropic  and  polar 
circles. 

27.  A  great  circle  equally  distant  from  the  poles. 

28.  It  crosses  the  mouth  of  the  Amazon  river,  Brazil, 
United  States  of  Columbia,  Ecuador,  Pacific  Ocean,  East 


/iUgSs    ;   <,/  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

Tndiefe  (Celebes,  Borneo,  Sumatra),  Indian  Ocean,  Zangue- 
bar,  Ethiopia,  Lower  Guinea,  Atlantic  Ocean. 

29.  Any  great  circle  passing  through  the  poles.  A 
meridian  is  half  a  meridian  circle. 

30.  The  distance  either  east  or  west  from  any  given 
meridian. 

31.  The  one  which  passes  through  Washington,  and 
the  one  near  Greenwich. 

32.  About  77  o  . 

$^.     180  °  either  east  or  west. 

34.  If  situated  on  the  meridian  from  which  we  reckon, 
it  can  have  no  longitude. 

35.  It  has  no  latitude,  and  but  one  degree  of  longitude, 
west. 

^6.  Sixty  geographical  miles  at  the  equator,  but  they 
gradually  grow  less  as  they  approach  the  poles ;  in  lati- 
tude 30  °  it  is  about  fifty-two  geographical  miles ;  in  latitude 
60  °  it  is  thirty,  and  at  the  poles  it  is  nothing. 

37.  All  meridian  lines  terminate  at  tlie  poles,  and  as  a 
degree  of  longitude  is  enclosed  by  meridian  lines,  the 
length  must  decrease  as  the  lines  approach  the  poles. 

^8.  New  York,  Pennsylvania,  Maryland,  Virginia,  and 
North  Carolina. 

39.  Siberia,  and  Chinese  Empire. 

40.  Pekin. 

41.  The  distance  north  or  south  of  the  equator,  called 
north  and  south  latitude. 

42.  90  °  ,  which  is  at  the  poles. 

43.  Sixty  geographical,  or  69^  statute  miles. 

44.  Bahama  Islands,  Florida  Strait,  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
Mexico,  Pacific  Ocean,  Sandwich  Islands,  near  Canton 
(China),  Burmah,  Hindoostan,  Arabian  Sea,  Muscat 
(Arabia),  Egypt,  Sahara  Desert,  and  Atlantic  Ocean. 

45.  Near  Rio  Janeiro,  Paraguay,  the  Northern  part  of 
the   Argentine   Republic,    the  southern   part   of   Bolivia, 


GEOGRAPHY.  103 

Pacific    Ocean,    Central  Australia,    Isle    of    Madagascar, 
Southern  Africa,  and  Atlantic  Ocean. 

46.  Greenland,  British  America,  Alaska,  Behring  strait, 
Siberia,  northern  part  of  Russia,  Lapland,  Sweden,  Norway, 
and  Atlantic  Ocean. 

47.  Discoveries  of  land  have  been  made  in  this  region, 
but  the  cold  is  so  great  that  animal  or  vegetable  life  does 
not  exist. 

48.  In  the  northern  hemisphere  there  are  vast  tracts  of 
land  to  receive  the  rays  of  heat  and  warm  the  atmosphere ; 
but  towards  the  south  pole  the  rays  of  heat  are  lost  on  the 
great  bodies  of  water,  and  the  air  is  not  warmed. 

49.  The  southern  part  of  British  America. 

50.  Cold  winds  from  the  north  and  the  Arctic  current 
which  flows  near  the  coast  of  Labrador,  cause  the  climate 
to  be  too  cold  for  cultivation,  while  in  the  same  latitude  in 
England  snow  is  seldom  seen,  which  is  due  to  the  nearness 
of  the  warm  waters  of  the  Gulf  Stream,  a  branch  of  which 
flows  into  the  Irish  Sea,  and  the  northeast  current  flows  by 
the  coast  of  Norway.  This  stream  renders  the  climate  of 
Western  Europe  mild  and  moist. 

51  It  is  by  the  presence  of  the  Japan  current,  which 
brings  the  warm  waters  of  the  torrid  zone. 

52.  It  issues  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  spreads  out  a 
breadth  of  150  miles,  and  sweeps  along  the  shore  of  North 
America  to  Newfoundland.  Here  it  meets  the  Arctic  cur- 
rent and  divides  into  two  branches,  one  of  which  takes  a 
southeasterly  course  towards  the  coast  of  Africa,  while  the 
other  flows  in  a  northeasterly  direction  towards  the  British 
Isles  and  Norway. 

53.  It  is  situated  in  the  middle  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean, 
consisting  of  seaweed,  and  occupies  the  eddy  or  whirl 
caused  by  the  several  ocean  currents  which  surround  it. 

54.  It  is  a  Spanish  name,  meaning  grassy. 


104  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

55.  Continents,  islands,  peninsulas,   isthmuses,    capes, 
promontories,  mountains,  hills,  plains,  and  valleys. 

56.  Oceans,  seas,  gulfs  or  bays,  straits,  lakes,  and  rivers. 

57.  Straits,  passages,  sounds,  and  channels. 

58.  It  is  little  more  than  twice  as  large.     The  Western 
Continent  contains  about  15,000,000  square  miles. 

59.  About  200,000,000  square  miles. 

60.  Asia.  Europe.  Europe.  South  America. 

61.  England;  22,500,000. 

62.  It  is  about  one-sixtieth  as  large,  or  about  the  size 
of  Wisconsin. 

6$.     Europe  is  about  one-tenth  larger. 

64.  Asia  contains  four  times  as  many  square  miles  and 
two  and  a  half  times  as  many  inhabitants. 

65.  A  narrow  arm  of   the    sea    into    which   a   river 
empties. 

66.  A  sea  interspersed  with  many  islands. 

67.  When  a  river  discharges  its  waters  by  several   out- 
lets, the  tract  of  land  embraced  by  these  outlets  is  called  a 

68.  From  its  resemblance  to  the  fourth  letter  of  the 
Greek  alphabet,  which  is  deUa,  and  shape  of  a  triangle. 

69.  A  place  some  distance  from  the  shore  where  ves- 
sels can  anchor  in  safety. 

70.  A  fertile  spot  in  a  desert. 

71.  The  tract  of  country  drained  by  that  river  and  its 
tributaries. 

72.  The  Amazon.     It  contains  more  than   2,000,000 
square  miles. 

73.  About  1,000,000  square  miles. 

74.  One  hundred  and  eighty  miles. 

75.  Into  four :  enlightened,  civilized,  half-civilized,  and 
savage. 

76.  Three:     Monarchy,  Aristocracy,  and    Democracy. 
These  fonns  of  government  may  be  variously  modified. 


GEOGRAPHY.  105 

77.  The  fonn  of  government  where  the  supreme  power 
is  in  the  hands  of  one  person. 

78.  The  form  of  government  where  the  power  is  in  the 
hands  of  a  privileged  few. 

79.  Where  the  power  is  in  the  hands  of  the  people. 

80.  Empires,  kingdoms,  repiibHcs,  states,  counties, 
townships  and  cities. 

81.  An  empire  is  a  country  governed  by  an  emperor; 
a  kingdom^  one  governed  by  a  king ;  a  republic,  one  gov- 
erned by  representatives  chosen  by  a  people ;  a  state  is  a 
division  of  a  republic,  having  laws  of  its  own  harmonizing 
with  the  general  government :  a  county  is  a  division  of  a 
state  or  kingdom. 

82.  A  limited  monarchy. 

83  China,  Persia,  Morocco,  and  the  most  of  the  half- 
civilized  countries  of  the  Eastern  Continent. 

84.  Five :  Caucasian,  Mongolian,  American  or  Indian, 
African,  and  Malay. 

85.  Four:  Christian,  Jewish,  Mohammedan,  and 
Pagan. 

86.  Three :  Protestants,  Roman  Catholics,  and  adher- 
ents of  the  Greek  Church. 

87.  The  Mohammedans  are  followers  of  the  'false 
prophet  Mohammed,  who  lived  in  Arabia  about  six  hundred 
years  after  Christ.  They  believe  in  one  God ;  they  con- 
sider Moses  and  Christ  as  true  prophets,  but  Mohammed 
as  the  greatest  and  last. 

S8.  The  Jews  reject  Christ  and  his  gospel,  and  expect 
a  Messiah,  yet  to  come. 

89.  The  greater  part  ot  the  inhabitants  of  Asia  and 
Africa,  nearly  all  of  the  tribes  of  the  islands  of  the  Pacific, 
and  the  Indians  of  America. 

90.  About  one-half  of  the  people  of  the  globe  are  Pa- 
gans, about  one-third  are  Christians,  nearly  one-sixth  are 
Mohammedans,  and  about  4,000,000  are  Jews. 


106  THE   QUESTION   BOOK. 

91.  Mississippi,  with  the  Missouri,  4,200;  Nile,  4,000; 
Amazon,  3,750;   Yenisei,  3,400. 

92.  Mississippi  proper,  2,800;  Missouri,  to  the  Missis- 
sippi, 2,900;  Mackenzie,  2,300;  Arkansas,  2,000;  Sas- 
katchawan,  1,900. 

93.  2,000. 

94.  Amazon;  La  Plata,  2,300;  Orinoco,  1,550;  San 
Francisco,  1,550. 

95.  Volga,  2,000;  Danube,  1,600;  Don,  1,000;  Dniep- 
er, 1. 000. 

96.  Yenisei;  Yang-tse-Kiang,  3,320;  Obi,  3,000;  Lena, 
2,700. 

97.  Nile;  Niger,  3,000;  Zambesi,  1,800;  Senegal,  1,200. 

98.  It  is  a  broad,  deep  river,  and  navigable  for 
large  vessels  about  2,400  miles>  and  for  steamboats  to 
the  foot  of  the  Andes.  The  tide  flows  up  600  miles.  Its 
waters  teem  with  alligators,  and  its  banks  are  lined  with 
almost  impenetrable  forests,  filled  with  huge  serpents, 
ferocious  beasts,  troops  of  monkeys,  swarms  of  insects, 
and  flocks  of  gaudily-colored  birds. 

99.  It  rises  in  Itasca  Lake,  and  is  navigable  to  the 
Falls  of  St.  Anthony,  which  are  very  heavy  rapids.     The 

•upper*  part  of  the  river^  in  many  places,  has  very  high  and 
rugged  banks,  while  in  Louisiana  levees,  or  banks  are  built 
to  prevent  inundations.  Its  mouth  is  not  favorable  for  the 
)  *  navigation  of  large  vessels.  Instead  of  being  broad  and 
clear  it  has  many  outlets,  and  sand-bars  are  continually 
forming. 

100.  This  river  is  very  rapid.  It  is  much  larger  than 
the  Mississippi  above,  and  is  navigable  to  the  Great  Falls 
above  Ft.  Benton,  where  there  are  some  of  the  grandest 
cataracts  in  the  world. 

loi.  Its  source  is  not  definitely  known.  It  flows 
through  a  rainless  district,  but  its  periodical  inundations 
make  the  valley   one  of  the  most   fertile  in  the  world. 


GEOGRAPHY.  107 

Above  its  mouth,  for  1,500  miles,  there  are    no   rivers  or 
creeks  which  flow  into  it. 

102.  It  is  a  great  estuary  200  miles  long,  and  formed 
by  the  union  of  the  Parana  and  Uraguay.  For  1,000 
miles  on  the  Parana  there  is  a  continuous  and  safe  navi- 
gation for  vessels  of  three  hundred  tons  burden. 

103.  This  country  is  nearly  as  large  as  Texas;  about 
three-fourths  of  its  area  consists  of  sandy  deserts.  The 
settled  portions  are  principally  in  the  valley  of  the  Nile, 
which  is  from  ten  to  twenty  miles  in  width.  Egypt  is  noted 
for  its  wonderful  ruins.  The  pyramids,  temples,  sphynxes, 
statues,  and  caves  hewn  in  the  rocks,  are  traces  of  its 
former  civilization. 

104.  Cross  the  Atlantic,  enter  the  Mediterranean  Sea; 
pass  through  the  Suez  canal;  down  the  Red  Sea  into  the 
Indian  Ocean;  pass  near  the  southern  points  of  Asia,  to 
Canton;  thence  across  the  Pacific,  to  San  Francisco;  then 
by  rail  across  the  continent  to  New  York. 

2d.  Sail  southwest  on  the  California  route  until  nearly 
opposite  Rio  Janeiro;  cross  the  Atlantic;  pass  Cape  of 
Good  Hope;  through  the  Indian  Ocean  to  the  East  In- 
dies; then  up  the  China  Sea  to  Canton;  cross  the  Pacific 
to  San  Francisco;  thence  to  Panama,  and  across  the  Isth- 
mus; then  north,  through  the  West  Indies,   to  New  York. 

105.  The  United  States. 

106.  Between  the  26th  and  49th.  The  distance  from 
the  southern  point  of  Texas  to  the  British  possessions  is 
about  1,600  miles. 

107.  It  is  about  45°  west  from  Washington,  and  about 
3,000  miles  from  New  York. 

108.  Kansas. 

109.  Cotton — United  States.  Sugar — West  Indies. 
Coffee — Brazil.     Rice  and  tea — China. 

no.  Cotton — South  America  and  Egypt.  Sugar — 
United  States  and  South  America.     Coffee — Java  Islands, 


108  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

West  Indies,  and  United  States.  Rice^United  States  and 
Egypt. 

III.  The  Spice  Islands  are  celebrated  for  the  produc- 
tion of  cloves,  nutmegs,  and  other  spices.  Java  produces 
more  pepper  than  all  other  countries  combined. 

IT 2.  The  unexpanded  flower  dried.  The  clove  tree 
grows  to  the  height  of  from  twenty  to  thirty  feet. 

113.  The  fruit  of  the  nutmeg  tree.  This  tree  is  about 
the  size  of  the  cominon  pear. 

114.  Several  ranges  near  each  other  and  connected. 

115.  The  Rocky,  Californian,  Alleghanian,  Andean, 
Parime,  and  Brazilian. 

116.  At  the  equator  the  length  of  the  days  are  equal, 
being  twelve  hours  each;  at  the  tropics  the  longest  day  is 
about  thirteen  and  a  half  hours ;  at  the  Polar  circles 
twenty-four  hours ;  at  the  Poles  six  months. 

117.  Rains  from  the  Pacific  are  of  rare  occurrence, 
and  the  height  of  the  Andes  range  prevents  the  rain-clouds 
from  the  east. 

118.  Manchester.  Lyons.  Belfast.    Sheffield.    Brussels. 

119.  Agriculture,  manufactures,  lumbering,  and  com- 
merce. 

120.  Grains,  butter,  cheese,  wool,  maple  sugar,  and 
live  stock. 

121.  On  the  Merrimac  and  Pawtucket  rivers. 

n  122.     From  the    extensive   quarries   in   Vermont   and 

Italy.  It  is  also  found  in  the  states  of  Maine,  Massachu- 
setts, and  Rhode  Island. 

123.  It  is  very  hard  rock,  and  much  used  for  millstones. 
It  is  fouAd  in  the  Eastern  States. 

124.  New  Hampshire. 

125.  1,300  square  miles.     183. 

126.  The  boundary  line  varies  by  taking,  as  it  appears 
to  be,  a  township  in  one  place  and  part  of  another  from 
the  state  of  Connecticut  and  giving  it  to  Massachusetts. 


GEOGRAPHY.  109 

127.  About  189,000  square  miles. 

128.  A  large  portion  of  it  is  traversed  by  mountain 
ranges.  The  great  agricultural  valley  lies  between  the 
Sierra  Nevada  and  coast  range,  and  extends  500  miles. 

129.  It  is  the  Sacramento  and  San  Joaquin  valley,  and 
derives  its  name  from  the  Sacramento  river,  which  rises  in 
the  northern  part  of  the  state,  and  the  San  Joaquin  which 
rises  in  the  southern  part.  These  rivers  flow  towards  each 
other  and  empty  into  a  branch  of  the   San  Francisco  Bay. 

130.  A  narrow  strait  about  four  miles  long,  which  is 
the  entrance  from  the  Pacific  Ocean  to  San  Francisco  Bay. 

131.  It  was  first  announced  at  the  close  of  the  year 
1848. 

132.  The  climate  is  noted  for  its  periodical  changes. 
There  are  two  seasons,  the  wet  and  the  dry.  In  the  lati- 
tude of  San  Francisco  the  wet  season  lasts  from  the  middle 
of  November  to  the  middle  of  May. 

133.  Richmond  is  about  twenty-five  miles  south. 

134.  About  230  miles. 

135.  The  northern  part  of  Patagonia. 

136.  It  is  a  little  larger  than  the  United  States,  con- 
taining about  3,230,000  square  miles. 

137.  Havana. 

138.  It  is  a  vast  peninsula,  occupying  the  southern 
half  of  the  Western  Continent.  Its  length  from  north  to 
south  is  about  4,000  miles,  and  its  greatest  breadth  is 
about  3,000.  Three  great  mountain  systems  diversify  the 
surface,  viz :  The  Andean,  which  stretch  along  the  western 
coast;  the  Parime,  which  consists  of  several  parallel 
ranges,  extending  from  east  to  west,  between  the  Orinoco 
and  Amazon  rivers ;  and  the  Brazilian  system,  which  con- 
s.ists  of  two  ranges  running  parallel  to  the  coast  of  Brazil, 
with  several  diverging  chains.  Between  these  mountain 
systems  extends  a  vast  plain.     This  plain  may  be  divided 


110  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

into  four  parts — the   region  of  the  llanos,    the  selvaSy  the 
pampas,  and  wastes  of  Patagonia. 

139.  They  are  level  grazing  tracts,  which  occupy  most 
of  the  region  of  the  basin  of  the  Orinoco.  During  the 
dry  season  they  are  parched  and  desolate;  but  with  the 
return  of  ram,  rich  pastures  are  abundant. 

140.  They  are  the  forest  plains  of  the  Amazon,  occu- 
pying the  lower  part  of  the  basin,  extending  as  far  as  the 
periodical  inundation. 

141.  These  tracts  are  in  the  Argentine  Republic,  and 
are  covered  with  a  heavy  growth  of  grass,  which  afford 
sustenance  to  great  herds  of  cattle  and  horses. 

142.  Sterile  tracts  covered  with  sand  and  gravel. 

143.  An  extensive  level  tract  considerably  elevated 
above  the  level  of  the  sea. 

144.  The  Great  Plateau  of  the  Andes;  the.  elevated 
plains  of  Quito,  Bogota,  and  Popayan;  and  the  table-lartd 
of  Brazil. 

145.  It  is  an  extensive  tract  of  lofty  table-land,  stretch- 
ing along  the  tops  of  the  Andes  between  parallels  3  °  and 
15  °  south  latitude,  with  an  elevation  of  nearly  13,000 
feet. 

146.  It  is  situated  under  the  equator,  on  the  side  of  a 
volcanic  mountain,  9,500  feet  above  the  sea.     The  climate 

-I        is  that  of  continued  spring.     Earthquakes  are    frequent. 
^       There  are  in  sight  eleven  summits  of  the  Andes  coverc<' 
with  perpetual  snow. 

147.  Volcanoes  of  Equador.  Chimborazo  is  a  peak 
of  the  Andes  range,  21,440  feet  high.  Cotopaxi,  18,900 
feet  high,  is  the  most  tremendous  volcano  in  the  world. 
The  flame  sometimes  rises  3,000  feet  above  the  top. 

148.  A  light  raft,  which  is  formed  of  inflated  skins  cov- 
ered with  a  light  platform.  These  are  used  for  unloading 
vessels  through  the  breakers,  which  continually  dash  upon 
the  shores  and  prevent  the  approach  of  any  ordinary  boat. 


GEOGRAPHY.  Ill 

149.  It  is  a  connecting  river  between  the  Orinoco  and 
Rio  Negro  rivers.  This  tract  of  country  is  so  level  that  a 
rise  or  fall  of  the  Orinoco  governs  the  course  of  that  river, 
which  flows  during  a  portion  of  the  year  into  the  Amazon, 
and  at  other  times  in  an  opposite  direction. 

150.  Twelve  and  a  half  degrees  north  of  the  equator. 

151.  Uruguay. 

152.  Sydney. 

153.  Buffalo. 

154.  Near  Cape  Verd. 

155.  It  projects  from  Horn  Island,  which  is  southwest 
from  Hermit  Island.  Cape  Horn  h^as  usually  been  given  as 
projecting  from  the  Isle  of  Hermit. 

156.  The  most  southern  part  of  the  inhabited  world, 
and  is  peopled  by  a  race  of  miserable  savages,  who  live 
chiefly  by  fishing.  These  islands  were  discovered  by 
Magellan,  in  1520,  and  so  named  by  him  on  account  of 
the  number  of  fires  he  saw  along  the  coast,  which  he  sup- 
posed to  be  eruptions  of  volcanoes.  The  meaning  of 
Terra  del  Fuego  is  land  of  fire. 

157.  It  was  taken  from  the  Spanish  word  Patago?i — 
a  man  with  large  feet.  Magellan  gave  the  inhabitants  of 
this  country  the  name  of  Patagonians  on  account  of  the 
apparent  large  size  of  their  feet,  which,  being  wrapped  in 
skins,  seemed  much  larger  than  they  really  were. 

158.  Cape  Gallinas,  St.  Roque,  Horn,  Parina. 

159.  It  is  in  Peru,  and  the  Ucayle  river  is  its  outlet. 
This  lake  is  the  source  of  the  Amazon. 

160.  With  the  exception  of  Lake  Titicaca  and  Lake 
Maracaibo,  they  are  more  like  vast  morasses  than  lakes. 

161.  Lake  Titicaca  is  a  saltish  lake,  about  half  as 
large  as  Lake  Erie,  and  is  situated  on  the  Great  Plateau 
nearly  13,000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 
Its  waters  are  inland,  having  no  outlet  to  the  ocean.    Lake 


112  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

Maracaibo  is,  more  properly  speaking,  a  bay  being  con- 
nected by  a  strait  with  the  Carribbean  Sea. 

162.  They  lie  off  the  coast  of  Peru,  and  are  of  great 
value  for  the  immense  quantities  of  guano  found  upon 
them. 

163.  French  Guiana,  which  contains  about  3,500  square 
miles,  or  about  the  size  of  Maine. 

164.  It  contains  nearly  one  half  of  the  peninsula. 

165.  It  consists  of  a  number  of  states  united  under  a 
government  modelled  after  that  of  the  United  States.  Uru- 
guay and  Paraguay  were  formerly  members  of  this  con- 
federation. 

166.  They  form  one  of  the  grandest  mountain  ranges 
in  the  world.  They  commence  in  low  hills  on  the  Isthmus 
of  Panama,  and  terminate  in  the  Island  of  Cape  Horn, 
which  is  a  bleak  and  naked  rock,  rising  3,500  feet  above 
the  sea.  In  Patagonia  they  rise  abruptly  from  the  shore ; 
but  farther  north,  they  are  from  60  to  100  miles  from  the 
coast.  They  consist  generally  of  parallel  ranges  of  lofty 
mountains,  with  high  valleys  and  table-lands  between.  This 
system  is  from  30  to  400  miles  wide. 

167.  Its  divisions  are  Rupert  Land,  and  the  British 
Provinces. 

168.  'J'he  Dominion  of  Canada,  which  includes  the  Pro- 
vinces of  Quebec,  Ontario,  New  Brunswick,  and  Nova 
Scotia;  Prince  Edward  Island  Newfoundland,  and  British 
Columbia. 

169.  A  governor  for  each  of  these  provinces  is  appoint- 
ed by  the  British  government.  Every  province,  however, 
elects  its  own  legislature,  and  in  a  great  measure  are  inde- 
pendent. The  Governor  of  Canada  is  Governor-General 
of  the  whole  of  British  America. 

170.  Ottawa,  like  Washington,  is  the  capital  of  the  sev^ 
eral  provinces,  or  states,  and  the  Canadian  Parliament,  like 


GEOGRAPHY.  113 

our  Congress,  meets  there  to  enact  general  laws.       The 
Governor-General  is  President. 

171.  It  comprises  the  greater  part  of  British  America, 
formerly  known  as  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  Territory, 
who  had  exclusive  right  to  the  fisheries  and  fur  trade  of 
this  vast  region. 

172.  The  south-western  part  of  British  America,  be- 
tween the  Rocky  Mountains  and  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and 
Vancouver's  and  Washington  islands. 

1 73.  Cape  Breton. 

174.  The  surface  is  generally  rocky  and  barren.  The 
coast  is  indented  by  deep  inlets,  which  form  many  excellent 
harbors.     It  is  noted  for  its  fisheries. 

1 75.  It  is  an  arm  of  the  sea,  which  almost  divides  the 
island  of  Cape  Breton. 

176.  The  small  islands  of  St.  Pierre  and  Miquelon. 
These  islands  lie  south  of  Newfoundland,  and  serve  as 
fishing-stations. 

177.  They  are  shallow  places  in  the  sea,  the  largest  of 
which  is  Grand  Bank,  and  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  island. 
This  bank  is  more  than  600  miles  long  and  250  broad. 

178.  It  is  situated  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
river.  It  is  a  barren  island  and  only  occupied  by  keepers 
of  light-houses  upon  the  coast. 

179.  South  Carolina,  Delaware. 

180.  On  Montreal  island.  This  island  is  32  miles  in 
length,  and  is  situated  at  the  junction  of  the  Ottawa  with 
the  St.  Lawrence.     The  isle  of  Jesus  lies  north  of  it. 

t8i.  For  the  grandeur  and  beauty  of  its  natural  scenery. 
Niagara  Falls,  the  Thousand  Isles,  and  Rapids  of  St.  Law- 
rence, the  falls  near  Quebec,  and  the  grand  scenery  of  the 
Saguenay  river,  are  the  admiration  of  thousands  of  tourists. 

182.  For  having  the  highest  tides  in  the  world,  which 
rise  to  the  height  of  seventy  feet. 

183.  Tides  are  elevations  and  depressions  of  the  ocean 


114  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

at  regular  intervals,  occurring  twice  in  twenty-four  hours ; 
the  neap  tides  are  the  least  ebb  and  flow  of  the  water  and 
are  at  the  close  of  the  first  quarter,  and  first  of  the  last 
quarter  of  the  moon ;  spring  tides  are  the  greatest  ebb  and 
flow  of  the  water,  which  occur  at  the  time  of  the  new  and 
the  full  moon. 

184.  The  attraction  of  the  moon  and  sun. 

185.  Waves,  tides,  and  currents. 

186.  The  action  of  the  winds  on  the  surface  of  a  body 
of  water.  On  the  ocean,  the  height  of  waves  produced 
by  storms  averages  from  10  to  20  feet. 

187.  They  are  like  vast  rivers,  transporting  its  waters 
from  one  part  to  another,  and  are  caused  by  the  heat  of  the 
sun,  rotation  of  the  earth,  the  saltness  of  the  sea,  by  winds, 
tides,  and  melting  ice. 

188.  Into  constant,  periodical,  and  temporary. 

189.  A  stream  which  runs  by  the  side  of,  or  beneath 
another  current,  and  in  an  opposite  direction. 

190.  The  position  of  the  bay  is  such,  that  the  Atlantic 
tide  is  forced  into  it,  and  the  waters  are  raised  by  this  pres- 
sure above  the  adjoining  sea. 

191.  Grain,  hemp,  flax,  potatoes,  lumber,  fish,  coal, 
grindstones,  and  gypsum. 

192.  Halifax,  Charlotte  Town,  St.  John's,  Frederic- 
town,  Ottawa,  and  New  Westminster. 

193.  Newfoundland. 

194.  The  Rapids  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  Niagara  Falls, 
and  falls  in  the  river  St.  Mary. 

195.  In  ascending  the  river,  the  rapids  are  avoided  by 
canals  on  the  left  bank ;  but  the  downward  passage,  though 
perilous,  is  made  by  the  river  itself.  The  Welland  Canal 
connects  lakes  Ontario  and  Erie,  thereby  avoiding  the  Falls 
of  Niagara.  The  falls  of  the  St.  Mary  river  are  passed  by 
a  ship  canal. 

196.  By  an  isthmus,  fourteen  miles  in  width. 


GEOGRAPHY.  115 

197.  Grand,  Navy,  and  Goat. 

198.  Into  three  divisions:  Malasia,  Australasia,  and 
Polynesia. 

199.  The  East  India  Archipelago,  which  lies  to  the 
southeast  of  Asia.  The  principal  divisions  are  the  Sunda 
Isles,  Spice  Islands,  Philippine,  and  Celebes. 

200.  Borneo,  Sumatra,  and  Java. 

201.  They  are  varied,  for  no  part  of  the  world  is  richer 
in  its  vegetable  productions.  The  minerals  are  also  valu- 
able. Nearly  all  of  the  spices  that  we  use — such  as  cinna- 
mon, cloves,  nutmegs,  and  pepper — are  raised  on  these 
islands.  The  bread-fruit  tree,  sago,  cocoanut  palm,  ba- 
nanas, yams,  and  various  tropical  fruits  are  grown  exten- 
sively. Coffee  is  exported  from  Java ;  gold  and  diamonds 
from  Borneo;  tin  from  Banca;  sugar,  hemp,  and  tobacco 
from  the  Philippine  Isles. 

202.  They  are  among  the  largest  and  fiercest  upon 
the  earth.  The  tiger,  rhinoceros,  elephant,  and  ourang- 
outang  are  found  in  Sumatra. 

203.  They  are  principally  Malays,  and  are  engaged  in 
maritime  pursuits,  many  of  which  are  pirates. 

204.  The  Dutch,  English,  Spanish,  and  Portuguese. 
Java,  the  Spice  Islands,  Sumatra,  Celebes,  a  part  of  Borneo, 
and  most  of  Timor  belong  to  the  Dutch;  the  Philippine 
Isles  to  Spain;  a  part  of  Borneo  and  Lapuan  to  the  Eng- 
lish; and  a  part  of  Timor  belongs  to  the  Portugese. 

205.  Batavia  and  Manilla. 

206.  Borneo  contains  about  260,000  square  miles,  Su- 
matra 125,000,  Java  52,000,  Celebes  46,000,  Phihppine 
66,000. 

207.  Pennsylvania. 

208.  The  torrid.  The  equator  crosses  Sumatra, 
Borneo,  Celebes,  and  some  of  the  Spice  Islands. 

209.  Most  of  them  are  mountainous,  and  many  con- 
tain active  volcanoes.   Java,  alone,  contains  forty-three. 


116  l-HE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

210.  With  the  exception  of  Java  they  are  not.  Java, 
which  is  about  the  size  of  Arkansas,  contains  16,000,000 
people. 

211.  This  is  the  largest  division  of  Oceanica,  and 
comprises  Australia,  Papua  or  New  Guinea,  Tasmania, 
New  Zealand,  New  Caledonia,  and  many  other  islands. 

212.  To  Great  Britain. 

213.  New  Caledonia. 

214.  North  Australia,  South  Australia,  West  Australia, 
Queen's  Land,  New  South  Wales,  Victoria,  and  Alexan- 
dra Land. 

215.  About  four-fifths  as  large  as  the  United  States. 

216.  Near  the  coast  are  mountain  ranges.  The  central 
regions  have  never  been  explored,  but  are  supposed  to 
consist  of  a  low,  barren  plain.  The  Murray  is  the  only 
river  of  much  importance. 

217.  The  greater  part  of  them  are  Europeans  and 
their  descendants.  The  natives  are  a  race  of  negroes, 
called  Papuans, 

218.  Mining  and  raising  wool. 

219.  The  largest  is  the  kangaroo.  The  most  singular 
one  is  the  platypus,  which  has  the  body  of  an  otter,  the 
bill  of  a  duck,  and  lays  eggs. 

220.  Melbourne,  Sydney,  Adelaide,  and  Perth. 

221.  It  is  not.  The  estimated  number  of  inhabitants 
is  only  a  million  and  a  half. 

222.  It  is  about  one-half  as  large  as  England,  and  is  a 
fine  agricultural  island,  inhabited  solely  by  European  col- 
onists. 

223.  It  is  situated  southeast  of  Asia.  These  islands 
are  mountainous,  and  the  inhabitants  belong  to  the  Malay 
race.  ^ 

224.  They  are  but  little  known.  There  are  no  white 
settlements  in  any  of  them  except  New  Caledonia. 


GEOGRAPHY.  117. 

225.  The  great  number  of  islands  which  are  scattered 
throughout  the  wide  expanse  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

226.  The  Sancfwich,  Society,  Friendly,  Marquesas, 
Caroline,  and  Ladrone. 

227.  They  are  divided  into  two  classes:  The  mountain- 
ous, which  are  principally  ot  volcanic  formation,  and  the 
low  islands,  which  are  the  work  of  the  coral  insect. 

228.  Most  of  the  natives  belong  to  the  Malay  race. 

229.  When  first  discovered,  these  islands  contained 
neither  insects  or  reptiles,  and  no  animal  larger  than  a  hog. 

230.  Honolulu,  on  Oahu,  one  of  the  Sandwich  Islands. 

231.  New  York,  Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey  and  Dela- 
ware. 

232.  New  York  contains  47,000  square  miles,  and 
Pennsylvania  46,000. 

233.  New  York  is  somewhat  undulating.  The  Cats- 
kill  and  Adirondack  mountains  are  in  this  state.  Penn- 
sylvania is  quite  mountainous :  here  the  Alleghany  system 
has  attained  its  greatest  breadth.  The  greater  part  of 
New  Jersey,  Delaware,  and  Maryland  is  a  low  and  gener- 
ally sandy  tract. 

234.  In  wealth,  population,  and  commercial  import- 
ance, it  holds  the  first  rank  in  the  Union. 

235.  Rochester  has  the  most  extensive  flour-mills,  and 
Syracuse  the  greatest  salt  works  in  the  country.  West 
Point  is  the  seat  of  the  United  States  Military  Academy, 
and  Saratoga  is  well-known  as  a  fashionable  watering 
place. 

236.  It  is  one  of  the  wealthiest  states  in  the  Union. 
Much  of  its  wealth  lies  in  mining  and  manufacturing ;  but 
it  is  also  rich  in  grain  and  live  stock. 

237.  The  mines  of  iron  and  coal  far  surpass  those  of 
any  other  state.  Petroleum  in  large  quantities  is  found  in 
the  northwestern  part. 

238.  Pittsburg  is  the  greatest  iron  manufacturing  city 


118  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

and  Philadelphia  is  the  greatest  manufacturing  city  in  the 
Union. 

239.  Chiefly  agricultural.  They  supply  New  York  and 
Philadelphia  with  vegetables. 

240.  Long  Branch,  Cape  May,  and  Atlantic  City. 

241.  With  the  exception  of  Rhode  Island,  it  is  the 
smallest  state  in  the  Union.  It  contains  2,120  square 
miles. 

242.  One  hundred  and  sixty-five  feet. 

243.  Into  three  divisions:  the  Greater  Antilles,  the 
Lesser  Antilles,  and  the  Bahamas. 

244.  Cuba,  Hayti,  Jamaica,  and  Porto  Rico. 

245.  The  chain  of  islands  which  extend  from  Porto 
Rico  to  South  America. 

246.  They  are  low  islands  of  coral  formation,  and  lie 
north  of  the  Greater  Antilles. 

247.  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico  belong  to  Spain ;  Jamaica, 
tjie  Bahamas,  and  most  of  the  Lesser  Antilles  belong  to 
Great  Britain;  Hayti  is  independent;  and  the  remaining 
islands  are  owned  by  France,  Denmark,  Holland,  and 
Venezuela. 

248.  They  consist  principally  of  whites,  free  negroes, 
and  slaves.     About  one-sixth  axe  white. 

249.     In  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico. 
J  J  250.     They  are  mountainous,  and   are  supposed  to  be 

the  remains  of  a  mountain   chain,  which  at  some  remote 
period,  connnected  North  and  South  America. 

251.  Tropical  fruits,  sugar,  coffee,  tobacco,  rum,  ma- 
hogany, and  spices. 

252.  Spirits  diptilled  from  molasses. 

253.  Into  two  distinct  states:  the  Republic  of  Domin- 
ica and  the  Republic  of  Hayti. 

254.  The  island  once  belonged  to  France  and  Spain. 
In  1 791,  the  slaves  in  the  western,  or  French  division,  rose 
against  their  masters,  and,   after  a  bloody  and  cruel  war, 


GEOGRAPHY.  119 

succeeded  in  establishing  themselves,  first  as  an  empire, 
then  as  an  independent  republic.  In  1849,  the  President 
(Soulouque)  proclaimed  himself  emperor,  with  the  title  of 
Faustin  I.  After  a  reign  of  ten  years,  Soulouque  was  deposed 
and  a  republican  form  of  government  was  again  adopted. 
In  182 1,  the  eastern  division  revolted  from  Spain,  and  form- 
ed a  republic. 

255.  They  are  east  of  the  United  States  and  belong  to 
Great  Britain.  There  are  about  400  of  these  islands. 
Most  of  them  are  so  small  and  barren  that  they  have  neither 
name  or  inhabitants. 

256.  Cuba  is  about  the  size  of  Pennsylvania,  andHayti 
is  about  half  as  large  as  Michigan,  containing  28,000 
square  miles. 

257.  Small  rocky  islands  of  coral  formation. 

258.  A  chain  of  rocks  lying  near  the  surface  of  the  water. 

259.  It  is  fringed  with  reefs,  and  as  many  of  the  rocks 
are  just  below  the  surface  of  the  water,  it  becomes  danger- 
ous to  navigation. 

260.  It  is  the  most  southern  town  in  the  United  States, 
and  is  situated  upon  an  island  of  coral  formation,  south- 
west of  the  main-land  of  Florida.  Its  exports  are  salt  and 
sponge. 

261.  By  solar  evaporation. 

262.  A  soft  porous  substance,  which  is  found  attached  to 
rocks  below  the  surface  of  the  water,  supposed  to  be  the 
work  of  marine  insects. 

263.  It  is  generally  level,  there  being  no  mountains  in 
the  state.  In  the  south,  dense  marshy  thickets,  called 
everglades,  cover  the  surface  for  a  distance  of  160  miles 
with  an  average  breadth  of  60  miles 

264.  Cotton,  corn,  sugar-cane,  rice,-  and  tobacco.  Trop- 
ical fruits,  such  as  oranges,  lemons,  figs,  pomegranates, 
pineapples,  olives,  &c.,  are  abundant. 


120  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

265.  It  is  near  the  southern  part  of  Florida,  and  is  a 
great  swamp  connected  with  the  everglades. 

266.  On  account  of  the  numerous  reefs,  or  keys,  which 
skirt  the  shores,  and  the  lowness  of  the  land  as  it  approaches 
the  sea. 

267.  Louisiana.  About  one-fifth  part  of  the  state  is  on 
the  east  side  of  the  river. 

268.  On  the  west  side.  It  is  the  greatest  cotton  mart 
in  the  world,  and  is  about  100  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the 
Mississippi.  It  is  built  round  a  bend  in  the  river,  and  there- 
fore is  called  the  "Crescent  City."  The  foundation  is  arti- 
ficial; having  been  built  on  a  swamp.  It  lies  below  the 
level  of  the  river,  but  is  protected  by  the  Levee,  which  at 
this  place  is  a  continuous  quay,  4  miles  long  and  100  feet 
wide. 

269.  It  is  various.  The  richest  tract  in  the  state  is  a 
narrow  belt  of  land,  from  one  to  two  miles  wide,  on  both 
sides  of  the  river,  extending  from  150  miles  above,  to  100 
miles  below  New  Orleans.  This  tract  is  annually  inun- 
dated by  the  spring  floods.  Only  a  small  part  of  the  state 
is  under  cultivation. 

270.  There  are  ten:  Washington,  Idaho,  Montana, 
Dakota,  Wyoming,  Colorado,  Utah,  Arizona,  New  Mexico, 
and  Indian  Territory. 

271.  Alaska  is  a  posession  of  the  United  States,  not  or- 
ganized into  a  territory.  The  District  of  Columbia  con- 
tains 60  square  miles,  and  is  situated  on  the  north  bank  of 
the  Potomac  river.  It  contains  the  cities  of  Washington 
and  Georgetown,  and  has  a  territorial  form  of  government. 

272.  It  has  an  area  of  577,000  square  miles,  or  more 
than  ten  times  that  of  Illinois.  The  climate  is  cold,  and 
with  the  exception  of  the  southern  point,  it  is  unfit  for 
civilization.  In  the  northern  i)art  the  coast  is  low  and 
maishy,  while  in  the  south  it  is  mountainous.      About  five 


GEOGRAPHY.  121 

hundred  whites,   and   70,000  Indians  and  Esquimaux  con- 
stitute the  inhabitants. 

273.  It  may  be,  for  there  are  extensive  forests  of  pine 
and  other  timber;  valuable  deposits  of  minerals;  great 
numbers  of  fur-bearing  animals;  and  almost  inexhaustible 
fisheries, 

274.  Sitka,  in  the  southern  part,  on  Baranoff  Island. 

275.  Greenland  and  Iceland. 

276.  It  has  not.  The  interior  and  northern  parts  are 
unknown,  and  the  supposition  by  some,  is,  that  the  island 
is  only  a  projection  of  an  Arctic  continent  not  yet  dis- 
covered. 

277.  It  was  named  by  an  Icelandic  chief,  who,  for 
some  crime,  was  obliged  to  flee  from  his  native  land.  To 
induce  his  countrymen  to  follow  him  to  Greenland,  he 
falsely  represented  it  to  be  superior  in  fertility  to  Iceland. 

278.  It  is  of  volcanic  formation.  Ranges  of  high, 
rugged  mountains  border  the  coast,  while  the  interior  is  a 
dreary  desert  of  volcanoes,  ice-clad  mountains,  or  fields  of 
lava. 

279.  The  Geysers,  or  boihng  springs.  About  fifty  of 
these  hot  springs  occupy  an  area  not  exceeding  twelve 
acres.  Some  are  so  powerful  that  they  throw  up  water, 
and  even  large  stones,  to  a  great  height. 

280.  The  nearness  to  Mount  Hecla,  which  is  thirty-five 
miles  distant,  or  the  volcanic  commotion  beneath. 

281.  It  was  so  called  by  a  Norwegian  pirate,  who,  on 
his  first  visit,  saw  a  bay  filled  with  ice,  which  had  floated 
there  from  Greenland. 

282.  Lichtenfels  and  Reikiavik. 

283.  About  4,000,000  square  miles. 

284.  From  north  to  south  it  is  about  5,000  miles,  and 
its  greatest  breadth  is  about   4,800, 

285.  Large  portions  of  it  have  not,  as  yet,  been  ex- 
plored.    The  shores  are  not  indented  by  deep  gulfs  or  in- 


122  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

lets,  which  is  one  of  the  principal  reasons  why  the  interior 
is  so  little  known.  The  surface  is  various.  There  are 
mountain  systems;  sandy  deserts;  and  elevated  plateaus. 
The  greater  part  is  in  the  torrid  zone,  and,  much  of  the 
country  being  desert  land,  it  is,  as  a  whole,  the  hottest  and 
dryest  grand  division  of  the  globe. 

286.  Except  the  northern  part  and  some  settlements  on 
the  coast,  the  inhabitants  are  negro  tribes,  whose  religion 
is  Paganism  and  their  condition  barbarous. 

287.  Morocco,  Algiers,  Tunis,  and  Tripoli. 

288.  Morocco  is  an  independent  empire.  Algiers  is  a 
colony  of  France.  Tunis  and  Tripoli  are  subjects  of 
Turkey. 

289.  It  is  from  750  to  1,200  miles  wide,  and  3,000  in 
length. 

290.  Cape  Colony,  Natal,  Caffraria,  the  Trans  Vaal 
Republic,  Orange  Free  States,  and  Zoolu,  Bechuna,  Nam- 
aqua,  and  Damara. 

291.  Cape  Colony  and  Natal  are  British  colonies.  The 
others  are  in  possession  of  independent  tribes. 

292.  It  is  on  the  western  coast  of  Africa,  and  is  a  negro 
republic,  with  a  government  modeled  after  that  of  the 
United  States.  Liberia  was  founded  in  182 1,  by  the 
American  Colonization  Society,  as  a  place  of  refuge  for 
free  blacks  and  liberated  slaves  from  the  United  States. 

293.  It  is  situated  above  Liberia,  and  was  founded  for 
the  same  purpose,  in  1787,  by  the  British  government. 

294.  They  differ  in  different  parts.  The  southern  por- 
tion exports  corn,  wine,  wool,  hides,  horns,  ivory,  gold,  and 
diamonds;  the  western  part,  ebony,  palm  oil,  gold  dust, 
and  ostrich  feathers ;  the  northern,  fruits,  wool,  hides,  gums, 
indigo,  salt,  leather,  cotton,  rice,  opium,  coffee,  and  many 
other  articles. 

295.  It  is  the  largest  of  the  African  islands,  containing 
240,000  square  miles.     It  is  a  mountainous  country,  and 


GEOGRAPHY.  123 

but  little  known.     Part  of  the    inhabitants   belong   to  the 
African  and  part  to  the  Malay  race. 

296.  Boise  City,  Virginia  City,  Yankton,  Cheyenne, 
Denver,  Salt  Lake  City,  Tucson,  Santa  Fe,  and  Tahlequah. 

297.  For  their  rich  gold  and  silver  mines,  and  the 
natural  advantages  for  grazing  and  stock-raising. 

298.  It  has  less  mountains  than  Idaho  or  Montana. 
Much  of  its  surface  consists  of  rolling  prairie  land,  well 
watered,  and  especially  adapted  for  farming  and  cattle- 
raising. 

299.  This  name  is  given  to  that  part  of  the  great  rail- 
road west  of  the  Missouri  river.  It  passes  through  the 
southern  part  of  Nebraska,  up  the  valley  of  the  Platte 
river,  touching  the  northern  boundary  line  of  Colorado, 
and  the  southern  part  of  Wyoming,  through  Northern 
Utah  and  Nevada,  and  thence  through  California  to  the 
Pacific  Ocean. 

300.  Omaha,  Fremont,  Columbus,  Kearney,  Julesburg, 
Cheyenne,  Laramie,  and  Ogden. 

301.  It  is  on  the  Jordan  river,  near  Great  Salt  Lake, 
south  of  the  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  on  a  branch  of  that 
road. 

302.  It  contains  the  Great  Salt  Lake  and  the  eastern 
portion  of  the  Great  Basin,  which  is  the  most  desolate 
region  in  the  United  States.  Rain  seldom  falls  in  this 
Basin,  but  some  portions  near  the  rivers  and  lakes  have 
been  made  fertile  by  irrigation  Gold,  silver,  iron,  salt, 
coal,  and  other  minerals  are  plentiful. 

303.  For  grazing. 

304.  By  tribes  of  Indians,  and  large  herds  of  wild 
horses  and  buffaloes, 

305.  Cotton,  corn,  sugar,  tobacco,  rice,  and  tropical 
fruits.  Stock-raising  is  the  principal  business  of  the  in- 
habitants. 

306.  A  great  portion  of  the  state  is  much  elevated,  and 


124  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

therefore  free  from  extremes  of  heat  and  cold.  Snow  is 
seldom  seen,  but  from  October  to  March,  the  "Northers" 
(violent  winds)  sweep  over  the  prairies  of  Texas  and  plains 
of  Mexico. 

307.  Maine,  New  Hampshire,  Vermont,  New  York, 
Michigan,  Minnesota,  Dakota,  Montana,  Idaho,  Wash- 
ington. 

308.  Wisconsin,  Illinois,  Kentucky,  Tennessee,  Missis- 
sippi, on  the  east,  and  Minnesota,  Iowa,  Missouri,  Arkan- 
sas, and  most  of  Louisiana,  on  the  west. 

309.  Ohio,  Indiana,  and  IlKnois,  from  Kentucky  and 
West  Virginia. 

310.  It  is  more  irregular  than  that  of  any  other  division 
of  the  earth.  Large  seas  and  gulfs  penetrate  far  into  the 
interior,  affording  unequaled  advantages  for  commercial 
intercourse. 

311.  It  is  divided  into  extensive  plains  and  mountain 
systems.  Southern  Europe  is  crossed  from  west  to  east 
by  a  great  mountain  system,  which  is  continued,  in  Asia, 
to  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Northward  from  this  system  ex- 
tends a  great  plain,  which  stretches  from  the  Atlantic  to 
the  Pacific. 

312.  Caucasus,  Balken,  Alps,  Cevennes,  Pyrenees,  and 
Cantabrian. 

313.  Russia,  Northern  Germany,  Denmark,  Holland, 
Belgium,  and  a  part  of  France. 

314.  It  varies  in  the  same  latitude.  In  Eastern  Eu- 
rope the  winters  are  excessively  cold ;  while  the  summers 
are  very  hot.  On  the  shores  of  the  Atlantic  the  warm 
ocean  current  renders  the  climate  mild  and  moist. 

315.  Russia,  Austria,  Germany,  and  Turkey  are  empires ; 
Great  Britain,  Norway  and  Sweden,  Denmark,  Holland, 
Belgium,  Spain,  Portugal,  Italy,  and  Greece  are  kingdoms ; 
France  and  Switzerland  are  republics. 


GEOGRAPHY.  125 

316.  Great  Britain,  Russia,  Germany,  P'rance,  and 
Austria. 

317.  Scandinavian,  Jutland,  Iberian,  Italian,  Moreaand 
Crimea. 

318.  It  comprises  Sweden  and  Norway,  two  distinct 
states,  with  separate  governments,  but  are  united  under  one 
king.  Nearly  the  whole  of  Norway  and  the  eastern  part 
of  Sweden  are  mountainous.  The  southeastern  part  of 
Sweden  is  a  level  plain. 

319.  Iron,  copper,  lumber,  and  fish. 

320.  1,400  miles.  These  grains  are,  rye,  oats  and  barley.. 

321.  The  southern  point  of  Greenland. 

322.  It  is  in  that  part  of  Europe  north  of  the  Arctic 
Circle,  and  between  the  White  Sea  and  Atlantic  Ocean. 
It  belongs  to  Russia,  Sweden  and  Norway. 

323.  It  is,  by  a  tribe  of  the  Mongolian  race,  called 
Laplanders,  who  own  numerous  herds  of  reindeer,  which 
supply  them  with  food,  clothing  and  means  of  travelling. 

324.  It  is  the  largest,  in  extent,  in  the  world,  com- 
prising fully  one-half  of  Europe,  and  more  than  one-third 
of  Asia. 

325.  For  the  most  part  it  is  very  level.  The  only^ 
mountainous  section  in  European  Russia,  is  between  the 
Azov  and  Caspian  seas. 

326.  Into  four  classes:  ,  i — The  nobles.  2 — The 
clergy.  3 — The  merchants.  4 — The  lately  emancipated 
serfs. 

327.  It  is  an  absolute  monarchy.  The  greater  part  of 
the  inhabitants  are  adherents  of  the  Greek  Church. 

328.  In  its  forests  (two-fifths  of  the  country  is  covered 
with  forests),  and  the  products  of  agriculture  and  grazing. 

329.  In  Central  and  Southern  Russia. 

330.  It  is  mostly  a  sterile  region,  and  has  the  appearance 
of  having  been  subjected  to  volcanic  fires.  Salt  lakes  and 
fire-hills  are  numerous. 


126  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

331.  It  is  an  inland  sea,  containing  140,000  square 
miles,  and  below  the  level  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea, 
Several  large  rivers  flow  into  it,  but  there  is  no  visible  out- 
let. 

332.  I.arge,  barren  plains  in  southeastern  Russia. 
^^;^.     Poland  is  that  part  of  Russia  lying  north  of  Aus- 
tria.    Circassia  is  the  region  of  the  Caucasus  mountains. 

334.  Near  Central  Russia,  on  a  branch  of  the  Oka 
river.  It  is  a  railroad  center,  and  one  of  the  principal 
cities  for  trade.  It  was  burned  during  Napoleon's  invasion 
of  181 2,  to  defeat  him,  by  having  no  protection  for  his 
troops  in  winter. 

335.  For  the  siege  which  it  sustained  for  one  year, 
against  the  English,  French,  Turkish,  and  Sardinian  armies. 

336.  It  was  one  of  the  strongest  Russian  fortifications, 
and  was  a  perpetual  menace  to  Turkey.  Its  destruction 
ended  the  Crimean  war. 

337.  The  Cossacks  are  the  inhabitants,  and  are  of 
great  service  to  the  Russian  army  as  light  cavalry. 

338.  A  great  fair  is  held  there  every  year,  which  is  at- 
tended by  thousands  of  people  who  come  from  different 
parts  of  Europe  and  Asia  to  buy  and  sell  goods. 

339.  St.  Petersburg,  Cronstadt,  Riga,  Archangel,  and 
Odessa. 

340.  Caspian,  Azov,  Black,  Baltic,  White,  and  Kara; 
Riga,  Finland,  Bothnia,  Onega,  and  Petchora. 

341.  Great  Britain,  Ireland,  and  many  small  adjacent 
islands. 

342.  England,  Scotland  and  Wales. 

343.  England  and  Ireland  are  generally  level  or  undu- 
lating; Scotland  and  Wales  are  rugged  and  mountainous. 

344.  It  is  divided  by  the  Grampian  Hills  into  the  High- 
lands and  Lowlands.  The  Highlands  lie  north,  and  the 
lowlands  south  of  the  mountains. 


GEOGRAPHY.  127 

345.  It  is  very  irregular,  and  abounds  in  fine  harbors 
and  roadsteads. 

346.  It  is  moist  and  mild.  The  winters,  even  of  Scot- 
land, are  rarely  severe.  The  moisture  of  the  climate  and 
low  temperature  in  summer  sometimes  prevent  crops  from 
maturing.     Corn  will  not  ripen. 

347.  In  her  commerce,  manufactures  and  mining. 

348.  She  surpasses  every  other  country  in  the  world. 
The  principal  manufactures  are  those  of  cotton,  wool,  and 
iron. 

349.  Europe,  285,000,000;  Asia,  790,000,000;  Africa, 
188,000,000;  North  America,  50,500,000;  South  America, 
24,500,000;  Australia,  3,500,000. 

350.  Principally  from  Cornwall  (England)  and  the  is- 
land of  Banca.  The  mines  of  Cornwall  have  been  famous 
from  remote  antiquity. 

351.  Peat,  or  bog  turf,  of  which  there  are  over  3,000,- 
000  acres. 

352.  It  has  colonies  in  every  quarter  of  the  globe,  and 
unites  under  one  sovereign  a  greater  number  of  people  than 
are  ruled  by  any  other  government. 

353.  Gibraltar,  in  Spain,  and  the  islands  of  Malta  and 
Gozo. 

354.  British  India,  including  Ceylon,  Hindoostan,  a 
part  of  Farther  India,  and  Singapore ;  the  island  of  Hong 
K-ong,  and  the  city  of  Aden. 

355.  Sierra  Leone,  and  orner  settlements  on  the 
western  coast;  Cape  Colony  and  Natal;  the  islands  of 
Sychelle,  Mauritius,  Ascension,  and  St.  Helena. 

356.  Australia,  Tasmania,  New  Zealand,  N'orfolk, 
Labuan,  and  a  part  of  Borneo. 

357.  British  America,  Bermuda  Isianas,  Balize,  Jamaica, 
Bahama  Islands,  and  many  of  the  Lesser  Antilles,  British 
Guiana,  and  the  Falkland  Islands. 

358.  Liverpool,  for  its  great  commerce.     Its  fine  dock 


128  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

covers  more  than  400  acres.  Leeds  and  Bradford,  for 
their  manufactures  of  wool;  Birmingham,  for  hardware; 
Limerick,  for  the  manufacture  of  gloves,  laces,  and  fish- 
hooks; Merthyr  Tydvil,  for  its  iron-works. 

359.  It  is  the  principal  plateau  of  Europe,  the  whole 
central  part  of  which  consists  of  a  series  of  lofty  plains, 
divided  from  each  other  by  parallel  mountain  chains.  This 
plateau  comprises  93,000  square  miles,  or  nearly  one-half 
of  the  peninsula. 

360.  The  vine,  olive,  mulberry,  and  orange.  Large 
flocks  of  sheep  are  raised  on  the  table-lands  of  the  interior. 

361.  The  40th  parallel.  It  passes  through  central 
United  States,  or  New  Jersey,  Southern  Pennsylvania, 
Ohio,  Indiana,  Illinois,  Northern  Missouri,  Central  Ne- 
braska and  Kansas,  Colorado,  Utah,  Nevada,  and  North- 
ern California. 

362.  Southern  Italy  and  Turkey. 

363.  Turkey,  Georgia,  Turkistan,  Pekin,  and  the  Em- 
pire of  Japan. 

364.  In  the  northeastern  part  of  the  Spanish  Peninsula, 

365.  The  population  is  only  5,000  or  6,000,  but  the 
country  has  been  independent  for  more  than  a  thousand 
years. 

366.  Cuba,  Porto  Rico,  a  part  of  the  Philippine,  La- 
drone,  Caroline,  and  the  Canary  islands. 

367.  Twelve  miles  in  its  narrowest  place. 

368.  It  is  situated  on  a  mountainous  promontory,  and  is 
the  strongest  fortification  in  the  world. 

369.  It  contains  204,000  square  miles. 

370.  As  one  of  the  richest  and  most  powerful.  The 
position  of  the  country  and  the  fertility  of  the  soil  give  it 
great  commercial  and  agricultural  advantages. 

371.  The  eastern  portion  is  mountainous,  while  tne 
rest  belongs  to  the  Great  Plain,  which  extends  across  the 
continent. 


GEOGRAPHY.  129 

372.  They  are  plains  of  shifting  sands,  in  the  south- 
western, part  of  France. 

373.  PVance  exports  more  wine,  brandy,  and  silk  goods 
than  any  other  country, 

374.  The  influence  of  fashions. 

375.  Algeria,  Senegal,  Pondicherry,  Isle  of  Bourbon, 
New  Caledonia,  Marquesas  Islands,  French  Guiana,  St. 
Pierre  and  Miquelon,  Martinique,  Guadeloupe,  and 
Corsica. 

376.  In  Holland,  stock-raising  and  dairying  are  the 
chief  pursuits.  Belgium  is  an  agricultural  and  manufac- 
turing country;  it  also  has  extensive  mines  of  coal  andiron. 

377.  It  is  so  low  that  in  many  places  dikes,  or  em- 
bankments, are  necessary  to  prevent  inundations. 

378.  By  numerous  canals.  In  Holland  especially, 
canals  run  through  the  principal  streets  of  the  towns,  and 
and  form  a  complete  network  over  the  country. 

379.  An  arm  of  the  sea,  or  gulf,  which  indents  the 
northern  part  of  Holland. 

380.  The  people  of  Holland. 

381.  It  is  nearly  flat;  some  portions  are  below  the  sur- 
tace  of  the  sea,  from  which  it  is  defended  by  dykes. 

382.  On  the  eastern  coast  of  the  island  of  Zealand, 
and  partly  on  the  adjacent  island  of  Amok.  Many  of  the 
buildings  are  built  above  the  water. 

^S;^.  The  kingdoms  of  Prussia,  Bavaria,  Wurtemburg, 
and  Saxony;  six  grand  duchies;  five  duchies;  seven 
principaHties ;  three  free  cities;  and  the  new  State  of 
Alsace. 

384.  Hamburg,  Bremen,  and  Lubeck. 

385.  It  was  formerly  a  part  of  France,  but  since  the 
late  Franco-Prussian  war  it  was  ceded  to  Germany. 

386.  Hamburg  and  Bremen. 

387.  Nearly  the  whole  of  Germany  is  under  cultivation, 


130  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

and  large  crops  of  wheat,  rye,  barley,  oats,  tol)acco,  beet- 
root, and  linseed  are  produced. 

388.  Sandy  tracts  in  Northern  Germany  and  Denmark. 

389.  They  are  of  different  races.  The  Germans, 
Hungarians,  Italians,  and  Poles  are  most  numerous. 

390.  On  eighty-two  small  islands,  separated  Dy  150 
canals  crossed  by  360  elevated  bridges. 

391.  An  important  kingdom  of  Central  Europe,  but, 
after  suffering  many  reverses,  it  was  divided  between 
Russia,  Germany  and  Austria. 

392.  Switzerland. 

393.  It  is  composed  of  twenty-two  states,  or  cantons. 
It  is  about  one-third  as  large  as  the  state  of  New  York. 

394.  For  their  love  of  liberty,  and  attachment  to  their 
native  country.  Most  of  the  population  speak  the  Ger- 
man language.  Italian  and  French  are  spoken  in  the 
cantons  adjoining  Italy  and  France. 

395.  For  the  manufacture  of  watches  and  jewelry. 

396.  It  was  formerly  divided  into  a  number  of  states, 
but  after  a  protracted  struggle,  the  efforts  of  the  people  to 
obtain  national  unity  were  successful,  and  the  whole  country 
is  now  united  under  a  liberal  and  enlightened  government. 

397.  It  was  the  central  part  of  the  Roman  Empire, 
which  ruled  all  the  known  world. 

♦  I  398.     Almost   every  place  is   connected  with   some  re- 

markable event,  which  is  renowned  in  history  or  art. 

399.  It  is  a  small  republic,  with  an  independent  gov- 
ernment, on  the  Adriatic  Sea. 

400.  Italy. 

401.  It  comprises  Turkey  in  Europe,  Asiatic  Turkey, 
Isle  of  Candia,  and  Egypt.  Tripoli  and  Tunis  are  nominally 
under  the  control  of  the  government. 

402.  They  are  a  grave  and  solemn  people, — ignorant, 
bigoted,  and  indolent.     Their  reHgion  is  Mohammedanism. 

403.  This  country  was  in  advance  of  all  other  nations 


GEOGRAPHY.  131 

in  civilization  and  learning,     Athens  was  the  birthplace  of 
many  renowned  philosophers  and  orators. 

404.  It  is  very  irregular,  projecting  southward,  and  hav- 
ing many  indentations  from  the  sea,  one  of  which,  the  gulf  oi 
Lepanto,  nearly  separates  it,  forming  the  peninsula  of 
Morea,  which  is  connected  with  the  mainland  by  the  isthmus 
of  Corinth. 

405.  St.  Petersburg,  Stockholm,  Copenhagen,  Berlin, 
Hague,  Brussels,  Paris,  Madrid,  Lisbon,  Rome,  Vienna, 
Athens,  Constantinople,  Berne,  London,  Edinburgh. 

406.  The  United  States. 

407.  Hammerfest. 

408.  Mexico,  Central  America,  West  Indies,  and  the 
greater  part  of  South  America. 

409.  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico. 

410.  The  interior  consists  of  table-lands,  from  4,000  to 
9,000  feet  high.  The  Pacific  coast  is  abrupt,  and  abounds 
in  fine  harbors;  but  upon  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  it  is  flat 
and  sandy,  and  deficient  in  good  harbors. 

411.  Only  by  two  carriage  roads;  one  by  Jalapa,  from 
Vera  Cruz;  the  other  by  Saltillo,  from  Matamoras  and 
Monterey. 

412.  As  Mexico  contains  high  and  lowlands,  it  exhibits 
a  great  variety  of  climate.  In  ascending  from  the  coast  to 
the  surface  of  the  plateau,  there  are  three  regions:  the 
hot,  swampy  and  pestilential  lowlands ;  the  temperate  re- 
gions; and  the  cold,  desolate  plains  above. 

413.  Whites,  Indians,  and  mixed  races.  The  Ir.dians 
and  mixed  races  form  the  greater  part  of  the  population. 

414.  The  wet  and  dry.  The  rainy  season  continues 
from  May  to  October,  and  the  dry  from  October  to   May. 

415.  They  vary  with  climate.  Wieat  and  barley  are 
produced  in  the  cooler  regions,  and  cotton,  tobacco,  sugar- 
cane, tropical  fruits  and  spices  in  the  plains  and  valleys 
below. 


132  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

416.  Gold  and  silver,  iron  and  copper. 

417.  It  is  situated  in  a  plain,  7,000  feet  above  the  level 
of  the  sea,  enclosed  by  lofty  mountains.  The  city  is  about 
two  miles  from  Lake  Tezcuco ;  is  in  the  form  of  a  square, 
and  noted  for  its  numerous  churches,  convents,  and 
squares. 

418.  Popocatapetl  and  Iztaccihuatl.  The  former  is 
17,717  feet  high,  and  its  name  signifies  Smoking- Mountain. 
The  latter  is  15,600  feet  high,  and  is  White  Lady. 

419.  The  cochineal  is  an  insect  which  feeds  on  a 
species  of  cactus.  When  killed  and  dried  in  the  sun  it 
yields  a  brilliant  crimson  dye.  Pulque  is  a  favorite  Mexi- 
can beverage,  manufactured  from  the  Maquey  plant.  It  is 
intoxicating. 

420.  In  152 1.  Fernando  Cortez,  a  Spanish  adventurer, 
conquered  the  country.  He  found  an  extensive  kingdom, 
with  regular  laws,  and  with  cities,  temples,  public  roads, 
and  many  of  the  arts  of  civilization.  After  the  conquest 
the  cruelty  of  the  Spaniards  drove  the  Indians  back  into 
a  state  of  barbarism.  In  182 1  Mexico  became  independ- 
ent of  Spain,  and  established  first  an  empire,  then  a  re- 
publican form  of  government.  The  people  are  restless, 
and  revolutions  have  been  common.  By  the  war  with  the 
United  States  she  lost  valuable  territory. 

421.  Yucatan  and  Old  California.  These  parts  are  but 
little  known.  Yucatan  is  noted  for  its  ruins  of  ancient 
cities  and  temples. 

422.  Five  states:  Guatemala,  Honduras,  San  Salvador, 
Nicaragua,  and  Costa  Rica.  This  country  bears  a  general 
resemblance  to  Mexico. 

423.  Comayagua,  San  Salvador,  Managua,  Nicaragua, 
and  San  Jose. 

424.  It  is  situated  south  of  the  eastern  part  of  Yuca- 
tan.    It  belongs  to  the  British. 


GEOGRAPHY.  133 

425.  Mahogany  and  other  hard  cabinet  wood,  cochi- 
neal, tortoise  shells,  sarsaparilla  and  cocoa-nuts. 

426.  Across  the  isthmus  of  Panama;  by  way  of  the 
San  Juan  river  and  Lake  Nicaragua ;  and  by  the  Isthmus 
of  Tehuantepec. 

427.  About  one-fourth  as  large. 

428.  North,  temperate  and  torrid.  The  Tropic  of  Can- 
cer in  the  central  part. 

429.  In  Northern  Michigan  and  Wisconsin. 

430.  In  southwestern  Wisconsin  and  parts  of  Illinois 
and  Iowa  which  adjoin. 

431.  Cotton,  tobacco,  rice,  sugar,  corn,  and  sweet  po- 
tatoes. 

432.  Cotton — Alabama.  Rice — South  Carolina.  Sugar — 
Louisiana.  Tobacco — Kentucky.  Sweet  potatoes — 
Georgia.     Wheat — California.      Corn — Illinois. 

433.  Swine — Illinois.  Cattle — Texas.  Horses — Illi- 
nois.    Mules — Alabama.     Sheep — Ohio. 

434.  Gold — California.  Silver  —  Nevada.  Iron  — 
Pennsylvania.  Copper — Michigan.  Lead — rlUinois.  Coal — 
Pennsylvania.  Lumber — Michigan.  Turpentine,  etc. — 
North  Carolina. 

435.  Turpentine  and  resin  are  made  of  the  sap  of  the 
pitch  pine,  by  boiling ;  turpentine  is  the  vapor,  while  resin, 
like  sugar,  is  what  remains.  Tar  is  also  made  from  the 
pitch,  but  by  burning;  the  timber  having  been  placed  in 
nearly  a  perpendicular  position,  and  covered  to  prevent  a 
flame,  the  heat  causes  the  pitch  to  ooze  out  and  run  below 
where  it  can  be  saved. 

436.  From  her  pine  forests. 

437.  On  account  of  the  abundance  of  palmetto  trees, 
which  grow  there,  it  is  often  called  the  Palmetto  State. 

438.  Corn. 

439.  The  Atlantic  Slope,  the  Pacific  Slope,  and  the 
Central  Plain. 


184  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

440.  The  country  which  extends  from  the  Alleghany 
Mountains  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean  and  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

441.  The  country  between  the  Rocky  Mountains  and 
the  Pacific  Ocean. 

442.  The  Mississippi  Valley,  the  Texas  Slope,  the 
basin  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  and  the  small  valley  of  the  Red 
River  of  the  North. 

443.  The  St.  Lawrence  Basin,  Atlantic  Slope,  Missis- 
sippi Valley,  Texas  Slope,  Pacific  Slope,  inland  Basin  of 
Utah,  and  Red  river. 

444.  It  is  crossed  by  a  system  of  mountains,  table- 
lands and  plains. 

445.  They  are  divided  into  two  classes:  Those  of 
Central  and  those  of  Southern  Asia.  They  are  the  loftiest 
and  most  extensive  in  the  world. 

446.  Turkistan  and  Siberia.  This  is  a  continuation  of 
the  great  plain  of  Europe. 

447.  It  commences  with  the  Ta.urus  Mountains,  and  is 
continued  by  the  Elborz  and  Hindoo  Koosh  to  the  Balor 
Mountains.  From  this  point  it  branches  off  into  four 
great  chains — the  Himalaya,  Kuen  Lun,  Thian  Shan,  and 
Alti — which  are  the  grandest  and  most  stupendous  moun- 
tains upon  the  globe. 

448.  It  is  near  the  central  part  of  Asia,  south  of  the 
jj        Thian  Shan  mountains.     This  desert  is  only  a  part  of  an 

immense  belt  of  desert  land,  which  extends  almost  across 
the  continent  from  west  to  east. 

449.  Into  three  divisions:  that  of  Northern,  Central, 
and  Southern  Asia. 

450.  It  is  characterized  by  intense  cold,  with  short  in- 
tervals of  great  heat  during  summer. 

451.  It  is  a  great  plain,  comprising  more  than  one-third 
of  Asia.  Near  the  Arctic  Ocean,  it  is  a  barren  and  deso- 
late region,  and  the  cold  is  so  intense  that  the  spongy  soil 
is  frozen  to  the  depth  of  several  hundred  feet.     Near  the 


GEOGRAPHY.  135 

Irtysh  river  the  soil  is  rich,  and  pasturage  good,  but  there 
are  few  inhabitants. 

452.  Central  Asia  has  the  dimate  of  the  temperate 
zone.  It  is  subject  to  great  extremes  of  heat  and  cold, 
and,  except  near  the  shores  of  the  Pacific,  is  remarkably 
dry — for  the  mountain  system  intercepts  the  warm  and 
moist  winds  of  the  Indian  Ocean.  Southern  Asia  has  the 
climate  of  the  torrid  zone. 

453.  Mongolian,  Caucasian,  and  the  Malay. 

454.  Those  nations  living  north  of  the  Himalaya  moun- 
tains, those  of  ]^arther  India,  the  Japanese,  and  Turks. 

455.  The  Georgians,  Armenians,  Arabs,  Persians, 
Afghans,  and  Hindoos. 

456.  The  Peninsula  of  Malacca,  and  many  of  the  is- 
lands of  Oceanica. 

457.  Caucasian  race,  564,500,000;  Mongolian,  535,- 
500,000;  Ethiopian,  180,000,000;  Malay,  55,000,000; 
American,  or  Indian  race,  15,000,000.  Total,  1,350,- 
000,000. 

458.  As  a  place  of  banishment  for  exiles  and  criminals. 
A  large  portion  of  the  population  consists  of  them  and  their 
descendants. 

459.  It  is  a  Russian  province.  The  people  are  a  vig- 
orous and  handsome  race. 

460.  The  name  given  to  the  rulers  of  the  several  inde- 
pendent states  of  Turkistan. 

461.  China,  Thibet,  and  Chinese  Tartary  (Corea,  Mon- 
golia, Mantchooria,  and  Soongaria). 

462.  So  dense  is  the  population  in  some  districts  that 
great  numbers  of  the  inhabitants  dwell  constantly  upon 
boats  in  the  rivers,  or  on  rafts  in  the  lakes,  which  they  con- 
vert into  gardens  by  covering  them  with  earth.  They  are 
a  very  industrious  people,  but  deceitful  and  very  immoral, 
and  jealous  of  Europeans. 


136 


THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 


463.  The  most  important  are  rice,  tea  and  silk.  Rice 
is  the  chief  article  of  food  for  the  entire  population. 

464.  A  despotic  monarchy.  The  laws  are  severe ;  for 
trifling  offences  punishment  with  the  bamboo  is  inflicted, 
while  serious  crimes  almost  always  meet  with  death. 

465.  Canton,  Shanghai,  Ningpo,  Fuchow,  Amoy 

466.  Niphon,  Sikoke,  Kiusui,  and  Jcsso. 

467.  Rice,  wheat,  barley,  tea,  tobacco,   and  camphor. 

468.  Hindoostan  and  Farther  India. 

469.  Into  the  kingdoms  of  Burmah  and  Siam,  the  em- 
pire of  Anam,  the  interior  state  of  Laos,  and  that  part  of 
British  India  on  the  east  side  of  the  Bay  of  Bengal. 

470.  Calcutta,  Pondicherry,  Goa,  Ava,  Bangkok,  and 
Hue. 

471.  The  chief  productions  are  rice  and  cotton. 

472.  A  despotic  monarchy.  The  sovereign  is  called  a 
shah. 

473.  The  greater  part  is  a  desert  plateau.  The  princi- 
pal fertile  tracts  are  Oman  and  Yemen,  and  the  mountain 
valleys. 

474.  The  greater  portion  of  them  are  Bedouins,  who 
are  a  wandering  people  and  inhabit  the  deserts,  devoting 
themselves  to  the  care  of  their  camels,  horses,  goats,  and 
sheep.  They  are  generous  and  hospitable,  but  quarrel- 
some, revengeful,  and  addicted  to  plunder. 

)i  475.  Mecca  is  regarded  by  the  Mohammedans  as  a 
holy  city,  and  is  annually  visited  by  vast  numbers  of  pilgrims. 
Medina  is  the  burial  place  of  Mohammed. 

476.  The  southeastern  part  of  Anam. 

477.  Arabia,  Hindoostan,  Farther  India,  Corea,  and 
Kamtschatka. 

478.  It  connects  Malacca  with  the  main  land. 

479.  Sirikol,  the  source  of  the  Amoo  river,  on  the 
table-land  of  Pamer,  is  15,600  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
sea. 


GEOGRAPHY.  137 

480.  Behring,  40  miles;  Dover,  30;  Gibraltar,  12. 

481.  Panama,  27  miles;  Tehuantepec,   130;  Suez,  65. 

482.  Australia,  Greenland,  Borneo,  New  Guinea,  and 
Madagascar. 

483.  The  Pacific  Ocean  contains  about  82,000,000 
square  miles;  greatest  width  10,000  miles.  The  Atlantic, 
30,000,000;  wddth  5,000.  The  Indian  22,000,000,  width 
6;000.  Antarctic,  12,000,000;  and  the  Arctic  4,000,000. 

484.  By  Captain  Perry,  in  1827,  502  miles  from  the 
pole.     By  Captain  Ross,  in  1842,  803  miles  from  the  pole. 

485.  London,  3,311,000;  Paris,  1,852,000 ;  Pekin, 
1,648,000;     Canton,  1,000,000. 

486.  New  York,  942,000;  Tientsin,  930,000 ;  Vienna, 
834,000;    Berlin,  825,000. 

487.  New  York;  Philadelphia — 674,000;  Brooklyn — 
396,000;  Chicago — 325,000;  St.  Louis — 320,000. 

488.  Coal,  iron,  salt,  lead,  and  tin. 

489.  Mississippi,  Missouri,  Arkansas,  Rio  Grande, 
Columbia,  Nebraska,  and  Red. 

490.  Of  the  Chinese  Empire,  470,000,000;  Japan,  37,- 
000,000;  Hindoostan,  200,000,000;  United  States,  40,- 
000,0000. 

491.  It  is  a  little  more  than  one-fourth  as  large  as  the 
United  States,  and  contains  about  420,000,000  people. 

492.  That  part  of  the  heavens  which  appears  to  meet 
the  earth. 

493.  For  drainage,  commerce,  and  milling. 

494.  Philadelphia,  Columbus,  Indianapolis,  Springfield, 
Denver,  Pekin,  Constantinople,  and  Madrid. 

495.  The  boundary  line  between  the  states  of  Missis- 
sippi, Alabama,  and  Georgia,  from  Tennessee. 

496.  Cape  Horn  is  53°  south,  and  Good  Hope  about 
32  o. 

497.  Commercial  cities  require  good  harbors  and  water 


138  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

communication  to  faciliate  commerce;  while  manufactur- 
ing cities  depend  very  much  upon  water  power  to  run  their 
machinery. 

498.  Lakes  of  this  class  lose  water  by  evaporation 
only,  and  retain  the  salt  and  other  materials  carried  into 
them  by  their  affluent  rivers. 

499.  Cotton,  wheat,  pork,  cheese,  machinery. 

500.  Wool,  tea,  coffee  and  spices,  dry-goods,  sugar, 
and  liquors. 


QUESTIONS 


ON 


English    Grammar. 


1.  What  IS  English  Grammar  ? 

2.  Into  what  parts  is  it  divided? 

3.  Of  what  does  pronunciation  treat? 

4.  Define  etymology. 

5.  Of  what  does  syntax  treat? 

6.  Ofwhat  does  prosody  treat? 

7.  What  is  the  basis  of  grammar? 

8.  Ofwhat  does  language  consist? 

9.  What  is  a  part  of  speech?     How  many r 

10.  How  are  nouns  divided? 

11.  What  is  a  collective  noun? 

12.  What  is  an  abstract  noun? 

13.  What  is  a  participial  noun? 

14.  When  does  a  proper  noun  become  a  common  noun? 

15.  When  does  a  common  noun  become  proper? 

16.  What  is  the  office  of  a  pronoun? 

17.  What  is  the  antecedent  of  a  pronoun? 

18.  Into  what  classes  are  pronouns  divided? 

19.  What  is  a  personal  pronoun  ?     Name  them. 

20.  Where  are  thou,  thy^  thine,  thee  a.ndye  used  ? 

21.  In  parsing,  how  are  the  pronouns  ours,  yours,  hers^ 
theirs  and  mine  disposed  of  ? 

22.  What  peculiarity  about  the  pronoun  /// 

23.  What  is  a  compound  personal  pronoun  ? 


140  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 


24 

26 
27 
28 
29 


What  is  a  relative  pronoun? 


To  what  are  the  relatives  who  and  which  applied? 
How  is  the  relative  what  used? 
When  is  oj  a  relative  pronoun?     When  is  thafi 
What  are  the  compound  relative  pronouns? 
What  is  an  interrogative  pronoun? 
30      What    is  a  responsive,    or  indirect    interrogative 
pronoun  ? 

31.  What  is  an  adjective  pronoun?     How  many? 

32.  To  what  do  distributive  pronouns  relate? 

'i^'Ti'  What  is  the  difference  between  the  demonstrative 
and  indefinite  pronouns? 

34.  What  do  the  reciprocal  pronouns  denote? 

35.  How  should  either,  neither,  each  other,  and  one  an- 
other be  used? 

36.  How  should  this  and  that  be  used? 

37.  What  properties  have  nouns  and  pronouns? 

38.  When  are  objects  personified? 

39.  In  personified  objects  when  is  the  masculine  gen- 
der preferred? 

40.  When  is  the  feminine  gender  preferred? 

41.  What  are  the  methods  of  distinguishing  the  two  sexes? 

42.  When  and  how  are  proper  nouns  made  plural? 

43.  What  class  of  nouns  is  generally  used  in  the  singu- 
lar number?     How  may  they  be  used  in  the  plural  ? 

•f  44.     When  is  a  collective  noun  singular?     When  plural? 

45.  How  are  most  nouns  made  plural? 

46.  How  are  most  compound  words  made  plural? 

47.  How  are  the  titles  Mr.,  Mrs.,  Miss  and  Dr.  made 
plural  ? 

48.  How  is  the  plural  of  foreign  nouns  formed? 

49.  How  are  foreign  words  ending  in  a,  us,  urn  ox  on,  is, 
X  or  ex  changed  to  form  the  plural?  Form  the  plural  of 
the  following  words  •  formula,  larva,  nebula,  vertebra,  focus, 
radius,  sarcophagus,  stimulus,  phenomenon,  datum,  analysis, 


GRAMMAR.  141 

synthesis,  axis,  basis,   crisis,   emphasis,   oasis,   parenthesis, 
thesis. 

50.  How  are  letters  and  figures  made  plural? 

51.  How  is  the  editorial  we  used? 

52.  What  is  case?     Name  them. 

53.  When  is  a  noun  or  pronoun  used  in  the  different 
cases? 

54.  When  is  a  noun  or  pronoun  used  independently? 

55.  How  is  the  possessive  case  denoted? 

56.  How  can  the  possessive  case  be  expressed  without 
the  apostrophe  ? 

57.  When  are  two  terms  in  opposition?     When  is  one 
predicated  by  the  other?  In  what  must  these  terms  agree? 

58.  How  is  a  compound  term  expressed  in  the  posses- 
sive case? 

59.  When  is  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the   same   case   as 
another? 

60.  In  how  many  cases    are  compound  personal  pro- 
nouns used  ? 

61.  Decline  who,  which,  what,  and  that. 

62.  When  may  that  have  two  cases? 

63.  What  is  declension? 

64.  How  are  the  articies  the,  a,  and  an  used? 

65.  Why  are  a  and  an  both  called  the  indefinite  arti- 
cles? 

66.  When  should  a  be  used? 

67.  When  should  an  be  used? 

68.  What  is  an  adjective? 

69.  How  are  the  adjectives  divided?  Define  each  class. 

70.  Into  what  smaller  classes  are  adjectives  divided? 

71.  Define  a  common  adjective. 

72.  Define  a  proper  adjective. 

73.  What  is  a  participial  adjective? 

74.  What  is  a  compound  adjective? 

75.  What  is  a  numeral  adjective? 


142  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

76.  How  are  the  numeral  adjectives  divided?     Define 
them. 

77.  What  is  a  pronominal  adjective? 

78.  Into  what  classes  are  the  pronominals  divided? 

79.  What  is  comparison?     How  many  degrees? 

80.  Define  the  positive  degree.     Comparative.    Super- 
lative. 

81.  What  parts  of  speech  have  comparison? 

82.  How  are  degrees  below  the  positive  expressed. 

83.  When  should  more  or  most  in  comparison  be  pre- 
ferred? 

84.  Must  adjectives  always  agree  with  their  substan- 
tives in  number? 

85.  When  does  an  adjective  become  a  noun? 

86.  What  is  a  verb?     A  regular  verb?     An  irregular 
verb? 

87.  What  are  the  principal  parts  of  a  verb? 

88.  Why  are  these  called  the  principal  parts? 

89.  What  is  a  redundant  verb?     A  defective  verb?     A 
finite  verb? 

90.  What  parts  of  a  verb  are  not  finite? 

91.  What  is  a  transitive  verb?     An  intransitive  verb? 

92.  When  may  a  transitive  verb  become  intransitive? 

93.  When  may  an  intransitive  verb  become  transitive? 
♦  I             94.     What  is  a  neuter  verb? 

95.  What  is  a  principal  verb?     An  auxiliary  verb? 

96.  What  properties  have  verbs? 

97.  Define  voice,  mode,  tense. 

98.  What  are  the  person  and  number  of  a  verb? 

99.  When  is  a  verb  in  the  active  or  passive  voice? 

100.  How  is  a  verb  in  the  active  voice  changed  into 
tlie  passive? 

10 1.  To  what  verbs  does  voice  belong? 

102.  How  many  modes  are  there? 


GRAMMAR.  143 

103.  "Wliat  does  a  verb  in  the  indicative  mode  express? 
In  the  subjunctive?     In  the  potential?    In  the  imperative? 

104.  How  many  tenses  in  each  of  the  modes? 

105.  What  are  the  signs  of  the  tenses? 

106.  What  are  the  forms  of  a  tense? 

107.  How  is  the   emphatic  form  of  a  verb  expressed? 

108.  How  is  the  passive  form  expressed?  The  pro- 
gressive? 

109.  What  is  the  ancient  form? 

no.  How  is  a  proposition  made  interrogative?  How 
made  negative? 

111.  When  the  subject  consists  of  words  differing  in 
person,  how  is  the  form  of  the  verb  or  pronoun  deter- 
mined ? 

112.  What  is  an  impersonal  verb? 

113.  What  properties  have  auxiHary  verbs? 

114.  Which  are  auxiliary  verbs? 

115.  Which  are  sometimes  principal  verbs? 

116.  When  is  it  proper  to  use  shall  and  should 2 

117.  When  is  it  proper  to  use  will  and  would? 

118.  When  are  do,  be  and  hai'e  principal  verbs? 

119.  What  is  an  infinitive?     How  many? 

120.  How  is  the  present  infinitive  formed,  and  what 
does  it  denote  ? 

121.  How  is  the  perfect  infinitive  formed,  and  what 
does  it  denote? 

122.  When  is  to,  the  sign  of  the  infinitive,  omitted? 

123.  What  is  a  participle ?     How  many? 

124.  Howis  the  present  participle  formed?  What  does 
it  represent? 

125.  Howis  the  perfect  participle  formed?  What  does 
it  represent? 

126.  "What  voice  have  participles  ? 

127.  What  is  a  compound  participle? 


144  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

128.  What  do  beings  having  and  having  been  express  in 
relation  to  participles? 

129.  What  are  some  of  the  chief  particulars  in  which 
participles  and  infinitives  agree?  Some  in  which  they 
differ? 

130.  What  is  the  conjugation  of  a  verb? 

131.  What  is  the  synopsis  of  a  verb? 

132.  What  forms  of  a  verb  are  called  composite? 

a.  Conjugate  lie^  to  repose;  lie^  to  speak  falsely;  dare, 
to  venture ;  bear,  to  carry. 

b.  Give  the  principal  parts  of  the  following  verbs: 
drink,  lay,  rose,  build,  eat,  sow,  dive,  gone,  set,  sit,  get,  bid, 
dig,  slay,  thrust,  was. 

c.  Give  the  synopsis  of  the  verb  eat,  in  the  third  per- 
son, singular  number,  indicative  mode,  passive  voice. 

d.  Give  a  synopsis  of  the  verb  run,  in  the-  first  per- 
son, singular  number,  interrogative  form,  in  the  indicative 
and  potential  modes. 

133.  What  is  an  adverb?  How  are  most  of  them 
formed? 

134.  What  is  a  conjunctive  adverb? 

135.  Into  what  classes  are  adverbs  divided? 

136.  What  is  the  difference  in  the  use  of  an  adjective 
and  adverb? 

a.  Classify  the  following  adverbs:  Now,  much, 
more,  so,  well,  here,  whither,  everywhere,  to-morrow,  for- 
ever, daily,  enough,  nearly,  yesterday,  aloud,  hither,  whence 
forth,  away,  often,  little,  yet,  too,  nevertheless,  together, 
to-day.  yonder,  out,  somewhat. 

137.  How  can  we  ascertain  to  what  class  adverbs  be- 
long? 

138.  What  is  a  preposition?  An  adjunct?  To  what 
does  an  adjunct  relate? 

139.  What  may  a  substantive,  governed  by  a  preposi- 
tion, be! 


GRAMMAR.  145 

140.  When  does  a  preposition  become  an  adverb? 

141.  What  is  a  conjunction?     Correlative  connective? 

142.  What   is    the    difference   between    analysis    and 
synthesis? 

143.  What  is  parsing? 

144.  What  is  relation?    Agreement?     Government? 

145.  What    is    a    sentence?     Clause?      Proposition? 
Phrase? 

146.  What  is  a  declaratory   sentence?    Interrogatory? 
Imperative?  Exclamatory? 

147.  What  is  a  simple   sentence?    Compound?    Com- 
plex? 

148.  What  is  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  sentence? 

149.  What  is  the  logical  and  grammatical  subject  and 
predicate  of  a  sentence? 

150.  What  is  discourse?     Of  what  may  it  treat? 

151.  What  is  a  paragraph  ? 

152.  What  is  analysis  based  upon? 

153.  What  are  elements  of  sentences? 

154.  What  must  every  proposition  have? 

155.  What  is  a  modifier?     How  many  kinds? 

156.  By  what  may  a  noun   and  pronoun  be  modified? 

157.  By  what  may  a  verb  be  modified? 

158.  When  an  infinitive  or  participle  is  used  as  a  noun? 
What  i/iodifiers  do  they  take  ? 

159.  What  parts  of  speech  are  never  modified? 

160.  What  kinds  of  words  are  connectives? 

161.  In  the  analysis  of  phrases,  what  forms  are  given? 

162.  What  part  of  a  sentence  is  considered  the  most 
important? 

163.  When  may  a  subordinate  element  occupy  the  chief 
place? 

164.  What  is  a  period  in  grammar? 

165.  In  what  do  all  the  errors  of  language  consist? 

166.  What  is  a  figure  ii\  grammar? 


146  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

167.  What  is  aphoeresis?    Syncope?   Apocope?    Pros- 
thesis? Paragoge?   Tmesis? 

168.  What   is   ellipsis?     Aposiopesis?    Zengma?   Ple- 
onasm? 

169.  What  is  a  simile?    Metaphor?    Allegory?   Synec- 
doche? 

170.  What  is  antithesis?    Irony?    Paralipsis?    Hyper- 
bole? 

171.  What  is  euphemism?  Interrogation?  Exclamation? 

172.  What  is  versification?     Verse? 

173.  What  is  rhyme?     Blank  verse? 
1.74.  What  is  a  couplet?     Stanza? 


)* 


ANSWERS 


TO 


Questions  on  English.  Grammar. 


1.  The  science  of  speaking  and   writing  the   EngUsh 
language  correctly. 

2.  Pronunciation,  orthography,   etymology,  syntax  and 
prosody. 

3.  Of  the  sounds  of  letters  and  syllables. 

4.  It  treats  of  the  different  parts  of  speech,  their   deri- 
vation and  modification. 

5.  Of  the  arrangement  and  relation  of  words  in  sentences. 

6.  Of  versification,  punctuation,  figures  and  utterance. 

7.  The  usage  of  the  best  authors. 

8.  Of  sounds,  which,  combined,  form  words  which  rep- 
resent ideas. 

9.  Classes  of  words,  differing  according  to  their  usage 
and  meaning. 

10.  Into   proper   and   common;  and  the  common  are 
divided  into  collective,  abstract  and  verbal. 

11.  One  that  denotes  a  collection. 

12.  The  name  of  some  quality  of  a  substance. 

13.  A  participle  or  infinitive  used  as  a  noun. 

14.  When  it  is  used  to  denote  a  whole  class;  as,  "The 
Washingtons  of  the  world  are  few. " 

15     When  personified,  or  used  as  a  proper  noun. 
16.     To  avoid  the  repetition  of  nouns. 


148  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

1 7.  The  word,  phrase,  or  clause,  which  the  pronoun  rep- 
resents. 

18.  Personal,  relative,  interrogative  and  adjective. 

19.  One  which  distinguishes  the  persons.  I,  thou  or 
you^  he,  she  and  it,  with  their  compounds  and  declined 
forms,  are  the  personal  pronouns. 

20.  In  the  Bible  and  addresses  to  the  Deity,  and  fre- 
quently, in  poetry. 

21.  As  these  words  are  equivalent  to  a  noun  and  pro- 
noun, the  parsing  should  correspond  with  the  words  which 
they  represent. 

22.  The  antecedent  of //is  sometimes  considered  lost, 
when  the  pronoun  denotes  merely  the  state  or  condition  of 
things,  or  a  point  of  time,  or  when  it  introduces  a  sentence 
and  is  explained :  as,  It  rains.  It  is  twelve  o'clock.  It  was 
moonlight.  It  is  mean  to  take  advantage  of  another's  dis- 
tress. Some  authors  consider  it  in  the  above  examples  as 
having  no  antecedent,  yet,  if  we  observe  closely  there  may 
be  one  somewhat  remote ;  as,  in  the  first  example,  we  might 
use  clouds  for  the  antecedent;  in  the  second  example,  time; 
in  the  third,  night;  and  in  the  last  example  we  might  use 
act  for  the  antecedent :  as,  the  act  is  mean,  &c. 

23.  My,  thy,  your,  him,  her,  or  //,  compounded  with 
self  to  form  the  singular;  and  our,  your,  and  them,  com- 
pounded with  selves  to  form  the  plural. 

24.  A  pronoun  that  joins  a  descriptive  clause  to  its  an- 
tecedent. 

25.  Who  is  applied  to  persons  only;  which  to  persons 
or  things. 

26.  What  is  used  in  place  of  that  which  or  things  whichy 
and  may  denote  persons  or  things. 

Note — This  idea,  of  forming  an  antecedent  for  //,  has  been  given 
to  provoke  discussion  and  impress  the  mind  with  the  peculiarity  of  this 
pronoun. 


GRAMMAR.  149 

27.  When  preceded  by  such^  many^  or  same,  and  relates 
to  the  objects  thus  specified,  that  is  a  relative  pronoun, 
when  it  is  equivalent  to  who,  whom  or  which. 

28.  Who,  which,  and  what,  with  ever  and  soever 
annexed. 

29.  One  used  to  ask  a  question. 

30.  One  used  indirectly  as  an  interrogative;  as,  "Tell 
rae  what  truth  is. " 

31.  An  adjective  that  is  sometimes  used  as  a  pronoun. 
They  are  divided  into  four  classes ;  distributive,  demonstra- 
tive, indefinite,  and  reciprocal. 

32.  They  relate  to  objects  taken  singly,  and  are  ecu:h, 
either,  and  neither. 

33.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  point  out  objects 
definitely,  while  the  indefinite  relate  to  objects  indefinitely. 
The  demonstratives  are  this,  these,  that,  those,  satne,  former, 
latter.  The  indefinites  are  one,  ones,  other,  others,  any, 
some,  such,  all,  both,  and  none. 

34.  The  same  signification,  and  consequently  are  con- 
vertible, and  may  be  used  for  each  other. 

35.  In  speaking  of  two,  either,  neither,  and  each  other 
should  be  used;  but  in  speaking  of  more  than  two,  one  an- 
other, 

36.  TJiat  shoula  be  applied  to  the  more  distant,  the  first 
mentioned,  or  the  absent;  this,  to  the  nearer,  the  last 
mentioned  or  the  present. 

37.  Gender,  person,  number,  and  case. 

38.  When  they  are  regarded  as  persons.  Nouns  thus 
used  have  gender  by  personification. 

39.  When  the  character  of  the  object  denotes  size, 
power,  or  domineering  qualities;  as,  "The  Sun  seemed 
shorn  of  his  beams."  "Lo,  steel-clad  ?^dJr  his  gorgeous 
standard  rears. " 

40.  When  the  character  of  the  object  is  noted  for 
beauty,    amiability,    productiveness,    or    submission;    as. 


150  THE    QUESTION   BOOK.  » 

"  Soon  Peace  shall  come  with  all  her  smiling  train. "  The 
earth,  moon,  and  ship,  when  personified,  are  given  the 
feminine  gender. 

41.  By  different  words,  different  endings,  and  by  a  dis- 
tinguishing word;  as,  father,  mother;  eitiperor,  empress; 
/«««-servant,  maid-SQr\2Xi\. 

42.  When  they  refer  to  a  class  of  the  same  character^ 
they  are  made  plural  by  adding  s  when  it  does  not  coalesce 
in  sound,  otherwise  es;  as,  the  Cherokees;  the  Napoleons; 
the  twelve  Caesars. 

43.  The  names  of  substances,  actions,  states,  qualities, 
arts,  sciences,  and  diseases,  when  they  refer  to  the  kind  of 
thing;  but  when  different  kinds  are  meant  they  are  plural; 
as,  wine^  wines;  tea.,  teas;  fever ^  fevers;  religion^  religions. 

44.  When  the  whole  collection  is  regarded  as  one 
thing,  it  is  singular,  but  plural  when  different  collections 
are  meant,  or  when  it  refers  to  the  individuals  composing 
the  collection ;  as,  army^  armies;  congregation,  congregations; 
most  people  are  eager  to  succeed. 

45.  By  adding  s  to  the  singular;  but  those  ending  in  /, 
0,  «,  y,  and  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  j,  x^  sr,  sh^  and 
soft  ch,  add  es. 

46.  By  making  plural  that  part  described  by  the  rest; 
as,  mouse-trapj,  cup-fulU. 

47.  Mr.,  Dr.  and  Miss  are  made  plural  by  annexations; 
as,  Messrs.,  Drs.,  Misses.  When  the  title  is  Mrs.,  or  when 
a  numeral  stands  before  the  title,  the  noun  is  made  plural; 
as,  the  Mrs.  Browns,  the  two  Miss  Smiths. 

48.  Most  of  them  retain  their  foreign  plural  when  used 
in  the  English  language. 

49.  When  the  ending  is  a,  it  is  changed  to  ce  or  ataj  us 
is  changed  to  i,  um  or  on  to  a,  is  to  es  or  ideSy  x  or  ex  to 
ces  or  ices. 

50.  By  annexing  'j. 

51.  To  represent  one  person. 


GRAMMAR.  151 

52.  The  property  of  nouns  and  pronouns  which  shows 
their  relation  to  other  words.  They  are  nominative, 
possessive,  and  objective. 

53.  In  the  nominative  when  it  is  the  subject  of  a  verb; 
in  the  objective  when  it  is  the  object  of  a  verb  or  preposi- 
tion ;  and  in  the  possessive  when  il  denotes  possession. 

54.  By  direct  address.  ^^John,  your  father  is  here." 
By  exclamation,  "Alas,  poor  Yorick  T'  By  pleonasm  or 
specification,  ^^ He  that  hath  ears,  let  him  hear." 

55.  By  adding  the  apostrophe  and  s,  fexcept  when  the 
word  ends  in  j-,  when  the  apostrophe  only  is  added. 

56.  By  using  of^  or  by  making  the  possessive  word  an 
adjectiv-.     "The  death  of  Socrates,"  "Soldiers'  Home." 

57.  When  a  verb  joins  the  terms,  one  is  predicated  of 
of  the  other:  as,  "He  is  president;"  but  when  no  verb  joins 
them,  the  latter  term  is  in  apposition  with  the  former;  as, 
"Webster,  the  orator."     These  terms  must  agree  in  case. 

58.  It  takes  the  possessive  sign  but  once;  generally  at 
the  end,  or  next  to  the  name  of  what  is  owned.  The  court- 
mar  tiaVs  decision.     Daniel  Webster's  oration. 

59.  When  it  denotes  the  same  person, or  thing. 

60.  Only  in  the  nominative  and  objective  cases,  and 
then  they  retain  the  same  form. 

61.  Nominative  ivho^  possessive  w^^i-^,  objective  «/^<?w/ 
which  and  what  have  the  same  form  in  the  nominative 
and  objective,  but  borrow  whose  for  their  possessive.  That 
is  not  declined. 

62.  When  it  is  a  relative,  and  equivalent  to  that  which. 

63.  A  regular  arrangement  of  the  grammatical  properties 
of  a  noun  or  pronoun. 

64.  The  is  used  to  point  out  a  particular  one,  object  or 
class;  while  a  or  an  is  used  to  show  that  no  particular  one 
of  a  class  is  meant. 

65.  They  have  the  same  meaning,  therefore  used  in  the 


152  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

same  class.     One  is  a  later  and  the  other  an  earlier  form  of 
the  same  word. 

66.  Whenever  the  next  word  begins  with  a  consonant 
sound. 

67.  Whenever  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel  sound. 

68.  A  word  used  to  qualify  or  limit  the  meaning  of  a 
noun  or  pronoun. 

69.  Into  two  chief  classes :  descriptive  and  definitive. 
The  descriptive  describes  or  qualifies ;  the  definitive  speci- 
fies or  limits. 

70.  Into  common,  proper,  numeral,  pronominal,  par- 
ticipial, and  compound. 

71.  The  common  adjective  expresses  quality. 

72.  A  proper  adjective  is  derived  from  a  proper  name. 

73.  A  participle  used  as  an  adjective. 

74.  A  compound  word  used  as  an  adjective. 

75.  One  that  expresses  number. 

76.  Into  cardinal,  ordinal,  multiplicative,  and  indefinite. 
The  cardinals  are  one^  two,  etc. ;  the  ordinals,  Jirsty  second, 
etc. ;  the  multiplicative,  single,  double;  the  indefinite,  few, 
many. 

77.  One  sometimes  used  as  a  pronoun. 

78.  The  distributive,  demonstrative,  and  indefinite. 

79.  A  variation  in  the  form  of  adjectives  and  adverbs 
to  denote  the  different  degrees  of  meaning.  There  are 
three  degrees :  positive,  comparative,  and  superlative. 

80.  The  positive  expresses  the  quality  of  the  adjective; 
the  comparative  expresses  the  quality  in  a  higher  or  lower 
degree ;  the  superlative  expresses  the  quality  in  the  highest 
or  lowest  degree. 

81.  Adjectives  and  adverbs. 

82.  Usually  by  adding  less  and  least, 

83.  Usually  with  adjectives  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
or  those  of  two  syllables  that  do  not  end  in  le  or  y. 


GRAMMAR.  153 

84.  Yes:  although  the  substantive  is  not  always  ex- 
pressed. 

85.  When  it  is  used  abstractly,  or  in  place  of  a  noun  of 
which  it  expresses  quality;  as,  the  briny  deep^  the  good. 

86.  A  word  used  to  state  the  act  or  state  of  the  subject. 
A  regular  verb  is  one  that  forms  its  past  tense  by  adding 
ed;  an  irregular  verb  does  not  add  ed. 

87  The  present  tense,  past  tense,  present  participial, 
and  perfect  participial. 

ZZ.  ^y  the  means  of  these  and  the  auxiliary  verbs  all 
the  other  parts  of  the  verb  can  be  formed. 

89.  A  redundant  verb  is  one  that  has  more  than  one 
form  for  some  of  its  principal  parts.  A  defective  verb  is 
wanting  in  some  of  its  principal  parts.  A  finite  verb  pred- 
icates the  act  or  state  of  its  subject. 

90.  The  infinitives  and  participles. 

91.  One  that  has  or  requires  an  object.  An  intransitive 
does  not  have  or  require  an  object. 

92.  When  it  is  the  chief  design  to  set  forth  the  act,  and 
leave  the  object  unknown.     She  reads  well. 

93.  In  poetical  expressions,  in  a  causitive  sense,  and  in 
idiomatic  expressions;  as,  to  march  armies,  I  laughed  myself 
hoarse. 

94.  One  that  does  not  express  action  or  state. 

95.  A  principal  verb  expresses  the  chief  act  or  state. 
An  auxiliary  verb  helps  other  verbs  to  express  their  gram- 
matical properties. 

96.  Voice,  mode,  tense,  person  and  number. 

97.  Voice  shows  whether  the  subject  does  or  receives 
the  act.  Mode  is  manner  of  assertion.  Tense  expresses 
time. 

98.  The  form  of  the  verb  to  agree  with  the  Subject. 

'  99.  In  the  active,  when  the  subject  acts,  in  the  passive 
when  it  receives  the  act. 

100.     By  using  the  object  of  a  verb  for  the  subject. 


154  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

loi.     To  transitive  verbs  only. 

102.  Four:  indicative,  subjunctive,  potential,  and  im- 
perative.    Some  grammarians  add  the  infinitive  mode  ? 

103.  The  indicative  indicates  or  declares  a  fact.  The 
potential  expresses  power,  possibility,  liberty,  inclination, 
duty,  and  necessity.  The  subjunctive  expresses  a  wish, 
an  uncertainty,  or  future  contingency.  The  imperative 
commands,  or  entreats. 

104.  Six  in  the  indicative;  three  in  the  subjunctive — 
the  present,  past,  and  past-perfect ;  the  potential,  four — 
the  present,  present-perfect,  past,  and  past-perfect;  the 
imperative,  one — the  present  tense. 

105.  In  the  indicative  mode  have  is  the  sign  of  the 
present-perfect  tense;  had  the  sign  of  the  past-perfect; 
shall  or  will^  of  the  future ;  shall  have  or  will  have,  of  the 
future  perfect;  the  present  or  past  tense  is  a  ve'rb  in  its 
simplest  form,  expressing  present  or  past  time.  The 
signs  of  the  present  potential  are  may,  ca?i,  musi\  of  the 
present-perfect,  may  have,  can  have,  must  have\  of  the 
past,  might,  could,  would,  should;  of  the  past-perfect,  might 
have,  could  have,  would  have,  should  have.  The  three 
tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mode  are  the  same  in  form  as  the 
indicative,  except  in  the  singular  number  of  the  present 
and  past  tense,  which  takes  the  plural  form  without  varia- 
tion. The  imperative  has  the  same  form  as  the  present  in- 
dicative. 

106.  The  different  ways  in  which  it  can  be  expressed; 
as  the  common  form,  the  emphatic,  the  progressive,  the 
passive,  and  solemn. 

107.  It  denotes  emphasis  and  is  expressed  by  do  or  didy 
as  a  part  of  the  verb. 

108.  By  combining  the  verb  be,  or  some  of  its  varia- 
tions, ynth.  the  perfect  participle.  The  progressive  form 
represents    the   continuation  of  the  act  or  state,  and  is 


GRAMMAR.  155 

fbnned  by  combining  the  verb  be,  or  some  of  its  variations, 
with  the  present  participle. 

109.  The  old  common  form  that  is  still  used  in  the 
solemn  style.  It  uses  thou  ox  ye  and  has  the  ending  /,  st  or 
estiox  the  second  person  singular;  th  or  eth  for  the  third 
person  singular. 

no.  By  placing  the  verb,  or  part  of  it,  before  the  nom- 
inative. It  is  made  negative  by  placing  not  after  the  verb, 
or  after  the  first  auxiliary. 

111.  The  first  person  is  preferred  to  the  second,  and 
the  second  to  the  third.  You,  John,  and  I,  are  attached  to 
our  country.  If  the  nominatives  are  taken  separately,  or 
connected  by  or  or  nor^  the  verb  prefers  the  nominative 
next  to  it.     He  or  I  am  to  blame. 

112.  A  verb  having  person  and  number  without  a  sub- 
ject; as  methinks,  meseems. 

113.  Voice,  mode,  tense,  person,  and  number. 

114.  Be  and  its  variations— ^<?,  did;  can,  could;  have 
had;  may,  might;  must;  shall ^  should;  will  and  would. 

115.  Be,  or  am,  was,  do,  and  have. 

116.  When  required  to  express  a  duty,  command,  de- 
termination, resolve ;  and  in  future  propositions  when  the 
subject  is  of  the  first  person  and  no  reference  is  made  to 
the  will  of  the  subject. 

117.  When  the  expression  is  of  willingness,  inclination, 
or  in  future  propositions  when  the  subject  is  of  the 
second  or  third  person,  and  no  compulsion  required. 

118.  When  not  combined  with  any  other  verb  expressed 
or  understood. 

119.  The  form  of  the  verb  generally  preceded  by  to, 
expressing  an  act  or  state  without  predicating  it.  There 
are  two  infinitives — the  present  and  perfect. 

120.  By  combining  to  with  the  simplest  form  of  the 
verb,  or  to  be  with  a  simple  participle. 

121.  By  combining  to  have,   or  to   have  been,    with  a 


K 


156  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

simple   participial.     It  represents  the  completion  of  the 
act  or  state  at  the  time  referred  to. 

122.  When  the  infinitive  is  combined  with  an  auxiliary 
or  after  the  active  verbs  bid,  dare,  let,  make,  need,  see,  hear, 
feel,  and  sometimes  after  have,  help,  please,  and  find. 

123.  A  word  derived  from  a  verb,  participating  in  the 
properties  of  a  verb  and  adjective,  and  is  generally  formed 
by  adding  ing,  dor  ed  to  the  verb.  There  are  two  partici- 
ples— the  present  and  perfect. 

124.  By  annexing  ing  to  the  simplest  form  of  the  verb, 
and  represents  the  act  or  state  as  present  and  continuing 
at  the  time  referred  to. 

125.  By  annexing  ed  to  to  the  simplest  form  of  the 
verb,  and  it  represents  the  act  or  state  as  completed  at  the 
time  referred  to. 

126.  The  simple  present  participle  of  a  transitive  verb 
is  nearly  always  in  the  active  voice.  The  simple  perfect 
participle  of  a  transitive  verb  is  either  active  or  passive ; 
it  is  in  the  active  voice  when  have  or  any  of  its  forms  is 
combined  with  it ;  in  the  passive  voice  when  it  stands  by 
itself,  or  when  be  in  any  of  its  forms  is  combined  with  it. 

127.  Being,  having,  or  having  been,  combined  with  some 
other  participle. 

128.  Being  expresses  the  present  passive  participle; 
having  expresses  the  perfect  active  participle ;  having  been 
the  perfect  passive  participle. 

129.  They  have  voice  and  tense,  are  annexed  to  aux- 
iliary verbs,  they  partake  of  the  nature  of  nouns,  adjec- 
tives and  adverbs,  and  when  nouns  they  assume  case.  A 
participle  may  become  an  adjective,  it  may  govern  the 
possessive  case,  it  may  become  concrete  and  assume  num- 
ber, it  may  be  used  after  prepositions ;  but  an  infinitive  has 
none  of  these  attributes. 

130.  The  regular  arrangement  of  the  modes,  tenses, 
persons  and  numbers,  and  participles  of  verbs. 


GRAMMAR.  157 

131.  An  jutline  of  its  parts  through  the  modes  and 
tenses,  in  a  single  person  and  number. 

132.  Those  which  consist  of  auxiHaries  combined  with 
participles  or  infinitives. 

133.  A  word  used  to  modify  the  meaning  of  a  verb, 
adjective,  or  other  adverb.  The  most  of  them  are  formed 
from  adjectives  by  adding  ly. 

134.  A  word  used  to  perform  the  office  of  a  conjunc- 
tion and  adverb  at  the  same  time. 

135.  Into  adverbs  of  time,  place,  degree  and  manner. 

136.  An  adverb  expresses  manner,  or  describes  the  act;, 
an  adjective  describes  the  object. 

137.  Adverbs  of  time  answer  to  the  question  when  ? 
How  long  ?  How  often  ?  Adverbs  of  place  answer  to  the 
question:  Where?  Whence?  Adverbs  of  degree  answer 
to  the  questions:  How  much?  To  what  extent?  In  what 
degree?  Adverbs  of  manner  answer  to  the  question: 
How? 

iT,^.  A  word  used  to  show  the  relation  between  a  fol- 
lowing noun  or  pronoun  and  some  other  word.  An  ad- 
junct is  a  preposition  with  its  object  and  modifiers,  and 
may  relate  to  a  substantive,  verb,  adjective,  or  adverb. 

139.  A  noun,  pronoun,  infinitive,  participle  noun,  and 
a  clause. 

140.  When  there  is  no  word  to  govern;  as.  The  eagle 
flew  up,  then  around,  then  down  again. 

141.  A  word  used  to  connect  words,  phrases,  or  propo- 
sitions. A  correlative  connective  is  one  of  a  separated 
pair  that  connect  the  same  parts.     Neither  this  nor  that. 

142.  Analysis  is  the  resolving  of  the  whole  into  its 
parts.  Synthesis  is  the  combining  of  the  parts  to  form  the 
whole. 

143.  The  resolving  of  a  sentence  into  its  parts,  giving^ 
their  properties  and  syntax. 

144.  The  relation  of  words  is  their  relation  or  connec-- 


u 


1^8  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

tion  with  one  another ;  agreement  is  their  similarity  in  per- 
son, number,  gender,  case,  etc. ;  government  is  the  power 
one  word  has  over  another. 

145.  A  sentence  is  an  assemblage  of  words  making 
complete  sense;  a  clause  is  a  proposition  that  makes  but 
part  of  a  sentence;  a  proposition  is  a  subject  combined 
with  its  predicate;  a  phrase  is  two  or  more  words,  but  not 
an  entire  proposition. 

146.  The  declaratory  expresses  a  declaration;  the  in- 
terrogatory asks  a  question;  the  imperative  expresses  a 
command  or  entreaty;  the  exclamatory  expresses  an  excla- 
mation. 

147.  A  simple  sentence  has  but  one  proposition;  a 
compound  has  two  or  more  propositions ;  a  complex  has 
one  principal  clause,  with  one  or  more  dependent  clauses. 

148.  The  subject  is  that  of  which  something  is  said; 
the  predicate  is  that  which  denotes  what  is  said  of  the 
subject. 

149.  The  grammatical  subject  and  predicate  are  the 
subject  and  predicate  words;  the  logical  subject  and  predi- 
cate are  these  words  with  all  their  modifiers. 

150.  A  train  of  thought  expressed  in  language,  and 
may  be  description,  narration,  science  or  philosophy. 

151.  A  sentence  or  combination  of  sentences,  com- 
pleting a  train  of  thought,  and  distinguished  by  a  new  be- 
ginning. 

152.  Three  relations:  the  predicate  relation,  the  ad- 
jective relation,  and  the  adverbial  relation. 

153.  Words,  phrases,  and  clauses. 
454.     A  subject  and  predicate. 

155.  A  dependent  word,  phrase  or  clause,  used  to 
limit  or  vary  the  meaning  of  some  other  word  or  expression, 
and  may  be  an  adjective  or  adverbial  modifier. 

156.  By  an  article,  adjective,  a  possessive,  an  oppo- 
sitive,  a  participle,  an  infinitive,  phrases,  and  clauses. 


GRAMMAR.  169 

157.  By  an  object,  a  predicate  adjective,  an  adverb,  a 
participle,  an  infinitive,  phrases  and  clauses. 

158.  The  infinitive  takes  only  the  modifiers  of  a  verb; 
the  participle  either  those  of  a  verb  or  noun. 

159.  Articles,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjec- 
tions. 

160.  Conjunctions,  prepositions,  relative  pronouns, 
responsive  pronouns,  and  the  conjunctive  adverbs. 

161.  Simple,  complex,  compound,  mixed,  and  prepo- 
sitional. 

162.  The  beginning;  the  next  most  important  is  the  end. 

163.  When  it  is  uppermost  in  the  speaker's  mind,  or 
denotes  what  is  most  striking.  "  Out  flew  millions  of  flaming 
words. "     ^'  By  these  we  acquired  our  liberty. " 

164.  A  sentence  so  construed  that  the  meaning  is  sus- 
pended till  the  close. 

165.  In  the  improper  arrangement  of  words,  in  the  use 
of  improper  words,  in  the  omission  of  words,  and  the  use  of 
unnecessary  words. 

166.  A  deviation  from  the  ordinary  form,  construction 
or  application  of  words,  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  force,  or 
beauty. 

167.  The  shortening  of  a  word  by  taking  a  letter  or 
syllable  from  the  beginning;  as,  'gainst,  there's.  Syncope 
is  the  shortening  of  a  word  by  taking  a  letter  or  syllable 
from  the  middle;  as,  red'ning  for  reddening.  Apocope  is 
the  shortening  of  a  word  by  taking  a  letter  or  a  syllable 
from  the  end;  as,  th'  for  the.  Prosthesis  is  the  lengthening 
of  a  word  by  prefixing  a  syllable.  Paragoge  is  the  length- 
ening of  a  word  by  annexing  a  syllable.  Tmesis  is  the  in- 
serting of  a  word  between  the  parts  of  a  compound ;  as,  on 
which  side  soever. 

168.  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  words,  and  elision  the 
omission  of  letters  Aposiopesis  the  leaving  of  something 
unsaid.     Zengma  is  the  referring  of  a  word  to  two  different 


160  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

ones,  when  in  strict  syntax  it  can  agree  with  only  one  of 
them.  Pleonasm  is  the  using  of  more  words  than  the  sense 
or  syntax  absolutely  requires 

169.  A  comparison  expressed.  A  metaphor  is  a  com- 
parison implied.  "  Life  is  an  isthi7ius  between  two  eterni- 
ties. "  An  allegory  is  a  fictitious  story  about  one  thing, 
which  is  designed  to  teach  some  moral  or  practical  wisdom 
about  another.  Synecdoche  is  the  name  of  a  part  applied 
to  the  whole,   or   that   of  the  whole  applied  to  a  part. 

1 70.  A  contrast :  "Virtue  ennobles,  vice  debases."  Irony  is 
the  sneering  use  of  words  with  a  contrary  meaning.  Paralipsis 
is  the  pretented  omission  or  concealment  of  what  is  meant. 
"  I  will  not  call  him  a  villain,  for  it  would  be  unparliamen- 
tary. "     Hyperbole  is  exaggeration. 

171.  A  softened  mode  of  speech  for  what  would  be 
disagreeable  or  offensive  if  told  in  the  plainest  language. 
An  appeal  in  the  form  of  a  question  to  strengthen  a  state- 
ment. An  abrupt  mode  of  speech,  designed  to  express 
more  strongly  the  emotions  of  the  speaker. 

172.  The  art  of  making  verse.  Verse  is  the  musical 
arrangement  of  words,  according  to  some  regular  accent. 

1 73.  The  similarity  of  sounds  between  the  endings  of 
poetic  lines.     Blank  verse  is  verse  without  rhyme. 

1 74.  Two  poetic  lines  that  usually  rhyme  together.  A 
stanza  is  a  regular  division  of  the  poem,  and  consists  of 
three  or  more  poetic  lines  with  complete  rhymes. 


QU  E  S  T I O  N  S 


ON 


Written  Arithmetic. 


1.  What    is   mathematics? 

2.  What  is  quantity? 

3.  What  is  a  unit? 

4.  What  is  a  number?     A  power  of  a  number?     Root? 

5.  What  is  an  integer? 

6.  What  is  an   abstract  number?     Concrete  number? 

7.  What  is  a  sign?     What  is  the  sign  of  aggregation? 

8.  What  is  a  rule  ?     Problem  ?     Axiom  ? 

9.  What  is  analysis  in  arithmetic? 

10.  What  is  notation ?     Numeration? 

11.  How  many  systems  of  notation  in  general  use? 

12.  Upon  what  is  the  Roman  notation  founded? 

13.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  simple  and  local 
value  of  a  figure? 

14.  What  are  the  fundamental  principles  of  arithmetic ? 

15.  What  is  the  minuend?     Subtrahend? 

16.  What  is  a  composite  number? 

17.  Whas  are  the  component  factors  of  a  number? 

18.  What  is  the  first   power  of  a   number?     Second? 
Third?  ^ 

19.  What  is  the  reciprocal  of  a  number? 

20.  How  find  the  true  remainder  by  dividing  by  factors? 

21.  What  is    a  prime   number?     When   are  numbers 
prime  to  each  other? 


162  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

22.  What  is  a  common  divisor?    The  greatest  common 
divisor? 

23.  What  is   a  multiple?     Common  multiple?     Least 
common  multiple? 

24.  What  are  fractions? 

25.  What  is  the  value  of  a  fraction? 

26.  What  does  the  numerator  show?     The  denomin- 
ator? 

27.  What  is  a  proper  fraction?     Improper?     Mixed? 
Complex? 

28.  Why  invert  the  divisor  in  division  of  fractions? 

29.  How  find  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  fractions? 

30.  How  find  the  least  common  multiple  of  fractions? 

31.  What  are  decimal  fractions? 

32.  How  find  the  product  of  two  decimals  by  a  con- 
tracted multiplication  ? 

$;^.     How  find  the  quotient  of  one  decimal  divided  by 
another  by  a  contracted  division? 

34.  "What  are  circulating  decimals? 

35.  What  isarepetend? 

^6.  What  are  continued  fractions? 

37.  What  is  the  difference  between  decimal  fractions 
and  common  fractions? 

38.  What  is  currency? 

39.  From  what  was  the  sign  $  derived? 

40.  What  is  an  aliquot  part  of  a  number? 

41.  What  is  a  bill? 

42.  AVhat  is  a  compound  number? 

43.  What  is  a  measure?     How  divided? 

44.  How  many  dimensions  have  extension?    A  line? 
Surface?     A  solid? 

45.  What  is  a  scale? 

46.  What  is  weight? 

47.  Describe  the  Gunter's  chain. 


WRITTEN    ARITHMETIC.  163 

48.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  pound  Troy  and 
a  pound  Avoirdupois? 

49.  What  is  linear  measure? 

50.  What  is  a  square?     A  cube? 

51.  How   many   inches   in  a  wine  gallon?     In  a  beer 
gallon?     In  a  bushel? 

52.  What  are  duodecimals? 

53.  What  is  percentage?     What  is  its  base? 

54.  What  do  the  words  per  cent,  mean? 

55.  What  is  commission?     Brokerage? 
<^().     What  is  a  commission  merchant? 

57.  What  is  a  consignee?     Consignor? 

58.  What  is  a  company?     Corporation? 

59.  What  is  a  share?     Stock?     Stockholder? 

60.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  charter  and  a  firm? 

61.  When  is  stock  at  par?     When  below  par? 

62.  What  is  profit  and  loss? 

62,.     How  find  the  gain  or  loss  per  cent,  when  the  cost 
and  selling  price  are  given? 

64.  How  find  the  selling  price  when  the  cost  and  gain 
or  loss  per  cent,  are  given? 

65.  How  find  the  cost  when  the   selling  price  and  the 
gain  or  loss  per  cent,  are  given  ? 

66.  What  is  an  installment?     Assessment?    Dividend? 

67.  What  is  insurance?     A  pohcy?     A  premium? 

68.  What  is  a  tax?     Poll  tax?     Assessor? 

69.  What  is  an  inventory? 

70.  What  is  general  average?     Jetson? 

71.  What  are  duties  or  customs?     What  is  a  custom- 
house? 

72.  What  is  smuggling? 

73.  How  many  kinds  of  duties?     Define  them. 

74.  What  is  interest?     Usury? 

75.  The  time,  rate  per  cent.,  and  interest  being  given, 
how  find  the  principal? 


li 


164  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

76.  The  time,  rate  per  cent.,  and  amount  being  given, 
how  find  the  principal? 

7*7.  The  pnncipal,  time,  and  interest  being  given,  how- 
find  the  rate  per  cent.  ? 

78.  The  principal,  interest,  and  rate  per  cent,  being 
given,  how  find  the  time? 

79.  What  is  a  partial  payment?     Indorsement? 

80.  What  is  discount?  Present  worth  of  a  debt? 
How  find  it? 

81.  What  is  a  bank?    Bank  discount?    Days  of  grace? 

82.  What  is  a  promissory  note?  Bank  note?  Nego- 
tiable note? 

83.  What  is  a  notary-public?     A  protest? 

84.  What  is  exchange?     How  many  kinds? 
.     85.     What  is  domestic  exchange?     Foreign  exchange? 

86.  What  is  a  set  of  exchange?     Course  of.  Exchange? 

87.  What  is  equation  of  payments? 
S8.     What  is  equated  time? 

89.  What  is  the  focal  date? 

90.  What  is  partnership ?     Partners? 

91.  What  is  ratio?     Define  each  kind? 

92.  What  is  the  antecedent?     Consequent? 

93.  What  is  direct  ratio?     Inverse  or  reciprocal? 

94.  What  is  proportion? 

95.  Which  are  the  extremes?     The  means? 
»                96.  Of  what  does  allegation  treat? 

97.  How  many  kinds  of  allegation?     Define  each, 

98.  What  is  involution?     Evolution? 

99.  What  is  a  surd? 

100.  What  is  the  square  root  of  a  number? 

10 1.  What  is  the  cube  root  of  a  number? 

102.  What  is  arithmetical  progression? 

103.  What  is  geometrical  progression? 


A  N  S  ^V  E  R  S 

TO 

Questions  on  Written  Arithmetic. 


1.  The  science  of  quantity. 

2.  Anything  that  can  be  increased,  diminished  or 
measured. 

3.  One,  or  a  single  thing. 

4.  A  unit  or  a  collection  of  units.  The  power  of  a 
number  is  the  product  produced  by  repeating  a  number 
any  number  of  times  as  a  factor.  A  root  is  a  factor  re- 
peated to  produce  power. 

5.  A  whole  number. 

6.  An  abstract  number  is  one  used  without  reference 
to  any  particular  thing.  A  concrete  number  is  one  that 
has  reference  to  a  particular  thing. 

7.  A  character  indicating  an  operation  to  be  performed. 
The  sign  of  aggregation  is  a  parenthesis,  or  bar,  which 
shows  that  the  numbers  enclosed  by  it  are  to  be  considered 
together  subject  to  the  same  operation. 

8.  A  rule  is  a  prescribed  method  of  performing  an 
operation.  A  problem  is  something  to  be  done.  An  ax- 
iom is  any  truth  that  is  self-evident. 

9.  The  process  of  investigating  principles,  and  solving 
problems,  independently  of  set  rules. 

10.  Notation  is  a  method  of  writing  or  expressing  num- 
bers by  characters.  Numeration  is  a  method  of  reading 
numbers  expressed  by  characters. 

11.  Two:  the  Roman  anu  Arabic. 


16b  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

12.  Upon  five  principles:  first,  repeating  a  letter  re- 
peats its  value ;  second,  if  a  letter  of  any  value  is  placed 
after  one  of  greater  value,  it  is  added  to  the  greater ;  third, 
if  a  letter  of  any  value  is  placed  before  a  greater,  it  is  to 
be  taken  from  :he  greater;  fourth,  if  a  letter  of  any  value  is 
placed  between  letters  of  higher  value,  it  is  to  be  taken 
from  their  united  values;  fifth,  if  a  bar  or  dash  is  placed 
over  a  letter,  it  increases  its  value  a  thousand-fold. 

1 3.  The  simple  value  of  a  figure  is  its  value  when  taken 
alone,  while  the  local  value  depends  upon  the  place  it  oc- 
cupies with  other  figures. 

14.  Notation  and  numeration,  addition,  subtraction^ 
mulliplicatfen,  and  division. 

15.  The  minuend  is  the  number  to  be  subtracted  fi-om. 
The  subtrahend  is  the  number  which  is  subtracted. 

16.  One  that  can  be  produced  by  multiplying  two  or 
more  numbers  together. 

1 7.  The  several  numbers,  which,  being  multiplied  to- 
gether, produce  the  number. 

18.  The  number  itself,  or  the  root.  The  second  power, 
or  square,  is  the  number  multiplied  by  itself.  The  third 
power,  or  cube,  of  a  number,  is  the  product  arising  fi-om 
using  the  number  three  times  as  a  factor. 

19.  It  is  I  divided  by  that  number. 

20.  Multiply   each  partial   remainder   except  the  first, 
*if          by  all  the  preceding  divisors,  and  add  these  products  to  the 

first  remainder.  It  will  be  noticed  that  after  the  first  divis- 
ion, the  remamder  cannot  be  of  the  same  denomination  as 
the  first  number  divided ;  and  as  each  succeeding  division 
increases  the  value  of  the  remainders,  therefore  each  re- 
mainder must  be  multiplied  by  all  the  preening  divisors  to 
reduce  it  to  its  former  denomination. 

21.  One  that  cannot  be  resolved  into  factors.  Num- 
bers are  prime  to  each  other  when  they  have  no  common 
divisor. 


WRITTEN   ARITHMETIC.  167 

22.  One  that  will  divide  two  or  more  numbers  without 
a  remainder.  The  greatest  common  divisor  is  the  greatest- 
number  that  will  divide  two  or  more  numbers  without  a  re- 
mainder. 

23.  A  multiple  is  a  number  that  is  exactly  divisible  by 
a  given  number.  A  common  multiple  is  one  that  is  exactly 
divisible  by  two  or  more  numbers.  The  least  common 
multiple  is  the  least  common  multiple  that  is  exactly  divis- 
ible by  two  or  more  given  numbers. 

24.  Parts  of  a  unit. 

25.  The  quotient  of  the  numerator  divided  by  the  de- 
nominator. 

26.  The  denominator  shows  into  how  many  parts  a 
number  is  divided ;  the  numerator  shows  how  many  parts 
are  taken. 

27.  A  proper  fraction  is  one  whose  numerator  is  smaller 
than  its  denominator.  An  improper  fraction  is  one  whose 
numerator  is  equal  to  or  greater  than  its  denominator.  A 
mixed  number  is  one  expressed  by  an  integer  and  fraction 
written  together.  A  complex  fraction  is  one  that  has  a 
fraction  in  its  numerator,  or  denominator,  or  both. 

28.  For  convenience;  if  not  inverted  they  must  be  re- 
duced to  a  common  denominator,  and  one  numerator 
divided  b>  the  other. 

29.  Find  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  the  given 
numerators,  and  the  least  common  multiple  of  the  denom- 
inators. 

30.  Find  the  least  common  multiple  of  the  numerators, 
and  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  the  denominators. 

31.  Fractions  whose  denominators  are  increased  or  de- 
creased in  ten-fold  ratio. 

32.  Write  the  multiplier  with  the  order  of  its  figures 
reversed,  and  with  units'  place  under  that  figure  of  the  mul- 
tiplicand which  is  the  lowest  decimal  to  be  retained  in  the 
product.     Find  the  product  of  each  figure  of  the  multiplier 


): 


168  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

by  the  one  above  in  the  multiplicand  and  those  to  the  left, 
increasing  this  multiplication  by  as  many  units  as  would 
have  been  carried  had  the  rejected  part  of  the  multiplicand 
been  used.  Write  these  partial  products  with  the  lowest 
figure  in  the  same  column  and  add  together,  pointing  off 
the  required  number  of  decimal  figures. 

;^;^.  Compare  the  left  hand  figure  of  the  divisor  with 
the  units  of  like  order  in  the  dividend,  and  determine  how 
many  figures  will  be  required  in  the  quotient.  For  the  first 
contracted  divisor,  take  as  many  figures  from  the  left  of 
the  divisor  as  there  are  places  required  in  the  quotient,  and 
in  each  following  division  reject  one  place  from  the  right  of 
the  last  preceding  divisor,  using  the  remainder  for  a  new 
dividend. 

34.  A  decimal  in  which  a  figure  or  set  of  figures  are 
continually  repeating. 

35.  The  figure  or  set  of  figures  continually  repeated. 

^6.  A  fraction  whose  numerator  is  i,  and  whose  de- 
nominator is  a  whole  number,  plus  a  fraction  whose  nu- 
merator is  also  I,  and  whose  denominator  is  a  similar  frac- 
tion, etc. 

37.  The  first  has  a  denominator  understood,  showing 
that  a  unit  is  divided  into  ten  equal  parts,  or  sub-divided 
in  a  ten-fold  ratio ;  the  seconi^  has  a  denominator  showing 
that  a  unit  is  divided  into  any  number  of  equal  parts. 

38.  The  medium  of  circulairion. 

39.  From  the  initial  letters  of  the  United  States^  U.  S. 
joined  together  as  a  monogram. 

40.  Such  a  part  as  will  exactly  divide  that  number. 

41.  A  written  statement  of  articles  bought  or  sold,  to- 
gether with  price  of  each  and  the  whole  cost. 

42.  A  concrete  number,  whose  value  is  expressed  in 
two  or  more  different  denominations. 

43.  That  by  which  extent,  dimension,  capacity,  or 
amount  is   ascertained.     Measures   are   of  seven  kinds: 


WRITTEN    ARITHMETIC.  169 

Length,  surface  or   area,    solidity,    weight,     time,     angles 
and  money. 

44.  Extension  has  three :  Length,  breadth,  and  thick- 
ness. 

45.  A  series  of  numbers,  descending  or  ascending,  used 
in  operations  upon  compound  numbers. 

46.  A  measure  of  the  quantity  of  matter  a  body  con- 
tains, according  to  some  fixed  standard. 

47.  It  consists  of  100  links,  each  link  containing  7.92 
inches,  or  the  whole  length  66  feet,  or  4  rods. 

48.  Troy  has  5,760  grains;  avoirdupois  has  7,000. 

49.  That  which  is  used  in  measuring  lines  or  distances. 

50.  A  square  is  a  figure  having  four  equal  sides  and 
four  equal  angles;  a  cube  is  a  figure  having  six  equal  sides. 

51.  In  a  wine  gallon,  231  cubic  inches;  beer,  282;  in 
a  bushel,  2,150.4  cubic  inches. 

52.  The  divisions  and  subdivisions  of  a  unit,  resulting 
by  continually  dividing  by  12. 

53.  Such  part  of  a  number  as  is  represented  by  the  per 
cent.  Its  base  is  the  number  on  which  the  percentage  is 
reckoned. 

54.  By  the  hundred. 

55.  The  percentage  allowed  an  agent,  factor  or  com- 
mission merchant,  is  commission.  Brokerage  is  the  fee 
paid  to  a  dealer  in  money,  stocks,  &c.,  for  the  transaction 
of  business. 

56.  An  agent  who  buys  or  sells  goods  for  another. 

57.  A  person  who  receives  goods  to  sell  for  another. 
A  consignor  is  a  person  who  sends  goods  to  another  to  be 
sold. 

58.  Individuals  united  for  the  purpose  of  performing 
some  business  or  undertaking.  A  corporation  is  a  com- 
pany  formed  and  authorized  by  law  to  act  as  one  person. 

59.  One  of  the  equal  parts  into  which  capital  stock  is 


170  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

divided.     Stock  is  the  amount  of  capital  invested.     Stock- 
holders are  the  owners  of  stock. 

60.  A  charter  defines  the  powers  of  an  incorporated 
body,  while  Jir7ti  is  the  name  under  which  an  unincor- 
porated body  transacts  business. 

61.  Stock  is  at  par  when  it  sell?  for  its  first  cost;  below 
par  when  it  sells  for  less  than  first  cost. 

62.  A  commercial  term,  used  to  express  the  gain  or 
loss  in  business  transactions. 

63.  Divide  the  gain  or  loss  by  the  purchase  price. 

64.  Multiply  the  purchase  price  by  $1,  increased  or 
diminished,  as  the  case  may  be,  by  the  gain  or  loss  per 
cent. 

65.  Divide  the  selling  price  by  $1,  increased  or  dimin- 
ished, as  the  case  may  be,  by  the  gain  or  loss  per  cent. 

6(i.  A  portion  of  the  capital  stock  required  of  the 
stockholders  as  a  payment  on  their  subscription.  An  as- 
sessment is  a  sum  required  of  the  stockholders  to  meet  the 
losses  or  the  business  expenses  of  the  company.  A  divi- 
dend is  a  sum  paid  to  the  stockholders  from  the  profits  of 
the  business. 

67.  Security  on  property  guaranteed  by  one  party  to 
another,  for  a  stipulated  sum,  against  the  loss  of  that  prop- 
erty by  any  casuality.  A  policy  is  a  written  contract  be- 
tween the  parties.     Premium  is  the  sum  paid  for  insurance. 

68.  A  tax  is  a  sum  of  money  assessed  on  the  person 
or  property  of  an  individual  for  public  purposes.  Poll  tax 
is  a  sum  required  of  each  male  citizen  liable  to  taxation, 
without  regard  to  his  property.  An  assessor  is  the  person 
appointed  to  prepare  the  assessment  roll,  and  apportion 
the  taxes. 

69.  A  written  list  of  articles  of  property  with  their 
value. 

70.  A  method  of  ascertaining  the  loss  to  be  sustained 
by  the  proprietors  of  ships,  freight,  and  cargo,  where  a  por- 


WRITTEN    ARITHMETIC.  171 

tion  oi  the  property  nas  oeen  sacrificed  or  damaged  for  the 
common  safety.  Jetson  is  the  portion  of  goods  thrown 
overboard. 

71.  Duties  are  taxes  levied  on  imported  gooas.  A 
custom-house  is  an  office  established  by  government  for 
the  transaction  of  business  relating  to  duties. 

72.  Carrying  on  foreign  commerce  secretly,  without 
paying  the  duties  imposed  by  law. 

73.  There  are  two  kinds:  Ad  valorem  and  Specific. 
Ad  valorem  duty  is  a  sum  computed  on  the  cost  of  the 
goods  in  the  country  from  which  they  were  imported. 
Specific  duty  is  a  sum  computed  on  the  weight  or  measure 
of  goods,  without  regard  to  their  cost. 

74.  A  sum  paid  for  the  use  of  money.  Usury  is  illegal 
interest. 

75.  Divide  the  given  interest  by  the  interest  on  $i  for 
the  given  time  at  the  given  rate. 

76.  Divide  the  given  amount  by  the  amount  of  $i  for 
the  given  time  at  the  given  rate. 

77.  Divide  the  given  interest  by  the  interest  on  the 
principal  at  i  per  cent,  for  the  time. 

78.  Divide  the  given  interest  by  the  interest  on  the 
principal  for  one  year  at  the  rate  per  cent. 

79.  Part  payment  of  a  note,  bond,  or  other  obligation. 
An  endorsement  is  an  acknowledgement  written  on  the 
back  of  a  note,  or  any  obligation,  stating  the  time  and 
amount  of  a  partial  payment. 

80.  Discount  is  an  allowance  made  for  the  payment  of 
a  debt  before  it  is  due.  The  present  worth  of  a  debt  is 
such  a  sum,  which,  being  put  at  legal  interest  would  amount 
to  the  debt  when  due.  It  is  found  by  dividing  the  given 
debt  by  the  amount  of  $i  for  the  given  time  and  rate. 

81.  A  bank  is  a  corporation  chartered  by  law  for  the 
purpose  of  receiving  and  loaning  money,  and  furnishing  a 
paper  circulation.     Bank  discount  is  an  allowance  made  to 


172  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

a  bank  for  the  payment  of  a  debt  before  it  is  due.  Days 
of  grace  are  three  days  allowed  a  bank  to  pay  its  notes  after 
they  become  due. 

82.  A  promissory  note  is  a  written  agreement  to  pay  a 
certain  sum  either  on  demand  or  at  a  specified  time.  Bank 
notes  are  paper  circulation  issued  by  banks  as  money.  A 
negotiable  note  is  one  which  may  be  bought  and  sold,  or 
negotiated,  and  is  made  payable  to  the  bearer  or  to  the  or- 
der of  the  payee. 

Z-7^,  An  officer  authorized  by  law  to  attest  documents 
or  writings  of  any  kind  to  make  them  lawful.  A  protest  is 
a  formal  declaration  in  writing,  made  by  a  notary-public, 
at  the  request  of  the  holder  of  a  note,  notifying  the  makers 
and  the  endorsers  of  its  non-payment. 

84.  A  method  of  remitting  money  from  one  person  to 
another,  or  making  payments  by  written  orders. .  There 
are  two  kinds,  domestic  and  foreign. 

85.  Domestic  or  inland  exchange  is  the  exchange  be- 
tween different  places  in  the  same  country.  Foreign  ex- 
change is  the  remittance  made  between  different  countries. 

86.  It  consists  of  three  copies  of  the  same,  made  in 
foreign  exchanges,  and  sent  by  different  conveyances  to 
provide  against  a  loss ;  when  one  has  been  paid  the  others 
are  void.  A  course  of  exchange  is  the  current  price  paid 
in  one  place  for  bills  of  exchange  on  another  place. 

87.  The  process,  of  finding  the  meantime  of  the  pay- 
ment of  several  sums,  due  at  different  times,  without 
interest. 

88.  The  date  at  which  several  debts  may  be  paid  atone 
time. 

89.  The  date  by  which  all  others  are  compared  in 
averaging  an  account. 

90.  A  relation  established  by  two  or  more  persons  in 
trade.     Partners  are  the  individuals  thus  associated. 

91.  The  comparison  o(   two  numbers  with  each  other. 


WRITTEN   ARITHMETIC.  173 

Arithmetical  ratio  is  the  difference  between  two  numbers. 
Geometrical  ratio  is  one  divided  by  the  other. 

92.  The  antecedent  is  the  first  term  of  a  ratio;  a  con- 
sequent is  the  second  term.  -  3 

93.  Direct  ratio  is  dividing  the  consequent  by  the  ante- 
cedent. Inverse  ratio  is  dividing  the  antecedent  by  the 
consequent. 

94.  An  equality  of  the  ratio.  ^ 

95.  The  extremes  are  the  first  and  fourth  terms.  The 
means  are  the  other  two. 

96.  Of  mixing  or  compounding  two  or  more  ingredients 
of  different  values. 

97.  Two :  medial  and  alternate.  Medial  is  the  process 
of  finding  the  average  price  or  quality  of  several  ingredients 
whose  prices  or  qualities  are  known.  Alternate  is  the  pro- 
cess of  finding  the  proportional  quantity  to  be  taken  of 
several  ingredients  whose  prices  are  known. 

98.  Involution  is  the  process  of  raising  a  number  to  a 
given  power.  Evolution  is  the  process  of  extracting  the 
root  of  any  number  considered  as  a  power. 

99.  The  indicated  root  of  an  imperfect  power. 

100.  One  of  two  equal  factors  that  produce  that  number. 

10 1.  One  of  three  equal  factors  that  produce  that 
number. 

102.  A  series  of  numbers  increased  or  diminished  by  a 
common  difference. 

103.  A  series  of  numbers  increased  or  diminished  by  a 
constant  multiplier. 


QUESTIONS 


ON 


READING, 


1.  What  is  reading  ? 

2.  What  is  elocution  ? 

3.  What  does  elocution  embrace  ? 

4.  What  is  expression  ? 

5.  What  does  orthoepy  embrace  ?  *         '! 

6.  Define  articulation. 

7.  What  are  the  oral  elements  ?     How  produced  ? 
S.     What  is  accent  ? 

9.  When  two  syllables  of  a  word  are  accented,  which 
has  the  greater  force  ? 

10.  What  are  the  expressions  of  speech  ? 

11.  What  is  emphasis  ? 

12.  Define  slur. 

13.  How  are  emphatic  words  distinguished  ? 

14.  When  should  emphatic  words  be  used  ? 

15.  How  many  kinds  of  emphasis  are  there  ? 

16.  What  is  absolute  emphasis  ? 

1 7.  Define  antithetic  emphasis. 

18.  How  many  inflections  are  there  ? 

19.  What  is  the  circumflex  ? 

20.  What  is  the  monotone  ? 

21.  When  is  the  rising  inflection  used  ? 

22.  When  is  the  falling  inflection  used  ? 
33.     In  what  is  the  circumflex  mainly  used  ? 


READING.  175 


24.  What  is  modulation  and  its  divisions  ? 

25.  What  is  pitch  ?     How  divided  ? 

26.  Define  force.     What  are  its  divisions  ? 

27.  Define  rate.     How  classified  ? 

28.  What  is  quality,  and  how  divided  ? 

29.  What  is  a  pure  tone  ? 

30.  What  is  the  orotund  ? 

:?i.     Describe  the -aspirated  tone. 

32.     What  is  the  guttural  quality  ? 

^;^.     When  is  the  trembling  tone  used  ? 

34.  What  is  personation  ? 

35.  WTiat  are  pauses  ? 

^6.     What  are  grammatical  pauses  ? 

37.  Define  rhetorical  pauses. 

38.  What  is  suspensive  quantity  ? 

39.  What  does  quantity  embrace  ? 

40.  What  are  some  of  the  essential  qualities  of  good 
reading  ? 

41.  What  is   the   difference   between  enunciation  and 
pronunciation  ? 

42     What  quality  of  voice  is  mostly  used  in  reading  and 
speaking  ? 

43.  What  determines  the  proper  accent  of  words  ? 

44.  How  is  inflection  sometimes  affected  by  emphasis  ? 

45.  What  is  cadence  ? 

46.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  construction  of 
prose  and  poetry  ? 

47.  What  is  a  parenthetic  clause,  and  how  should  it  be 
read  ? 

48.  When  melody  comes  in  cc>nflict  with  accent,  which 
must  yield  ? 


AN  S\VERS 

•1-0 


Questions  on  Reading, 


1.  The  enunciation  of  written  language. 

2.  The  delivery  of  composition. 

3.  Orthoepy  and  expression. 

4.  It  is  the  manner  of  deHvery.  • 

5.  Articulation,  syllabication,  and  accent. 

6.  It  is  the  distinct  utterance  of  the  oral  elements. 

7.  The  sounds  that  form  syllables  and  words;  and  are 
produced  by  the  positions  of  the  organs  of  speech  in  con- 
nection with  the  breath. 

8.  The  force  given  to  one  or  more  syllables  of  a  word. 

9.  The  primary. 

10.  Emphasis,  slur,  inflection,  modulation,  monotone, 
personation,  and  pauses. 

1 1.  The  force  given  to  one  or  more  words  of  a  sentence. 

12.  It  is  that  smooth,  gliding,  subdued  movement  of 
the  voice  used  in  parenthetic  clauses,  words  contrasted  or 
repeated,  and  in  explanation. 

1 3.  By  italics,  small  capitals,  and  CAPITALS. 

14.  AVhen  words  and  phrases  are  important  in  meaning, 
or  when  they  point  out  a  difference ;  when  emphatic  words 
are  repeated,  or  when  a  succession  of  important  words  or 
phrases  occur. 

15.  There  are  two  kinds:  absolute  and  antithetic. 


READING.  177 

1 6.  It  is  used  to  designate  the  important  words  of  a 
sentence,  without  any  direct  reference  to  other  words. 

17  It  is  founded  on  the  contrast  of  one  word  or  clause 
with  another. 

18.  Three:  the  rising  inflection,  falHng  inflection,  and 
circumflex. 

19.  A  union  of  the  rising  and  falling  inflections,  begin- 
ning with  the  one  and  ending  with  the  other. 

20.  A  sameness  of  tone. 

21.  It  is  generally  used  when  the  sense  is  incomplete; 
in  questions  which  may  be  answered  by  yes  or  no;  when 
a  word  or  sentence  is  repeated  as  a  kind  of  interrogatory 
exclamation;  usually  m  negative  sentences;  and  in  the 
last  but  one  of  a  passage. 

22.  When  the  sense  is  incomplete,  when  language  de- 
mands stronpr  emphasis,  in  exclamations,  and  in  questions 
which  cannot  be  answered  by  yes  or  no. 

23.  In  the  language  of  irony,  sarcasm,  and  contrast. 

24.  Modulation  is  the  variation  of  the  voice  made  in 
reading  and  speaking,  and  is  divided  into  pitch,  force, 
quality,  and  rate. 

25.  Pitch  is  the  degree  of  elevation  of  the  voice,  and 
is  divided  into  high,  moderate,  and  Jow.  High  pitch  is 
that  which  rises  above  the  usual  speaking  key,  and  is  used 
in  expressing  joyous  and  elevated  feelings.  Moderate 
pitch  is  that  which  is  heard  in  common  conversation,  and 
is  used  in  expressing  ordinary  thought  and  moderate  emo- 
tion. Low  pitch  is  that  which  falls  below  the  usual  speak- 
ing key,  and  is  employed  in  expressing  emotions  of  sub- 
limity, awe,  and  reverence. 

26.  Force  is  the  volume,  or  loudness  of  voice,  and  is 
divided  into  loud,  moderate  and  gentle.  Loud  force  in 
expressing  violent  passions  and  vehement  emotions.  Mod- 
erate force  is  a  medium  loudness  of  voice,  and  is  employed 
in  narrative,  description,  and  ordinary  assertion.     Gentle 


178  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

or  subdued  force  is  employed  to   express  fear,    caution, 
secrecy,  solemnity,  and  tender  emotions. 

27.  Rate  is  the  speed,  and  is  divided  into  quick,  moder- 
ate, and  slow.  Quick  rate  is  used  to  express  joy,  mirth, 
violent  anger,  and  sudden  fear.  Moderate  rate  is  similar 
to  moderate  force.  Slow  rate  is  used  to  express  grandeur, 
vastness,  pathos,  horror,  and  consternation. 

28.  Quality  has  reference  to  the  kinds  of  sound  uttered, 
and  is  divided  into  the  pure  tone,  orotund,  aspirate,  gut- 
teral,  and  trembling. 

29.  A  clear,  smooth,  flowing  sound,  with  moderate 
pitch. 

30.  It  is  the  pure  tone  deepened,  enlarged,  and  intensi- 
fied, and  is  adapted  to  the  expression  of  the  sublime  and 
pathetic  emotions. 

31.  It  is  an  expulsion  of  the  breath,  the  words  being 
spoken  in  a  whisper. 

32.  The  guttural  is  deep  undertone,  expressing  hatred, 
contempt,  ioathmg. 

33.  The  trembling  is  a  constant  waver  of  the  voice, 
used  to  express  an  intense  degree  of  suppressed  excite- 
ment, or  to  represent  the  tones  of  enfeebled  old  age. 

34.  Changes  of  the  voice  necessary  to  represent  two 
or  more  persons  speaking. 

35.  Suspensions  of  the  voice  in  reading  or  speaking. 

36.  Grammatical  pauses  are  indicated  by  the  punctua- 
tion marks. 

37.  They  are  suspensions  of  the  voice  which  the  sense 
requires  when  a  grammatical  pause  is  not  admissible. 

38.  Prolongation  of  the  voice  at  the  end  of  a  word 
without  making  an  actual  pause. 

39.  Force  and  rate. 

40.  To  read  slowly,  mind  the  pauses,  give  the  proper 
inflections,  speak  plainly,  and  read  as  if  talking. 


READING.  179 

41.  Enunciation  is  the  utterance  of  words;  pronuncia- 
tion the  mode  of  utterance. 

42.  The  pure  tone. 

43.  General  usage. 

44.  It  sometimes  changes  the  falUng  to  the  rising  in- 
flection. 

45.  It  is  a  fall  of  the  voice  very  similar  to  the  falling 
inflection. 

46.  Prose  pays  no  attention  to  the  melodious  arrange- 
ment of  its  words,  while  poetry  is  written  with  regard  to 
the  rhythm  and  feet  of  each  line. 

47.  Something  abruptly  introduced  into  a  sentence  for 
the  purpose  of  modifynig,  explaining,  or  adding  to  the 
leading  proposition,  and  should  be  read  in  a  lower  voice. 

48.  Accent. 


QUESTIONS 


ON 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


1.  What  is  orthography? 

2.  Dehne  orthoepy. 

3.  What  is  Phonology? 

4.  What  is  a  letter? 

5.  What  are  elementary  sounds? 

6.  How  many  elementary  sounds  in  the  English  lan- 
guage?    How  divided? 

7.  How  are  these  sounds  produced? 

8.  What  are  the  organs  of  speech? 

9.  How  is  voice  produced? 

10.  What  is  the  larynx? 

11.  How  are  the  letters  divided? 

12.  What  are  vowels?     Consonants? 

13.  How  are  the  consonants  divided? 

14.  What  is  a  mute?     Name  them. 

15.  What  is  a  semivowel?     Name  them. 

16.  What  divisions  are  formed  from  the  semivowels? 

1 7.  What  are  the  subvocals?    Which  of  the  elementary 
sounds  are  represented  by  them? 

18.  What  are   aspirates?     What  sounds  do  they  rep- 
resent? 

19.  Name  the  combinations  of  the  consonants? 

20.  In   the   formation  of  the  consonant  sounds,'  how 
many  classes  are  given  them? 

21.  How  are  the  labials  formed?     Name  them. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  181 

2  2.  How  are  the  dentals  made?     Name  them. 

23.  What  are  the  linguals?     How  many? 

24.  How  many  palatals,  and  how  made? 

25.  Why  is  the  letter  h  not  included  in  these  divisions? 

26.  What  are  cognates? 

27.  How  do  we  analyze  words? 

28.  How  is   th    aspirate    distinguished   from    th   sub- 
vocal? 

[The  following  table  exhibits  the  properties  of  the  consonants  and 
should  be  committed  to  memory  for  use  in  analyzing  words.] 
^  is  a  consonant,  mute,  labial,  subvocal. 
^/  is  a  consonant,  mute,  lingual,  subvocal. 
/  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  labial,  aspirate. 
g  hard  is  a  consonant,  mute,  palatal,  subvocal. 
^  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  aspirate. 
j  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  dental,  subvocal. 
k^  g,  and  c  hard,  consonant,  mute,  palatal,  aspirate. 
,  /  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  lingual,  subvocal. 
w  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  labial,  subvocal. 
«  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  lingual,  subvocal. 
/  is  a  consonant,  mute,  labial,  aspirate. 
;r  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  lingual,  subvocal. 
s  and  c  soft,  consonant,  semivowel,  dental,  aspirate. 
/  is  a  consonant,  mute,  lingual,  aspirate. 
27  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  labial,  subvocal. 
w  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  labial,  subvocal. 
^  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  lingual,  subvocal. 
^  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  dental,  subvocal. 
th  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  lingual,  aspirate. 
th  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  lingual,  subvocal. 
4:h  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  dental,  aspirate. 
sh  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  dental,  aspirate. 
zh  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  dental,  subvocal. 
zjh  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  labial,  aspirate. 
ng  is  a  consonant,  semivowel,  palatal  subvocal. 


182  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

[In  analyzing  words,  the  properties  of  the  letters  given  in  the  table 
above,  can  always  be  applied  to  the  same  letter,  in  whatever  word  it 
may  be  found,  except  silent  and  substituted  letters.] 

[The  following  is  an  approved  plan  for  analyzing  the  letters  of  any 
word:] 

Shrine — Monosyllable, 
sh — cons.,  semi.,  den.,  aspr.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  i. 
I — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  i. 
i — vowel,  long  sound. 

n — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  L 
e — vowel,  silent. 

Veil — Monosyllable. 
V — cons.,  semi.,  lab.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  digraph  ei. 
ei — digraph,  substitute  for  long  a. 
1 — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  digraph  ei. 

Phrensy — Dissyllable. 

ph — subs,  for/,  cons.,  semi.,  lab.,  aspr.,  antecedent  to  its 

vowel  e. 
r — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  e, 
e — ^vowel,  short  sound. 

n — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  g. 
s — subs,  for  z.  cons.,  semi.,  dent.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its 

vowel  y. 
y — vowel,  substitute  for  /,  short  sound. 

Machine — Dissyllable, 
m — cons.,  semi.,  lab.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  a. 
a — vowel,  long  sound, 
ch — subs.  {oTsA,  cons.,  semi.,  den.,   aspr.,   antecedent  to 

its  vowel  i. 
i — vowel,  subs,  for  e,  long  sound, 
n — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  i. 
e — vowel,  silent. 

Echo — Dissyllable. 
e — vowel,  short  sound. 
ch — subs,  for  k,  cons.,  mute.,  pal.,  aspr.,  consequent  to  its 

vowel  e. 
o— vowel,  long  sound. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  183 

Rose — Monosyllable, 
r — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  o. 
o — vowel,  long  sound. 

s — cons.,  semi.,  dent.,  aspr.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  o. 
e — vowel,  silent. 

Republican,  polysyllable^ 
r — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  e^ 
e — vowel,  long  sound. 

p — cons.,  mute.,  labial,  aspr.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  u. 
u — vowel,  short  sound. 

b — cons.,  mute,  labial,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  u. 
1 — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  i.. 
i — vowel,  short  sound. 
c — subs,  for  k,  cons.,  mute,  pal.,  aspr.,  antecedent  to  its 

vowel  a. 
a — ^vowel,  short  sound. 
n — cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  a. 

The  plan  of  the  above  example  should  be  carefully  exam- 
ined, and  the  table  on  page  i8i  should  be  studied  so  thor- 
oughly, that  the  properties  of  all  the  consonants  can  be 
given  without  any  hesitation.  A  little  practice  is  required, 
after  which  any  word  can  be  analyzed  readily. 

The  following  are  test  words  for  analyzing:  People, 
guard,  jewel,  avoirdupois,  due,  grammar,  contradictory, 
nephew,  phosphorus,  arduous,  was,  alien,  quartz,  century, 
lungs,  wrangle,  ascension,  special,  free,  buy,  ride,  chuck, 
debt,  sovereign,  rhetoric,  rhinoceros,  column,  calf,  isle, 
knife,  weight,  neigh,  daisy. 

P'or  further  practice  let  the  student  take  any  exercise  in 
the  spelling  book,  or  any  sentence  which  he  may  see  or 
think  of. 

29.  How  are  the  elementary  sounds  divided? 

30.  How  many  sounds  have  each  of  the  vowels? 

31.  What  is  a  diphthong? 

32.  How  many  diphthongs  are  there. 


184  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

S$.  How  many  sounds  are  represented  by  these  diph- 
thongs? 

34.  What  IS  a  digraph?    Triphthongi* 

35.  When  are  w  and^  vowels? 

36.  What  is  a  syllable? 

37.  What  is  a  word? 

38.  What  are  the  words  of  one,  two,  three,  four  or  more 
syllables  called? 

39.  What  is  essential  in  every  syllable? 

40.  By  what  is  the  principal  sound  in  every  syllable 
produced? 

41.  To  what  does  every  consonant  belong? 

42.  When  is  a  consonant  antecedent  or  consequent  to 
a  vowel? 

43.  What  is  syllabication? 

44.  What  is  the  guide  for  arranging  words  i-nto  sylla- 
bles? 

45.  How  may  words  be  divided  at  the  end  of  the  lines? 

46.  Why  are  words  divided  into  syllables? 

47.  When  is  the  hyphen  used? 

48.  When  two  vowels  come  together,  how  are  they  dis- 
posed of  in  syllabication? 

49.  When  is  one  letter  a  substitute  for  another? 

50.  What  properties  do  a  substituted  letter  assume? 

51.  Which  letters  have  no  substitutes? 

The  following  table  contains  a  list  of  the  substitutes  of 
the  elementary  sounds : 

A  long  has  two  substitutes :  ei  and  ey,  as  in  weight  and 
they. 

A  short  has  no  substitutes. 

A  medial  has  one  substitute ;  ^  as  in  there. 

Aflat  has  no  substitutes.  ' 

A  droad  hsis  one  substitute;  0  as  in /or, 

jE  long  has  one  substitute ;  i  as  in  machine. 

£  short  has  two  substitutes ;  a  and  «,  as  in  says  and  dury. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  185 

I  long  has  one  substitute;  7  long  as  in  rhyme. 
I  short  has  four  substitutes;  y,  e,  u,  and  ^,  diSiw  hymn, 
England,  btisy,  and  women. 

O  long  has  two  substitutes;  eau  and  ew,  as  in  beau  and 

sezu. 

O  short  has  one  substitute ;  ^  as  in  what. 

O  slender  has  no  substitutes. 

U  long  has  one  substitute ;  ew,  as  in  fiew. 

U short  \ia.s  three  substitutes;  e,  z,  and  0,  as  in  her^  stir, 
and  son. 

U  7nedial  has  one  substitute,  0,  as  in  wolf  and  wool. 

F  has  two  substitutes ;  ph  and  ^//,  as  in  philosophy  and 
rough. 

G  has  part  of  a  substitute ;  as  x  in  exist. 

yhas  two  substitutes  besides  g  soft;  ^i  and  ^,  as  in  sol- 
dier and  verdure. 

K  has  two  substitutes  besides  c  hard  and  half  of  x;  ch 
and  ^/^,  as  echo  and  lough. 

S  has  two  substitutes ;  ^  soft^  z,  as  in  <r^;z/^r  and  quartz. 

T'has  one  substitute;  ed  final,  after  any  aspirate  except 
t,  as  in  mixed. 

Fhas  one  substitute ;/ in  the  word  of. 

W\\2js,  one  substitute;  u,  as  m  quake. 

V  has  one  substitute ;  i,  as  in  <2/^>72. 

Z  has  three  substitutes ;  s,  e,  and  .^^,  as  in  was,  siiffice,  and 

Ch  has  two  substitutes;  /i  and  /,  d.'^'wy  question  and  nature. 

Sh  has  six  substitutes;  <r(?,  ci,  si,  ti,  ch,  and  s,  as  in  ocean, 
social,  mansion,  nation,  chaise,  and  sugar. 

Zh  is  represented  by  .yz,  zi,  and  2:  and  j-  before  ?/,  as  in 
fusion,  glazier,  azure,  razure. 

Ng  has  one  substitute ;  n  generally  before  the  palatals, 
as  in  thank,  uncle,  finger,  conquer,  etc. 

Students  should  become  familiar  with  the  table  above,  for 


186  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

in  it  is  a  compilation  of  usefui  information  in  regard  to  the 
power  of  letters. 

52.  When  is  i  a  consonant? 

53.  Is  u  ever  a  consonant? 

54.  What  is  the  use  of  silent  letters? 

55.  Which  letters  are  never  silent? 

56.  Which  letters  have  no  sound  of  their  own? 

RULES    FOR    SILENT    LETTERS. 

A  rule  for  silent  letters  is  formed  when  a  letter  is  always, 
or  usually,  silent  in  similar  situations. 

57.  When  is  ^  final  silent? 

58.  What  would  be  the  result  if  ^  final  was  not  silent? 

59.  When  is  b  silent? 

60.  When  is  c  silent? 

61.  When  is  ^  silent? 

62.  When  is  g  silent? 
Gt,.     When  is  h  silent? 

64.  When  is  k  silent? 

65.  When  is  /  silent? 

66.  When  is  n  silent? 

67.  When  is/ silent? 

68.  When  is  /  silent? 

69.  When  is  w  silent? 

70.  When  is  gh  silent? 

71.  In  what  words  is  ch  silent? 

72.  In  what  words  is  s  silent? 

73.  Is  m  ever  silent? 

74.  In  how  many  ways  are  words  designated? 

75.  What  is  a  simple  word?     Compound? 

76.  What  is  a  primitive  word? 

77.  What  is  a  derivative  word? 

78.  What  is  a  prefix?     Suffix?     Root? 

79.  Under   what   circumstances   is   a   word    primitive 
which  is  formed  by  the  addition  of  prefixes  or  suffixes? 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  187 

The  following  is  a  plan  of  giving  the  full  analysis-  of  a 
word: 

Antidote — Simple,    derivative    word,    from   dote,    the 
primitive  part,  meaning  given ;  ant?',  a  suffix,  signifying 
against;  antidote,  what  is  given  against  poison;  dis- 
syllable, accent  on  the  first  syllable. 
a — vowel,  short  sound. 

n— cons.,  semi.,  ling.,  sbv.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  a. 
t — cons.,  mute.,  ling.,  aspr.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  ^ 
i — vowel,  short  sound. 

d — cons.,  mute.,  lab.,  sbv.,  antecedent  to  its  vowel  o. 
o — vowel,  long  sound. 

t — cons.,  mute.,  ling.,  aspr.,  consequent  to  its  vowel  o. 
e — vowel,  silent. 

For  exercise  the  following  words  should  be  analyzed  in  full : 
Counterpoise,  absolve,  expand,  syllable,  intrude,  trans- 
gress, enterprise,  coerce,  connect,  ignore,  contradict, 
supervene,  walking,  actor,  homicide,  parricide,  infanticide, 
matricide,  fratricide,  regicide,  suicide,  centennial,  octagon, 
hexagon,  polygon,  democracy,  hippodrome,  horticulture, 
homogeneous,  microscope,  telescope,  orthography,  geo- 
graphy, biography,  geology,  hydrophobia,  carnivorous,  tele- 
graph, cyclopedia,  stereotype. 


ANSAA^ERS 

TO 

Questions  on  Orthographyo 


1.  It  treats  of  correct  spelling,  and  the  nature  and 
power  of  letters. 

2.  The  art  of  a  conect  pronunciation  of  words 

3.  The  science  of  uttering  the  elementary  sounds. 

4.  A  character  used  to  represent  an  elementary  sound. 

5.  Distinct  sounds,  from  which  all  of  the  w6rds  of  our 
language  are  formed. 

6.  Forty-one*.  They  are  divided  into  thr^e  classes : 
vowels,  subvocals,  and  aspirates. 

7.  By  the  organs  of  speech,  with  the  breath. 

8.  The  principal  ones  are  the  lips,  teeth,  tongue  and 
palate. 

9.  By  the  action  of  the  breath  on  the  larynx. 

10.  The  upper  part  of  the  windpipe  or  trachea,  which 
modulates  the  voice  in  speaking  and  singing. 

1 1.  Into  vowels  and  consonants. 

12.  Vowels  are  letters  that  denote  pure  tones;  conso- 
nants are  letters  that  cannot  be  fully  uttered  without  the 
aid  of  a  vowel  sound. 

13.  They  have  three  divisions  formed  from  the  whole: 
as  single  letters  and  combinations ;  mutes  and  semi-vowels ; 
subvocals  and  aspirates. 

♦Some  authors  give  43,  some  38,  and  divide  them  into  tonics,  sub- 
stances, and  atonies. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  189 

14.  A  letter,  which  admits  of  no  escape  of  breath, 
while  the  organs  of  speech  are  in  contact.  The  mutes  are 
b^  p,  d,  /,  k,  c  and  g  hard. 

15.  A  letter,  which  in  pronouncing,  admits  of  an  escape 
of  breath.  The  semi-vowels  are  all  the  consonants  except 
the  mutes.* 

16.  Four  of  the  semivowels,  /,  w,  «,  r,  are  called 
liquids,  because  of  their  soft  sound,  which  easily  unites 
with  the  sounds  of  other  letters ;  two  of  them,  m  and  n,  and 
one  of  the  combinations,  ng,  are  called  nasals;  s  and  z  are 
called  sibilants,  or  hissing  letters.  These  properties  called 
liquids,  nasals  and  sibilants,  are  not  essential  in  analyzing 
words. 

1 7.  Those  consonants  which  produce  an  undertone  of 
voice  when  their  sounds  are  uttered.  The  subvocals  are 
^j  d^  g->  h  A  ^)  ^j  ^»  ^j  «'>  y^  z-)  ^^j  ^K  and  ng, 

18.  The  aspirates  are  mere  whispers  made  by  the  or- 
gans of  speech  and  breath,  and  are  ^,  /,  h^  k,  /,  s,  /,  x,  th, 
ch,  shj  and  wh. 

19.  They  are  th  aspirate,  ih  subvocal,  ch,  sh,  zh,  why 
and  ng. 

20.  Four:  labials^  dentals^  Unguals^  and  palatals. 

21.  They  are  made  by  the  lips,  and  are  <^,/,  m^  p.  v,  Wy 
and  wh.  The  lips  are  assisted  by  the  teeth  in  making  the 
sounds  of/ and  v. 

22.  They  are  made  through  the  teeth,  and  are  /,  s,  Zy 
ch.  sh,  zh,  and  c  and  g  soft. 

23.  They  are  made  by  the  tongue,  and  are  d,  /,  n,  r,  t, 
y,  fh  aspirate,  and  th  subvocal. 

24.  They  are  made  by  the  palate,  and  are  k,  q,  x,  ng, 
and  c  and  g  hard. 

25.  As  the  sound  is  lormed  by  emitting  the  breath  sud- 

*The  difference  between  the  mutes  and  semi-vowels,  is,  that  the 
organs  of  speech  are  more  closely  united  in  pronouncing  the  mutes 
than  the  semi- vowels. 


190  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

denly  with  all  the  organs  open,  it  does  not  properly  belong 
to  these  divisions,  as  the  organs  of  speech  are  not  brought 
into  action. 

26.  Letters  whose  elements  are  produced  by  the  same 
organs  in  a  similar  manner,  as  /  and  v.  The  aspirates 
(except  h)  are  all  cognates  of  some  of  the  subvocals. 

27.  Take  each  letter  separately,  state  whether  it  is  a 
vowel  or  consonant,  if  a  vowel,  what  sound,  if  a  consonant, 
give  its  divisions. 

28.  To  distinguish  th  subvocal  from  th  aspirate,  a  dash 
is  placed  beneath  the  subvocal, 

29.  There  ?.re  sixteen  vowel  sounds,  fifteen  subvocals, 
and  ten  aspirates. 

30.  A  has  .^ve  -.  long,  short,  medial,  flat,  and  broad,  as  in 
ale,  Of,  air,  art,  all. 

M  has  two :  long  and  short,  as  in  eat^  ebb. 

/has  two:  long  and  short,  as  in  ice,  it. 

O  has  three :  long,  short,  and  slender,  as  in  old,  not,  do. 

6^ has  three:  long,  short  and  medial,  as  in  due,  up, pull. 

Ou  and  o^v  have  one  and  the  same  sound,  as  in  out^ 
cow. 

Oi  and  oy  have  one  and  the  same  sound,  as  in  oil,  joy. 
The  diphthongs  oi  or  oy  are  not  purely  distinct  vowel 
sounds,  as  they  represent  two  sounds  in  connection,  broad 
a  and  short  /. 

31.  A  union  of  two  vowel  sounds  in  the  same  syllable. 

32.  Four:  ou,  ow,  oi,  oy. 

33.  Two :  ou  and  ow  represent  the  same  sound,  and  are 
called  inseparable  diphthongs,  because  they  cannot  be  sep- 
arated into  two  distinct  vowel  sounds ;  oi  and  oy  represent 
one  sound,  and  are  called  separable  diphthongs,  because  their 
sounds  can  be  separated  into  broad  a  and  short  /". 

To  test  the  separable  diphthongs  spell  by  sound  the  words 
oil  and  boy,  using  broad  a  and  short  /  in  each,  and  pro- 
nounce in  quick  succession. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  191 

34.  A  digraph  is  the  union  of  two  vowels  in  the  same 
syllable,  one  of  which  is  silent.  A  triphthong  is  the  union. 
of  three  vowels  in  the  same  syllable,  two  of  which  are  silent 

35.  When  they  represent  the  sounds  of  u  and  i. 
Some  authors  justly  question  whether  w  is  ever  a  vowel. 

It  cannot  form  a  syllable,  either  alone  or  in  connectioh 
with  consonants ;  which  all  the  other  vowels  will  do.  There- 
fore, as  it  requires  the  aid  of  a  vowel  letter  to  express  a 
perfect  syllable   it  cannot  be  a  perfect  vowel. 

■T^d.  A  letter  or  combination  of  letters,  uttered  by  one 
emission  of  the  voice. 

37.  A  syllable  or  combination  of  syllables  representing 
some  thought  or  idea. 

38.  Monosyllables,  dissyllables,  trisyllables,  and  poly- 
syllables. 

39.  A  vowel. 

40.  By  the  vowel,  except  in  unaccented  syllables  with 
e  as  the  vowel  sound. 

This  may  be  observed  by  the  careless  manner  in  which 
many  pupils  spell  such  words  as  table^  labels  center^  &c.  In 
these  words  the  vowel  is  not  as  distinct  as  the  consonant 
sounds. 

41.  Unless  it  is  silent,  every  consonant  in  a  word  be- 
longs to  some  vowel  or  diphthong. 

42.  When  it  precedes  the  vowel  in  the  same  syllable,  it 
is  antecedent  to  it ;  when  it  follows  in  the  same  syllable,  it 
is  consequent  to  it. 

43.  Dividing  words  into  syllables. 

44.  They  must  be  arranged  exactly  as  they  are  heard 
in  correct  pronunciation. 

45.  Between  the  syllables. 

46.  To  assist  in  the  pronunciation  of  words. 

47.  Between  compound  words  when  first  formed  or  when 
little  used;  between  syllables  at  the  end  of  lines; 
and  between  syllables  for  the  purpose  of  instruction. 


19^  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

48.  Unless  it  should  be  a  diphthong,  two  syllables  must 
be  formed,  or  they  may  be  used  together  with  one  vowel 
silent. 

49.  When  it  has  the  sound  that  another  letter  usually 
represents. 

50.  Those  of  the  letter  which  it  represents. 

51.  B,  d,  g,  h,  /,  m,  «,/,  r,  ///,  and  wh. 

52.  When  it  begins  a  syllable  and  is  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  a  vowel  sound ;  as  in  alien. 

53.  When  it  is  preceded  by  g  or  s,  and  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  a  vowel  sound,  it  is  a  consonant  and  a  substitute 
for  w;  as  in  ^iznguage. 

54.  To  modify  the  sounds  of  other  letters. 

55.  F,j,  q,r,x,Vy  z. 

56.  C,  X,  and  q. 

57.  When  another  vowel  precedes  it  in  the  same  sylla- 
ble ;  as  in  ?nade,  grape,  ice,  bride. 

58.  Two  syllables  would  be  formed  for  one. 

59.  Before  t  or  after  m  in  the  same  syllable;  as  in  comd^ 
tomb,  debt,  subtle. 

60.  Before  k  in  the  same  syllable ;  as  in  back,  rack,  luck. 
It  is  also  silent  in  czar,  indict,  muscle,  victuals,  and  a  few 
others. 

61.  Before  g in  the  same  syllable;  as  in  bridge,  pledge. 

62.  Before  m  or  n  in  the  same  syllable;  as  in  phlegniy 
gnat,  malign,  design. 

63.  After  ^  or  r  in  the  same  syllable ;  as  in  ghost,  rhyme, 
rheumatism;  when  it  is  final,  following  a  vowel ;  as  in  oh,  ah, 
Jehovah;  when  it  is  initial  it  is  silent  in  a  few  words;  as  in 
herb,  heir,  honest,  hour;  in  asthma,  phthisic,  isthmus,  Thomas, 
Thames,  it  follows  /  and  is  silent. 

64.  Before  n  in  the  same  syllable ;  as  in  knife,  knee. 

65.  After  a  when  followed  by/,  m,  k,  or  v,  in  the  same 
syllable  (except  valve);  as  in  folks,  half,  palm,  stalk,  salve. 
L  is  also  silent  in  could,  would,  and  should. 


ORTOOGRAPHY.  193 

66.  After  /  and  m;  as  in  kiln,  solemn. 

67.  When  it  is  initial  and  before  «,  s,  or  /;  as  in  psalm, 
pneumonia,  psalter. 

68.  Before  ch  in  the  same  syllable;  as  in  notch,  latch. 
It  is  also  silent  in  Christmas,  eclat,  mortgage,  and  a  few- 
others. 

69-  Before  r  in  the  same  syllable ;  as  in  wrap,  wreck. 
In  whole,  sword,  whoop,  answer  and  two  it  is  silent. 

70.  After  i  in  the  same  syllable;  as  in  fright,  neigh; 
after  au  and  ou;  as  in  aught,  ought,  bought,  slaughter,  and 
through. 

71.  In  yacht,  schism,  and  drachni. 

72.  In  corps,  isle,  island,  puisne,  viscount,  and  Belles- 
lettres. 

73.  In  the  word  ^/nemonic  or  mnemonics. 

74.  In  two  ways:  first,  as  simple  or  compound;  second, 
as  primitive  or  derivative. 

75.  One  that  is  not  composed  of  two  01  more  whole 
words ;  a  compound  word  is  composed  of  two  or  more  sim- 
ple ones. 

76.  One  that  is  derived  from  no  other  word. 

77.  One  formed  from  a  primitive  by  means  of  prefixes 
or  suffixes. 

78.  A  letter  or  letters  joined  to  the  beginning  of  a  word 
is  called  a  prefix ;  when  added  to  the  end  of  a  word,  a  suffix ; 
and  the  root  is  the  chief  word  without  prefix  or  suffix. 

79.  Whenever  the  meaning  of  the  word  is  radically 
changed  by  the  addition  of  prefixes  or  suffixes ;  as  in  re- 
proof, in  which  the  meaning  of  neither  re  or  proof  is  re- 
tained. 

In  forming  derivatives  by  means  of  suffixes,  something 
more  is  required  than  merely  to  write  the  parts  together  as 
one  word.  Thus,  if  we  desire  to  affix  the  suffix  ed  to  the 
word  suffer,  we  have  only  to  unite,  without  change,  thj  suf- 
fix with  the  radical ;  as  suffered.     If  we  take  prefer,  a  change 


194  THE    QUESTION    BOOK.. 

must  be  made  by  doubling  the  final  letter  r,  as  preferred. 
This  and  other  changes  of  like  nature  are  made,  for  the 
most  part,  in  strict  accordance  with  known  rules.  These 
rules  should  be  committed  to  memory  by  repeated  illustra- 
tions in  order  to  fully  understand  when  and  how  to  apply 
them. 


RULES  FOR  SPELLING. 

Rule  L — The  final  <?  of  a  radical  word  is  rejected,  when 
the  suffix  commences  with  a  vowel,  except  words  ending  in 
ce  or  ge.     Moving,  salable,  pleasure,  peaceable,  courageous. 

Rule  II. — The  final  ^  of  a  radical  word  is  generally  re- 
tained, when  the  suffix  commences  with  a  consonant;  as 
hopeless,  movement. 

In  abridge,  acknowledge,  argue,  awe,  due,  judge,  lodge, 
true,  and  whole,  silent  e  is  not  retained. 

Rule  III. — Monosyllables  and  words  accented  on  the 
last  syllable,  when  they  end  with  a  single  consonant,  pre- 
ceded by  a  single  vowel,  double  their  final  consonants  be- 
fore a  suffix  that  begins  with  a  vowel ;  as  baggage,  spotted, 
beginner. 

Rule  IV. — The  final  consonant,  when  not  preceded  by 
a  single  vowel,  or  when  the  word  is  not  accented  on  the 
last  syllable,  remains  single  upon  the  addition  of  a  suffix; 
as,  spoiling,  suffered,  toiling,  visiting. 

Rule  V. — The  final  y  of  a  radical  word,  when  preceded 
by  a  consonant,  is  generally  changed  into  /,  upon  the  addi- 
tion of  a  suffix ;  as  happmess,  tr/al,  stor/ed.  In  a  few 
instances  y  is  changed  into  e  before  ous  and  its  compounds ; 
as,  beauteous,  beauteously. 

Rule  VI. — ^The  final  i  of  a  radical  word,  is  omitted  when 
the  suffix  begins  with  i ;  as,  alkah',  alkalize. 

Rule  VII. — The  final^  of  a  radical  word,  when  preceded 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  196 

by  a  vowel,  or  when  the  suffix  begins  with  i,  remains  un- 
changed; as,  buyer,  glorying. 

Rule  VIII. — Words  ending  in/ or /<?,  commonly  change 
/  into  V,  when  a  suffix  is  added  beginning  with  a  vowel ;  as, 
wives,  mischievous. 

Rule  IX. — Words  ending  in  le,  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
drop  these  letters  upon  receiving  the  suffix  ly,  as,  ably, 
idly. 

Rule  X. — ^Words  ending  in  ble,  before  the  suffixes  ity  and 

ities^  take  i  between  tne  letters  b  and  /;  as.  ab/lity,  abilities. 

Rule  XI. — Words  ending  in  er  or  or,  often  drop  the  e  or 

Of  before  a  suffix  commencing   with    a   vowel  •   as   victrix, 

wondrous. 

Rule  XII. — Monosyllables  ending  in/,  /,  or  s,  preceded 
by  a  single  vowel,  double  the  final  consonant;  as,  stqff'f 
spell,  mill — except  if,  of,  as,  gas,  has,  was,  yes,  is,  his,  this, 
us,  thus. 

Rule  XIII. — Words  ending  in  any  other  consonants  than 
/,  /,  or  s,  do  not  double  the  final  letter — except  add,  odd^ 
ebb,  egg,  inn,  err,  bunn,  purr,  butt,  buzz,  fuzz. 

The  following  is  a  list  of  prefixes,  with  their  significations : 
A  signifies,  on,  in,  at,  to,  as,  abroad,  abed,  avert. 
AB  signifies  from ;  as,  absolve,  to  free  from. 
AD,  AC,  AF,  AG,  AL,  AN,  AP,  AR,  AT,  signify  to;  as,  adjoin, 
to  join  to. 

Accredit,  to  give  credit  to. 
Affix,  to  fix  to 
Agglutinate,  sticking  to. 
Allure,  entice  to. 
Annex,  join  to. 
"   Append,  hang  to. 
Arrange,  range  to. 
Attune,  tune  to. 
ALL,  AL,  signify  wholly;  as,  all-just,  wholly  just. 
Already,  wholly,  or  completely  ready. 


196  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

All,  when  not  separated  from  the  radical  by  a  hyphen, 
rejects  one  /. 
ANTi,  ANT,  signify  against ;  as,  antipathy,  a  feeling  against.. 

Antarctic,  opposite  to  the  arctic. 
ANTE  signifies  before ;  as,  antecedent,  going  before. 
BE  signifies  near;  as,  beside,  near,  or  by  the  side  of. 
Bi  signifies  two;  as,  bifold,  two-fold. 
CIRCUM    signifies   around;   as,    circumnavigate,    to  sail 

around. 

CON,  COM,  CO,  COL,  COR,  signify  with;  as  conjoin,  to  join 
with. 

Commix,  to  mix  with, 

Coequal,  equal  with. 

Collect,  to  place  with  or  together. 

Correlative,  relating  with. 
CONTRA,  COUNTER  signify  opposite ;  as, 

Contradance,  a  dance  opposite. 

Counterview,  a  view  opposite. 
DE  signifies  from ;  as,  depart,  to  depart  from. 
DEMI  signifies  half;  as,  demi-wolf,  half-wolf. 
DiA  signifies  through ;  as  diameter,  the  measure  through. 
Di,  Dis  signify  two ;  as, 

Ditone,  an  interval  of  two  tones. 

Dissyllable,  a  word  of  two  syllables. 
DIS  also  signifies  not  or  un ;  as,  dissimilar,    not    similar, 

disband,  unband. 
E,  EX,  EC,  EF,  signify  out ;  as, 

Emigrate,  to  move  out. 

Export,  to  carry  out  of  port. 

Eccentric,  out  of,  or  deviating  from  the  center. 

Effluent,  flowing  out. 
EXTRA  signifies  beyond ;  as  extravagant,  going  beyond. 
EQui    signifies   equal;   as,  equidistance,  at  an  equal  dis- 
tance. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  197 

EN,  EM,  signify  in ;  as. 

Enclose,  to  close  in. 

Embroil,  to  put  in  a  broil  or  tumult 
EU  signifies   well   or  agreeable;   as,  euphony,  agreeable 

sound. 
HEX  signifies  six ;  as,  hexangular,  six-angles. 
HYPER  signifies  over;  as,  hypercritical,  over-critical. 
IN,  IM,  IG,  IL,  IR,  signify  not  or  in ;  as, 

Incomplete,  not  complete. 

Imprudent,  not  prudent. 

Illegible,  that  can  not  be  read. 

Ignoble,  not  noble. 

Irregular,  not  regular. 
INTRO  signifies  within ;  as,  introspection,  looking  within. 
INTER  signifies  between ;  as,  intervene,  to  come  between. 
juxTA  signifies  next;  as,  juxtaposition,  placed  next. 
MAL  signifies  bad ;  as,  malpractice,  bad  practice. 
MIS  signifies  wrong ;  as,  misguide,  to  guide  wrong. 
MONO  signifies  one;  as,  monosyllable,  one  syllable/ 
MULTI  signifies  many ;  as,  multiform,  having  many  forms. 
NON  signifies  not;  as,  non  essential,  not  essential. 
OCT  signifies  eight,  as,  octangular,  eight  angled. 
OMNI  signifies  all ;  as,  omnipotent,  all  powerful. 
OUT  signifies  beyond;  as,  outrun,  to  run  beyond. 
OVER  signifies  above ;  as,  overshoot,  to  shoot  over. 
ovi  signifies  an  egg;  as,  oviform,  egg-shaped. 
PER  signifies  by ;  as,  perchance,  by  chance. 
PERI  signifies  around ;  as,  perimeter,  the  measure  around. 
PAR,  PARA,  signify  from ;  as 

parody,  an  ode  or  song  which  is    an  alteration   from 
another. 

parasol,  a  small  canopy  to  shield  from  the  sun. 
PEN  signifies  almost ;  as,  peninsula,  almost  an  island. 
PLENi  signifies  full ;  as,  plenipotent,  full  of  power. 
POLY  signifies  many;  as,  poUysyllable,  many  syllables. 


198  THE   QUESTION   BOOK. 

POST  signifies  after;  as,  postpone,  to  place  after  or  put  off. 
PRE  signifies  before;  as,  prejudge,  to  judge  beforehand. 
PRETER   signifies    beyond;     preternatural,    beyond   the 

natural. 
PRO  signifies  for   ;  as,  pronoun,  for  a  noun. 
PROTO  signifies  first;  as,  protomartyr,  the  first  martyr. 
QUAD  signifies  four;  as,  quadrangle,  four  angled. 
RE  signifies  again ;  as,  review,  to  view  again. 
RECT,  RECTI  signify  right  or  straight ;  as 

rectangle,  right  angle, 

rectilinear,  straight-lined. 
RETRO  signifies  back;  as,  retrograde,  to  go  backwards. 
SEMI,  DEMI,  HEMi,  signify  half;  as, 

semicircle,  half  a  circle. 

demitone,  half  a  tone. 

hemisphere,  half  a  sphere. 
STEREO  signifies  solid ;  as  stereotype,  solid  type. 
SUB,  sue,  suF,  SUG,  SUP,  suBTER,  signify  under;  as, 

subcommittee,  under  committee. 

succeed,  to  follow  after. 

suffix,  to  fix  after. 

suggest,  to  put  under  notice. 

suppress,  to  press  under. 

subterfluous,  flowing  under. 
SUPER,  suR,  signify  over  or  more;  as 

super  human,  more  than  human. 

surcharge,  overcharge, 
sus  signifies  up ;  as,  sustain,  to  hold  up. 
SE  signifies  apart ;  as,  secede,  to  go  apart. 
SINE  signifies  without ;  as,  sine  die,  without  a  day, 
6YM  signifies  with;  as  sympathy,  with  feeling. 
TRANS  signifies  across;  as,  transatlantic,  across  the  At- 
lantic. 
ULTRA  signifies  beyond ;    as,  ultramontane,  beyond  the 

mountains. 


ORTHOGRAPHY.  199 

UN  signifies  not ;  as,  unwise,  not  wise. 

WITH  signifies  against;  as,  withstand,  to  stand  against. 

The  following  table  contains  the  simple  suffixes  with 
their  definitions,  and  words  to  illustrate  them.  For  want 
of  space  a  full  analysis  of  the  words  cannot  be  given,  but 
the  student  can  supply  the  want  by  giving  a  complete 
definition  of  the  suffixes  and  primitive  words  combined. 

a.  Ize,  iize,  ze,  ise,  se,  ish,  fy,  ify,  en,  e,  ate,  iate,  uate, 
cafe,  icate,  ite,  signify  to  make,  to  give,  to  put  upon  or  into ; 
as,  civilize,  stigmatize,  glaze,  criticise,  cleanse,  establish,  sat- 
isfy, justify,  soften,  breathe,  maturate,  ampliate,  actuate, 
impHcate,  duplicate,  unite. 

b.  Ing,  ant,  ent,  ient,  signify  continuing  to ;  as,  watering, 
dormant,  pendent,  sufficient. 

c.  ed  signifies  did ;  as,  preferred,  did  prefer. 

d.  Ate,  He,  en,  signify  made,  made  of  or  like,  possessed 
of;  as,  globate,  erudite,  silken. 

e.  Ant,  ent,  ate,  ite,  ast,  ist,  ado,  ard,  on,  oso,  ar,  ary, 
iary,  er,  ee,  eer^  ier,  or,  ive,  ster,  ner,  yer,  zen,  isan,  an,  ian, 
tain,  signify  one,  who,  a  person;  as,  servant,  president,  col- 
legiate, favorite,  encomiast,  botanist,  desperado,  dotard, 
glutton,  virtuoso,  beggar,  adversary,  incendiary,  payer, 
payee,  charioteer,  cannonier,  executor,  executive,  teamster, 
partner,  lawyer,  citizen,  artisan,  veteran,  grammarian,  chief- 
tain. 

/.  Ess,  ix,  ine,  ago,  signify  a  female ;  as  lioness,  media- 
trix, heroine,  virago. 

g.  Ity,  ety,  ty,  cy,  ce,  ice,  ude,  tude,  itude,  ness,  t,  th, 
mony,  signify,  the  quality  or  state  of  being,  the  thing  which 
or  that  which;  as  publicity,  variety,  novelty,  privacy,  opu- 
lence, justice,  quietude,  plenitude,  exactitude,  meekness, 
restraint,  truth,   sanctimony. 

h.     Ion,  ment,  affient,  iment,  ure,  ture,  ature,  iture^  al, 
ade^  signify  the  act  of;  that  which;  as,    erection,  ejectment, 


200  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

armament,  impediment,  pressure,  mixture,  signature,  expen- 
diture, refusal,  cannonade. 

i.  A  I,  ealy  ial,  ual,  em,  urn,  iac,  ic^  tic,  otic,  etic,  id^ 
an,  can,  ian^  ane,  ine,  He,  eth,  th,  ar,  ary,  iary,  tmry,  signify 
pertaining,  belonging,  or  relating  to ;  as,  central,  corporeal, 
dictatorial,  habitual,  southern,  taciturn,  demoniac,  patriotic, 
dyspeptic,  emblematic,  dietetic,  stupid,  Roman,  marmo- 
rean,  Newtonian,  mundane,  crystaline,  infantile,  fortieth, 
tenth,  columnar,  missionary,  stipendiary,  sumptuary. 

j.  Ose,  ous,  eous,  ious,  uous,  ceous,  aceous,  aneous, 
oneous,  itious,fui,  ey,  y,  signify  lull  of;  abounding  in;  hav- 
ing the  nature,  or  quality  oi;  as,  verbose,  mountainous, 
righteous,  robustious,  tempestuous,  cetaceous,  lardaceous, 
instantaneous,  erroneous,  cementitious,  hopeful,  clayey, 
juicy. 

k.  Kin,  ling,  ule,  cule,  cle,  icle,  ock,  et,  let,  aster,  sig- 
nify little,  small,  minute,  slight,  petty,  lambkin,  kingling, 
globule,  animalcule,  tubercule,  particle,  hillock,  feveret, 
ringlet,  poetaster. 

/.  Ics  signifies  the  doctrine,  art  or  science  of;  as, 
optics. 

m.  Ism  signifies  that  which  is  peculiar  to ;  a  doctrine; 
a  state,  or  condition ;  as,  savageism,  Calvinism. 

n.     Er  signifies  more;  as,  wiser,  more  wise. 

0,     Est  signifi'is  most ;  as,  wisest,  most  wise. 

/.  Dotn,  ric,  ate,  hood,  ship,  age,  cy,  ry,  signify  the 
state,  rank,  office  of;  the  territory  or  jurisdiction  of;  as, 
Popedom,  bishopric,  electorate,  childhood,  township,  peer- 
age, captaincy,  chieftainry. 

q.  Y,  ry,  ary,  ery,  ory,  signify  the  art,  practice,  or 
business  of;  the  place  where;  as,  gluttony,  bigotry,  statu- 
ary, cookery,  armory. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


201 


EXERCISES      IN     ABBREVIATIONS      USED     IN 
WRITING. 


WRITE  OUT  IN  FULL. 

A.  A.  S. 
G.  C.  B. 
Id.    i.  e. 
C.  R  S. 
Nom.     No. 
I.  H.  S. 
A.  B.  or  B.  A , 
Col.     Coll. 
Min.    Plen. 
N.  J.     N.  H. 
Q.  E.  F. 
Qr.     Qt. 
Rt.  Rev. 
S.  A.     R.  R. 
Sec.    Leg. 
V.  P.     vs. 
Nov.      N.  S. 
Do.  or  Ditto. 
H.  B.  M. 
M.  B.    M.  D. 
Acct.     A.  B.  S. 
E.  J.      e.  g. 
U.  T.     Vt. 
C.  S.  A.     Yd. 
S.  E.     N.  W. 
Zool.     Pwt. 
N.  T.     N.  Y. 
111.     Ind. 
A.  M.    Md. 


ABBREVIATE. 

In  the  year  of  our  Lord. 

Member  of  Congress. 

Before  Christ. 

Keeper  of  the  Seal. 

Justice  of  the  Peace. 

House  of  Representatives. 

As  if  he  would  say. 

Blessed  Virgin. 

In  the  same  place. 

No  one  dissenting. 

Which  was  to  be  demonstrated. 

A  sufficient  quantity. 

Right  Honorable. 

For  the  time  being. 

Doctor  of  Divinity. 

Superintendent. 

New  Testament. 

A  hundred  weight. 

District  of  Columbia. . 

Bachelor  of  Divinity. 

And  so  forth. 

See ;  refer  to. 

United  States  Navy. 

The  last,  or  last  month. 

West  Indies. 

By  the  hundred. 

Attorney. 

Unknown. 

Manuscripts. 


202 


THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 


M.  P.     Neb. 
Co.     Am. 
Com.     Feb. 
Wm.     Wt. 
Wis.      Vt. 
O.  S.     Oct. 
P.  O.     Pop. 
U.  S.  A.      Viz. 
P.    pp.     Oz. 
Va.    V.    Wed. 
N.  E.    Ky.    Kans. 
Feb.    Fahr.    Cal. 
G.  B.    N.  C.    Neh. 
Tim.    Sp.    Sam. 
Rep.    Rev.    S. 
La.    lbs.    Fem. 
Id.    i.  e.    Gen. 
Mt.    N.  A.    Miss. 
Hhd.    Hist.    Gov. 
Hdkf.    Cr.    Dft. 
4  to.      LL  D.    8  vo. 
Sat.    S.  C.    W. 
Inst.    Int.    lo. 
Dist.    Diet.    Cyc. 
Long.    L.    Lat. 
\.   Minn.    Mad.   Masc. 
Gent.    Fur.    Ft. 
Jam.    Inter.    Dr. 
Conj.    Agt.    Al. 
E.    Deut.    Dea. 
Hon.    Gr.    U.  S. 
Cor.    Adj.    Anon. 
Capt.    Chron.    C. 
N.    Myth,    Mo. 


Doctor  of  Laws. 

Love  of  learning. 

Right  Honorable. 

Old  Testament. 

To  wit ;  namely. 

Postmaster;  afternoon. 

Take  notice. 

Rhode  Island. 

Parliament. 

Gentlemen;  Sirs. 

Fellow  of  the  Royal  Society. 

Professor,  President. 

Texas,  Territory. 

Postscript,  Regiment. 

Mademoiselle,  Major. 

Italy,  Hundred,  Dozen. 

Fellow  of  the  Society  of  Arts. 

Assistant,  Junior. 

Cash  on  delivery. 

Thursday,  Schooner. 

Volume,  Philadelphia. 

Geology,  Louisiana. 

Place  of  the  Seal. 

Meridian,  Thousand. 

Legislature,  Lieutenant. 

Long  Island,  Matthew. 

Executor,  Barrel,  Adverb. 

Mistress,  Servant,  Democrat 

Alderman,  Amount,  Editor. 

Esquire,  Geometry,  History. 

Constable,  Constitution. 

Chapter,  Capitals,  Avenue. 

Mexico,  Michigan,  Minnesota. 

Memorandum,  Maine. 


QUESTIONS 

ON  , 

Civil   Government. 


1.  What  is  a  constitution? 

2.  What  is  a  preamble  ? 

3.  What  are  legislative  powers,  and  in  what  are  they 
vested? 

4.  What  is  Congress? 

5.  What  is  the  Senate?     House  of  Representatives? 

6.  How  are  senators  and  representatives  elected,  and 
for  how  long  a  term  of  office  ? 

7.  How  old  must  a  representative  be,  and  how  long  a 
citizen  of  the  United  States? 

8.  What  is  an  elector? 

9.  How  are    representatives  apportioned   among    the 
states? 

10.  What  is  census?     How  often  taken? 

11.  If  vacancies  happen  in  the  representation  of  any 
state,  how  is  that  vacancy  filled? 

12.  What  are  writs  of  election? 

13.  What  officers   does  the  House  of  Representatives 
choose? 

14.  What  sole  power  has  this  branch  of  Congress? 

15.  What  is  impeachment? 

16.  Into  how  many  classes  are  the  senators  divided? 

17.  Who  is  president  of  the  Senate?     Can  he  vote? 

18.  Should  a  vacancy  occur  in  the  Senate,  what  is  to  be 
done? 


204  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

19.  How  old  must  a  senator  be,  and  how  long  a  citi- 
zen of  the  United  States? 

20.  Who  becomes  president  of  the  Senate  when  the 
vice-president  is  absent? 

21.  What  sole  power  belongs  to  the  Senate? 

22.  How  may  the  president  of  the  United  States  be 
punished  for  crime  in  office? 

23.  What  judgment  can  the  Senate  declare  against  a 
convicted  president? 

24.  If  an  officer  is  removed  from  office  by  an  impeach- 
ment trial,  is  he  subject  to  the  common  law? 

25.  What  is  a  judgment?     Indictment? 

26.  What  is  an  oath?     An  affirmation? 

27.  What  officers  does  the  Senate  choose? 

28.  What  is  the  meaning  of  pro  tempore  ? 

29.  Who  appoints  the  times,  places,  and  manner  of 
holding  elections  of  senators  and  representatives?  What 
may  Congress  do? 

30.  If  disputes  arise  in  election  returns,  how  are  they 
to  be  decided? 

31.  How  many  does  it  require  to  do  business?  What 
may  a  smaller  number  do? 

32.  What  power  has  each  house  over  its  members? 

33.  Can  either  House  adjourn  at  pleasure? 

34.  Shall  each  House  keep  a  journal  of  its  proceedings? 

35.  When  shall  the  yeas  and  noes  be  entered  on  the 
journal? 

36.  When  shall  Congress  assemble?  Can  it  assemble 
at  any  other  time? 

37.  How  do  members  receive  compensation? 

38.  Can  a  member  be  arrested  while  Congress  is  in 
session?  I 

39.  For  what  shall  they  not  be  questioned  in  any  other 
place? 


CIVIL   GOVERNMENT.  205 

40.  Can  a  person  hold  an  office  under  the  United  States 
and  be  a  member  of  Congress? 

41.  Where  shall  bills  for  raising  revenue  originate? 

42.  What  is  revenue?     What  is  a  bill? 

43.  When  does  a  bill  become  a  law? 

44.  What  question  does  not  require  the  sanction  of  the 
president  ? 

45.  What  are  the  powers  of  Congress  r 

46.  What  is  meant  by  high  seas?     By  law  of  nations? 

47.  What  are  letters  of  marque  and  reprisals? 

48.  What  are  duties,  imports,  and  excises? 

49.  What  is  the  militia? 

50.  Over  what  district  may  Congress  exercise  exclu- 
sive legislation? 

51.  What  are  forts?  magazines?  arsenals?  dockyards? 

52.  What  is  the  writ  of  y^^^^^i- ^^r/^^i-/     When  can  it  be 
suspended? 

53.  What  is  a  bill  of  attainder?     Is  it  allowed? 

54.  What  is  an  ex  post  facto  law? 

55.  Can  a  tax  or  duty  be  laid  on  articles  exported  from 
any  state? 

56.  WTiat  is  prohibited  in  regard  to  nobility  and  the 
receiving  of  presents? 

57.  Can  any  state  enter  into  any  treaty,  alliance,  or 
confederation? 

58.  Can  a  state  engage  in  war? 

59.  What  are  the  states  forbidden  to  do  in  regard  to 
imposts  or  duties  on  imports  or  exports? 

60.  In  whom  is   the   executive  power  of  the  United 
States  vested? 

61.  Who  are  eligible  to  this  office? 

62.  How  are  the  President  and  Vice-President  elected? 
(iT,.     Supposing  the   House   of  Representatives   fail  to 

elect  a  President  whenever  the  right  of  choice  shall  devolve 
upon  them,  who  shall  act  as  President? 


$06  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

64.  What  may  Congress  determine  in  regard  to  the 
time  of  choosing  the  electors? 

65.  When  does  the  Vice-President  act  as  the  chief 
magistrate  ? 

66.  How  is  the  President  compensated  for  his  services? 

67.  What  oath  must  he  take  before  he  enters  upon  the 
execution  of  his  office? 

68.  Who  is  commander-in-chief  of  the  army  and  navy? 

69.  What  offence  is  he  not  permitted  to  pardon? 

70.  Does  he  have  a  right  to  make  treaties,  appoint  em- 
bassadors, judges  of  the  Supreme  Court,  and  officers  of  the 
United  States? 

71.  If  a  vacancy  occur,  during  a  recess  of  Congress 
how  is  it  filled? 

72.  What  is  the  President's  message. 

73.  For  what  crimes  can  the  President,  Vice-President, 
and  all  civil  officers  of  the  United  States  be  impeached? 

74.  What  is  treason?     Bribery? 

75.  In  what  is  the  judicial  power  of  the  United  States 
vested? 

76.  How  long  do  the  judges  of  the  Supreme  Court  hold 
office? 

77.  To  what  cases  does  their  power  extend? 

78.  In  what  cases  has  the  Supreme  Court  original  juris- 
diction? 

N^^^       79.     Where  shall  a  criminal  be  tried? 

80.  If  the  crime  is  not  committed  in  the  United  States, 
where  must  the  trial  be  held? 

81.  What  crimes  are  not  tried  by  jury? 

82.  What  power  declares  the  punishment  of  treason? 
How  shall  a  person  be  convicted? 

83.  What  is  meant  by,  "but  no  attainder  of  treason  shall 
work  corruption  of  blood  or  forfeiture,  except  during  the 
iife  of  the  person  attained?" 

84      What  faith  and  credit  shall  be  given  each  state? 


CIVIL    GOVERNMENT.  207 

85.  Can  a  person  charged  with  crime  be  taken  from  an 
other  state? 

86.  How  are  new  states  admitted  into  the  Union? 

87.  How  can  new  states  be  formed? 

88.  What  power  has  Congress  in  regard  to  the  territory 
and  other  property  belonging  to  the  United  States? 

89.  What  shall  the  United  States  guarantee   to  every 
State  in  the  Union? 

90.  What  is  the  supreme  law  of  the  land?     Who  are 
bound  by  oath  to  support  it? 

91.  Is  a  religious  test  required  as  a  qualification  to  any 
office  or  pubHc  trust? 

92.  How  may  the  constitution  be  amended? 

93.  How  many  amendments  to  the  constitution?  When 
were  the  first  ten  adopted? 

94.  What  did  Congress  grant  in  the  first  amendment  to 
the  constitution? 

95.  What  privilege  was  given  the  states  in  the  second 
amendment? 

96.  What  is  the  law  respecting  the  quartering  of  soldiers 
in  any  house  in  the  time  of  peace? 

97.  What  rights  are  secured  to  the  people  in  the  fourth 
amendment? 

98.  Can  a  person  be  twice  put  in  jeopardy  of  life? 

99.  Can  a  person  be  compelled  to  be  a  witness  against 
himself  ? 

100.  What  is  the  law  respecting  the  taking  of  private 
property? 

10 1.  In  the  sixth  amendment,  what  right  shall  the  ac- 
cused enjoy  in  all  criminal  prosecutions? 

102.  When  shall  the  right  of  trial  by  jury  be  preserved? 

103.  What  shall  not  be  required,  nor  imposed,  no*r  in- 
flicted, in  the  eighth  amendment? 

104.  In  the   tenth   amendment,  what  powers   are  re- 
served to  the  states  respectively,  or  to  the  people? 


208  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

105.  What  is  the  thirteenth  amendment? 

106.  In  the  fourteenth  amendment,  who  is  forbidden 
from  holding  certain  offices?  How  may  the  disability  be 
removed? 

107.  What  is  said  of  the  public  debt?  What  shall  be 
held  as  illegal  and  void? 

108.  What  is  the  fourteenth  amendment? 


AN  S  W  E  R  S 


TO 


Questions  on  Ciyil  Government. 


1.  The  established  form  of  government  in  a  state, 
kingdom  or  country. 

2.  A  formal  and  explanatory  introduction. 

3.  The  right  to  make  and  enforce  laws,  and  are  vested 
in  a  Congress  of  the  United  States. 

4.  An  assemblage  especially  applied  to  the  two  houses 
of  legislative  power  in  the  United  States. 

5.  The  Senate  is  the  upper  house  of  a  legislature,  or 
Congress.  The  House  of  Representatives  is  the  lower 
branch  of  a  Legislature,  or  Congress. 

6.  Senators  are  elected  by  the  legislatures  of  the  states 
for  a  term  of  six  years,  each  state  being  entitled  to  two ; 
representatives  are  elected  by  the  people  for  a  term  of  two 
years,  each  state  being  represented  according  to  its  popu- 
lation. 

7.  Twenty-five  years,  and  seven  years  a  citizen 

8.  One  entitled  to  vote. 

9.  According  to  the  population  of  the  states. 

10.  An  official  enumeration  of  the  people,  with  the 
statement  of  their  property,  pursuits,  age,  etc.  It  is  to  be 
taken  once  in  ten  years,  which  forms  a  new  basis  of  appor- 
tioning the  number  of  representatives  to  the  several  states. 

11.  By  the  executive  authority  of  the  state. 

12.  A  writing  issued  to  an  officer  or  officers  to  give 
notice  of  some  election  to  be  held. 


^6  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

13.  The  speaker,  chief  clerk,  and  sergeant-at-arms. 

14.  The  sole  power  of  impeachment. 

15.  An  accusation  or  charge  brought  against  a  public 
officer  for  misconduct  in  office. 

16.  Three :  one  class  being  elected  every  two  years. 

17.  The  vice-president  of  the  United  States,  and  is  en- 
titled to  the  casting  vote. 

18.  The  executive  of  the  state  may  make  a  temporary 
appointment,  until  the  next  meeting  of  the  legislature. 

19.  Thirty  years  of  age,  and  nine  years  a  citizen. 

20.  The  Senate  elects  one  pro  tern. 

21.  The  sole  power  to  try  all  impeachments. 

22.  He  shall  be  impeached  by  the  House  of  Represen- 
tatives, and  tried  b>  the  Senate,  sitting  for  that  purpose,  on 
oath  or  affirmation,  and  the  Chief  Justice  shall  preside. 
The  conviction  shall  be  by  the  concurrence  of,  two-thirds 
of  the  members  present. 

23.  It  shall  not  extend  further  than  to  removal  from 
office,  and  disqualification  to  hold  and  enjoy  any  office  of 
honor,  trust,  or  profit  under  the  United  States. 

24.  He  is  liable  and  subject  to  indictment,  trial,  judg- 
ment, and  punishment,  according  to  law. 

25.  Judgment  is  the  sentence  pronounced  by  the  judge 
or  court  by  which  the  person  is  tried.  Indictment  is  a  writ- 
ten accusation  of  crime  made  by  a  grand  jury. 

26.  An  oath  is  a  solemn  declaration,  made  with  an  ap- 
peal to  God  for  the  truth  of  what  is  affirmed.  An  affirma- 
tion is  a  solemn  declaration,  made  by  one  who  is  unwilling 
to  take  an  oath. 

27.  They  choose  all  of  their  officers  except  the  presi- 
dent of  the  Senate,  but  when  absent  or  exercising  the  office 
of  president  of  the  United  States,  one  shall  be  chosen  pro 
tempore, 

28.  For  the  time  being. 

19.     It  is  prescribed  in  each  state  by  the  Legislature 


CIVIL    GOVERNMENT.  211 

thereof;  but  Congress  may  at  any  time  by  law  make  or 
alter  such  regulations,  except  as  to  the  places  choosing  sen- 
ators. 

30.  Each  House  shall  be  the  judge  of  the  elections,  re- 
turns, and  qualifications  of  its  own  members. 

31.  A  majority;  but  a  smaller  number  may  compel  the 
attendance  of  absent  members,  in  such  a  manner  and  un- 
der such  penalties  as  each  House  may  provide. 

32.  It  may  punish  its  members  for  disorderly  beha- 
Tior,  and  with  the  concurrence  of  two-thirds,  expel  a  mem- 
ber. 

;^^.  Not  for  more  than  three  days,  without  the  consent 
of  the  other  House. 

34.  It  shall,  and  print  the  same,  unless  secresy  is  re- 
quired. 

35.  When  one-fifth  of  those  present  shall  require  it. 

^6.  The  first  Monday  in  December;  but  it  may  be  con- 
vened by  the  president,  when  necessary,  or  Congress  may 
adjourn  from  time  to  time. 

37.  By  law;  and  are  paid  out  of  the  treasury  of  the 
United  States. 

;^8.     Only  for  felony,  treason,  or  breach  of  the  peace. 

39.     For  any  speech  or  debate  in  Congress. 

.40.     He  cannot. 

41.  In  the  House  of  Representatives. 

42.  Revenue  is  the  income  of  government,  arising  from 
taxes,  duties,  etc. 

A  bill  is  a  formal  writing  presented  to  the  Legislature 
for  enactment. 

43.  By  passing  both  Houses  of  Congress,  and  receiv- 
ing the  sanction  of  the  president ;  but  if  returned  within  ten 
days,  Sundays  excepted,  with  his  objections,  it  does  not 
become  a  law,  unless  reconsidered  and  passed  by  a  two- 
thirds  vote  of  both  Houses. 

44.  The   question   of   adjournment,    except   in   cases 


212  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

of  disagreement  between  the  two  Houses  with  respect  to 
the  time  of  adjournment,  when  the  President  can  adjourn 
them  to  such  a  time  as  he  shall  think  proper. 

45.  Section  8.  The  Congress  shall  have  power  to  lay 
and  collect  taxes,  duties,  imposts,  and  excises,  to  pay  the 
debts  and  provide  for  the  common  defense  and  general 
welfare  of  the  United  States;  but  all  duties,  imposts,  and 
excises  shall  be  uniform  throughout  the  United  States ;  to 
borrow  money  on  the  credit  of  the  United  States ;  to  regu- 
late commerce  with  foreign  nations,  and  among  the  several 
states,  and  with  the  Indian  tribes ;  to  establish  a  uniform 
rule  of  naturalization,  and  uniform  laws  on  the  subject  of 
bankruptcies  throughout  the  United  States ;  to  coin  money, 
regulate  the  value  thereof,  and  of  foreign  coin,  and  fix  the 
standard  of  weights  and  measures;  to  provide  for  the  pun- 
ishment of  counterfeiting  the  securities  and  current  coin  of 
the  United  States;  to  establish  post-offices  and  post-roads; 
to  promote  the  progress  of  science  and  the  useful  arts,  by 
securing  for  limited  times  to  authors  and  inventors  the  ex- 
clusive right  to  their  respective  writings  and  discoveries; 
to  constitute  tribunals  inferior  to  the  Supreme  Court;  to 
define  and  punish  piracies  and  felonies  committed  on  the 
high  seas,  and  offences  against  the  law  of  nations ;  to  declare 
war,  grant  letters  of  marque  and  reprisal,  and  make  rules 
concerning  captures  on  land  and  water;  to  raise  and  sup- 
port armies,  but  no  appropriation  of  money  to  that  use 
shall  be  made  for  a  longer  term  than  two  years ;  to  provide 
and  maintain  a  navy;  to  make  rules  for  the  government  and 
regulation  of  the  land  and  naval  forces ;  to  provide  for  calling 
forth  the  militia  to  execute  the  laws  of  the  Union,  suppress  in- 
surrections, and  repel  invasions;  to  provide  for  organizing, 
arming,  and  disciplining  the  militia,  and  for  governing  such 
part  of  them  as  may  be  employed  in  the  service  of  the 
United  States,  reserving  to  the  states  respectively,  the  ap- 
pointment of  the  officers,  and  the  authority  of  training  the 


CIVIL   GOVERNMENT.  213 

militia  according  to  the  discipline  prescribed  by  Congress; 
to  exercise  exclusive  legislation  in  all  cases  whatsoever, 
over  such  district  (not  exceeding  ten  miles  square)  as  may, 
by  cession  of  particular  states,  and  the  acceptance  of  Con- 
gress, become  the  seat  of  government  of  the  United  States, 
and  exercise  like  authority  over  all  places  purchased  by 
the  consent  of  the  Legislature  of  the  state  in  which  the 
same  shall  be,  for  the  erection  of  forts,  magazines,  arsenals, 
dockyards,  and  other  needful  buildings; — and  to  make  all 
laws  which  shall  be  necessary  and  proper  for  carrying  into 
execution  the  foregoing  powers,  and  all  others  vested  by 
this  Constitution  in  the  government  of  the  United  States, 
or  any  department  or  officer  thereof. 

46.  The  law  of  nations,  the  accepted  or  universal 
laws  of  all  nations. 

47.  Written  authority  from  government  to  seize  the 
property  of  an  enemy,  especially  vessels  and  cargoes. 

48.  Duty,  a  tax  levied  on  imports.  Imports,  goods 
brought  from  other  countries.  Excise,  a  tax  on  anything 
made,  used,  or  sold. 

49.  The  citizens  of  a  state  liable  to  military  duty  en- 
rolled for  service. 

50.  The  District  of  Columbia. 

51.  Fort,  a  place  of  defense.  Magazine,  a  store 
where  ammunition  is  kept.  Arsenal,  a  repository  for  arms 
and  military  stores.  Dockyard,  a  place  for  containing  all 
kinds  of  naval  stores  and  timber. 

52.  A  writ  for  delivering  a  person  from  false  imprison- 
ment, and  can  only  be  suspended  in  cases  of  treason,  or 
when  the  public  safety  requires  it. 

53.  A  special  act  of  the  Legislature  inflicting  capital 
punishment  upon  persons  supposed  to  be  guilty  of  high 
crimes,  without  the  process  of  law.  It  is  not  allowed  by 
the  constitution  of  the  United  States. 


214  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

54.  A  law  making  an  act  criminal  which  was  not  so 
when  done.     It  is  not  allowed. 

55.  It  cannot. 

56.  No  title  of  nobility  shall  be  granted  by  the  United 
States ;  and  no  person  holding  an  office  of  profit  or  trust 
under  them,  shall,  without  the  consent  of  Congress,  accept 
of  any  present,  emolument,  office,  or  title  of  any  kind 
whatever,  from  any  king,  prince,  or  foreign  state. 

57.  It  cannot. 

58.  Not  unless  in  imminent  danger  from  invasion. 

59.  No  state  shall,  without  the  consent  of  Congress,  lay 
any  imposts  or  duties  on  imports  or  exports,except  what  may 
be  absolutely  necessary  for  executing  its  inspection  laws. 

60.  In  a  president. 

61.  Any  citizen  born  in  the  United  States,  thirty-five 
years  of  age,  and  fourteen  years  a  resident. 

62.  By  electors  chosen  by  the  people. 

The  electors  shall  meet  in  their  respective  states  and 
vote  by  distinct  ballots  for  President  and  Vice-President. 
These  votes  are  sealed  and  transmitted  to  the  seat  of  gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States,  directed  to  the  President  of 
the  Senate.  The  President  of  the  Senate  shall,  in  the  pres- 
ence of  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives,  open 
all  the  certificates,  and  the  votes  shall  then  be  counted; 
the  person  having  the  greatest  number  of  votes  for  Presi- 
dent shall  be  President,  if  such  number  be  a  majority  of  the 
whole  number  of  electors  appointed ;  and  if  no  person 
have  such  majority,  then  from  the  persons  having  the  high- 
est numbers,  not  exceeding  three  on  the  list  of  those 
voted  for  as  President,  the  House  of  Representatives  shall 
choose  immediately,  by  ballot,  the  President. 

The  person  having  the  greatest  number  of  votes  as  Vice- 
President,  shall  be  the  Vice-President,  if  such  number  be  a 
majority  of  the  whole  number  of  electors  appointed,  and  if 


CIVIL    GOVERNMENT.  215 

no  person  have  a  majority,  then  from  the  two  highest  num- 
bers on  the  list,  the  Senate  shall  choose  the  Vice-President. 
6;^.  The  Vice-President  shall  act  as  President,  in  the 
case  of  the  death  or  other  constitutional  disability  of  the 
President. 

64.  Congress  may  determine  the  time  of  choosing  the 
electors,  and  the  day  on  which  they  shall  give  their  vote; 
which  day  shall  be  the  same  throughout  the  United  States. 

65.  In  case  of  the  removal  of  the  President  from  office, 
or  of  his  death,  resignation,  or  inability  to  discharge  the 
powers  and  duties  of  the  said  office. 

66.  The  President  shall,  at  stated  time,  receive  for  his 
services  a  compensation  which  shall  neither  be  increased 
or  diminished  during  the  period  for  which  he  shall  have 
been  elected,  and  he  shall  not  receive  within  that  period 
any  other  emolument  from  the  United  States,  or  any  of 
them. 

67.  "I  do  solemnly  swear  (or  affirm)  that  I  will  faith- 
fully execute  the  office  of  President  of  the  United  States, 
and  will,  to  the  best  of  my  ability  preserve,  protect,  an(i 
defend  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States. " 

68.  The  president. 

69.  Cases  of  impeachment. 

70.  He  has  the  right  with  the  advice  and  consent  o^ 
the  Senate  to  make  treaties,  provided  two-thirds  of  the 
senators  present  concur,  and  with  the  advice  and  consent 
the  Senate  he  shall  appoint  embassadors,  ministers,  judges, 
and  officers  of  the  United  States,  and  all  appointments 
which  shall  be  established  by  law. 

71.  By  an  appointment  by  the  President. 

72.  An  article  directed  to  Congress,  stating  the  condi- 
tion of  the  country,  and  proposing  such  measures  as  he  may 
judge  necessary  and  expedient. 

73.  For  treason,  bribery,  and  other  high  crimes  and 
misdemeanors. 


216  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

74.  Treason  against  the  United  States  shall  consist  only 
in  levying  war  against  them,  or  in  adhering  to  their  ene- 
mies, giving  them  aid  and  comfort. 

Bribery  is  giving  money  or  some  other  consideration  to 
procure  desired  legislation,  a  judicial  decision,  or  other 
official  action. 

75.  In  one  Supreme  Court  and  such  inferior  courts  as 
Congress  may  from  time  to  time  establish. 

76.  During  good  behavior,  or  life. 

77.  In  all  cases  arising  under  the  Constitution,  the  laws 
of  the  United  States,  and  cases  that  cannot  be  settled  in 
the  Supreme  Court  of  any  state. 

78.  In  all  cases  affecting  embassadors,  other  public  min- 
isters and  consuls,  and  those  in  which  a  state  shall  be  a 
party.  In  other  cases  the  Supreme  Court  shall  have  ap- 
pellate jurisdiction,  or  jurisdiction  by  an  appeal  from  lower 
courts. 

79.  In  the  state  where  the  crime  is  committed. 

80.  At  such  a  place  or  places  as  Congress  may  by  law 
have  directed. 

81.  Crimes  subject  to  impeachment. 

82.  Congress.  No  person  shall  be  convicted  of  treason 
unless  on  the  testimony  of  two  witnesses  to  the  same  overt 
act,  or  on  confession  in  open  court. 

S$.  That  no  posterity  or  person  shall  be  denied  any 
rights  because  of  the  punishment  or  conviction  of  another. 

84.  Full  faith  and  credit  shall  be  given  in  each  state  to 
the  public  acts,  records,  and  judicial  proceedings  of  every 
other  state. 

85.  On  demand  of  the  executive  authority  of  the  state 
where  the  crime  was  committed. 

86.  By  consent  of  Congress. 

87.  From  territories  having  30,000  inhabitants,  or  from 
states  or  parts  of  states  with  the  consent  of  the  states  con- 
cerned. 


CIVIL    GOVERNMENT.  217 

88.  Congress  shall  have  power  to  dispose  of  and  make 
all  needful  i-ules  and  regulations  respecting  it. 

89.  A  republican  form  of  government  and  protection. 

90.  The  constitution  and  laws  of  the  United  States. 
All  government  officers  and  representatives  are  bound  by 
oath  to  support  it. 

91.  No  religious  test  shall  ever  be  required  as  a  qualifi- 
cation to  any  office  or  public  trust  under  the  United  States. 

92.  By  two-thirds  vote  of  both  houses  of  Congress,  or 
by  the  action  of  the  legislatures  of  two-thirds  of  the  states, 
ratified  in  either  case  by  three-fourths  of  all  the  states. 

93.  Fifteen;  the  first  ten  were  adopted  at  the  first  ses- 
sion of  Congress. 

94.  Freedom  of  religion,  of  speech,  of  the  press,  the 
right  of  the  people  peaceably  to  assemble,  and  to  petition 
to  the  government  for  a  redress  of  grievances. 

95.  The  right  of  the  people  to  keep  and  bear  arms. 

96.  No  soldier  shall,  in  the  time  of  peace,  be  quartered 
in  any  house  without  the  consent  of  the  owner,  nor  in  time 
of  war,  but  in  a  manner  to  be  prescribed  by  law. 

97.  The  right  of  the  people  to  be  secure  in  their  per- 
sons, houses,  papers,  and  effects,  against  unreasonable 
searches  and  seizures. 

98.  Nor  shall  any  person  be  subject  for  the  same 
offense  to  be  twice  put  in  jeopardy  of  life  or  limb. 

99.  He  cannot. 

100.  If  taken  for  public  use,  he  shall  have  just  com- 
pensation. 

loi.  A  speedy  and  public  trial,  by  an  impartial  jury;  to 
be  confronted  with  the  witnesses  against  him ;  to  have  com- 
pulsory process  for  obtaining  witnesses  in  his  favor,  and  to 
have  the  assistance  of  counsel  for  his  defence. 

102.  In  suits  at  common  law,  where  the  value  in  con- 
troversy shall  exceed  twenty  dollars. 

103.  Excessive  bail  shall  not  be  required,  nor  exces- 


218  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

sive  fines  imposed,  nor  cniel  and  unusual  punishment  in- 
flicted. 

104.  The  powers  not  delegated  to  the  United  States  by 
the  Constitution,  nor  prohibited  by  it  to  the  states,  are  re- 
served to  the  states  respectively,  or  to  the  people. 

105.  Neither  slavery  nor  involuntary  servitude,  except 
as  a  punishment  for  crime,  whereof  the  party  shall  have 
been  duly  convicted,  shall  exist  within  the  United  States, 
or  any  place  subject  to  their  jurisdiction. 

106.  Persons  who  have  held  office  under  the  United 
States,  or  of  any  state,  and  shall  have  been  engaged  in  in- 
surrection, or  rebellion  against  the  same,  or  given  aid  or 
comfort  to  the  enemies  thereof  Congress  may,  by  a  vote 
of  two-thirds  of  each  house,  remove  such  disability. 

107.  The  vaHdity  of  the  public  debt  of  the  United 
States,  authorized  by  law,  shall  not  be  questioned.  Any 
debt  or  obligation  incurred  in  aid  of  insurrection  or  rebel- 
lion against  the  United  States,  or  any  claim  for  the  loss  or 
emancipation  of  any  slave,  shall  be  held  illegal  and  void. 

108.  The  right  of  the  citizens  of  the  United  States  to 
vote  shall  not  be  denied  or  abriged  by  the  United  States 
or  any  state  on  account  of  race,  color,  or  previous  condi- 
tion of  servitude. 


QUESTIONS 


ON 


PHYSIOLOGY  km  ANATOMY. 


1.  What  is  Physiology? 

2.  What  is  Anatomy?     What  is  Hygiene? 

3.  What  law  is  impressed  on  all  animal  beings? 

4.  What  is  the  difference  between  food  and  living  flesh? 

5.  What  organs  constitute  the  digestive  apparatus? 

6.  What  difference  in  the  teeth  of  the  carnivorous  and 
herbivorous  animals? 

7.'    How  many  teeth  has  man,  and  how  divided? 

8.  Of  what  are  teeth  composed? 

9.  How  are  the  teeth  set  in  the  jaw? 

10.  What  are  salivary  glands?     What  is  their  function? 

11.  Where  are  the  salivary  glands  situated? 

12.  Describe  the  pharynx,   or  second  chamber  of  the 
mouth. 

13.  What  is  the  epiglottis? 

14.  Describe  the  cesophagus. 

15.  How  does  food  find  its  way  to  the  stomach? 

16.  Describe  the  stomach. 

17.  By  what  is  the  food  dissolved  in  the  stomach? 

18.  Describe  the  process  of  digestion  in  the  stomach. 

19.  Of  what  is  gastric  juice  composed? 

20.  What  is  hunger? 

21.  Wliat  is  the  relative  position  of  the  stomach,  lungs, 
IW'^*  and  diaphragm? 


220  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

22.  To   what   substance  is   all   food   reduced   in   the 
stomach? 

23.  Does  the  stomach  digest  fatty  articles  of  food? 

24.  What  is  the  temperature  of  the  stomach? 

25.  Can  food  be  digested  artificially? 

26.  What  is  the  pyloric  valve? 

2  7.     How  long  does  it  take  our  chief  articles  of  food  to 
digest? 

28.  What  is  the  first  work  of  the  stomach  in  digestion? 

29.  Into   what  organ  does   the  chyme  pass  from  the 
stomach? 

30.  Describe  the  intestinal  canal. 

31.  What  is  the  pancreas? 

32.  What  is  the  office  of  the  pancreas? 

33.  What  are  the  lacteal  absorbments? 

34.  What  is  the  lacteal  duct? 

35.  What  is  called  the  lacteal  system? 

36.  How  is  the  digested  food  disposed  of  ? 

37.  What  is  chyle? 

38.  When  is  a  new  supply  of  nutriment  needed? 

39.  Will  the  stomach  bear  sudden  changes  in  the  time 
of  eating? 

40.  When  does  the  body  sustain  labor  and  exposure 
best? 

41.  Why  do  growing  persons,  or  convalescents  require 
more  food  than  adults  or  persons  in  health? 

42.  What  is  the  common  error  in  regard  to  eating? 

43.  When  any  organ  of  the  body  is  in  action,   what 
changes  occur? 

44.  What  is  the  office  of  the  liver? 

45.  Where  is  the  bile  emptied? 

46.  Where  is  the  spleen? 

47.  What  is  the  office  of  the  spleen? 

48.  What  is  fatigue? 

49.  What  is  rest? 


PHYSIOLOGY    AND    ANATOMY.  221 

50.  What  terms  are  applied  to  the  difference   in   the 
temperament  of  men  ? 

51.  Describe  the  nervous  temperament. 

52.  Describe  the  sanguine  temperament. 

53.  Describe  the  bilious  temperament. 

54.  Describe  the  lymphatic  temperament. 

55.  How  does  childhood  differ  from  old  age? 

56.  Does  this  difference  lequire  a  modification  of  diet? 

57.  What  two  things  are  to  be  considered  in  all  kinds 
of  food? 

58.  What  are  the  natural  effects  of  stimulation? 

59.  What  is  the  effect  of  alcohol? 

60.  What  becomes  of  the  chyle  ? 

61.  What   is  the   apparatus  of  the  circulation  of  the 
blood  ? 

62.  Describe  the  heart. 

63.  What  is  the  beating  of  the  heart? 

64.  What  are  the  valves  of  the  heart? 

65.  How  do  these  valves  act? 

66.  How  many  sets  of  blood-vessels? 

67.  Describe  the  arteries. 

68.  Describe  the  veins. 

69.  Describe  the  capillaries. 

70.  What  is  the  difference  between  the  pulmonary  and 
systemic  circulation? 

71.  Give  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

72.  What  is  the  aorta? 

73.  Where  are  the  carotids? 

74.  Where  are  the  subclavians? 

75.  What  arteries  supply  the  stomach  with  blood? 

76.  How  is  the  liver  supplied? 

77.  How  are  the  kidneys  supplied? 

78.  How  is  the  spleen  supplied? 

79.  How  is  the  intestinal  canal  supplied? 

80.  How  is  the  heart  supplied  ? 


222  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

8i.     What  are  the  chief  divisions  of  the  aorta? 

82.  What  is  the  vena  cava? 

83.  What  are  the  names  of  the  larger  branches  of  the 
vena  cavas? 

84.  How  are   the  arteries  or  veins  arranged  in  respect 
to  each  other? 

85.  How  does  the  blood  pass  through  the  heart? 

86.  How  do  the  pulmonary  arteries  and   pulmonarj' 
veins  differ? 

87.  Where  are  the  largest  arteries  situated? 

88.  Where  are  the  largest  veins  situated? 

89.  What  prevents  the  blood  in  the  veins  from  jflowinpc 
backwards? 

90.  How  does  arterial  blood  differ  from  venous? 

91.  What  action  has  the  lungs  upon  the  blood? 

92.  What  causes  the  blood  to  circulate  in  the  veins? 

93.  How  much  blood  in  a  man  of  average  size? 

94.  In  what  time  does  it  circulate  through  the  system? 

95.  What   circumstances  will  affect  the  rate  of  circula- 
tion? 

96.  How  do  mental  states  affect  the  circulation? 

97.  Where  is  the  living  flesh  made? 

98.  What  materials  of  the  body  are  obtained  from  the 
blood? 

99.  For  what  purpose  is  the  circulation  of  the   blood? 
'V,      100.     What  law  must  be  observed,  in  regard  to  eating, 

if  health  is  preserved? 

10 1.  How  are  the  wasted  particles  of  the  body  dis- 
posed of? 

102.  What   elements   are   selected  by  the  nutritive  or- 
gans to  form  fat? 

103.  What  elements  are  required  to  form  hair? 

104.  What  to  form  muscle? 

105.  Describe  the  lungs. 

106.  Describe  the  air-cells. 


PHYSIOLOGY  AS^B   ANATOMY.  223 

107.  What  is  the  organ  of  voice?     How  is  voice  pro- 
duced? 

108.  Describe  the  spine. 

109.  Describe  a  vertebra, 
no.  What  is  the  pelvis? 

111.  What  is  the  sternum? 

112.  What  is  the  coccyx? 

113.  Describe  the  ribs. 

114.  Describe  the  skull. 

115.  What  are  the  bones  of  the  arm  and  forearm? 

116.  What  are  the  bones  of  the  wrist? 

117.  What  are  the  bones  of  the  hands? 

118.  Name  the  bones  of  the  lower  extremities. 

119.  How  many  different  kinds  of  joints? 

120.  How  are  the  joints  held  together? 

121.  Where  is  the  clavicle? 

122.  Where  is  the  scapula? 

123.  What  pecuHarity  about  the  joints  of  the  neck? 

124.  How  is  the  femur  joined  to  the  pelvis? 

125.  What  peculiarity  about  the  elbow  and  wrist  joints? 

126.  Describe  the  hip  joint. 

127.  Describe  the  shoulder  joint. 

128.  How  many  bones  in  the  human  body? 

129.  Of  what  is  a  bone  made? 

130.  What  is  the  structure  of  a  bone? 

131.  Where  are  the  synoval  membranes  situated? 

132.  What  is  the  function  of  the  synoval  membrane? 

133.  When  is  a  joint  said  to  be  sprained? 

134.  What  is  a  muscle? 

135.  How  many  kinds  of  muscles, 

136.  What  is  the  use  of  muscles? 

137.  How  many  muscles? 

138.  How  are  the  muscles  under  the  control   of  the 
will? 

139.  Is  the  heart  a  muscle?     Voluntary  or  organic? 


224  THE  QUESTION   BOOK, 

140.  How  do  we  breathe? 

141.  Describe  the  diaphragm. 

142.  Explain  the  process  of  inspiration. 

143.  Explain  the  process  of  expiration. 

144.  What  is  coughing? 

145.  What  is  sneezing? 

146.  What  is  the  effect  of  breathing  the  same  air  sev- 
eral times? 

147.  In  how  many  ways  is  the  air  unfit  for  respiration? 

148.  How  much  fresh  air  ought  to  be  supplied  to  each 
person  per  minute? 

149.  How  much  air  will  the  lungs  hold? 

150.  What  effect  has  an  ill-ventilated  school-room  upon 
children? 

151.  What  is  the  average   number  of  respirations  per 
minute? 

152.  What    animals    are    most    active?     What    most 
sluggish? 

153.  How    does    consumption    waste    the   flesh   and 
strength  ? 

154.  Why  does  sleep  sometimes  fail  to  refresh? 

155.  What  is  carbonic  acid? 

156.  What  is  a  common  source  of  danger  from  carbonic 
ax:id? 

157.  How  does  drowning  produce  death? 

158.  What  necessity  is  imposed  on  all  animals? 

159.  What  reciprocal  offices  do  animals  and  vegetables 
perform  ? 

160.  What  is  the  temperature  of  the  human  body? 

161.  ^Vhat  is  the  origin  of  heat  in  living  bodies? 

162.  Into   what  classes  are  animals  divided  in  relation 
to  heat? 

163.  What  prevents  an  increase   of  temperature  in  the 
body? 

164.  What  is  insensible  perspiration? 


PHYSIOLOGY   AND   ANATOMY.  225 

165.  What  is  sensible  perspiration? 

166.  Which  protects  from  cold  best,  alcohol  or  food? 

167.  Which  warms  most,  flesh  or  bread? 

168.  Why  is  more  fat  required  for  food  in  a  cold  climate 
than  in  a  warm? 

169.  Describe  the  skin. 

1 70.  What  is  the  cuticle? 

171.  What  part  of  the  blood  flows  through  the  skin? 

172.  Describe  the  hair. 

1 73.  Describe  the  nails. 

174.  Where  is  the  seat  of  color  in  the  skin? 

175.  What  proportion  of  the  waste  of  the  body  passes 
through  the  skin  ? 

176.  ^Vhat  connection  exists  between  the  internal  or- 
gans and  the  skin? 

177.  What  is  the  office  of  the  skin? 

178.  Name  those  organs  which  carry  off"  waste  matter 
from  the  body. 

1 79.  Name  those  organs  which  bring  fresh  material  to 
the  body. 

180.  Describe  the  minute  structure  of  the  perspiratory 
organs. 

181.  Of  what  does  the  nervous  system  consist? 

182.  Describe  the  general  outline  of  the  brain. 

183.  How  is  the  brain  protected? 

184.  What  large  nervous  trunks  have  their  origin  in  the 
brain? 

185.  What  is  the  spinal  cord,  and  its  position? 

186.  How  many  kinds  of  nerves? 

187.  What  three  things  are  necessary  for  sensation? 

188.  Is  the  action  of  the  different  organs  modified  by 
the  nerves? 

189.  Do  the  arteries  have  nerves? 

190.  If  the  nerve  which  governs  the  action  of  the  heart 
should  be  severed,  what  would  the  heart  do? 


226  THE   QUESTION    BOOK. 

191.  What  is  day-dreaming? 

192.  Describe  the  eye. 

193.  What  is  the  sclerotic  coat?     Cornea? 

194.  What  is  the  choroid  coat? 

195.  Where  is  the  retina?     Its  office? 

196.  Where  is  the  iris?     Its  office? 

197.  Describe  the  hds. 

198.  Where  is  the  fluid  prepared  which  moistens  the 
eyes? 

199.  What  are   the   lachrymal  glands?     What  is  the 
nasal  duct? 

200.  \Vhat  moves  the  eye? 

201.  Describe  the  optic  nerve. 

202.  How  is  vision  produced? 

203.  How  does  the  eye  change  as  one  grows  old? 

204.  What  is  the  difference  between  a  short-si'ghted  man 
and  one  who  is  long-sighted? 

205.  Why  are  some  persons  cross-eyed? 

206.  What  does  the  organ  of  hearing  include? 

207.  Describe  the  external  ear. 

208.  Describe  the  internal  ear. 

209.  What  is  the  eustachian  tube? 

210.  How  is  sound  produced? 


AN  S^V  E  RS 

TO 

Questions  on  Physiology, 


1.  The  science  of  the  organic  functions  of  animals  or 
plants. 

2.  The  science  of  the  structure  of  animal  bodies. 

3.  That  branch  of  medicine  which  treats  of  the  preser- 
vation of  health. 

4.  Food  is  the  material  we  eat,  changed  by  the  action 
of  the  system  into  living  flesh. 

5.  The  mouth,  pharynx,  oesophagus,  stomach,  pancreas 
and  intestinal  canal. 

6.  The  carnivorous  have  sharp  front  teeth,  and  long, 
sharp  and  pointed  canine  teeth,  and  grinders  with  high 
and  sharpened  points.  The  herbivorous  have  short,  blunt, 
and  strong  front  teeth;  small  canine  teeth;  but  their 
molars  are  very  large  broad  and  flat,  with  slightly  raised 
lines  on  their  surface. 

7.  Sixteen  in  each  jaw:  four  incisors  in  the  center;  one 
canine  next  to  the  incisors,  on  each  side ;  then  two  bicus- 
pids, and  three  molars. 

8.  They  are  composed  of  soft  bone  within,  but  are 
covered  on  the  outside  with  an  enamel  of  very  hard  tex- 
ture, which  admits  of  an  exquisitely  fine  polish. 

9.  With  long  fangs,  so  they  are  not  easily  started  from 
their  places. 

10.  They  are  glands  which  empty  their  fluids  into  the 


228  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

mouth.  Their  function  is  to  secrete  fluid  which  moistens  the 
food  during  mastication,  and  assists,  in  a  measure,  in  diges- 
tion. 

11.  The  two  larger  ones,  situated  between  the  ear  and 
upper  part  of  the  jaw,  and  are  called  parotid  glands.  Two 
smaller  ones  situated  about  half  way  between  the  symphe- 
sis,  or  center,  are  called  submaxillary.  Smaller  ones  still, 
underneath  the  tongue,  are  called  sublingual. 

12.  It  is  separated  from  the  mouth  by  the  palate.  Four 
passages  open  out  of  it :  one  leads  forward  to  the  mouth ; 
a  second,  upward  to  the  nose ;  a  third,  downward  to  the 
lungs;  and  a  fourth,  backward  to  the  stomach. 

13.  A  small  valve  placed  over  the  mouth  of  the  trachea, 
admitting  air,  but  excluding  all  foreign  substances. 

14.  It  is  a  soft  muscular  tube,  extending  from  the 
pharynx  to  the  stomach,  and  is  about  nine  inches  in  lengthy 
and  some  less  than  one  inch  in  diameter.  It  is  composed 
principally  of  two  muscular  coats;  the  fibers  of  one  run 
lengthwise  of  the  tube,  and  the  fibers  of  the  other  passing 
around  it  in  a  circular  manner. 

15.  Upon  being  forced  back  in  the  mouth  to  the  phar- 
ynx it  causes,  by  its  presence,  the  muscles  of  the  pharynx 
to  contract  upon  it.  This  is  the  act  of  swallowing,  and  is 
beyond  the  control  of  the  will.  The  circular  fibers  of  the 
muscles  of  the  oesophagus  seize  upon  the  morsel  of  food, 
and  contracting,  force  it  downward  until  it  reaches  the 
stomach. 

16.  It  is  an  oval-shaped  sac,  situated  below  the  dia- 
phragm on  the  same  plane  with  the  liver,  and  lies  mostly 
on  the  left  side  of  the  spine.  It  has  two  openings;  an  up- 
per, or  cardiac  orifice,  where  the  oesophagus  enters;  and  a 
lower  or  pyloric  orifice,  which  enters  into  the  duodenum. 
It  is  composed  of  three  coats :  an  outer,  or  serous  coat, 
which  is  the  same  as  that  which  lines  the  whole  abdomen ; 
a  middle,  or  muscular  coat  composed   of  two   layers   of 


PHYSIOLOGY  AND   ANATOMY.  229 

iibers,  longitudinal  and  circular,  the  contraction  of  which 
move  the  food  about  the  stomach  during  digestion ;  and  an 
inner,  or  mucous  coat,  containing  the  gastric  tubules,  which 
secrete  the  gastric  juice. 

17.  A  powerful  fluid  called  the  gastric  juice. 

1 8.  The  presence  of  food  in  the  stomach  causes  the 
gastric  juice  to  be  thrown  out.  The  muscles  of  the  stom- 
ach move  the  food  about,  which  causes  the  gastric  juice  to 
be  thoroughly  intermingled  with  it.  The  gastric  juice  re- 
duces the  food  to  a  pulpy  mass,  which  occurs  usually,  in 
three  cr  four  hours,  and  is  then  passed  out  of  the  stomach  ^ 
at  the  pyloric  orifice. 

19.  It  is  composed  of  an  acid,  supposed  to  be  lactic 
or  hydrochloric  acid,  and  an  organic  substance  called  pep- 
sine. 

20.  A  sensation  of  want  of  more  nutriment  in  the  body, 
and  is  caused  by  the  action  of  the  blood  on  the  terminal 
branches  of  the  nerves  in  the  mucous  coat  of  the  stomach. 

21.  The  lungs  lie  within  the  walls  of  the  thorax,  sep- 
arated from  the  abdomen  by  a  broad  muscle,  the  diaphragm. 
Under  the  right  lung,  below  the  diaphragm,  lies  the  liver; 
and  to  the  left  is  the  stomach. 

22.  A  pulpy  substance,  called  chyme. 

23.  It  does  not;  they  are  digested  by  the  pancreatic 
and  intestinal  juices. 

24.  About  100^  F. 

25.  It  can.  If  food  be  thoroughly  mixed  with  hydro- 
hloric  acid  and  pepsine,  and  kept  at  an  equal  temperature 
of  100°,  it  will  be  reduced  in  a  few  hours  to  a  homoge- 
neous mass  somewhat  resembling  chyme. 

26.  It  is  no  valve,  but  simply  a  narrowing  or  contrac- 
tion of  the  pyloric  end  of  the  stomach. 


230 


THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 


27.    Articles. 


Preparation. 


Time. 


Hrs.  Min. 


Apples,  hard,  sour.  . . . 
Apples,  sweet,  mellow. 

Barley 

Beef,  fresh,  rare 

Beef,  steak 

Bread,  wheat,  fresh... 

Cake,  sponge 

Cheese,  old 

Codfish,  salt,  dry 

Ducks,  wild 

Eggs,  fresh 

Eggs,  fresh 

Eggs,  fresh,  whipped. . 

Milk,  new 

Mutton,  fresh 

Oysters,  fresh 

Oysters,  fresh —  . . . . . 
Pigs'  feet,  soused  . . . . 
Pork,  fat  and  lean  . . . , 

Pork,   salted 

Potatoes,  Irish. . ;  . . . . , 

Potatoes,  Irish. 

Rice 

Sausage 

Soup,  barley 

Soup,  oyster 

Tripe,    soused. ....... 

Trout,  fresh. 

Veal,  fresh 

Venison,  steak 


Raw. 

Raw. 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Fried. 

Baked. 

Baked. 

Raw. 

Boiled 

Roasted. 

Boiled,  har-'. 

Roasted. 

Raw. 

Raw. 

Roasted. 

Raw. 

Stewed. 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Raw. 

Boiled. 

Roasted. 

Boiled. 

Broiled. 

Boiled. 

Boiled. 

Boiled. 

Fried. 

Fried. 

Broiled. 


50 
30 


30 
30 
3«> 

30 
30 
20 

30 
15 


3 

15 

S 

. . 

3 

30 

I 

.. 

5 

15 

3 

... 

3 

30 

2 

30 

I 

... 

3 

20 

I 

30 

3 

30 

I 

30 

4 

30 

I 

35 

28.  To  get  rid  of  the  greater  part  of  the  fluid  which  has 
been  swallowed  with  the  food. 

29.  Into  the  duodenum. 

30.  It  is  composed  of  three  coats,  arranged  in  a  man- 
ner similar  to  the  stomach,  and  for  similar  purposes.  The 
mucous  coat  secretes  the  intestinal  juice,  which  aids  diges- 
tion. It  is  divided  into  the  large  and  small  intestines ;  the 
small  intestine  is  sub-divided  into  the  duodenum,  jejunum, 
and  ileum ;  between  the  ileum  and  the  large  intestine  is  a 
a  perfect  valve,  which  alldws  nothing  to  pass  back  that 
has  once  entered  the  large  intestine  from  the  ileum. 


PHYSIOLOGY   AND    ANATOMY.  231 

31.  A  long,  narrow  gland,  situated  immediately  below 
and  behind  the  stomach. 

32.  It  secretes  the  pancreatic  juice,  which  is  emptied 
into  the  duodenum,  and  digests  the  fatty  parts  of  food. 

;^^.  Numberless  minute  tubules  in  the  intestinal  mucous 
membrane,  which  take  up  by  absorption  the  nutriments, 
and  convey  it  to  the  blood.  These  tubules  join  together, 
forming  other  tubules,  which  again  join,  and  continue  to  do 
so  until  all  are  united  in  the  thoracic  duct. 

34.  The  duct  into  which  all  the  lacteal  absorbents  empty, 
and  is  sometimes  called  the  thoracic  duct.  It  passes  up- 
ward along  the  spine,  and  empties  into  the  left  subclavian 
vein. 

35.  The  lacteal  absorbents,  the  tubes  which  they  form 
by  joining  together,  and  the  lacteal  duct, — all  together 
form  the  lacteal  system, 

36.  In  the  duodenum  the  digested  food  is  divided  into 
two  kinds :  that  which  is  to  enter  the  blood  vessels,  and 
the  waste. 

3  7.  Food  reduced  to  a  whitish  colored  fluid,  and  ready 
to  be  absorbed  by  the  lacteals. 

^S.  When  the  lacteal  absorbents  have  consumed  the 
chyle  and  carried  it  to  the  veins,  and  the  blood  can  no 
longer  meet  the  demands  of  the  wasting  flesh. 

39.  Not  without  some  complaint.  One's  appetite  re- 
turns ^t  established  periods;  then  his  stomach  craves  food, 
and  the  gastric  juice  is  ready  to  flow  and  dissolve  it. 

40.  When  it  is  best  nourished. 

41.  In  order  to  meet  the  new  conditions,  and  supply 
the  new  wants  of  the  system. 

42.  That  to  please  the  palate,  food  that  is  not  easily 
digested  is  eaten,  and  more  than  the  system  requires. 

43.  The  nervous  force  of  the  part  is  increased,  and  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  quickened,  to  supply  the  waste 
and  support  its  powers. 


232  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

44.  To  form  the  bile,  the  elements  of  which  are  sep- 
arated from  the  blood. 

45.  It  is  emptied  through  a  duct  into  the  duodenum, 
and  serves  to  keep  the  intestinal  contents  in  a  healthy  con- 
dition. 

46.  On  the  left  side  of  the  spine. 

47.  It  is  a  ductless  gland ;  and  its  office  is  not  for  a 
certainty  known. 

48.  A  waste  of  the  particles  of  the  system,  by  exercise 
greater  than  the  new  materials  supplied  by  the  blood. 

49.  The  restoration  of  the  materials  wasted  by  fatigue. 

50.  The  general  classes  are  the  nervous,  sanguine,  bil- 
ious, and  lymphatic  temperaments. 

51.  Those  in  whom  the  nervous  system  predominates, 
who  are  easily  elated  or  depressed,  whose  mental  actions 
are  performed  with  rapidity. 

52.  Those  in  whom  the  circulatory  system  predomin- 
ates, who  are  strong,  but  at  the  same  time  active,  who  are 
bold  and  resolute,  and  always  hopeful. 

53.  Those  in  whom  the  physical  system  predominates, 
who  are  strong  in  mind  and  body,  but  not  quick,  who.  are 
calm,  steady,  and  persevering. 

54.  Those  in  whom  the  lymphatic  system  predomin- 
ates, who  are  indisposed  to  exertion  and  unexcitable. 

55.  In  childhood  the  blood  flows  rapidly,  the  muscles 
are  easily  stimulated  to  action,  the  nervous  system  is  irri- 
table, and  the  feelings  and  passions  are  readily  quickened. 
In  old  age,  all  the  powers,  feelings  and  passions  are  in  an 
opposite  direction. 

56.  It  does.  The  elastic  period  requires  a  mild  and 
soothing  diet,  while  the  inactive  period  needs  more  stimu- 
lating food. 

57.  First — The  digestibility.  Second — The  quantity 
of  nutriment  contained  in  them. 

58.  When  any  part  of  the  body  is  rubbed  with  pepper, 


PHYSIOLOGY    AND    ANATOMY.  233 

mustard,  or  spirits,  it  creates  an  irritation;  the  blood  flows 
to  the  place  more  abundantly;  there  is  greater  action  and 
quicker  life ;  but  these  effects  soon  cease,  and  then  the 
skin  is  pale,  the  circulation  is  more  languid,  for  unusual 
action  of  the  muscles  causes  fatigue. 

5j9.  It  is  quick  in  action,  both  in  excitement  and  ex- 
haustion. To  a  healthy  stomach  it  must  be  injurious,  foi 
it  gives  only  temporary  strength;  it  only  quickens  the  ac- 
tion and  expenditure  of  power  already  existing,  leaving  the 
stomach  to  fall  below  its  natural  standard. 

60.  It  is  taken  up  by  the  lacteal  absorbents,  carried 
through  the  lacteal  tubes,  to  the  thoracic  duct,  and  from 
that  emptied  into  the  left  subclavian  vein  near  the  heart. 

61.  The  heart,  arteries,  capillaries,  and  veins. 

62.  It  is  a  hollow,  muscular  organ  of  a  conical  form, 
placed  between  the  lungs,  lying  more  in  the  left  than  right 
cavity  of  the  chest.  It  is  about  five  inches  in  length,  three 
inches  and  a  half  in  breadth,  and  two  inches  and  a  half  in 
thickness ;  and  weighs  from  eight  to  twelve  ounces.  It  is 
divided  by  a  se-ptum  into  two  lateral  halves;  and  a  trans- 
verse construction  divides  each  half  into  two  cavities,  the 
upper  cavity  on  each  side  being  called  the  auricle,  and  the 
lower  the  ventricle. 

6^.  When  the  heart  contracts,  to  send  the  bl®od  out, 
the  apex  is  thrown  forward  and  strikes  against  the  ribs  of 
the  left  side,  near  the  breast  bone,  where  the  beating  is 
very  easily  felt. 

64.  In  the  passage-ways  of  the  heart  valves  are  placed, 
which  open  to  allow  the  blood  to  pass  downward,  but  they 
close,  and  prevent  its  passing  upward. 

65.  They  act  on  the  same  principle  as  the  valve  in  the 
common  pump-box. 

66.  Three :     The  arteries,  veins  and  capillaries. 

67.  They  are  tubular  vessels,  which  serve  to  convey  the 
blood  fiom  both  ventricles  of  the  heart   to  every  part  of 


234  THE    QUESTION    BOOK.. 

the  boay.  They  are  composed  of  three  coats :  internal, 
middle,  and  external.  The  middle  coat  consists  of  muscu- 
lar and  elastic  fibers  principally,  which  make  the  larger 
arteries  very  elastic.  The  arteries  are  supplied  with  nutri- 
ent arteries  and  nerves. 

68.  The  veins  return  the  blood  from  the  capillaries  to 
the  heart,  communicating  very  freely  with  one  another. 

69.  They  are  minute  terminal  branches  of  the  arteries, 
and  pervade  nearly  every  tissue  of  the  body  in  a  vast  net- 
work. 

70.  In  the  pulmonary  circulation  the  blood  is  conveyed 
to  the  lungs  to  be  purified,  and  then  brought  back  to  the 
heart;  in  the  systemic  circulation  the  blood  is  carried  to 
every  part  of  the  system,  and  returned  by  the  veins  to  the 
heart. 

71.  By  a  contraction  of  the  heart  the  blood  is  forced 
from  the  left  ventricle  through  the  aortic  valve?  into  the 
aorta,  and  through  all  the  arteries  of  the  body,  to  the  upper 
and  lower  extremities,  and  the  internal  organs.  From 
these  various  points  it  enters  the  capillaries,  where  all  the 
changes  in  the  system  are  produced;  and  is  then  taken  up 
by  the  veins,  and  returned  as  venous  blood  to  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart.  From  the  right  auricle  it  passes  through 
a  valvular  constriction  into  the  right  ventricle ;  from  the 
right  ventricle  it  is  forced  through  valves  into  the  pulmon- 
ary arteries,  which  carry  it  to  the  lungs;  and  from  the 
lungs  returned  again  to  the  heart  through  the  pulmonary 
veins,  entering  the  left  auricle  of  the  heart,  and  passing  to 
the  left  ventricle,  the  point  of  commencement. 

72.  The  largest  artery  in  the  systemic  circulation.  It 
passes  upward  from  the  heart  at  first,  describes  a  curve, 
and  goes  downward,  passing  through  the  diaphragm,  and 
along  the  spinal  column.  The  curved  portion  is  called 
the  arch  of  the  aorta ;  between  the  arch  and  the  diaphragm 


PHVSiOLOGlif    AND    ANATOMY.  236 

it  is  called  the  thoracic   aorta;  below  the  diaphragm,  the 
abdominal  aorta. 

73.  The  carotids  are  arteries  carrying  blood  upwards 
along  the  neck;  the  left  carotid  arises  from  the  arch  of  the 
aorta ;  the  right  from  the  arteria  innominata,  a  large  vessel 
springing  from  the  aorta. 

74.  The  subclavians  carry  blood  to  the  arms;  the  left 
arises  from  the  arch  of  the  aorta;  the  right  from  the  arteria 
nominata. 

75.  The  gastric  artery,  arising  from  the  coelic,  which 
arises  from  the  abdominal  aorta;  also,  a  branch  from  the 
splenic  artery,  and  one  from  the  hepatic. 

76.  The  liver  is  supplied  by  the  hepatic  artery,  a  branch 
of  the  coelic  axis. 

77.  The  kidneys  are  supplied  by  the  renal  arteries. 

78.  By  the  splenic  artery,  the  third  branch  of  the  coelic 
axis. 

79.  By   the  superior  and  inferior  messenteric  arteries. 
So.     By  the   coronary  arteries,  small  branches  from  the 

aorta. 

81.  The  subclavian,  carotid,  coelic,  hepatic,  renal, 
Splenic,  and  where  the  aorta  branches  off  to  go  to  the  ex- 
tremities it  is  then  called  (the  two  branches  that  pass 
through  the  groins)  the  inguinal  arteries,  and  where  they 
enter  the  thighs  the  femoral  arteries. 

82.  There  are  two  vessels  by  this  name :  one  called  the 
superior,  and  the  other  the  inferior  vena  cava.  The 
superior  vena  cava  is  formed  by  the  junction  of  the  two  in- 
nominate veins,  which  in  turn  are  formed  from  the  sub- 
clavian and  jugular  veins.  The  inferior  vena  cava  is 
formed  from  the  junction  of  the  two  iliac  veins,  which  are 
supplied  by  the  femoral  and  other  veins.  Both  vessels 
empty  into  the  right  auricle  of  the  heart. 

83.  The  jugular,  subclavian,  and  inguinal  veins. 

84.  The  arteries  begin  at  the  heart,  and  end  in  all  the 


236  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

parts  of  the  body,  in  minute  tubes.  The  veins,  on  the 
contrary,  begin  in  the  flesh  of  all  the  parts  of  the  body  at 
the  connecting  link  (the  capillaries),  and  end  in  one  large 
trunk,  the  vena  cava,  at  the  heart. 

85.  By  the  contraction  of  the  heart,  which  forces  the 
blood  from  one  chamber  to  another;  first,  from  the  right 
auricle  to  the  right  ventricle,  then  to  the  lungs,  and  back 
to  the  heart,  passing  through  the  left  auricle  and  left  ven- 
tricle. 

86.  The  pulmonary  arteries  convey  venous  blood  from 
the  heart  to  the  lungs,  where  it  is  purified,  and  then  re- 
turned to  the  heart  by  the  pulmonary  veins  as  arterial 
blood. 

87.  They  are  placed  deeply  within  the  flesh,  where 
they  are  protected  from  injury.  Some  of  them  approach 
the  surface,  and  their  pulsations  can  be  felt  at  the  wrist,  at 
the  sides  of  the  neck  and  on  the  temple. 

88.  Their  great  trunks  are  placed  near  the  great  arteries, 
but  being  less  liable  to  injury,  their  branches  are  situated 
nearer  to,  and  more  of  them  on,  the  surface,  than  the  ar- 
terial branches. 

8y.  Valves  placed  at  proper  intervals  on  the  inner  coat 
of  the  veins.  The  long  veins  are  the  best  supplied ;  some 
veins  have  no  valves. 

90.  Venous  blood  is  of  a  dark  purple  color,  loaded 
with  the  waste  particles  of  the  system.  The  arterial  blood 
is  of  a  bright  scarlet  color,  purified  of  all  wastt?  matter,  rich 
in  oxygen  and  nutricious  elements 

91.  It  purifies  the  venous  blood  by  means  of  the  air  in  the 
lungs,  which  gives  up  its  oxygen,  and  absorbs  the  carbon 
and  other  impurities. 

92.  The  action  of  the  heart,  which  is  like  a  pump;  for 
when  the  arterial  blood  is  forced  out,  it  leaves  a  vacuum 
for  the  venous  blood  to  flow  in ;  also  the  pressure  of  the 


PHYSIOLOGY    AND    ANATOMY.  237 

muscles  on  the  veins  by  contraction;  and  perhaps  a  power 
from  behind,  or  capillary  force,  in  the  capillaries. 

93.  It  is  estimated  to  be  twenty-eight  pounds. 

94.  The  left  ventricle  of  the  heart,  in  a  man  of  average 
size,  will  contain  about  two  ounces.  Every  time  the  heart 
beats,  this  cavity  is  filled  and  emptied.  In  ordinary  health 
the  heart  will  beat  about  seventy-two  times  in  a  minute; 
therefore,  in  three  minutes,  an  amount  of  blood  equal  to 
the  whole,  will  pass  through  the  heart,  or  system. 

95.  The  heart  will  beat  faster  when  we  are  standing 
than  when  we  are  sitting,  and  faster  when  sitting  than  when 
lying  down.  The  pulsation  is  more  rapid  in  the 
morning  than  in  the  evening.  All  exercise  increases  the 
force  of  the  circulation. 

96.  When  the  mind  is  excited  with  anger,  hope,  cheer- 
fulness and  love,  the  blood  flows  more  freely,  and  he  is 
capable  of  greater  exertions.  The  depressing  passions 
have  the  opposite  effect. 

97.  In  the  capillaries. 

98.  All  the  tissues  of  the  body, — the  bone,  muscle^ 
brain,  skin,  fat,  the  hair  and  nails,  the  tears,  saliva,  and 
the  perspiration. 

99.  To  cany  nutrition  to  the  body,  and  absorb  the 
dead  particles  of  the  flesh. 

100.  When  exercise  is  light,  eat  but  little,  and  at  no 
time  eat  to  excess. 

10 1.  They  are  thrown  out  of  the  system  by  the  lungs, 
by  the  skin,  by  the  kidneys,  and  by  the  liver  and  intestines. 

102.  Seventy-nine  parts  of  carbon,  i  imparts  of  hydro- 
gen, and  9%  parts  of  oxygen. 

103.  Fifty  parts  of  carbon,  6  of  hydrogen,  17  of  nitro- 
gen, and  26  parts  oxygen  and  sulphur. 

104.  Fifty-one  parts  of  carbon,  7  of  hydrogen,  15  of 
nitrogen,  2 1  of  oxygen,  and  4  parts  of  other  matters. 

105.  The  lungs  are  placed,  one  in  each  of  the  lateral 


238  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

cavities  of  the  chest,  separated  from  each  other  by  the 
heart;  and  are  conical  in  shape.  The  right  lung  is 
larger  than  the  other,  and  has  three  lobes ;  the  left  lung  has 
two.  The  weight  of  both  lungs  is  about  forty-two  ounces ; 
the  color,  in  young  persons,  is  of  a  pinkish  white,  but  mot- 
tled with  dark  spots  as  age  advances.  The  substance  of 
the  lungs  is  of  a  light,  spongy  texture.  Passing  through  it 
in  every  direction  from  the  trachea  are  numerous  tubes, 
called  bronchial  tubes,  growing  smaller  as  they  subdivide. 
Each  tube  ends  in  a  minute  cell,  or  vesicle,  the  air-cell. 

1 06.  The  air  tubes  commence  at  the  back  part  of  the 
mouth  and  nostrils  with  a  single  cylinder,  which  leads 
through  the  neck  to  the  chest;  but  in  the  lungs  they  are 
divided  and  subdivided  into  smaller  and  smaller  tubes,  and 
at  the  minute  teraiination  of  these  tubes  are  found  the  air- 
cells.  These  cells  are  separated  from  the  myriads  of  min- 
ute arteries  only  by  an  exceedingly  thin  membrane,  so  thin 
that  gases  can  pass  through  it,  and  the  blooa  itself  is 
almost  in  contact  with  the  air,  whereby  it  becomes  purified 
and  in  condition  to  nourish  the  system. 

107.  The  larynx  is  the  organ  of  voice,  and  is  the  upper 
part  of  the  trachea,  where  small  cords,  called  vocal  cords, 
stretch  across  it.  Voice  is  produced  by  the  air  rushing 
over  the  vocal  cords. 

108.  The  spinal  column  is  composed  of  twenty-foui 
vertebrae — the  sacrum  and  the  coccyx;  and  is  a  little  over 
two  feet  in  length.  The  vertebn-e  are  separated  from  one 
another  by  a  thick  piece  of  elastic  cartilage,  which  saves 
the  body  from  jars.  Twelve  of  the  vertebrae  in  the  thoracic 
region  support  the  twelve  ribs  on  each  side. 

109.  It  is  somewhat  circular  and  flattened  on  the  sides, 
with  tooth-like  projections,  which  match  one  with  another. 
They  each  have  spinous  processes  extending  backward. 
Through  the  center  of  each  vertebrae  the  spinal  cord  passes. 

no.     It  is  a  bony  cavity  at  the  lower  part  of  the  spine, 


PHYSIOLOGY   AND   ANATOxMY.  239 

composed  of  the  sacrum,  coccyx,  and  the  two   innominate 
bones,  or  hip  bones. 

111.  A  flat,  sword-shaped  bone,  consisting  of  three 
pieces,  which  forms  the  front  part  of  the  thorax,  and  sup- 
ports the  ribs  by  means  of  their  cartilages. 

112.  A  small  bone  at  the  lower  extremity  of  the  sac- 
rum. 

113.  The  ribs  are  curved,  and  join  the  spine  behind, 
and  the  sternum  in  front.  The  lower  five  are  called  false 
ribs,  because  their  connection  with  the  sternum  is  not  so 
close  as  that  of  the  others. 

114.  The  skull  is  divided  into  the  cranium  and  face; 
the  cranium  is  composed  of  eight  bones,  the  face  of  four- 
teen. 

115.  The  humerus  of  the  arm,  and  the  radius  and  ulna 
of  the  forearm. 

116.  In  the  wrist  are  eight  small  bones  arranged  in  two 
layers. 

117.  In  the  hands  are  five  metacarpal  bones  and  four- 
teen phlanges. 

118.  In  the  thigh,  the  femur;  in  the  leg,  the  tibia  and 
fibula;  in  the  ankle,  seven  small  bones;  in  the  foot,  five 
metacarpal  bones  and  fourteen  phlanges;  also,  the  patella, 
or  knee-pan. 

119.  Four:  the  hinge  joint,  as  in  the  elbow;  the  ball 
and  sock  joint,  as  in  the  shoulder  and  thigh;  a  combination 
of  the  hinge  joint  with  a  rotary  movement,  as  in  the  neck; 
and  a  joint  with  a  sliding  movement,  as  between  the  clavi- 
cle and  sternum. 

120.  They  are  held  together  by  ligaments. 

121.  It  IS  the  collar  bone,  extending  between  the  ster- 
num and  shoulders. 

122.  The  scapula  is  a  broad,  flat,  triangular  bone,  called 
the  sho alder-blade ,  it  forms  part  of  the  shoulder  joint. 

123.  Between    the    head   and  the  first    vertebra  is    a 


240  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

hinge  joint;  and  between  the  first  and  second  vertebra  is 
a  joint  with  a  rotary  movement,  formed  by  a  tooth-like 
projection  from  the  second  vertebra,  which  serves  as  an 
axis  for  the  first  to  i)lay  upon.  These  two  joints  combined 
gives  the  various  movements  to  the  head. 

124.  By  a  ball  and  socket  joint. 

125.  That  a  rotary  movement  is  given  to  the  hand  by 
the  radius  rotating  in  a  fibrous  socket  at  the  elbow,  and 
corresponding  movement  at  the  wrist  between  the  ulna  and 
hand. 

126.  The  femur,  or  thigh  bone,  has  almost  a  globular 
head  at  its  upper  extremity,  which  is  fitted  into  a  very  deep 
socket  in  the  side  bone  of  the  pelvis.  The  socket  is  called 
the  acetabulum. 

127.  The  head  of  the  bone  of  the  upper  arm  is  less 
than  half  a  ball,  and  is  fitted  into  a  very  shallow  socket  in 
the  upper  corner  of  the  scapula  or  shoulder-blade. 

128.  Two  hundred  and  four,  besides  the  teeth  and  the 
patellae,  or  knee-caps. 

129.  Of  animal  and  earthy  matter:  two-thirds  earthy 
and  one-third  animal.  The  earthy  matter  is  principally 
carbonate  and  phosphate  of  lime. 

130.  Bone  is  made  of  two  kinds  of  tissue:  a  dense, 
hard  tissue,  like  ivory,  which  is  on  the  outside  and  forms 

.-V  the  shell;  and  a  porous  or  cancellated  tissue,  always  found 
on  the  inside  of  the  bone. 

131.  In  joints. 

132.  To  secret  a  liquid  which  lubricates  the  joint. 

133.  When,  by  an  accident,  a  ligament  or  some  fibers 
of  a  ligament  are  torn  or  much  stretched. 

134.  The  active  organs  of  locomotion.  They  are 
formed  of  bundles  of  reddish  fibres  endowed  with  the  prop- 
erty of  contractility. 

135.  Two:  those  under  control  of  the  will,  called  the 


PH^'SIOLOGY   AND   ANATOMY.  241 

muscles  of  animal  life ;  and  those  over  which  the  will  has 
no  control,  called  muscles  of  organic  life. 

136.  To  produce  all  the  motions  of  the  body. 

137.  About  527;  the  number  varies. 

138.  Through  the  nervous  system.  Every  muscle  of 
animal  life  is  supplied  with  nerves  through  which  the  mind 
operates. 

139.  It  is  a  muscle  of  organic  life. 

140.  Principally  by  the  aid  of  the  diaphragm,  which 
contracting,  produces  a  vacum  in  the  lungs,  and  air  rushes 
in  to  fill  the  space. 

141.  It  is  a  flat  muscle,  and  is  a  flexible  partition  that 
divides  the  chest  from  the  abdomen,  and  separates  the  res- 
piratory from  the  digestive  organs.  Its  edges  are  attached 
to  the  back-bone,  to  the  lower  edge  of  the  lower  ribs,  to 
the  breast-bone,  and  to  the  loAver  part  of  the  chest.  It 
forms  an  arch,  upon  the  upper  surface  of  which  the  lungs 
rest;  and  in  the  hollow  below,  the  liver  and  stomach. 
"WTien  the  diaphragm  is  at  rest  its  upper  point  reaches  as  high 
as  the  fourth  rib ;  but  Vv-hen  it  is  in  action  it  is  drawn  down 
to  below  the  seventh  rib. 

142.  The  muscles  on  the  sides  of  the  chest  raise  the 
ribs  and  extend  their  circle  forward  and  outward.  The 
diaphragm  draws  down  its  arch  and  thus  enlarges  the  chest, 
and  the  lungs  having  room  for  expansion,  the  air  is  pressed 
into  them  to  fill  the  vacuum  left  by  the  enlarging  chest. 
This  is  the  mechanical  part  of  the  process  of  inspiration. 

143.  After  the  chest  is  thus  sufficiently  expanded,  the 
muscles  of  the  ribs  and  the  diaphragm  relax  and  lose  their 
firmness.  Then  the  action  of  other  muscles  carries  the 
ribs  dovmward;  and  at  the  same  time,  the  muscles  that 
cover  the  abdomen  press  upon  its  contents,  and  force  them 
against  the  diaphragm.  This  yields  to  the  pressure  and 
rises  upward  and  presses  upon  the  lungs,  which  retreat  be- 


242  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

fore  it,  and  the  air  is  expelled.     This  is  the  process  of  ex- 
piration. 

144.  A  spasmodic  action  of  the  muscles  of  expiration 
forcing  the  air  out  violently  through  the  mouth. 

145.  It  is  the  same  action  as  coughing,  only  the  mouth 
is  closed,  and  the  air  rushes  through  the  nose. 

146.  It  poisons  the  system,  the  expired  air  being  loaded 
with  waste  matter  and  carbonic  acid. 

147.  Three:  by  being  deprived  of  oxygen;  by  being 
loaded  with  carbonic  acid ;  by  being  filled  with  waste  mat- 
ter from  the  lungs,  skin,  etc.,  or  other  poisonous  materials. 

148.  About  four  cubic  feet. 

149.  About  384  cubic  inches. 

150.  They  grow  dull  and  sleepy  from  the  action  of  the 
poisonous  matter  in  the  air. 

151.  Eighteen. 

152.  Those  which  breathe  most  are  the  most  vigorous, 
lively,  and  active,  while  those  which  breathe  least  are  the 
most  sluggish,  stupid  and  feeble. 

153.  In  this  disease  the  lungs  are  more  or  less  filled 
with  tubercles  and  abscesses ;  the  air-vessels  are,  to  some 
extent,  closed,  so  that  the  air  cannot  penetrate  them  and 
reach  the  blood,  to  purify  it ;  therefore,  for  want  of  pure 
blood,  the  system  is  not  well  nourished,  the  muscles  grow 
thin  and  weak,  and  the  body  gradually  wastes  away. 

154.  For  want  of  sufficient  air. 

155.  This  gas  is  known  by  many  as  damps ^  dead  air^ 
and  is  often  found  in  wells  and  vats.  It  is  heavier  than 
air,  and,  therefore,  falls  to  the  bottom  of  a  vessel  or  room, 
like  water. 

156.  A  pan  of  coals  is  sometimes  left  burning  in  a  bed- 
room which  has  no  fire-place,  while  some  one  sleeps  on  the 
bed.  The  gas  given  out  falls  to  the  floor,  and  fills  the  bot- 
tom of  the  room,  rising  as  fast  as  it  is  produced,  until,  like 


PHYSIOLOGY    AND    ANATOMY.  243 

water,  it  reaches  the  sleeper's  head,  and  suffocation  is  the 
result. 

157.  It  produces  death,  not,  as  is  commonly  supposed, 
by  filling  the  lungs  with  water,  but  because  the  water  pre- 
vents the  access  of  air  to  the  respiratory  organs,  and  the 
sufferer  dies  from  suffocation. 

158.  The  necessity  of  good  air,  though  in  an  unequal 
degree.  Yet  every  animal,  the  highest  and  the  lowest,  the 
man  and  the  worm,  must  sustain  life  by  their  breath. 

159.  The  animal  uses  oxygen  and  gives  out  carbonic 
acid;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  plant  uses  carbonic 
acid,  and  gives  out  oxygen. 

160.  98°  to  100^,  F. 

1 61.  The  carbon  of  the  food  and  the  oxygen  of  the 
air.  These  two  unite  and  produce  heat  similar  to  the  way 
in  which  heat  is  produced  by  sensible  combustion. 

162.  Into  two  grand  classes :  the  warm-blooded,  and  in- 
cludes man,  birds,  quadrupeds,  &c.  Their  heat  is  ever  of 
the  same  degree.  The  other  class  is  called  cold-blooded, 
and  includes  snakes,  oysters,  fishes,  worms,  toads,  turtles, 
&c.  Their  heat  is  but  little  higher  than  that  of  the  medium 
in  which  they  live. 

163.  Perspiration. 

164.  That  moisture  which  is  absorbed  by  the  air  as  fast 
as  formed. 

165.  When  the  moisture  is  exuded  too  fast  to  be  imme- 
diately absorbed,  and  is  left  in  small  drops  upon  the  skin. 

166.  Alcohol  stimulates  the  stomach,  and  excites  the 
nervous  system.  It  supplies  to  the  flame  carbon  and 
hydrogen ;  but  these  soon  burn  out,  and  the  body  is  after- 
ward cooler  than  it  otherwise  would  have  been.  Food, 
alone,  can  sustain  a  permanent  fire. 

167.  Flesh,  containing  more  carbon  and  hydrogen,  sup- 
plies more  fuel  to  the  fire  than  vegetable  matter. 


244  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

1 68.  Because  it  supplies  more  carbon,  and  gives  more 
heat. 

169.  It  is  composed  of  two  layers;  t«he  derma,  or  true 
skin,  and  the  epidermis,  or  cuticle.  On  the  surface  of  the 
former  are  the  sensitive  papillae;  and  within  or  beneath 
it  are  the  sweat  glands,  hair  follicles  and  sebaceous  glands. 
This  layer  is  a  dense  and  thick  membrane,  and  composed 
of  firm  and  strong  fibers,  and  is  almost  filled  with  minute 
blood  vessels. 

170.  The  cuticle,  or  scarf  skin,  is  a  thin  layer  for  the 
purpose  of  protecting  the  derma. 

171.  A  large  proportion. 

172.  It  is  an  outgrowth  from  the  skin.  It  has  a  root 
which  is  bulbous ;  and  a  shaft  which  is  hollow.  The  hollow 
ceases  near  the  point. 

173.  The  nails  are  also  outgrowths  from  the  skin. 
They  are  flattened,  elastic  structures  of  a  horny  nature,  and 
are  firmly  connected  with  the  cutis. 

1 74.  In  the  pigment  cells,  or  the  rete  mucosum,  which 
are  situated  in  the  innermost  and  last  formed  layer  of  the 
cuticle.  The  contents  of  these  cells  give  the  diff"erent 
shades  to  the  various  races  of  mankind. 

175.  About  five-eighths. 

176.  A  most  intimate  connection.  As  the  blood  finds 
its  way  freely  through  it,  it  serves  to  relieve  internal  organs 
when  the  circulation  is  disturbed. 

177.  It  protects  the  body;  it  regulates  the  heat  of  the 
body  by  means  of  its  sweat-follicles;  and  it  throws  out  much 
waste  matter. 

1 78.  The  skin,  lungs,  kidneys,  liver,  and  intestines. 

179.  The  stomach  and  intestines  particularly;  and 
sometimes  the  skin.     The  lungs  bring  oxygen. 

180.  The  perspired  fluid  is  formed  by  the  inner  skin 
and  conveyed  to  the  surface,  through  minute  tubes  which 
are  attached  to  the  glands.  There  are  three  thousand  five 


PHYSIOLOGY   AND   ANATOMY.  245 

hundred  and  twenty-eight  of  these  Httle  tubes  on  each 
square  inch  in  the  palm  of  the  hand,  and  twenty-eight 
hundred  on  each  square  inch  throughout  the  whole  body, 
making  seven  millions  of  perspiratory  tubes  on  a  man  of 
average  size. 

1 8 1.  The  brain,  spinal  cord,  and  the  nerves. 

182.  It  is  divided  into  two  principal  parts,  the  cerebrum 
and  cerebellum.  The  first  is  divided  by  a  deep  fissure  into 
two  lateral  halves,  called  hemispheres.  The  under  part  of 
the  cerebellum  is  divided  in  the  same  way.  The  cerebrum 
is  much  the  larger  part  of  the  brain,  and  occupies  the  an- 
terior portion  of  the  skull.  Its  surface  is  indented  with  nu- 
merous convolutions.  The  outer  portion ,  of  grey  color,  is 
called  the  cortical  substance.  The  inner  portion,  of  like 
color,  is  called  the  medullary  substance.  The  cerebrum  is 
separated  from  the  cerebellum  by  a  strong  fibrous  tissue. 

183.  By  three  membranes  which  cover  it.  The  inner 
and  middle  of  these  membranes  are  very  delicate,  and  give 
the  brain  a  soft  cushion  to  lie  between  it  and  its  bony  en- 
closure. The  outer  membrane  is  thick  and  very  strong, 
and  would  hold  the  brain  in  its  position,  even  when  re- 
moved from  the  skull. 

184.  The  olfactory  nerve,  the  optic,  the  facial  and  au- 
ditory, the  pneumogastric,  and  others,  nine  in  all.  Some 
authors  divide  the  seventh  and  eighth  pair,  and  make  three 
more  nerves. 

185.  It  extends  from  the  brain,  through  the  whole 
length  of  the  spinal  column.  It  gives  off  thirty  pairs  of 
nerves,  which  divide  and  subdivide  until  they  reach  every 
part  of  the  body. 

186.  Two:  motor  and  sensory. 

187.  The  nerves  upon  which  the  impression  is  made, 
the  trunk  which  conveys  the  impression,  and  the  brain 
which  receives  it  and  perceives  it. 


246  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

1 88.  They  are.  The  amount  of  blood  they  receive  is 
regulated  by  the  nerves. 

189.  They  do. 

190.  The  heart  would  cease  beating. 

191.  Drawing  beautiful  imaginations  of  the  future,  where 
all  things  which  are  unpleasant  and  disagreeable  are  ex- 
cluded; where  wealth,  honor,  fame,  love,  and  pleasure  are 
begging  at  the  dreamer's  feet.  It  is  but  one  delightful 
revery,  where  all  is  beautiful  and  satisfactory.  It  is  more 
commonly  known  as  "building  air-castles. " 

192.  It  is  placed  in  a  deep,  bony  socket.  It  contains 
two  humors :  the  aqueous  humor,  a  transparent  fluid  in  the 
anterior  portion  of  the  eye ;  and  the  vitreous  humor,  trans- 
parent and  jelly-like,  in  the  posterior  portion,  and  forms 
the  greater  part  of  the  eye.  Between  these  two  humors  is 
the  chrj-stalline  lens,  a  double  convex  lens. 

193.  It  is  a  dense  fibrous  coat,  covering  the  whole  eye 
except  in  front,  in  which  the  cornea  is  placed,  a  transpar- 
ent and  strong  tissue. 

194.  It  is  the  middle  coat,  and  contains  a  black  pig- 
ment, which  absorbs  such  rays  of  light  as  are  not  needed 
for  vision. 

195.  A  delicate  nervous  membrane,  lining  the  inner 
surface  of  the  ^choroid  coat.  The  images  of  external  ob- 
jects are  received  upon  it.     Behind,  it  is  continuous  with 

^  the  optic  nerve. 

196.  It  is  a  thin,  circular-shaped  curtain  suspended  be- 
hind the  cornea,  in  the  aqueous  humor,  and  connected  at 
its  circumference  with  the  choroid  coat.  A  small  opening 
in  its  center  admits  the  rays  of  light,  and  is  called  the 
pupil. 

197.  They  are  composed  of  cartilages  adapted  to  the 
shape  of  the  eye,  the  skin  without,  and  the  lining  mem- 
brane within.  One  circular  muscle  surrounds  the  open 
part  of  the  eye,  and  closes  the  lids  when  it  contracts.    An- 


PHYSIOLOGY    AND    ANATOMY.  247 

Other  muscle,  attached  to  the  upper  eyeUd  by  one  end,  and 
to  the  bone  of  the  socket  by  the  other,  opens  the  eye. 

198.  In  the  Hning  membrane  of  the  Hds. 

199.  The  lachrymal  glands  secrete  the  tears,  and  are  in 
the  upper  and  outer  part  of  the  orbit.  The  tears  clean 
the  eye  of  any  particles  of  foreign  matter ;  and  upon  reach- 
ing the  inner  corner  of  the  eye  pass  into  the  lachrymal 
canal  and  nasal  duct  into  the  nose.  The  nasal  duct  is  a 
membranous  canal,  about  three  quarters  of  an  inch  in 
length,  extending  from  the  inner  corner  of  the  eye  into  the 
nose. 

200.  The  eye  is  rolled  by  a  set  of  muscles  peculiar  to 
itself.  These  are  attached  by  one  end  to  the  bony  socket, 
and  by  the  other  to  the  eyeball.  By  their  contractions 
they  roll  the  eye  in  every  direction ;  and,  by  their  co-opera- 
tion, both  eyes  are  directed  to  a  single  object. 

201.  It  passes  from  the  base  of  the  brain  forward 
through  the  socket  and  into  the  eyeball.  After  passing  the 
outer  and  middle  coats,  it  is  spread  out  on  their  inner  sur- 
face, and  forms  the  retina,  which  receives  the  rays  of  light. 

202.  The  light  is  reflected  from  objects,  and  passes 
through  the  transparent  cornea  and  the  pupil  into  the  ball. 
The  humors  and  the  lens  refract  these  rays,  and  give  them 
such  a  direction  that  they  fall  upon  the  retina,  where  they 
form  the  image  of  the  object.  This  impression  is  carried 
along  the  optic  nerve  to  the  brain,  and  there  perception 
takes  place  and  the  object  is  seen. 

203.  The  lens  loses  its  convexity  in  some  degree,  and 
the  rays  of  light  are  not  concentrated  at  short  distances 
upon  the  retina;  the  person  becomes  far-sighted. 

204.  In  one  who  is  near-sighted  the  lenses  are  too  con- 
vex; in  one  who  is  long-sighted  the  lenses  are  not  convex 
enough. 

205.  Because  the  muscles  that  govern  the  movement  of 


248  THE    QUESTION   BOOK. 

the  eyeball  do  not  act  in  harmony ;  one  muscle  is  more 
powerful  than  another,  and  draws  the  eye  to  one  side. 

206.  The  external  ear,  the  internal  ear,  and  the  passage 
between  them. 

207.  It  is  composed  principally  of  stiff  cartilage;  and 
its  shape  is  that  which  is  best  adapted  to  catch  sounds,  and 
transmit  them  to  the  internal  ear.  The  canal  leading  in- 
wards is  about  an  inch  in  length ;  and  is  covered  with  hair 
and  wax  to  project  it  from  insects.  A  thin  membrane,  the 
covering  of  the  drum  of  the  ear,  is  stretched  across  the 
the  canal,  and  separates  it  from  the  internal  ear. 

208.  It  consists  of  a  cavity  filled  with  air  behind  the 
membrane  of  the  drum,  and  three  small  bones,  which  reach 
from  the  membrane  to  the  labyrinth,  where  the  auditory 
nerve  is  spread  out  in  numerous  filaments  to  receive  im- 
pressions of  sound. 

209.  A  canal  passing  from  the  internal  ear  to  the  back 
part  of  the  mouth,  and  serves  as  vent  to  the  air  in  the 
drum  of  the  ear. 

210.  The  pulsations  of  air  pass  along  the  external 
canal,  cause  the  membrane  of  the  drum  to  vibrate,  which 
transmits  the  vibrations  by  the  air  and  three  small  bones 
to  the  labyrinth,  where  in  some  unexplained  manner,  the" 
filaments  of  the  auditory  nerve  receive  the  impression, 
which  is  conveyed  to  the  brain,  and  we  hear. 


QUESTIONS 


ON 


Physical  Geography. 


1.  What  is  Pliysical  Geography? 

2.  What  are  some  of  the  proofs  of  the  rotundity  of  the 
earth? 

3.  What  conclusively  proves  the  annual  revolution  of 
the  earth? 

4.  In  what  condition  was  the  earth  supposed  to  be  in 
a  remote  period  of  its  existence? 

5.  What  are  the  uroofs  of  this  molten  condition  of  the 
earth. 

6.  How  did  the  earth  become  solid? 

7.  What  is  the  thickness  of  the  earth's  crust? 

8.  What  is  a  simple  substance? 

9.  How  many  elements  have  been  discovered? 

10.  How  many  elements  mainly  compose  the  crust  of 
the  earth? 

11.  What  is  oxygen?  Silicon?  Carbon?  Hydrogen? 
Sodium?  Chlorine?  Sulphur?  Potassium?  Calcium? 
Magnesium?     Aluminum? 

12.  How  are  rocks  classihed? 

13.  What  are  stratified  rocks? 

14.  How  are  these  rocks  formed  into  layers? 

15.  How  did  water  originate  on  the  earth's  surface? 

16.  What  are  igneous  rocks? 

17.  What  are  metamorphic  rocks? 

18.  What  are  fossils? 


250  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

19.  What  are  fossiliferous  rocks?     Nonfossiliferous? 

20.  Into  how  many  ages  does  geology  divide  the  globe? 

21.  What  is  the  Azoic  Age?  The  Silurian  Age?  De- 
vonian Age?  Carboniferous  Age?  Reptilian  Age?  Mam- 
malian Age?     Age  of  Man? 

22.  By  what  agencies  are  the  changes  of  the  earth's 
crust  produced  at  the  present  time. 

23.  How  does  the  atmosphere  produce  a  change? 

24.  How  does  the  water  produce  a  change? 

25.  What  is  erosion? 

26.  Where  is  the  greatest  example  of  erosion. 

27.  What  are  the  changes  which  are  produced  by  the 
action  of  the  heated  interior? 

28.  Where  are  there  illustrations  of  the  slowly  progress- 
ing change? 

29.  What  will  eventually  be  the  condition  of  the  earth's 
surface  ? 

30.  What  proportion  of  the  whole  volume  of  the  globe 
is  water? 

31.  What  is  the  position  of  the  continents? 

32.  How  are  islands  divided? 

33.  What  are  continental  islands? 

34.  Give  illustrations  of  continental  islands. 

35.  What  are  oceanic  islands? 

36.  What  is  coral?     ^Vhere  found? 

37.  Into  how  many  classes  are  coral  formations  divided? 

38.  What  are  fringing  reefs? 

39.  What  are  barrier  reefs?     Encircling  reefs? 

40.  What  are  atolls,  or  coral  islands? 

41.  What  is  a  lagoon? 

42.  What  is  the  theory  of  the  circular  formation  of 
atolls? 

43.  Into  how  many  great  classes  may  we  divide  the 
surface  of  the  earth? 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  251 

44.  Where  is  found  the  highest  elevation  of  the  earth? 
The  lowest  depression? 

45.  What  is  trend? 

46.  What  elevation  is  given   as  necessary  to  become 
table-lands? 

47.  Where  are  the  great  plateaus  of  the  world? 

48.  Where  are  the  great  low  plains  of  the  world? 

49.  Into  how  many  classes  are  mountains  divided? 

50.  What  is  a  longitudinal  valley?    A  transverse  valley? 

51.  How  many  mountain  systems  in  America? 

52.  What  is  the  extent  of  the  Rocky  system? 

53.  Describe  the  Alleghany  system. 

54.  Describe   the   plateau  of  North    America.      How 
may  this  region  be  divided? 

55.  How   may    the   plateaus    of    South   America  be 
divided? 

56.  Describe  the  plateau  of  the  Andts. 

5  7.  Into  what  divisions  are  the  plateaus  of  Asia  divided  ? 

58.  What  does  the  central  table-land  of  Asia  embrace? 

59.  What  table-lands  does  Southern  Asia  embrace? 

60.  What  are  the  known  table-lands  of  Africa? 

61.  Describe  the  principal  plateau  of  Europe. 

62.  Where  is  the  great  plain  of  North  America? 

6$.  What  does  the  great  plain  of  South  America  comr 
prise?     How  is  it  divided? 

a.  What  are  //anos,  selv as,  pampas^  and  wastes  "i 

b.  What  are  steppes,  heaths,  lands,  and  where  found? 

c.  What  is  a  plain?     Plateau,  or  table-land? 

64.  What   is  the  boundary  of  the  great  plain  of  the 
Eastern  Continent? 

65.  What  are  some  of  the  chief  points  in  the  physical 
geography  of  Siberia? 

66.  What  are  the  principal  known  plains  of  Africa? 
a.     Describe  the  Desert  of  Sahara. 


262  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

67  Of  what  is  the  hiterior  of  Australia  supposed  to 
consist? 

6S.  What  resemblance  between  North  and  South 
America? 

69.  From  what  do  volcanic  phenomena  result?  How 
are  these  phenomena  divided? 

70.  How  are  volcanoes  classified? 

71.  What  are  intermittent  volcanoes? 

a.  What  is  the  crater  of  a  volcano?     Lava? 

72.  Where  is  the  largest  known  crater  in  the  world? 

73.  Into  what  classes  are  volcanoes  divided? 

74.  What  is  the  central?     The  lineal? 

75.  "V^Tiere  are  volcanoes  most  numerous? 

76.  How  many  volcanoes  have  been  enumerated? 

77.  What  are  some  of  the  volcanic  phenomena? 

78.  What  are  mud  volcanoes?     Where  found? 

79.  What  are  fields  of  fire?     Where  found? 

80.  What  are  earthquakes,  and  where  confined  ? 

81.  What  are  the  movements  of  earthquakes? 

82.  What  is  the  theory  of  earthquakes? 

S$.  What  is  the  dynamic  force  of  earthquakes? 

84.  "What  is  the  duration  ? 

85.  Of  what  does  hydrography  treat? 

86  What  are  springs,  and  how  may  they  be  classified? 

87.  What  are  perennial  springs?  Intermittent?  Peri- 
odical? 

88.  How  are  springs  produced? 

89.  What  are  artesian  wells? 

90.  What  is  a  bifurcation? 

91.  Into  what  classes  are  rivers  divided?  Describe 
them. 

a,  "What is  the  basin  of  a  river?     A  watershed? 

92.  On  what  does  the  amount  of  water  in  a  basin  de- 
pend? 


PHYSICAL    GEOGKAPHY.  253 

93.  Into  what  divisions  may  the  United  States  be  di- 
vided with  reference  to  its  drainage? 

94.  What  are  the  divisions  of  Europe  ? 

95.  What  is  a  singular  fact  in  regard  to  the  watershed', 
of  Europe  which  separates  the  three  systems  of  drainage? 

96.  Where  do  the  largest  streams   of  Africa  flow?     Of 
Asia? 

97.  Why  do  larger  streams  flow  into  the  Atlantic   than 
into  the  Pacific  ? 

98.  How  are  lakes  divided?     Describe  each  class. 

99.  What  name  is  given  to  lakes  without  an  outlet? 

100.  Where  are  the  principal  steppe  lakes? 
loi.     Describe  the  Caspian  Sea. 

102.  Describe  the  most  extensive  lake    region    of  the- 
globe. 

103.  What  is  said  of  the    Great    Lakes?     How   large 
are  they? 

104.  Describe  the  lake  regions  of  Europe. 

105.  ^Vliat  are  the  Tundras? 

106.  What  is  the  color  of  the  ocean?     Depth?    Trans- 
parency? 

107.  Which  is   heavier,   fresh  or  sea-water?     At  what 
temperature  will  sea-water  freeze  ? 

108.  What  causes  the  phosphorescence  of  the  sea? 

109.  How    many,    and    where   are   the  great  mediter- 
ranean seas? 

a.     What  is  a  mediterranean  sea? 
no.     Name  the  principal  border  seas.     What  separates 
these  seas  from  the  ocean? 

a.  What   are  the  three  distinct    movements    of  the 
ocean  ? 

b.  What  are  tides?     Neap  tides?     Springtides? 

c.  AVhat  are  the  chief  causes  of  the  tides? 

d.  What   are   v/aves?      Breakers?      How    high   da 
waves  roll? 


v 


254  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

111.  To  what  depth  is  the  sea  agitated  by  waves? 

112.  What  is  the  height  of  tides? 

113.  Describe  the  great  tidal  wave. 

114.  What   are  ocean   currents?     How   are   they   di- 
vided? 

115.  What  are  temporary  currents? 

116.  What  are  periodical  currents? 

117.  What  are  constant  currents? 

118.  What   is   a   counter   current?      Where  are   they 
found? 

119.  Of  what  does  meteorology  treat? 

120.  What  is  the  composition  of  air? 

121.  What  is  temperature^ 

122.  On  what  does  the  temperature  of  a  place  depend? 

123.  What  is  the  depth  of  the  limit  of  invariable  tem- 
perature in  the  several  zones? 

124.  What  is  the  depth  of  the  limit  of  invariable  tem- 
perature in  the  ocean? 

125.  What  is  the  mean  temperature  of  a  place? 

126.  Does  the  mean  temperature  of  a  place  vary  one 
year  with  another? 

127.  What  are  isothermal  lines? 

128.  Into  how  many  zones  of  climate  may  the  surface 
of  the  earth  be  divided  by  the  isothermal  lines? 

129.  What  is  wind?     How  produced? 

130.  To  what  region  must  we  look  for  the  cause  of  tht: 
circulation  of  the  winds  of  the  globe? 

131.  Explain  the  circulation  of  the  atmosphere. 

132.  What  are  trade  winds? 

133.  Why  do  these  currents  become  distinct  winds  at 
30°  of  latitude? 

134.  In  what  direction  do  the  trade-winds  blow?    Why? 

135.  How  many  wind  zones  are  there? 

136.  Where  is  the  zone  oi  calms? 

137.  Where  are  the  sub-tropical  zones? 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  ,  255 

138.  Where  are  the  zones  of  variable  winds? 

139.  What  are  monsoons? 

140.  Wliere  are  the  principal  monsoon  regions? 

141.  Describe  the  monsoons  of  the  Indian  Ocean. 

142.  What  is  the  cause  of  the  monsoons  of  the  Carib- 
bean Sea? 

143.  What  are  the  "Northers"  of  Texas  and  Mexico? 

144.  What  are  land  and  sea-breeze  si 

145.  Where  are  the  Etesian  winds?      To  what  do  they 
owe  their  origin? 

146.  What  are  the  most  noted  hot  winds,  and  where  do 
they  prevail? 

147.  What  are  the  most  noted  cold  winds,  and  where 
do  they  prevail? 

148.  What  are  whirlwinds?     Waterspouts? 

149.  How  are  the  tropical  storms  variously  named? 

150.  Where  are  the  three  principal  hurricane  regions? 

151.  What  is  the  nature  of  tornadoes? 

152.  What  is  dew,    hoar-frost,    fogs,  clouds,  rain,  and 
snow? 

153.  How  is  hail  formed? 

154.  Into  what  classes  are  clouds   divided?     Describe 
each  class. 

155.  How  may  the   surface  of  the  earth  be  divided  in 
reference  to  the  quantity  of  rain  that  falls? 

156.  Where  are  the  regions  of  periodical  rains? 

157.  Describe  the  zone  oi calms. 

158.  Describe  the  zones  of  the  trade-winds. 

159.  What  are   the  characteristics  of  the   sub-tropical 
zones? 

160.  Where  are  the  regions  of  frequent  rains? 

161.  Where  are  the  rainless  regions? 

162.  Why  are  the  Pacific  shores  of  Peru  and  Bolivia 
rainless? 


c 


256  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

163.  Wliat  would  be  the  condition  of  South  America, 
providing  the  Andes  were  on  the  Atlantic  coast? 

164.  Why  is  the  Pacific  shore  of  Mexico  rainless? 

165.  Where  is  the  largest  rainless  district  of  the  globe? 
Why  are  these  regions  rainless? 

166.  What  is  the  cause  of  barrenness  of  the  desert  of 
Gobi? 

167.  Where  does  the  greatest  amount  of  rain  fall? 

168.  What   particular   place  has  the  greatest    annual 
rain  fall  on  the  globe  ? 

a.     What  is  a  climate? 

169.  What  circumstances  affect  the  cHmate  of  a  place? 

170.  What  are  the  two  chief  classes  of  climate?     De- 
scribe them. 

171.  What  effect  nas   the   soil   on   the  climate   of  a 
country? 

172.  Why  does  California  have  but  little  rain  between 
May  and  November? 

173.  What  is  organic  life? 

174.  Under  what  three  divisions  is  this  department  con- 
sidered? 

175.  What  is  botanical  geography? 

1 76.  What  is  indispensable  to  the  existence  of  vegetable 
life? 

177.  What  four  regions  are  destitute  of  vegetation  in 
consequence  of  the  want  of  moisture? 

1 78.  Into  what  two  great  classes  are  vegetable  forms 
divided? 

179.  What  plants  are  flowerless? 

180.  How  are  flowering  plants  divided? 

181.  Describe  the  endogenous.     The  exogenous. 

182.  About  how  many  distinct  plant  species  are  there? 

183.  Which  are  the  simplest  forms  of  the  plant  species? 

184.  Where  are  the  lichens,  algne,  and  mosses  found? 

185.  Which  are  the  most  stately  of  all  vegetable  forms? 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  257 

1 86.  What  are   the  principal  food-plants  of  the  torrid 
and  hot  zones? 

187.  What  are  bananas,  bread-fruit,   dates,  cocoanuts, 
yams,  cassava,  and  sago? 

188.  What  are  the  principal  food-plants  of  the   warm 
and  temperate  zones? 

189.  What  plants  are  the  most  valuable  for  furnishing 
clothing? 

190.  What  spices  are    in  common  use  in   the  various 
countries  of  the  globe? 

191.  What  are  the  principal  narcotics  used  in  the  differ 
ent  parts  of  the  globe? 

192.  What  is  opium,  betel,  haschish? 

193.  What  is  zoological  geography? 

194.  How  have  the  animals  upon  the  globe  been  classi- 
fied? 

195.  What    are   vertebrates?      How  have    they  been 
divided? 

196.  What  are  mollusks?     Articulates?     Radiates? 

197.  What  is  the  mammaHa? 

198.  How  have  the  mammalia  been  classified? 

199.  Of  what  does  ethnology  treat? 


AN  S  W^  E  R  S 


TO 


Questions  on  Physical  Geograpliy. 


1.  That  science  which  treats  of  the  natural  divisions  of 
water,  the  atmosphere,  and  all  organic  life. 

2.  The  masts  of  ships  coming  into  a  harbor  are  seen 
before  the  hull,  and  the  shadow  of  the  earth  on  the  moon 
is  always  circular. 

3.  The  seasons. 

4.  In  a  state  of  igneous  fluidity.  All  the  elements  of 
the  earth  were  one  molten  mass,  surrounded  by  a  thick  at- 
mosphere, charged  with  vapors  and  gases. 

5.-  A  direct  proof  is  the  ball-like  form  of  the  earth, 
which,  but  for  its  plastic  condition,  would  not  have  been. 
Astronomy  furnishes  us  with  examples  of  like  condition. 
Our  sun  is  even  now  in  a  state  of  intense  ignition,  and  the 
stars  of  the  firmament  are  burning  suns.  The  moon  was 
once  a  fiery  ball,  but  is  now  cooled,  and  covered  with  ex- 
tinct craters. 

6.  In  the  course  of  countless  ages  the  earth  lost  heat 
and  cooled  sufficiently  to  form  a  solid  crust,  while  the  in- 
terior, even  now,  is  liquid  lava,  gradually  losing  its  temper- 
ature, which  in  time  will  cause  a  solid  earth. 

7.  It  is  variously  estimated  at  from  fifty  to  one  nunared 
miles.  At  the  depth  of  60  feet,  water  obtains  its  greatest 
degree  of  cold;  at  2,200  feet  the  temperature  rises  to 
ninety  degrees  Fahrenheit ;  at  8,000  feet  water  would  boil. 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  259 

and  as  the  temperature  increases  regularly  from  the  surface 
downward,  at  a  depth  of  twenty-eight  miles  iron  would 
melt. 

8.  An  element  that  cannot  be  separated  into  other 
component  parts. 

9.  Sixty-three,  and  of  these  only  fourteen  have  been 
found  in  a  pure  state,  as  gold,  silver,  copper,  platinum. 

10.  Twelve:  oxygen,  silicon,  aluminum,  magnesium, 
calcium,  potassium,  sodium,  iron,  carbon,  sulphur,  hydro- 
gen, chlorine. 

11.  Oxygen  is  a  gas,  and  a  constituent  of  all  rocks, 
and  composes  about  one-half  by  weight,  of  the  earth's  crust. 

SiHcon  is  the  element  next  in  abundance ;  combined  with 
oxygen  it  forms  silica  or  quartz,  sandstone,  and  ordinary 
sand. 

Carbon  is  an  element,  which  combined  with  oxygen, 
enters  largely  into  the  composition  of  various  rocks.  Char- 
coal and  diamonds  are  pure  carbon. 

Hydrogen  is  a  gas,  and  combined  with  oxygen,  consti- 
tutes water. 

Sodium  is  a  metal,  and  with  oxygen  forms  soda.  It  is 
the  basis  of  salt. 

Chlorine  with  sodium  forms  common  salt. 

Sulphur  is  a  simple  mineral  substance,  and  united  with 
oxygen  and  lime  makes  gypsum. 

Potassium  is  a  metal  which,  combined  with  oxygen,  forms 
potash. 

Calcium  is  a  metal,  which  with  oxygen  forms  common 
quicklime,  and  with  carbon,  limestone. 

Magnesium  is  also  a  metal,  which  combined  with  oxygen 
forms  magnesia. 

Aluminum  is  a  white  metal,  and  with  oxygen  forms  alu- 
mina, the  basis  of  clay. 

12.  As  stratified  and  unstratified,  the  unstratified  being 
divided  into  igneous  and  nietamorphic. 


260  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

13.  Those  which  are  made  up  of  a  series  of  laj-ers,  as 
sandstone,  slate-rock,  limestone. 

14.  By  the  waters  of  the  globe  remdving  materials 
from  one  place  and  depositing  them  in  another  as  stratified 
sediment. 

15.  When  the  surface  of  the  earth  had  become  cooled, 
or  fallen  below  the  boiling  point  of  water  (212°  Fahren- 
heit), the  vapors  of  the  atmosphere  were  condensed  and 
gathered  as  water  in  the  depressions  of  the  earth. 

16.  Those  which,  instead  of  being  a  sedimentary  de- 
posit, were  forced  in  a  melted  condition  from  the  burning 
depths  below. 

17.  These  rocks  were  at  first  stratified,  but  by  the 
igneous  lava  breaking  forth  and  flowing  near  them,  a  sub- 
terranean heat  was  produced,  thus  destroying  the  sedimen- 
tary or  stratified  condition. 

18.  Petrified  remains  of  animals  or  plants  that  lie  im- 
bedded in  the  rock  formations  of  the  earth's  crust. 

19.  Stratified  rocks  that  contain  fossils.  Nonfossilifer- 
ous  rocks  are  those  without  fossils,  or  igneous  rocks. 

20.  Into  seven:  The  Azoic  Age,  the  Silurian  Age, 
Devonian  Age,  Carboniferous  Age,  Reptilian  Age,  Mam- 
malian Age,  and  the  Age  of  Man. 

21.  The  Azoic  Age  is  the  earliest,  and  includes  the 
time  from  the  first  forming  of  a  solid  crust  to  the  appear- 
ance of  animal  life.  Rocks  of  this  age  contain  no  animal 
fossils. 

The  Silurian  Age  succeeded  the  Azoic,  and  the  rocks 
abound  in  fossils  of  the  simplest  animals  and  plants. 
Star-shaped  animals  and  animals  that  consist  of  joints  or 
segments,  as  worms,  make  their  first  appearance  on  the 
earth ;  but  the  moUusks,  animals  like  our  oyster,  predom- 
inate. 

The  Devonian  Age,  or  Age  of  Fishes,  succeeds  the 
Silurian.     Rocks  of  this  age  contain  fossils  of  higher  and 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY.  261 

more  developed  animals  and  plants  than  those  of  the  pre- 
ceding age.     Of  fishes,  the  shark  and  gar-fish  predominate. 

The  Carboniferous  Age  was  the  age  of  vegetation.  Great 
forests  and  jungles  covered  the  land,  from  the  poles  to  the 
equator.  It  was  a  period  of  unceasing  change.  Destruc- 
tive floods  undermined  the  dense  vegetation,  which  fell, 
layer  upon  layer,  gradually  changing  into  vast  coal-fields 
under  the  pressure  of  the  waters. 

The  Reptilian  Age  is  remarkable  as  the  era  of  the  cul- 
mination of  reptiles  and  mollusks.  Among  the  former 
were  the  gigantic  ichthyosaurus^  a  marine  animal  with  the 
teeth  and  head  of  a  crocodile,  and  from  ten  to  thirty  feet 
long;  the  plesiosaurus^  a  huge  reptile  with  the  head  and 
neck  of  a  snake,  and  the  pterodactyl,  a  flying  reptile. 

In  the  Mammalian  Age  many  of  the  lower  animals  and 
vegetable  forms  become  extinct,  and  more  perfect  ones 
appear.  The  gar-fishes  give  place  to  the  salmon,  perch, 
and  herring;  thecycads  among  plants,  to  the  oaks,  willows, 
and  palms.  Animals  of  great  size  tread  the  earth,  which 
are  now  known  only  by  their  remains. 

The  Age  of  Man  is  the  present  era.  The  animal  ele- 
ment is  no  longer  dormant.  The  majority  of  the  large 
beasts,  that  during  the  preceding  era  were  the  chief  deni- 
zens of  the  world,  have  become  extinct,  and  made  room 
for  smaller  but  higher  creatures.  Man,  as  the  most  highly 
organized  being,  appears  latest  upon  the  earth,  which  has, 
by  means  of  successive  changes  in  the  past,  arrived  at  that 
stage  of  development  which  renders  it  a  fit  dwelling-place 
for  him.  The  earth,  in  this  last  stage,  has  reached  a  state 
of  comparative  stability.  Changes  take  place,  but  they 
are  less  sweeping  and  less  violent  than  those  of  the  pre- 
ceding ages. 

2  2.  By  the  atmosphere,  the  water,  ana  Dy  the  action  of 
the  heated  interior. 

23.    The  moisture  in  the  atmosphere  crumbles  the  exposed 


262  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

rock-surfaces,  and  the  dusty  fragments  are  drifted  by  the 
wind,  and  in  the  course  of  time,  deep  deposits  of  it  are 
formed. 

24.  Rivers  and  creeks  are  everywhere  at  work  gradually 
moving  the  whole  surface  of  continents  towards  the  oceans. 
Rivers  also  produce  important  changes  by  erosion. 

25.  Rivers  wearing  out  deep  channels  in  their  courses. 

26.  The  Canon  of  the  Colorado  River,  which  is  a  nar- 
row chasm  three  hundred  miles  long,  and  with  perpendic- 
ular walls  of  rock,  from  three  thousand  to  six  thousand  feet 
in  height,  worn  by  the  flowing  river. 

27.  Changes  of  level,  which  are  slowly  progressing  by 
the  century,  or  suddenly  by  the  action  of  volcanoes  and 
earthquakes. 

28.  The  northern  part  of  the  Scandinavian  peninsula  is 
slowly  rising  at  the  rate  of  four  feet  in  a  century,  while  the 
southern  part,  and  Holland  and  Denmark,  are  gradually 
subsiding.  It  is  by  this  subsidence  that  the  greater  part  of 
Holland  and  Denmark  is  below  the  level  of  the  sea,  and 
should  the  dykes  which  protect  these  countries  become 
broken,  great  inundation  would  follow. 

29.  When  the  interior  of  the  earth  has  cooled  beyond 
the  power  to  react  and  disturb  its  surface,  the  leveling  of 
continents  by  the  elements  of  nature  will  begin  to  be  ap- 
parent. By  the  washings  of  rain  the  surface  of  the  country 
is  slowly  moving  to  the  bottom  of  oceans ;  by  the  action  of 
the  moist  atmosphere  rocks  crumble  to  dust  and  are  borne 
away.  Though  the  process  of  decomposition  is  slow,  yet 
the  all-devouring  element  of  time  will  tear  down  the  moun- 
tains of  earth  and  fill  up  the  valleys  of  the  seas,  until  land 
shall  disappear,  and  the  earth  shall  be  one  wide  expanse  of 
ocean. 

30.  About  one-five-hundred-and-thirtieth  part  of  the 
whole  volume  of  the  globe,  or  if  the  earth  were  a  perfect 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  263 

Sphere,   without   elevations   and   depressions,    the  volume 
of  water  would  be  about  10,000  feet  in  thickness. 

31.  They  lie  with  their  masses  about  the  Arctic  and 
Atlantic  Oceans,  and  narrow  as  they  extend  southward. 

32.  Into  two  classes:  continental  and  oceanic. 

^^.  Those  that  lie  near  continents,  and  appear,  by  their 
position,  to  be  detached  portions. 

34.  The  West  Indies,  Bahamas,  Aleutian,  Japan  East 
Indies,  and  many  others. 

35.  Such  as  lie  far  removed  from  any  continent.  Nearly 
all  of  the  islands  of  the  Pacific  Ocean  belong  to  this  class. 

;^6.  It  is  the  limy  secretion  or  deposit  of  small  marine 
animals  that  lie  together  in  vast  numbers.  It  is  found  in 
tropical  seas,  or  where  the  temperature  of  the  water  is  not 
below  sixty-eight  degrees  (Fahrenheit). 

37.  Four :  fringing  reefs,  barrier  reefs,  encircling  reefs, 
and  atolls,  or  coral  islands. 

38.  lines  or  ribbons  of  coral  near  the  shores. 

39.  They  lie.  parallel  to  the  shore,  but  are  separated 
from  it  by  a  channel  of  water  of  considerable  depth  and 
varying  greatly  in  width.  The  grandest  example  of  coral 
formation  known  is  the  Great  Australian  barrier  reef  Ex- 
ternally it  rises,  with  little  incHnation,  from  a  fathomless 
ocean — stretches  upwards  of  1,000  miles  along  the  north- 
east shore — ^varies  in  breadth  from  two  hundred  yards  to  a 
mile,  and  in  distance  from  the  shore  from  twenty  to  seventy 
miles.  There  are  many  openings  through  the  reef,  by 
which  vessels  enter  the  interior  ocean,  which  is  everywhere 
safely  navigable.  An  encircling  reef  is  a  barrier  reef  which 
encloses  one  or  more  islands. 

40.  They  consist  of  a  low,  narrow  rim  of  reef  surround- 
ing a  lagoon. 

41.  The  vacant  place  enclosed  by  atolls  or  coral 
islands. 

42.  It  is  based  uoon  a  regular  and  gradual  subsidence 


264  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

of  the  bed  of  the  ocean.  A  fringing  reef  is  first  formed 
near  the  shore  of  an  island,  which  becomes  an  encircling 
reef,  and  as  the  ocean  bed  subsides,  the  coral  deposits  still 
continue  to  grow  upward  until  by  the  subsidence  the  in- 
terior island  disappears,  and  the  atoll  alone  remains. 

43.  Into  three  classes :  mountains,  table-lands  or  plat- 
eaus, and  low  lands. 

44.  The  Himalayas  are  the  highest  elevations,  rising 
29,000  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  The  lowest  de- 
pression is  the  Dead  Sea,  in  Palestine,  which  lies  1,300 
feet  below  the  level  of  the  ocean. 

45.  The  direction  of  a  mountain  chain. 

46.  Above  an  elevation  of  1,000  feet.  Low  plains  are 
below  1,000  feet. 

47. 

Mean  elevation  in  feet. 

The  Plateau  of  Thibet 14,000 

The  Bolivian  Plateau,  in  the  Andes 13,000 

Plateau  of  Anahuac,  in  Mexico    8,000 

Arabian  Plateau 7,000  to  8,000 

Colorado  Plateau 7,000 

The  Great  Basin 4,000  to  5,000 

The  Sahara 2,000  to  3,000 

Southern  Africa 3,000  to  5,000 

Central  Asiatic   Plateau 2,000  to  4,000 

48.  In  the  Western  Continent  there  is  the  Mississippi 
Plain,  the  Arctic  Plain,  Atlantic  Coast  Plain,  Llanos  of  the 
Orinoco,  Selvas  of  the  Amazon,  and  the  Pampas  of  the  La 
Plata.  In  Europe  there  is  the  Great  Central  Germanic 
Plain.  In  Asia,  there  is  the  Siberian  Plain,  the  Plain  of 
Turkistan,  the  Chinese  Plain,  and  the  Mesopotamia!!  Plain. 
Africa  has  no  great  low  plains. 

49.  Into  three :  those  rising  to  an  elevation  of  20,000 
feet  or  upwards ;  those  between  10,000  and  20,000  feet, 
and  those  between  2,000  and  10,000  feet 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  266 

50.  Longitudinal  valleys  are  those  which  separate 
parallel  ridges  of  mountain  chains,  and  extend  in  the  same 
direction.  Transverse  valleys  cut  the  ridges  at  right  angles, 
and  extend  in  an  opposite  direction. 

51.  Six:  the  Rocky  Mountains,  Californian,  Allegha- 
nian,  Andean,  Parime,  and  Brazilian. 

52.  This  system^  including  the  Californian  system, 
occupies  the  whole  western  part  of  the  continent,  ext-end- 
ing  from  the  Isthmus  of  Panama  to  the  Arctic  Ocean,  a 
distance  of  5,700  miles. 

53.  It  extends  in  a  southwesterly  direction  from  the 
shores  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  to  the  northern  part 
of  Georgia  and  Alabama.  This  system  consists  of  many 
parallel  chains,  varying  in  height  from  1,000  to  3,000  feet, 
enclosing  fertile  valleys. 

54.  It  extends  from  the  50th  parallel  of  north  latitude, 
between  the  Rocky  Mountains  and  the  coast  range  of  the 
Pacific,  through  the  Central  part  of  Mexico  to  the  Isthmus 
of  Panama,  and  may  be  divided  into  the  Great  Basin  of 
Utah,  the  Great  Mexican  Plateau,  and  the  table-lands  of 
Central  America. 

55.  The  Great  Plateau  of  the  Andes;  the  elevated 
plains  of  Quito,  Bogota,  and  Popayan ;  and  the  table-land 
of  Brazil. 

56.  It  is  an  extensive  tract  of  lofty  table-land,  stretch- 
ing along  the  top  of  the  Andes  between  the  parallels  of 
15°  and  3°  south  latitude,  with  an  elevation  of  nearly  13,- 
000  feet. 

57.  They  are  divided  into  Central,  Southern  and  South- 
western Asia. 

58.  The  great  desert  of  Gobi,  and  the  table-land  of 
Thibet. 

59.  Those  of  Hindostan,  Iran,  Asia  Minor,  and  Arabia. 

60.  Those  of  Abyssinia  and  South  Atrica. 

61.  It  is  the  Spanish  peninsula,  the  whole  central  part 


266  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

of  which  consists  of  a  series  of  lofty  plains,  divided  from 
each  other  by  parallel  mountain  chains.  This  plateau 
comprises  93,000  square  miles,  or  nearly  one-half  of  the 
peninsula. 

62.  It  extends  from  the  Arctic  Ocean  to  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico,  and  from  the  Rocky  Mountains  to  the  Alleghanies, 
and  is  divided  about  midway  into  a  northern  and  southern 
slope. 

6;^.  The  entire  peninsula  east  of  the  Andes,  except  the 
mountain  systems  and  the  Brazilian  table-land,  and  is  di- 
vided into  the  llanos,  selvas,  pampas,  and  wastes  of  Pata- 
gonia. 

64.  It  extends  from  the  Bay  of  Biscay  and  the  North 
Sea,  to  Behring  Strait. 

65.  It  contains  a  great  plain,  extending  from  the  foot 
of  the  Ural  Mountains  to  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  from  the 
Alti  Mountains  to  the  Arctic  Ocean.  This  plain,  near  the 
Arctic,  is  a  barren  and  desolate  region,  and  the  cold  is  so 
intense  that  the  spongy  soil  is  perpetually  frozen  to  the 
depth  of  several  hundred  feet.  Near  the  Irtysh  river,  the 
soil  is  rich  and  pasturage  good,  but  there  are  few  inhab- 
itants. 

66.  Sahara,  the  plains  of  Egypt,  Central  Africa,  and  the 
region  of  Zambezi. 

67.  Of  vast,  barren  plains. 

68.  Each  have  a  predominant  mountain  system  in  the 
west,  two  secondary  systems  in  the  east,  and  vast,  low 
plains  intervening. 

69.  From  the  reaction  of  the  heated  interior  upon  the 
solid  crust.  These  phenomena  are  divided  into  three 
classes:  volcanoes,  earthquakes,  and  a  rising  or  subsidence 
of  portions  of  the  earth's  surface. 

70.  As  active,  intermittent,  and  extinct. 

71.  Those  having  periods  of  rest. 

72.  It  is  that  of    Kilauea  on  the   island   of  Hawaii, 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  267 

4,270  feet  high.  This  crater  is  over  three  miles  long  and 
one  mile  wide,  and  from  600  to  1,000  feet  deep.  Large 
pools  of  boiling  lava  may  be  seen  from  the  brink. 

73.  Two :  the  central  and  lineal  systems. 

74.  The  central,  consists  of  several  vents  grouped  to- 
gether, one  of  which  usually  serves  as  a  common  point  of 
eruption.  The  lineal,  consists  of  several  vents  extending 
in  one  direction,  at  no  great  distance  from  each  other, 
forming,  as  it  were,  chimneys  along  an  extended  fissure. 

75.  On  the  islands  and  shores  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

76.  Humboldt  has  enumerated  225  still  in  action,  and 
the  number  of  extinct  volcanoes  is  much  greater. 

77.  Geysers,  mud  volcanoes,  and  fields  of  fire. 

78.  Miniature  volcanoes,  which  emit  steam  and  mud 
but  never  molten  rocks.  They  are  found  in  large  num- 
bers in  Sicily,  and  on  the  shores  of  the  Caspian  Sea,  near 
the  base  of  the  Caucasus  Mountains. 

79.  Regions  where  columns  of  fire  break  forth  from  the 
ground.  These  fires  are  classed  with  volcanic  phenomena,, 
although  they  may  have  their  origin  from  the  connection 
of  the  internal  heat  with  large  quantities  of  gases  which 
accumulate  in  the  crevices  of  rocks  and  burst  forth  in 
flames.  They  are  found  to  the  greatest  extent  west  of  the 
Caspian  Sea. 

80.  Convulsions  of  the  earth,  and  are  most  common  in 
volcanic  districts. 

81.  Horizontal,  vertical,  and  rotary. 

82.  That  the  convulsions  are  the  results  of  the  heated 
interior  seeking  vent,  and  may  be  caused  by  the  collection 
of  steam  and  gases,  or,  like  congealed  water,  the  crust  of 
the  earth  may  contain  the  property  of  expanding  during  its 
process  of  cooling,  thus  forming  a  pressure  which  is  re- 
sisted by  violent  agitations  to  obtain  reHef.  The  move- 
ments of  earthquakes  appear  to  be  on  the  principle  that 
waves  recede  when  any  substance  is  thrown  into  the  water; 


268  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

thus,  when  convulsions  occur  great  waves  of  the  fluid  in- 
terior recede,  by  which  the  crust  is  uplifted  and  more  or 
less  violently  shaken. 

8^.  They  vary  according  to  their  power.  The  terrible 
earthquake  of  Lisbon,  November  ist,  1755,  ^^  which  60,- 
000  persons  lost  their  lives,  disturbed  an  area  of  7,500,000 
square  miles,  or,  as  the  earth's  crust  is  about  twenty-five 
miles  in  thickness,  187,500,000  cubic  miles  of  matter  were 
moved. 

84.  Some  of  the  most  destructive  lasted  but  a  few  sec- 
onds. That  of  Lisbon  produced  its  terrible  effects  in  less 
than  five  minutes. 

85.  The  waters  upon  the  earth. 

86.  Fountains  of  waters  which  flow  from  reservoirs  un- 
derneath the  ground,  and  are  classified  as  perennial  or 
constant,  intermitting,  and  periodical. 

87.  Perennial  springs  are  those  which  continue  to  flow 
at  all  seasons.  Intermittent  are  those  that  alternately  flow 
and  stop.  Periodical  depend  upon  the  prevailing  charac- 
ter of  the  seasons. 

8S.  They  depend  upon  the  peculiar  arrangement  of  the 
pervious  and  impervious  stratification.  The  water  pene- 
trates the  pervious  stratum  and  sinks  to  the  impervious, 
where,  if  the  stratification  is  tilted,  the  water  will  follow 
this  layer  until  an  outlet  is  found.  Should  the  pervious 
V  stratum  lie  between  two  convex  layers  of  impervious  mat- 
ter, springs  could  be  obtained  at  any  place  where  the 
height  is  less  than  the  highest  points  of  the  pervious  stra- 
tum, by  breaking  through,  whereby  the  water  would  raise 
to  the  surface  and  flow. 

89.  Artificial  springs  formed  by  boring  to  the  pervious 
stratum,  as  explained  above. 

90.  When  a  river  is  so  situated  that  it  may  divide  and 
flow  to  two  distinct  river  basins.  The  best  known  exam- 
ple is  the  Cassiquiare  river,  in  Venezuela,  which  connects 


.-N 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY. 

through  its  bifurcation  the  river   systems  of  the  Amazon 
and  Orinoco  rivers. 

91.  Into  oceanic  and  continental.  The  oceanic  are 
those  that  flow  into  the  ocean,  and  are  divided  into  five 
classes,  one  for  each  ocean.  The  continental  are  those 
which  never  reach  the  ocean. 

92.  Upon  the  extent  of  the  territory  which  it  drains; 
the  rains;  the  physical  features  of  the  country — a  well- 
wooded  country  impeding  evaporation ;  and  the  climate. 

93.  The  St.  Lawrence  basin,  Atlantic  slope,  Missis- 
sippi valley,  Texas  slope.  Pacific  slope,  inland  basin  of 
Utah,  and  the  Red  River  basin. 

94.  There  are  three  classes:  the  Atlantic  basin,  the 
Arctic  slope,  and  the  inland  basin  of  the  Caspian  Sea. 

95.  They  are  entirely  within  the  low  plains  of  Russia. 

96.  Into  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

97.  The  position  of  the  several  grand  divisions  partially 
enclose,  and  slope  to  the  Atlantic,  while  mountain  chains 
which  form  the  divides  between  the  river  basins  of  these 
oceans  are  near  the  shores  of  the  Pacific. 

98.  Into  four  classes:  first,  those  which  receive  no 
streams  and  have  no  outlets;  second,  those  which  receive 
no  streams,  but  have  an  outlet;  third,  those  which  receive 
streams,  but  have  no  outlet ;  fourth,  those  which  both  re- 
ceive  and  discharge  streams. 

99.  Steppe  lakes. 

100.  Great  Salt  Lake  of  the  United  States,  Lake 
Titicaca  of  South  America,  the  Caspian  Sea,  Lake  Tchad 
and  Nagami  of  Africa,  and  numerous  smaller  ones  through- 
out Central  Asia. 

loi.  It  is  over  176,000  square  miles  in  extent,  and 
2,957  feet  deep;  its  surface  lies  eighty-four  feet  below  the 
level  of  the  ocean,  and  is  slowly  diminishing  in  size. 
Several  large  rivers  flow  into  it. 

102.     This  region  is  in  North  America,  and  sweeps  in 


270  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

the  shape  of  a  broad  belt  around  Hudson  Bay,  from  Lab- 
rador to  the  shores  of  the  Arctic  Ocean.  The  lakes  of 
Canada,  those  in  the  New  England  States,  New  York, 
Minnesota,  the  great  northern  lakes,  and  ,the  many  lakes 
in  the  great  northern  plain  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains, 
belong  to  this  region. 

103.  These  lakes  have  been  estimated  to  contain  one^ 
half  of  all  the  fresh  water  of  the  globe.  Lake  Superior 
contains  about  32,000  square  miles;  Lake  Michigan  about 
22,400;  Lake  Huron,  21,000;  Lake  Erie,  10,815;  Lake 
Ontario,  6,300. 

104.  In  Europe  there  are  two  lake  regions.  The  one 
surrounds  the  Baltic  Sea  and  its  branches.  To  it  belong 
the  countless  lakes  of  Finland,  the  great  Ladogo  and 
Onega  lakes  of  Russia,  the  numerous  small  lakps  in  North' 
em  Germany,  and  those  of  Denmark  and  Sweden.  The 
other  lake  region  is  that  of  the  Alps,  containing  426  lakes., 
the  largest  of  which  lie  along  the  base  of  this  mountain 
system. 

105.  They  are  the  most  extensive  swamps  on  the  globe, 
and  belong  to  Northern  Russia  and  Siberia.  These 
swamps  are  frozen  to  a  great  depth,  and  thawing  during  the 
summer  months  at  the  surface  only :  are  covered  with  a 
dense  covering  of  mosses. 

106.  The  color  is  generally  a  deep,  bluish  green,  which 
becomes  clearer  near  the  coast.  The  depth  depends  upon 
the  formation  of  the  bottom,  which,  like  the  land,  is  diver- 
sified by  mountains  and  valleys,  high  and  low  plains.  The 
greatest  depth  in  the  region  of  the  Atlantic  Telegraph 
Cable  is  about  12,700  feet;  in  the  South  Atlantic,  25,000; 
in  the  Pacific,  over  43,000  feet.  The  clearness  and  trans- 
parency vary  in  different  localities.  In  the  Arctic  Ocean 
shells  and  animals  are  distinguished  at  a  depth  of  500  feet ; 
around  the  Lesser  Antilles  objects  are  distinctly  seen  150 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  271 

feet   below  the   surface.     Sea-water,  in  general,  is  more 
transparent  than  fresh  water. 

107.  By  the  presence  of  mineral  substances,  chiefly- 
salt,  sea-water  becomes  heavier.  Fresh  water  congeals  at 
32°  Fahrenheit,  sea-water  at  28^^. 

108.  It  is  due  to  myriads  of  minute  animalcules  which 
inhabit  the  water. 

109.  There  are  four:  The  Gulf  of  Mexico,  Hudson 
Bay,  Mediterranean  Sea,  and  the  Baltic  Sea,  with  the  gulfs 
of  Bothnia  and  Finland. 

no.  Carribbean  Sea,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  North 
Sea,  Behring  Sea,  Sea  of  Okhotsk,  and  the  Japan,  Yellow, 
and  China  seas. 

111.  Experiments  show  an  agitation  from  450  to  620 
feet. 

112.  The  great  tidal-wave  rises  less  than  three  feet  in 
mid-ocean,  but  when  it  strikes  against  the  shores  of  conti- 
nents its  altitude  is  much  greater,  varying  according  to  the 
formation  of  the  inlets,  sometimes  rising  as  high  as  seventy 
feet. 

113.  This  vast  tidal  swell  or  wave,  probably  originates 
southeast  of  Australia,  and,  like  other  waves,  it  is  not  an 
onward  flow  of  water,  except  over  shoals  and  near  the  land. 
The  reason  assigned  for  giving  this  point  as  the  place  of 
commencement,  is,  the  position  of  the  continents.  Beyond 
this  commencement  extends  the  great  ocean,  which  con- 
sists of  the  Antarctic,  Pacific,  and  Indian  Oceans.  Over 
this  vast  water-area  the  flood-tide  journeys  westward  around 
the  earth,  sweeping  up  against  the  African  and  Asiatic 
coasts  into  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  around  Cape  Horn  in- 
to the  Pacific  Ocean.  ,  .    ^ 

114.  They  are  like  vast  rivers,  transporting  its  waters 
from  one  part  to  another,  and  are  caused  by  the  heat  of 
the  sun,  rotation  of  the  earth,  the  saltness  of  the   sea,  by 


272  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

winds,  tides,  and  melting  ice.     They  are  divided  into  con- 
stant, periodical  and  temporary. 

115.  Those  which  continue  for  a  limited  time,  and  are 
caused  by  tides,  melting  ice,  or  gales  of  considerable  dura- 
tion. 

116.  Such  as  flow  at  regular  intervals,  and  are  occa- 
sioned by  tides,  and  by  periodical  winds  called  monsoons. 

117.  Those  which  flow  throughout  the  entire  year  in  the 
same  direction,  and  have  their  origin  in  permanent  causes. 
There  are  two  kinds :  polar  currents,  flowing  from  the  poles 
to  the  equator,  and  equatorial  currents  flowing  from  east  to 
west  near  the  equator.  The  origin  of  constant  currents  may 
depend  upon  the  rotation  of  the  earth  and  enormous  evapo- 
ration in  the  equatorial  regions.  By  the  evaporation  cur- 
rents are  formed  from  beyond  the  equator  to  supply  the 
loss,  and  by  the  rotation  of  the  earth  from  west  to  east,  the 
waters  at  the  equator,  where  the  velocity  of  the  earth  is 
greatest,  are  inclined  to  flow  or  slide  to  the  west,  which 
produce  currents  in  an  opposite  direction  from  the  motion 
of  the  earth. 

118.  A  stream  which  runs  by  the  side  of,  or  beneath 
another  current,  and  in  an  opposite  direction. 

119.  Of  the  atmosphere,  temperature,  winds,  and 
moisture  (dews,  fogs,  rain,  snow,  and  hail). 

120.  It  is  composed  of  three  gases,  in  the  following 
proportion:  Nitrogen,  76.84;  Oxygen,  23.1;  Carbonic 
Acid,  0.06. 

121.  The  quantity  of  sensible  heat  which  a  body 
possesses,  as  indicated  by  a  thermometer. 

122.  The  direction  and  amount  of  the  sun's  rays,  its 
vicinity  to  the  sea,  the  prevailing  winds  to  which  it  is  ex- 
posed, and  its  elevation  above  the  sea. 

123.  In  the  tropical  zone  the  limit  is  but  one  foot  from 
the  surface ;  in  the  temperate  zone  it  is  from  sixty  to  sev- 
enty feet;  and  in  the  frigid  zone  it  is  about  fifty. 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY.       '  273 

124.  In  the  tropical  zone,  it  is,  ])robably,  about  7,200 
feet;  sixty  degrees  north  and  fifty-six  degrees  south  lati- 
tude, it  reaches  the  surface,  and  in  seventy  degrees  abput 
4,500  feet. 

125.  The  average  amount  of  heat  a  place  receives  dur- 
ing the  year. 

126.  The  variation  is  but  little.  The  variable  produce 
of  our  harvests  is  owing  more  to  the  change  in  the  distribu- 
tion of  heat  through  the  different  months,  than  to  any  differ- 
ence in  the  annual  supply. 

127.  Lines  which  are  drawn  through  all  places,  which 
have  nearly  the  same  mean  annual  temperature. 

128.  Six:  the  torrid,  hot,  warm,  temperate,  cold,  and 
frigid. 

129.  Air  in  motion.  It  is  produced  by  the  different 
amount  of  heat  which  the  atmosphere  receives  in  different 
localities. 

130.  To  the  equatorial  regions. 

131.  Within  the  tropical  regions  the  air  is  heated.  It 
expands,  becomes  lighter,  and  rises.  From  both  sides  the 
colder  air  rushes  in  to  restore  the  disturbed  equilibrium, 
thus  producing  two  lateral  currents,  one  from  the  north, 
the  other  from  the  south.  But  the  air  drawn  by  these  cur- 
rents must  be  restored,  else  there  would  be  an  accumula- 
tion of  atmosphere  in  these  regions.  This  is  effected  by 
the  ascending  current,  which,  on  reaching  a  certain  eleva- 
tion is  pressed  outward,  forming  two  return  currents,  one 
flowing  to  the  north,  the  other  to  the  south.  It  is  by  these 
currents,  one  ascending  current,  two  lateral  polar  currents^ 
and  two  returning  equatorial  currents,  that  the  general  cir- 
culation is  effected. 

132  Th^y  diXQ  t\iQ  lateral  polar  currents,  although  the 
name  is  generally  applied,  only  to  that  part  of  the  currents 
between  the  equator  and  30°  of  latitude,  where  they  be- 
come distinct  surface  winds. 


274  THE  QUESTION  BOOK. 

133.  The  equatorial  currents,  which  in  the  tropics  flow 
high  above  the  polar  currents,  become  chilled  in  their  tran- 
sit through  the  upper  regions  of  the  atmosphere,  and  have 
a  tendency  to  descend,  and  intermingle  with  the  polar  cur- 
rents, which  replace  each  other  successively,  thus  prevent- 
ing constant  currents  above  that  latitude. 

134.  They  are  northeast  winds  in  the  northern  hemis- 
phere, and  southeast  winds  in  the  southern  hemisphere.  The 
direction  is  due  to  the  rotation  of  the  earth,  the  velocity  of 
the  surface  of  the  earth  being  greater  as  the  polar  currents 
approach  the  equator,  which  cannot  acquire,  suddenly,  the 
same  velocity,  and  the  earth  moves  under  it,  and  the  trades, 
in  the  northern  hemisphere,  by  this  reason  blow  from  the 
northeast,  instead  of  coming  directly  from  the  north.  By  a 
similar  reason  the  equatorial  currents  flow  in  an  opposite 
direction.  As  these  currents  commence  to  flow  from  the 
equator,  they  acquire  the  equatorial  velocity,  which  can- 
not, suddenly,  conform  with  the  decreased  velocity  of  the 
earth's  surface  as  they  approach  the  poles,  but  unlike  the 
trades,  which  lag  behind,  they  have  acquired  a  velocity  and 
flow  beyond  the  meridian  from  which  they  started. 

135.  Seven:  the  zone  of  calms,  the  two  zones  of  the 
trade-winds,  the  two  subtropical  zones,  and  the  two  zones 
of  the  variable  winds. 

136.  It  extends  from  i^*^  to  11^  north  latitude.  This 
place  has  the  greatest  mean  annual  temperature,  conse- 
quently it  is  where  the  trade-winds  cease,  or  rather,  where 
they  rise  and  flow  back  again  as  equatorial  currents,  thus 
producmg  a  series  of  calms. 

137.  Those  belts  which  lie  between  the  summer  and 
winter  limits  of  the  trade-zones.  The  trades  prevail  here 
during  the  summer,  but  in  winter  they  recede,  and  the  vari- 
able winds  prevail. 

138.  They  extend  from  the  limits  of  the  sub-tropical 
zones  to  the  poles 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  275 

139.  Trade  winds  whose  direction  has  been  modified 
.  by  the  unequal  heating  of  the  land  and  sea.     The  name 

was  originally  restricted  to  periodical  winds  which  blow  in 
the  Indian  Ocean,  blowing  part  of  the  year  in  one  direc- 
tion, and  part  in  the  opposite. 

140.  In  the  Indian  Ocean,  along  the  coast  of  Guinea, 
and  in  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

141.  During  the  cooler  months  of  the  year,  the  mon- 
soons are  the  regular  northeast  trade-winds,  but  as  the  sun 
crosses  the  equator,  and  the  continent  of  Asia  becomes 
intensely  heated,  an  ascending  current  results,  and  the 
trades  are  deflected  and  rush  to  the  continent  to  restore 
the  equilibrium,  thus  turning  the  trades  in  almost  an  oppo- 
site direction.  A  similar  deviation  i?  also  produced  south 
of  the  equator  when  Australia  becomes  heated. 

142.  The  northeastern  trades  are  deflected  by  the  over- 
heated Mississippi  valley,  and  like  the  trades  of  the  Indian 
Ocean,  they  are  bent  to  supply  the  demand  on  the  conti- 
nent. 

143.  Violent  winds  which  sweep  over  the  prairies  of 
Texas  and  plains  of  Mexico.  They  prevail  from  October 
to  March,  and  are  considered  as  winter  monsoons. 

144.  Those  winds  which  blow  in  summer  from  the  sea  to 
the  land  during  the  greater  part  of  the  day,  and  from  the  land 
to  the  sea  at  night;  they  are  caused  by  the  different  tem- 
perature of  the  land  and  water,  the  land  being  warmer 
than  the  water  in  the  day,  and  colder  at  night. 

'145.  They  are  periodicals  which  blow  on  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea  in  summer,  and  owe  their  origin  to  the  Sahara 
desert. 

146.  The  simoon,  khamsin,  harmattan,  sirocco,  and 
the  solano.  The  simoon  prevail  on  the  deserts  of  Arabia, 
Nubia,  Persia,  and  Syria ;  the  khamsin  blow  in  Egypt,  but 
are  not  so  oppressive  as  the  simoon ;  the  sirocco  is  a  well- 


276  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

known  hot  wind  of  Greece  and  Italy,  and  the  solano  of 
Spain,  which  owe  their  origin  to  the  vicinity  of  the  Sahara. 

147.  The  pamperos  and  bora.  The  pamperos  are  cold 
southwest  winds  which  originate  among  the  snows  of  the 
Andes,  and  sweep  with  great  violence  over  the  level  pam- 
pas of  South  America.  The  bora  is  a  northeast  wind,  com- 
mon on  the  eastern  shores  of  the  Gulf  of  Venice. 

148.  A  whirlwind  is  the  meeting  of  two  winds  at  an 
angle.  Waterspouts  are  whirlings  occurring  on  the  sea  or 
on  lakes.  They  first  appear  in  the  form  of  an  inverted  cone 
attached  to  a  dark  cloud.  The  cone  swings  backward  and 
forward,  and  gradually  approaches  the  water,  which  be- 
comes violently  agitated.  The  whirling  eddy  draws  up 
masses  of  spray,  which  unite  with  the  descending  cone. 
When  fully  formed,  they  appear  as  tall  pillars  of  cloud  of 
sombre  grey,  stretching  from  the  ?ea  to  the  sky,  whirling 
around  an  axis.  They  continue  but  for  a  short  time, 
when  the  column  breaks,  and  rain  often  descends  from  the 
cloud  above.  The  drops  of  water  forming  this  rain  are 
never  salt,  as  would  be  the  case  were  they  carried  up  from 
the  ocean.  They  must,  therefore,  have  been  derived  from 
the  clouds,  as  in  ordinary  rain. 

149.  As  hurricanes,  typhoons,  cyclones,  and  tornadoes. 

150.  In  the  West  Indies,  Indian  Ocean,  and  the  Chinese 
^  Sea.     The  wind  revolves. 

V  151.  They  differ  from  the  other  tropical  storms  merely 
in  their  extent  and  duration.  Their  extent  is  quite  limited, 
and  their  duration  at  any  one  place  is  seldom  more  than  a 
few  seconds. 

152.  Dew  is  moisture  collected  on  substances  during 
the  night.  Hoar-frost  is  frozen  dew.  Fogs  are  masses  of 
vapor  resting  on  or  near  the  surface  of  the  earth.  Clouds 
are  masses  of  visible  vapor,  differing  in  no  respect  from 
fogs,  except  in  position.  Rain  is  water,  which,  originally 
taken  up  m  the  atmosphere  in  the  form  of  vapor,  is  re- 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  277 

turned  to  the  earth  in  drops.     Snow  is  the  frozen  vapor  of 
the  atmosphere. 

153.  As  they  are  composed  of  alternate  layers  of  snow 
and  ice,  it  is  supposed  that  the  wind  revolves  around  a 
horizontal  axis,  by  means  of  which  the  moisture  of  the  air 
is  successively  carried  into  warm  and  cold  clouds.  In  the 
cold  clouds  the  particles  of  snow  are  collected,  and  by  the 
whirl  are  carried  into  rain  clouds,  where  they  receive  a 
coating  of  water,  which  when  returned  to  the  cold  cloud 
becomes  ice.  In  this  manner  the  hailstones  grow  rapidly 
in  size,  and  are  finally  hurled  to  the  ground. 

154.  The  cirrus,  cumulus,  stratus,  and  nimbus.  The 
cirrus  occupy  the  highest  position  in  the  atmosphere,  and 
resemble  a  lock  of  hair,  being  composed  of  parallel  streaks. 
The  cumulus  resemble  a  mountain  of  snow,  and  are  most 
common  in  summer.  The  stratus  consist  of  horizontal 
bands  near  the  surface  of  the  earth,  and  belong  to  the 
night.  The  nimbus  is  the  rain-cloud,  and  much  more 
dense  than  the  others,  although  the  others  may  be  changed 
to  the  nimbus. 

155.  Into  rainless  regions,  regions  of  periodical  rains, 
and  regions  of  frequent  rains. 

156.  In  the  zone  of  calms,  the  zone  of  trade-winds,  and 
the  sub-tropical  zones. 

157.  In  this  zone  it  rains  daily.  The  ascending  cur- 
rent, hot  and  highly  saturated,  is  cooled  when  it  reaches 
greater  elevations.  In  the  afternoon,  usually,  a  ring  of 
clouds  appear,  and,  accompanied  by  thunder  and  lightning, 
torrents  of  rain  descend. 

158.  These  zones  are  characterized  by  almost  constant 
serenity,  and  a  deep-azure  sky.  But  as  the  sun  stands  over 
the  zenith  during  a  part  of  the  summer  in  these  zones,  it 
carries  with  it  the  calms  and  rains  of  the  first  zone.  Hence 
the  serenity  of  the  trade-zones  is  interrupted  by  a  brief 
rainy  season  during  summer,  while  the  winters  are  dry. 


278  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

159.  They  are  characterized  by  dry  summers  and  rainy 
winters.  This  is  due  to  the  trades  which  prevail  there  dur* 
ing  the  summer,  and  absorb  rather  than  bring  moisture. 
During  the  winter  the  variable  winds  prevail,  and  bring  the 
irregular  rains  of  the  temperate  regions.  A  large  portion 
of  the  United  States  lies  within  this  zone,  and  would  have 
dry  summers  if  it  were  not  for  the  monsoons  occasionally 
blowing  from  the  Mexican  Gulf  far  inland,  and  bringing 
thunder  storms. 

160.  A  part  of  the  temperate  zone  and  the  frigid. 

161.  They  lie  almost  entirely  within  the  zones  of  the 
trade-winds. 

162.  The  trade-winds  coming  across  the  entire  conti- 
nent, are  intercepted  by  the  Andes  Mountains,  and  are 
forced  to  ascend  their  slopes,  where  they  meet  the  cold 
air,  which  condenses  their  vapor,  and  the  rain  flows  down 
the  eastern  slopes.  The  wind  passes  over  the  crest  and 
reaches  the  western  slopes  dry  and  vaporless. 

163.  The  greater  part  would  be  a  barren  desert. 

164.  The  trade-wind  is  here  deprived  of  its  vapor  by 
the  Plateau  of  Anahuac. 

165.  The  Great  Desert,  Arabia  and  Persia.  The  trades 
prevail  here,  but  have  lost  their  moisture  on  the  passage 
across  the  mountains  and  plateaus  of  High  Asia. 

1 66.  It  is  found  to  be  in  the  Himalayas,  which  intercept 
\    the  prevailing  southwest  winds,  and  deprive  them  of  almost 

all  their  moisture. 

167.  In  the  tropics  of  the  New  World.  This  amount  is 
about  115  inches,  while  in  the  tropics  of  the  Old  World  the 
fall  is  about  77  inches.  In  the  temperate  parts  of  the  Old 
World,  34  inches  fall;  in  the  New  World  35  inches. 

168.  On  the  Khasia  Hills,  in  Farther  India,  which  face 
the  Bay  of  Bengal  and  receive  winds  heavily  laden  with 
vapor  on  their  passage  over  the  Indian  Ocean.  The  an- 
nual fall  is  about  50  feet. 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  279 

169.  The  lavitude  of  a  place;  its  height  above  the  level 
of  the  sea;  the  position  and  direction  of  the  mountain 
chains;  its  distance  from  the  sea;  the  slope  of  the  country; 
the  character  of  the  soil;  the  degree  of  cultivation  and 
density  of  population ;  and  the  quantity  of  rain  that  falls. 

170.  Oceanic  and  continental.  Those  regions  which 
are  open  to  the  influence  of  the  ocean  are  moist  and  mild, 
while  those  which  are  removed  from  the  influence  are  com- 
monly dry  and  suffer  to  great  excesses  of  heat  and  cold. 

171.  A  country  covered  with  a  barren,  sandy  soil  is 
subject  to  great  and  rapid  changes  in  its  temperature, 
owing  to  the  readiness  with  which  it  receives  and  parts  with 
heat,  while  marshy  lands,  or  lands  covered  with  forests  or 
vegetation,  are  more  salubrious. 

172.  It  is  owing  to  the  eastern  or  trade-winds  which 
prevail,  they  having  been  deprived  of  moisture  by  crossing 
the  continent  and  meeting  the  Rocky  and  Sierra  Nevada 
Mountains.  The  westerly  winds  prevail  from  December 
to  May,  which  produces  the  rainy  season. 

173.  It  is  that  department  of  Physical  Geography 
which  treats  of  all  vegetable  and  animal  life. 

174.  Botanical  Geography,  Zoological  Geography,  and 
Ethnography. 

175.  Botanical  Geography  treats  of  the  different  divis- 
ions of  the  vegetable  kingdom  and  their  geographical  dis- 
tribution. 

T  76.     Moisture,  in  the  form  of  rain  or  dew. 

177.  The  deserts  of  Gobi  and  Arabian  in  Asia,  the 
Sahara  in  Africa,  and  the  Atacama  on  the  western  slope  of 
the  Andes. 

1 78.  Into  the  cryptogamous  (flowerless),  and  the  phen- 
ogamous  (flowering). 

179.  The  mosses,  lichens,  fungi,  ferns,  and  sea  weeds. 

180.  Into  two  classes:  the  endogenous  and  the  exoge- 
nous. 


280  THE    QUESTION    BOOK.. 

i8i.  The  endogenous  are  those  plants  which  increase 
from  within,  as  grasses,  sugar-cane,  corn,  etc.  The  exo- 
genous are  those  which  increase  by  coatings  from  without, 
as  the  trees  of  the  forest,  etc. 

182.  It  is  estimated  that  there  are  about  250,000  dis- 
tinct plant  species  upon  the  earth.  Less  than  half  of  these 
have  been  described  by  botanists. 

183.  The  lichens,  algas,  and  mosses. 

184.  Lichens  cover  the  rocks  in  tropical  deserts  and  in 
the  regions  of  ice  or  snow.  They  are  the  most  widely  dis- 
tributed class  of  plants.  Algae  are  sea  and  fresh  water 
weeds,  of  the  most  varying  forms  and  colors.  Some  attain 
an  enormous  size.  One  species,  growing  in  the  Straits  of 
Magellan  and  near  the  Falkland  Islands,  is  often  400  feet 
long.  Mosses  are  also  found  in  all  zones,  wherever  mois- 
ture is  abundant.     In  our  forests  they  are  quite  Common. 

185.  The  palms.  The  tall  and  slender  shaft  rears  on 
high  its  crbwn  of  shining,  fan-like  leaves.  Some  are  nearly 
200  feet  high.  They  require  a  mean  annual  temperature 
of  78^  to  82°,  Fahrenheit,  and  occur,  therefore,  chiefly  in 
the  hottest  parts  of  the  tropical  zone. 

186.  Rice,  bananas,  bread-fruit,  dates,  cocoanuts,  yams, 
cassava  and  sago. 

187.  Bananas  are  the  fruits  of  tropical  plants.  This 
plant  rises  15  or  20  feet  high,  with  leaves  six  feet  long  and 
a  foot  broad.  The  fruit  is  four  or  five  inches  long,  and  an 
inch  or  more  in  diameter.  They  grow  in  large  bunches, 
weighing  a  dozen  pounds  or  more.  Bread-fruit  is  produced 
by  the  bread-fruit  tree,  which  grows  in  the  isles  of  the  Pa- 
cific Ocean,  of  the  size  of  the  common  apple  tree.  The 
fruit  is  of  a  round  or  oval  shape,  as  large  as  a  small  loaf  of 
bread,  which  is  eaten  as  food.  Dates  are  a  delicious  fruit, 
produced  by  the  date-palm  of  Asia  and  Africa.  Cocoanuts 
are  the  fruits  of  the  cocoa  tree.  These  nuts  hang  in  clus- 
ters of  a  dozen  each,  on  the  top  of  the  tree,  apd  are  bound 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  281 

together  by  tough,  stringy  filaments.  Yams  are  roots  re- 
sembHng  the  potato,  and  are  cultivated  in  a  similar  man- 
ner. Cassava  is  a  kind  of  bread  made  from  the  roots  of 
the  cassada  plant.  Sago  is  obtained  from  the  pith  of  sev- 
eral species  of  palm  trees,  which  form  entire  forests  in 
many  of  the  Spice  Islands.  The  pith  is  prepared  into  sago- 
meal  by  mixing  it  with  water  and  straining.  A  tree  com- 
monly yields  from  300  to  500  pounds. 

188.  Wheat,  potatoes,  corn,  rye,  oats,  and  barley. 

189.  Cotton,  hemp,  and  flax. 

190.  Pepper,  cinnamon,  cloves,  nutmegs,  and  vanilla. 

191.  Tobacco,  opium,  betel,  and  haschish. 

192.  Opium  is  prepared  from  a  specie  of  poppy,  and 
is  very  extensively  used  in  China  and  Turkey.  The  betel 
plant  is  a  climbing  shrub,  which  grows  in  Hindostan  and 
the  islands  of  the  Indian  Ocean.  The  leaves  are  used  by 
the  natives  as  tobacco.  Haschish  is  a  powerful  narcotic, 
obtained  from  a  specie  of  hemp-wort,  and  is  used  in  India 
to  produce  intoxication. 

193.  That  department  of  physical  geography  which 
treats  of  the  divisions  of  the  animal  kingdom  and  its 
geographical  distribution. 

194.  Into  four  classes:  vertebrates,  moUusks,  articu- 
lates, and  radiates. 

195.  This  division  includes  all  animals  which  have  an 
internal  skeleton  joined  to  the  backbone.  It  comprises 
four  classes:  i.  Mammalia;  2.  Birds;  3.  Reptiles;  4. 
Fishes. 

196.  Mollusks  are  animals  of  soft  texture,  and  have  no 
skeleton ;  as  the  oyster,  snail,  and  mussel.  Articulates  are 
animals  consisting  of  a  number  of  joints  or  rings,  soft  or 
hard,  supplymg  the  place  of  a  skeleton;  as  the  lobster, 
worms,  spiders,  and  insects.  Radiates  are  so  called  be- 
cause in  many  cases  their  organs  are  arranged  like  rays 


282  THE    QUESTION    BOOK. 

proceeding  from   a  center.     The   coral  and  microscopic 
animals  belong  to  this  division. 

197.  They  are  the  most  perfect  of  the  animal  creatibn. 
They  differ  greatly  in  appearance  and  habits,  but  corre- 
spond in  the  one  particular  of  suckling  their  young.  They 
number  about  3,000  species. 

198.  Into  eight  classes:  Quadrumana  (four-handed), 
monkey,  ape;  carnivora  (flesh-eaters),  bear,  cat,  dog; 
Marsupialia  (pouched),  opossum,  kangaroo;  rodentia 
(gnawers),  beaver,  squirrel,  rat;  edentata  (toothless),  sloth, 
armadillo;  pachydermata  (thick-skinned),  elephant,  horse, 
hog;  ruminantia  (chewing  the  cud),  camel,  ox,  sheep; 
marine  mammalia,  whale,  dolphin,  seal. 

199.  It  treats  of  the  varieties  of  the  human  race,  their 
physical  and  intellectual  characteristics,  and  their  geograph- 
ical distribution  on  the  earth. 


v 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Preface , 3 

Questions  on  United  States  History , 5 

Answers  to  Questions  on  United  States  History 25 

Questions  on  Geography 73 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Geography 99 

Questions  on  Grammar ...    139 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Grammar 147 

Questions  on  Written  Arithmetic 161 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Written  Arithmetic 165 

Questions  on  Reading 1 74 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Reading 176 

Questions  on  Orthography , iSo 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Orthography 188 

Questions  on  Civil  Government 203 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Civil  Government 209 

Questions  on  Physiology 219 

Answers  to  Questions  on  Physiology .,,...227 

Questions  on  Physical  Geography 249 

Answers  to  Qnestions  on  Physical  Geography 258 


X 


X 


\ 


'  O    OOJ I  I 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


